Configuration Guide(V100R006C001 02)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C01

Configuration Guide Issue

02

Date

2011-10-31

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:

Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China

Website:

http://www.huawei.com

Email:

[email protected]

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Configuration Guide

About This Document

About This Document Related Versions The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name

Version

OptiX OSN 8800

V100R006C01

OptiX OSN 6800

V100R006C01

OptiX OSN 3800

V100R006C01

iManager U2000

V100R005C00

iManager U2000 Web LCT

V100R005C00

Intended Audience This document describes how to configure optical network elements, WDM services, and Ethernet services. This document is intended for: l

Installation and commissioning engineers

l

Data configuration engineers

l

System maintenance engineers

Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol

Description

DANGER Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.


ii


About This Document

Symbol

Description

WARNING

CAUTION

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results.

TIP

Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time.

NOTE

Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.

GUI Conventions The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention

Description

Boldface

Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK.

>

Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Change History Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains all updates made in previous issues.

Updates in Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Based on Product Version V100R006C01 This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C01. Compared with the issue 01, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Update

Description

2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

l 2.1.3 Board Model (Standard Mode and Compatible Mode) is modified. l 2.1.4 ODUflex is modified.


iii


About This Document

Update

Description

5.7 Application Scenario 5: ODUflex NonConvergence Mode

l 5.7.3 Configuration Process is modified.

6.6 Application Scenario 4: Conversion Between Two 3G-SDI Services and One OTU2 Optical Signals

l 6.6.3 Configuration Process is modified.

Updates in Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Based on Product Version V100R006C01 This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C01. Compared with the OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C00, the manual of this issue provides the following updates. Update

Description

Whole manual

l Structure is adjusted. l The title of some charpters are changed. l 1 Guidelines for Configuring Equipment by Referring to This Manual is added. l 6 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station) is added. l 7 Configuring WDM Services (by Station Service Package) is added. l The charpter Managing NE Power Consumption removes to Commissioning Guide.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


l 2.1.3 Board Model (Standard Mode and Compatible Mode) is added.

5 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

l 5.2 Configuration Procedures is added.

l 2.1.4 ODUflex is added. l The charpter Configuring WDM Services for Tributary Boards and Line Boards (with ODUK SNCP Protection) is deleted.

l 5.7 Application Scenario 5: ODUflex Non-Convergence Mode is added.


iv


About This Document

Update

Description

11 Modifying the Configuration Data

"Converting a Normal WDM Service to an SNCP Service" and "Converting an SNCP Service to a Normal WDM Service" are deleted.

12 Configuration Tasks

12.1 Configuring Working Modes is added.

Updates in Issue 03 (2011-09-15) Based on Product Version V100R006C00 This issue is the third official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C00. Compared with the issue 02, the manual of this issue provides the following updates. Update

Description

Whole manual

l Structure is adjusted. l The charpter Managing NE Power Consumption removes to Commissioning Guide.


l The charpter Configuring WDM Services for Tributary Boards and Line Boards (with ODUK SNCP Protection) is deleted.


l 5.2 Configuration Procedures is added.


"Converting a Normal WDM Service to an SNCP Service" and "Converting an SNCP Service to a Normal WDM Service" are deleted.


12.1 Configuring Working Modes is added.

Updates in Issue 02 (2011-04-15) Based on Product Version V100R006C00 This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C00. Compared with the issue 01, the manual of this issue provides the following updates. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


v


About This Document

Update

Description

Whole manual

Add the chapter 5 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station).

Updates in Issue 01 (2010-12-31) Based on Product Version V100R006C00 This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C00. Compared with the OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R005C00, the manual of this issue provides the following updates. Update

Description

Whole manual

l Delete the "WDM Network Management Process". l Delete the "Quick Guide". l Delete the "Creating a Network". l Delete the "Performance Management". l Delete the "Configuring Wavelength Grooming". l Delete the "Configuring Broadcast Data Port Services". l Delete the "Backing Up and Restoring the NE Data".


The name of the chapter is changed from "Configuring WDM Services" to "Configuring WDM Services (By Station)".

8 Configuring WDM Services (by Trail)

Make configuring WDM Services by trail as an independent chapter.

Updates in Issue 04 (2011-08-30) Based on Product Version V100R005C00 This issue is the fourth official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R005C00. Compared with the issue 03, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


vi


About This Document

Update

Description

Whole manual

l Delete the "WDM Network Management Process". l Delete the "Quick Guide". l Delete the "Creating a Network". l Delete the "Performance Management". l Delete the "Configuring Wavelength Grooming". l Delete the "Configuring Broadcast Data Port Services". l Delete the "Backing Up and Restoring the NE Data".


The name of the chapter is changed from "Configuring WDM Services" to "Configuring WDM Services (By Station)".


Make configuring WDM Services by trail as an independent chapter.

Updates in Issue 03 (2011-05-25) Based on Product Version V100R005C00 Update

Description

Whole manual

Some bugs are fixed.

Updates in Issue 02 (2010-11-20) Based on Product Version V100R005C00 This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R005C00. Compared with the issue 01, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Update

Description

Configuring WDM Services for Tributary Boards and Line Boards (with ODUK SNCP Protection)

Modify the "service signal flow".


vii


About This Document

Update

Description

8.3 Configuration Example

Modify the "configuration process".

10.6 Configuration Example: Configuring EPL Services

Modify the "configuration process".

Updates in Issue 01 (2010-10-30) Based on Product Version V100R005C00 This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R005C00. In this release, the manuals for OptiX OSN 8800 V100R002C02, OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C04, and OptiX OSN 3800 V100R004C04 are combined into one manual.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Update

Description

Whole manual

This manual provides descriptions according to product series OptiX OSN 8800, OptiX OSN 6800A, and OptiX OSN 3800A. Any difference between the products is described in the manual.

Enabling the Port Blocking Function

Enabling the Port Blocking Function is added.

8.2 Creating OCh Trails by Trail Search

8.2 Creating OCh Trails by Trail Search is added.


viii


About This Document

Update

Description

2.3 Configuring WDM Services for OTU Boards Without CrossConnect Capability

2.3 Configuring WDM Services for OTU Boards Without CrossConnect Capability, 2.4 Configuring WDM Services for OTU Boards with Cross-Connect Capability, 2.5 Configuring WDM Services for Tributary Boards and Line Boards, and 2.6 Configuring WDM Services for Boards with the Layer 2 Switching Function are added.

2.4 Configuring WDM Services for OTU Boards with CrossConnect Capability 2.5 Configuring WDM Services for Tributary Boards and Line Boards 2.6 Configuring WDM Services for Boards with the Layer 2 Switching Function

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

8.4 Parameters: End to End Service Configuration

8.4 Parameters: End to End Service Configuration is added.

Configuring WDM Services for Tributary Boards and Line Boards (with ODUK SNCP Protection)

Configuring WDM Services for Tributary Boards and Line Boards (with ODUK SNCP Protection) is added.

8.3 Configuration Example

The name of the section is changed from "Configuring End-to-End GE Services" to "Configuring GE Services (By Trail)".


ix


About This Document

Update

Description

Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the GE Service

Sections "Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the GE Service", "Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the SAN Services", "Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the OTN Service", and "Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the SDH Services" are deleted.

Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the SAN Services Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the OTN Service Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the SDH Services

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


x


About This Document

Update

Description

10.8 Configuration Example: Configuring EPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1d Bridge) on a WDM Network

10.8 Configuration Example: Configuring EPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1d Bridge) on a WDM Network, 10.9 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge) on a WDM Network, 10.10 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1 ad Bridge) on a WDM Network, and 10.11 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL and EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge) on a WDM Network are added.

10.9 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge) on a WDM Network 10.10 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1 ad Bridge) on a WDM Network 10.11 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL and EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge) on a WDM Network Configuring the Receive Wavelength of Boards

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Configuring the Receive Wavelength of Boards is added.


xi


Contents

Contents About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii 1 Guidelines for Configuring Equipment by Referring to This Manual..............................1 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)...............................................................4 2.1 Basic Concepts...................................................................................................................................................5 2.1.1 Electrical Cross-Connections....................................................................................................................5 2.1.2 Service Types............................................................................................................................................9 2.1.3 Board Model (Standard Mode and Compatible Mode)...........................................................................18 2.1.4 ODUflex..................................................................................................................................................24 2.2 WDM Service Configuration Flow..................................................................................................................27 2.3 Configuring WDM Services for OTU Boards Without Cross-Connect Capability.........................................31 2.3.1 Configuration Networking Diagram........................................................................................................31 2.3.2 Service Signal Flow.................................................................................................................................32 2.3.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................32 2.4 Configuring WDM Services for OTU Boards with Cross-Connect Capability...............................................33 2.4.1 Configuration Networking Diagram........................................................................................................33 2.4.2 Service Signal Flow.................................................................................................................................34 2.4.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................34 2.5 Configuring WDM Services for Tributary Boards and Line Boards...............................................................37 2.5.1 Configuration Networking Diagram........................................................................................................38 2.5.2 Service Signal Flow.................................................................................................................................38 2.5.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................39 2.6 Configuring WDM Services for Boards with the Layer 2 Switching Function...............................................44 2.6.1 Configuration Networking Diagram........................................................................................................44 2.6.2 Service Signal Flow.................................................................................................................................45 2.6.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................45 2.7 Configuring 10GE LAN Services by Using the TDX and NS2 Boards...........................................................49 2.7.1 Configuration Networking Diagram........................................................................................................50 2.7.2 Service Signal Flow.................................................................................................................................50 2.7.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................52 2.8 Parameters........................................................................................................................................................55 2.8.1 WDM Cross-Connection Configuration..................................................................................................55 2.8.2 WDM Timeslot Configuration................................................................................................................57 Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


xii


Contents

3 Configuring the TN11TOM Board (Manually by Station)..................................................59 3.1 Application Scenario 1: Conversion Between Eight Any Services and Four ODU1 Electrical Signals..........61 3.1.1 Configuration Networking Diagram........................................................................................................61 3.1.2 Service Signal Flow.................................................................................................................................62 3.1.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................62 3.2 Application Scenario 2: Conversion Between Four OTU1 Optical Signals and Four ODU1 Electrical Signals ................................................................................................................................................................................65 3.2.1 Configuration Networking Diagram........................................................................................................65 3.2.2 Service Signal Flow.................................................................................................................................66 3.2.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................67 3.3 Application Scenario 3: Conversion Between Four Any Services and Four OTU1 Optical Signals...............69 3.3.1 Configuration Networking Diagram........................................................................................................69 3.3.2 Service Signal Flow.................................................................................................................................70 3.3.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................71 3.4 Application Scenario 4: Conversion Between Seven Any Services and One OTU1 Optical Signal...............73 3.4.1 Configuration Networking Diagram........................................................................................................73 3.4.2 Service Signal Flow.................................................................................................................................74 3.4.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................75 3.5 Application Scenario 5: Conversion Between Six Any Services and One OTU1 Optical Signal and Dual Feeding and Selective Receiving on the WDM Side...........................................................................................................78 3.5.1 Configuration Networking Diagram........................................................................................................78 3.5.2 Service Signal Flow.................................................................................................................................79 3.5.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................80

4 Configuring the TN52TOM Board (Manually by Station)..................................................85 4.1 Overview of the Working Modes.....................................................................................................................88 4.2 Configuration Principles...................................................................................................................................89 4.3 Application Scenario 1: Conversion Between Eight Any Services and Two ODU0 or One ODU1 Electrical Signals....................................................................................................................................................................90 4.3.1 Configuration Networking Diagram........................................................................................................91 4.3.2 Service Signal Flow.................................................................................................................................91 4.3.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................92 4.4 Application Scenario 2: Conversion Between Six Any Services and One OTU1 Optical Signal (with ODU0 Mapping)................................................................................................................................................................96 4.4.1 Configuration Networking Diagram........................................................................................................96 4.4.2 Service Signal Flow.................................................................................................................................97 4.4.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................98 4.5 Application Scenario 3: Conversion Between Eight Any Services and One ODU1 Electrical Signal..........101 4.5.1 Configuration Networking Diagram......................................................................................................101 4.5.2 Service Signal Flow...............................................................................................................................102 4.5.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................103 4.6 Application Scenario 4: Conversion Between Six Any Services and One OTU1 Optical Signal (with ODU1 Mapping)..............................................................................................................................................................105 4.6.1 Configuration Networking Diagram......................................................................................................105 Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


xiii


Contents

4.6.2 Service Signal Flow...............................................................................................................................106 4.6.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................107 4.7 Application Scenario 5: Conversion Between Eight Any Services and Eight ODU0 or Four ODU1 Electrical Signals..................................................................................................................................................................110 4.7.1 Configuration Networking Diagram......................................................................................................110 4.7.2 Service Signal Flow...............................................................................................................................111 4.7.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................112 4.8 Application Scenario 6: Conversion Between Four Any Services and Two OTU1 Optical Signals.............116 4.8.1 Configuration Networking Diagram......................................................................................................116 4.8.2 Service Signal Flow...............................................................................................................................117 4.8.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................118 4.9 Application Scenario 7: Conversion Between Eight Any or Four OTU1 Services and Four ODU1 Electrical Signals..................................................................................................................................................................121 4.9.1 Configuration Networking Diagram......................................................................................................121 4.9.2 Service Signal Flow...............................................................................................................................122 4.9.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................123 4.10 Application Scenario 8: Conversion Between Four OTU1 Services and Eight ODU0 Electrical Signals ..............................................................................................................................................................................126 4.10.1 Configuration Networking Diagram....................................................................................................126 4.10.2 Service Signal Flow.............................................................................................................................127 4.10.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................127 4.11 Application Scenario 9: Conversion Between Four OTU1 Optical Signals and Eight ODU0 Electrical Signals (Through Any Re-Encapsulation)........................................................................................................................129 4.11.1 Configuration Networking Diagram....................................................................................................129 4.11.2 Service Signal Flow.............................................................................................................................130 4.11.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................131 4.12 Application Scenario 10: Conversion Between Four OTU1 Optical Signals and Four ODU1 Electrical Signals (Through Any Re-Encapsulation)........................................................................................................................134 4.12.1 Configuration Networking Diagram....................................................................................................134 4.12.2 Service Signal Flow.............................................................................................................................135 4.12.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................135 4.13 Application Scenario 11: Conversion Between Two OTU1 Optical Signals and Two OTU1 Optical Signals (Through Any Re-Encapsulation)........................................................................................................................138 4.13.1 Configuration Networking Diagram....................................................................................................138 4.13.2 Service Signal Flow.............................................................................................................................139 4.13.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................140 4.14 Application Scenario 12: Regeneration of Four OTU1 Optical Signals......................................................143 4.14.1 Configuration Networking Diagram....................................................................................................143 4.14.2 Service Signal Flow.............................................................................................................................144 4.14.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................145

5 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)................................................148 5.1 Overview of the Working Mode.....................................................................................................................150 5.2 Configuration Procedures...............................................................................................................................150 5.3 Application Scenario 1: ODU0 Non-Convergence Mode..............................................................................162 Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


xiv


Contents

5.3.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................162 5.3.2 Service Signal Flow...............................................................................................................................163 5.3.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................164 5.4 Application Scenario 2: ODU1 Non-Convergence Mode..............................................................................164 5.4.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................164 5.4.2 Service Signal Flow...............................................................................................................................165 5.4.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................166 5.5 Application Scenario 3: ODU1 Convergence Mode......................................................................................166 5.5.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................167 5.5.2 Service Signal Flow...............................................................................................................................167 5.5.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................168 5.6 Application Scenario 4: ODU1_ODU0 Mode................................................................................................169 5.6.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................169 5.6.2 Service Signal Flow...............................................................................................................................170 5.6.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................170 5.7 Application Scenario 5: ODUflex Non-Convergence Mode..........................................................................171 5.7.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................171 5.7.2 Service Signal Flow...............................................................................................................................172 5.7.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................172

6 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)...........................................................174 6.1 Overview of the Working Mode.....................................................................................................................176 6.2 Configuration Procedures...............................................................................................................................176 6.3 Application Scenario 1: Conversion Between Eight Any Services and One OTU2 Optical Signals (with ODU0 Mapping)..............................................................................................................................................................187 6.3.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................187 6.3.2 Service Signal Flow...............................................................................................................................188 6.3.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................189 6.4 Application Scenario 2: Conversion Between Four Any Services and One OTU2 Optical Signals..............191 6.4.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................191 6.4.2 Service Signal Flow...............................................................................................................................192 6.4.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................193 6.5 Application Scenario 3: Conversion Between Four OTU1 Services and One OTU2 Optical Signals (with ODU0 Mapping)..............................................................................................................................................................194 6.5.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................194 6.5.2 Service Signal Flow...............................................................................................................................195 6.5.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................196 6.6 Application Scenario 4: Conversion Between Two 3G-SDI Services and One OTU2 Optical Signals........197 6.6.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................197 6.6.2 Service Signal Flow...............................................................................................................................198 6.6.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................199 6.7 Application Scenario 5: Conversion Between One FC800 Services and One OTU2 Optical Signals...........200 6.7.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................201 6.7.2 Service Signal Flow...............................................................................................................................201 Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


xv


Contents

6.7.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................202

7 Configuring WDM Services (by Station Service Package)...............................................204 7.1 Overview of the Service Packages.................................................................................................................205 7.1.1 Service Packages for the TN52TOM Board..........................................................................................205 7.1.2 Service Packages for the THA/TOA Board...........................................................................................211 7.1.3 Service Packages for the LOA Board....................................................................................................212 7.2 Configuring Service Packages........................................................................................................................213

8 Configuring WDM Services (by Trail)..................................................................................218 8.1 WDM Trail.....................................................................................................................................................219 8.2 Creating OCh Trails by Trail Search..............................................................................................................223 8.3 Configuration Example...................................................................................................................................225 8.3.1 Configuration Networking Diagram......................................................................................................225 8.3.2 Service Signal Flow...............................................................................................................................226 8.3.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................227 8.4 Parameters: End to End Service Configuration..............................................................................................230

9 Configuring SDH Services......................................................................................................234 9.1 SDH Service Configuration Process...............................................................................................................236 9.2 SDH Service Overhead...................................................................................................................................236 9.2.1 Trace Byte..............................................................................................................................................237 9.2.2 Signal Label Byte..................................................................................................................................237 9.3 Configuring Services on the Non-Protection Ring.........................................................................................237 9.3.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................237 9.3.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation....................................................................................................238 9.3.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................239 9.4 Configuring 1+1 Linear MSP Services..........................................................................................................243 9.4.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................243 9.4.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation....................................................................................................243 9.4.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................245 9.5 Configuring the Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring Services......................................................................252 9.5.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................253 9.5.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation....................................................................................................253 9.5.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................254 9.6 Configuring the SNCP Tangent Ring Services..............................................................................................259 9.6.1 Configuration Networking Diagram......................................................................................................260 9.6.2 Service Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation.......................................................................................261 9.6.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................262 9.7 Parameter........................................................................................................................................................267 9.7.1 SDH Service Configuration...................................................................................................................267 9.7.2 SNCP Service Control...........................................................................................................................268 9.7.3 VC4 Path Overhead...............................................................................................................................270

10 Configuring Ethernet Services..............................................................................................275 Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


xvi


Contents

10.1 Ethernet Service Types.................................................................................................................................278 10.1.1 Ethernet Private Line Service..............................................................................................................278 10.1.2 Ethernet LAN Service.........................................................................................................................279 10.2 Basic Concepts.............................................................................................................................................282 10.2.1 Tag Attributes......................................................................................................................................282 10.2.2 VLAN Group.......................................................................................................................................283 10.2.3 QinQ....................................................................................................................................................284 10.2.4 MAC Address Filtering.......................................................................................................................285 10.2.5 IGMP Snooping...................................................................................................................................286 10.2.6 STP/RSTP/MSTP................................................................................................................................289 10.3 Configuration Process of Ethernet Services.................................................................................................292 10.3.1 EPL Service Configuration Process....................................................................................................292 10.3.2 EVPL (QinQ) Service Configuration Process.....................................................................................293 10.3.3 EPLAN Service Configuration Process...............................................................................................294 10.4 Configuring Ethernet Services in an OTN System.......................................................................................295 10.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections on an Ethernet Board.............................................................................295 10.4.2 Creating EPL Services.........................................................................................................................297 10.4.3 Creating EPLAN Services...................................................................................................................299 10.4.4 Creating VLANs Filtering...................................................................................................................301 10.4.5 Creating VLAN Unicast......................................................................................................................302 10.4.6 Configuring the Aging Time for MAC Addresses..............................................................................303 10.4.7 Creating EVPL (QinQ) Services.........................................................................................................304 10.5 Configuring Ethernet Services in an OCS System.......................................................................................306 10.5.1 Creating Cross-Connections Between an Ethernet Board and a Line Board......................................306 10.5.2 Creating EPL Services.........................................................................................................................307 10.5.3 Creating EPLAN Services...................................................................................................................308 10.5.4 Creating VLANs Filtering...................................................................................................................309 10.5.5 Creating VLAN Unicast......................................................................................................................310 10.5.6 Configuring the Aging Time for MAC Addresses..............................................................................311 10.5.7 Creating EVPL (QinQ) Services.........................................................................................................312 10.5.8 Creating EVPL (QinQ) Services.........................................................................................................314 10.6 Configuration Example: Configuring EPL Services....................................................................................315 10.6.1 Networking Diagram...........................................................................................................................315 10.6.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation................................................................................316 10.6.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................318 10.7 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL (QinQ) Services on a WDM Network...................................323 10.7.1 Networking Diagram...........................................................................................................................323 10.7.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation................................................................................324 10.7.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................326 10.8 Configuration Example: Configuring EPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1d Bridge) on a WDM Network........329 10.8.1 Networking Diagram...........................................................................................................................329 10.8.2 Service Signals Flow and Wavelength Allocation..............................................................................330 Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


xvii


Contents

10.8.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................332 10.9 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge) on a WDM Network ..............................................................................................................................................................................337 10.9.1 Networking Diagram...........................................................................................................................337 10.9.2 Service Signals Flow...........................................................................................................................338 10.9.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................340 10.10 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1 ad Bridge) on a WDM Network ..............................................................................................................................................................................346 10.10.1 Networking Diagram.........................................................................................................................346 10.10.2 Service Signals Flow and Wavelength Allocation............................................................................347 10.10.3 Configuration Process........................................................................................................................349 10.11 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL and EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge) on a WDM Network................................................................................................................................................................355 10.11.1 Networking Diagram.........................................................................................................................355 10.11.2 Service Signals Flow.........................................................................................................................356 10.11.3 Configuration Process........................................................................................................................359 10.12 Configuration Example: Configuring EPL Services on a SDH Network..................................................360 10.12.1 Networking Diagram.........................................................................................................................360 10.12.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation................................................................................................361 10.12.3 Configuration Process........................................................................................................................363 10.13 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL (QinQ) Services on a SDH Network...................................372 10.13.1 Networking Diagram.........................................................................................................................372 10.13.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation................................................................................................374 10.13.3 Configuration Process........................................................................................................................376 10.14 Configuration Example: Configuring PORT-Shared EVPL (VLAN) Services on a SDH Network.........383 10.14.1 Networking Diagram.........................................................................................................................383 10.14.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation................................................................................................384 10.14.3 Configuration Process........................................................................................................................386 10.15 Configuration Example: Configuring VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL Services on a SDH Network...............396 10.15.1 Networking Diagram.........................................................................................................................396 10.15.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation................................................................................................397 10.15.3 Configuration Process........................................................................................................................399 10.16 Configuration Example: Configuring EPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1d Bridge) on a SDH Network ..............................................................................................................................................................................407 10.16.1 Networking Diagram.........................................................................................................................407 10.16.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation................................................................................................408 10.16.3 Configuration Process........................................................................................................................410 10.17 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge) on a SDH Network ..............................................................................................................................................................................419 10.17.1 Networking Diagram.........................................................................................................................419 10.17.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation................................................................................................421 10.17.3 Configuration Process........................................................................................................................424 10.18 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1ad Bridge) on a SDH Network ..............................................................................................................................................................................436 Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


xviii


Contents

10.18.1 Networking Diagram.........................................................................................................................436 10.18.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation................................................................................................438 10.18.3 Configuration Process........................................................................................................................441 10.19 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL and EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge) on a SDH Network................................................................................................................................................................451 10.19.1 Networking Diagram.........................................................................................................................451 10.19.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation................................................................................................452 10.19.3 Configuration Process........................................................................................................................456 10.20 Parameters..................................................................................................................................................456 10.20.1 Parameters: Basic Attributes (External Port).....................................................................................457 10.20.2 Parameters: Basic Attributes (Internal Port)......................................................................................458 10.20.3 Parameters: Flow Control (External Port).........................................................................................459 10.20.4 Parameters: Advanced Attributes (External Port).............................................................................459 10.20.5 Parameters: Advanced Attributes (Internal Port)..............................................................................460 10.20.6 Parameters: TAG Attributes..............................................................................................................460 10.20.7 Parameters: Network Attributes........................................................................................................462 10.20.8 Parameters: Ethernet Line Service.....................................................................................................462 10.20.9 Parameters: VLAN Group.................................................................................................................466 10.20.10 Parameters: Ethernet LAN Service..................................................................................................467 10.20.11 Parameters: Aging Time..................................................................................................................473 10.20.12 Parameters: VLAN Unicast.............................................................................................................474 10.20.13 Parameters: Port Mirroring..............................................................................................................474 10.20.14 Parameters: Ethernet Test................................................................................................................474 10.20.15 Parameters: Protocol Fault Management.........................................................................................477 10.20.16 Parameters: Port MAC Address Filtering........................................................................................477

11 Modifying the Configuration Data......................................................................................479 11.1 Modifying Port.............................................................................................................................................480 11.2 Modifying the Services Configuration.........................................................................................................481 11.2.1 Deactivating Cross-Connection Service..............................................................................................481 11.2.2 Deleting Cross-Connections................................................................................................................482 11.2.3 Modifying SDH Services.....................................................................................................................483 11.2.4 Deleting SDH Services........................................................................................................................484 11.2.5 Converting a Non-Protection Service to an SNCP Service.................................................................485 11.2.6 Converting an SNCP Service to a Non-Protection Service.................................................................486 11.3 Conversion Between EPL Ethernet Services and VLAN SNCP Services...................................................487 11.3.1 Converting an EPL Ethernet Service to a VLAN SNCP Service........................................................487 11.3.2 Converting a VLAN SNCP Service to an EPL Ethernet Service........................................................489 11.3.3 Deleting EPL Services.........................................................................................................................490 11.3.4 Deleting EVPL (QinQ) Services.........................................................................................................491 11.3.5 Deleting EPLAN Services...................................................................................................................491 11.3.6 Modifying a VLAN Group..................................................................................................................492 11.3.7 Deleting a VLAN Group.....................................................................................................................493 Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


xix


Contents

12 Configuration Tasks...............................................................................................................495 12.1 Configuring Working Modes........................................................................................................................497 12.2 Configuring the Service Type.......................................................................................................................497 12.3 Configuring the Service Mode.....................................................................................................................499 12.4 Configuring Common Cross-Connections...................................................................................................499 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections................................................................................................................500 12.4.2 Activating Cross-Connections.............................................................................................................502 12.5 Configuring Service Timeslots.....................................................................................................................503 12.6 Configuring SDH Cross-Connections..........................................................................................................504 12.6.1 Querying the Lower Order Cross-Connection Capacity.....................................................................504 12.6.2 Creating SDH Cross-Connections.......................................................................................................505 12.7 Configuring Path Overhead for SDH Services.............................................................................................506 12.7.1 Configuring Trace Byte.......................................................................................................................506 12.7.2 Configuring C2 Byte...........................................................................................................................507 12.8 Configuring the Board Mode........................................................................................................................508 12.9 Creating a VLAN Group..............................................................................................................................509 12.10 Configuring the Aging Time for MAC Addresses.....................................................................................510 12.11 Configuring MAC Address Filtering..........................................................................................................511 12.11.1 Adding the MAC Address of the Opposite Router............................................................................511 12.11.2 Deleting the MAC Address of the Opposite Router..........................................................................513 12.12 Configuring Port Mirroring........................................................................................................................514 12.13 Diagnosing Ethernet Protocol Faults..........................................................................................................515 12.14 Configuring Non-Intrusive Monitoring......................................................................................................515

A Parameters Description...........................................................................................................517 A.1 Enabled/Disabled ..........................................................................................................................................519 A.2 Max. Frame Length ......................................................................................................................................519 A.3 Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode ...................................................................................................520 A.4 Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode ............................................................................................................521 A.5 MAC Loopback ............................................................................................................................................522 A.6 PHY Loopback .............................................................................................................................................523 A.7 QinQ Type Area............................................................................................................................................524 A.8 Port (Ethernet Port Attribute) .......................................................................................................................525 A.9 Port Physical Parameters (Ethernet Port Attribute).......................................................................................525 A.10 Working Mode.............................................................................................................................................528 A.11 Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold....................................................................................................529 A.12 Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression .....................................................................................................531 A.13 Default VLAN ID .......................................................................................................................................532 A.14 VLAN Priority ............................................................................................................................................532 A.15 Entry Detection ...........................................................................................................................................533 A.16 Tag Identifier...............................................................................................................................................533 A.17 Source Channel (WDM Cross-Connection)................................................................................................534 A.18 Sink Channel (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration)............................................................................535 Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


xx


Contents

A.19 Activation Status (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration)......................................................................536 A.20 Level (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration).........................................................................................537 A.21 Direction (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration)...................................................................................539 A.22 Service Timeslot (WDM Services)..............................................................................................................540 A.23 Service Mode (WDM Interface)..................................................................................................................542 A.24 Board Mode (WDM Interface)....................................................................................................................543 A.25 Explicit Link................................................................................................................................................545 A.26 Explicit Node...............................................................................................................................................546 A.27 Excluded Node.............................................................................................................................................547 A.28 Auto-Calculation..........................................................................................................................................547 A.29 Copy after Creation......................................................................................................................................548 A.30 Level (WDM Trail Creation).......................................................................................................................549 A.31 Direction (WDM Trail Creation).................................................................................................................550 A.32 Rate (WDM Trail Creation).........................................................................................................................550 A.33 Source (WDM Trail Creation).....................................................................................................................551 A.34 Sink (WDM Trail Creation).........................................................................................................................552 A.35 OVPN Customer (ASON Trail Management).............................................................................................554 A.36 Non-Intrusive Monitoring............................................................................................................................555

B Glossary......................................................................................................................................556

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


xxi


1

1 Guidelines for Configuring Equipment by Referring to This Manual

Guidelines for Configuring Equipment by Referring to This Manual This manual describes how to configure services on the NMS and other NMS operations involved in service configuration. This section provides guidelines to use this manual and obtain reference information. l

See Table 1-1 to obtain the service configuration guidelines.

l

See Table 1-2 to obtain reference information, such as NMS configurations, NE and network configurations, and feature configurations.

Table 1-1 Guidelines for Service Configuration To...

Then...

Configure WDM services

Select the Manually by Station, by Station Service Package, or by Trail mode to configure WDM services as required. For boards that support multiple application scenarios, guidelines are provided for configuring services manually by station in each application scenario. For details, see: l 3 Configuring the TN11TOM Board (Manually by Station) l 4 Configuring the TN52TOM Board (Manually by Station) l 5 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station) l 6 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

Configure Ethernet services

See Configuring Ethernet Services to understand Ethernet Basic Concepts and complete Ethernet service configurations by referring to Configuration Process of Ethernet Services.

NOTE

l To configure services with ODUk SNCP protection, see ODUk SNCP Protection in the Feature Description. l To configure PID boards, see PID in the Feature Description.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


1



Table 1-2 Guidelines for Reference Information To...

Then...

Quickly understand NMS operations

See the Commissioning Guide: l Connecting the NMS Computer – Connecting the U2000 Server Directly – Connecting the U2000 Server Through a LAN l U2000 Quick Guide – Logging In to the U2000 Client – Exiting a U2000 Client l Web LCT Quick Guide – Connecting the Web LCT to NEs – Starting the Web LCT – Logging In to the Web LCT – Shutting Down the Web LCT l Entering the Common Views – Opening the Main Topology on the U2000 – NE List on the Web LCT – Opening the NE Explorer – Opening the NE Panel l Using Online Help

Configure NEs and networks

See Configuring NE and Network in the Commissioning Guide. Configure each functional part of a network according to the network creation process so that services can be created on the network topology.

Monitor performance using the NMS

See Performance Management in the Commissioning Guide to query and set performance monitoring.

Understand detailed information about boards

See the description of each board in the Hardware Description: l Physical and Logical Ports: Describes physical ports displayed on the NMS and logical ports of each board. l Configuration of Cross-connection: Describes crossconnection configurations of each board. l Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS: Describes parameters that can be set or queried on the NMS for each board, default values of the parameters, and parameter configuration principles.

Complete optical-layer configurations or service grooming

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

See Configuring Wavelength Grooming in the Commissioning Guide. Complete wavelength grooming by referring to Wavelength Grooming Configuration Flow.


2



To...

Then...

Configure features

See the Feature Description to understand features, such as: l Optical Line Protection l Intra-Board 1+1 Protection l Intelligent Power Adjustment (IPA) l Clock Feature(OTN) l OTN Overheads l QoS (OTN) l DCN l Master-Slave Subrack l 40G Transmission System To understand more features, see Mapping Relationship Between Products and Features in the Feature Description.

Back up NE data

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

See Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board, Manually Backing Up the NE Database to a CF Card, and Backing Up Device Data to the NMS Server or the NMS Client in the Commissioning Guide.


3


2


Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

About This Chapter When manually configuring WDM services by station, you need to perform various operations such as configuring board service types and creating cross-connections. Configuring WDM services in this mode involves multiple NMS GUIs and the configuration process is complex. However, the mode is applicable to various scenarios and very flexible. 2.1 Basic Concepts The basic concepts involved in WDM service configuration include electrical cross-connections, WDM service types, and board models. Understanding the basic concepts helps you successfully configure services. 2.2 WDM Service Configuration Flow This section describes the configuration process of boards and services. Before configuring WDM services according to the configuration flow, complete the basic configuration of NEs according to the configuration flow of creating a network. 2.3 Configuring WDM Services for OTU Boards Without Cross-Connect Capability This section describes how to configure the GE services by using the LDM board, which is a type of OTU board that does not require cross-connection configuration. 2.4 Configuring WDM Services for OTU Boards with Cross-Connect Capability This section describes how to configure GE services by using the LQMS board. 2.5 Configuring WDM Services for Tributary Boards and Line Boards This section describes how to configure GE services by using the TQM and NQ2 boards. 2.6 Configuring WDM Services for Boards with the Layer 2 Switching Function This section describes how to configure GE services by using the boards with Layer 2 processing functions (the TBE and L4G boards in this example). 2.7 Configuring 10GE LAN Services by Using the TDX and NS2 Boards This section describes how to configure 10GE LAN services by using the TDX and NS2 boards. 2.8 Parameters Describes the parameters involved in the WDM services configuration. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


4



2.1 Basic Concepts The basic concepts involved in WDM service configuration include electrical cross-connections, WDM service types, and board models. Understanding the basic concepts helps you successfully configure services.

2.1.1 Electrical Cross-Connections Cross-connections on WDM equipment can be classified into two types: optical crossconnections and electrical cross-connections. Optical cross-connections cross-connect optical signals and are not related to the types of carried services; electrical cross-connections crossconnect electrical signals and are closely related to the types of carried services. Before configuring WDM services, you need to be familiar with basic types of cross-connections.

Overview of Cross-Connections The grooming function of electrical cross-connections of WDM equipment helps WDM networks to change from static networks to dynamic networks. The MUX/DMUX of the traditional WDM equipment supports only the point-to-point multiplexing scheme, whereas the MUX/DMUX of the NG WDM equipment supports the end-to-end management capability. In addition, the NG WDM equipment supports cross-connections such as GE and ODUk crossconnections. Electrical cross-connections are classified as follows: l l

According to the cross-connection level and granularity, electrical cross-connections are classified into, for example, GE, 10GE, Any, and ODUk cross-connections. According to the cross-connection mode, cross-connections are classified into centralized cross-connections, distributed cross-connections, and mesh-group cross-connections. – Centralized cross-connections: Cross-connections are implemented using crossconnect boards. The board where a cross-connect service is created can be housed in any slot that supports the board. – Distributed cross-connections: Cross-connections are implemented using boards that are housed in paired slots.

l

– Mesh-group cross-connections: Cross-connections are implemented using boards that are housed in mesh-group slots. Electrical cross-connections can be also classified into intra-board cross-connections and inter-board cross-connections according to their positions. – Intra-board cross-connections: Services signals are still on a board after they are processed by a cross-connect unit in the board. As shown in Figure 2-1, crossconnections between channel 1 of client-side port 5 (RX3/TX3) on a board and channel 1 of WDM-side port 201 (LP1/LP1) on the same board are referred to as intra-board cross-connections. Figure 2-1 Intra-board cross-connections 3(RX1/TX1)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1

201(LP1/LP1)-1 201(LP1/LP1)-2 201(LP1/LP1)-3

6(RX4/TX4)-1

201(LP1/LP1)-4

4(RX2/TX2)-1

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


1(IN1/OUT1)-1

5



When ports or channels at the two ends of cross-connections are corresponded according to the arrangement sequence, the cross-connections are also referred to as direct crossconnections. See Figure 2-2. Figure 2-2 Direct cross-connections A 3(RX1/TX1)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1

201(LP1/LP1)-1 201(LP1/LP1)-2 201(LP1/LP1)-3

6(RX4/TX4)-1

201(LP1/LP1)-4

4(RX2/TX2)-1

1(IN1/OUT1)-1

– Inter-board cross-connections: Service signals are transmitted to the cross-connect unit on another board after they are processed by the cross-connect unit on a board. See Figure 2-3. Figure 2-3 Inter-board cross-connections A 3(RX1/TX1)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1

201(LP1/LP1)-1 201(LP1/LP1)-2 201(LP1/LP1)-3

6(RX4/TX4)-1

201(LP1/LP1)-4

3(RX1/TX1)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1

201(LP1/LP1)-1 201(LP1/LP1)-2 201(LP1/LP1)-3

6(RX4/TX4)-1

201(LP1/LP1)-4

4(RX2/TX2)-1

1(IN1/OUT1)-1

B 4(RX2/TX2)-1

1(IN1/OUT1)-1

Signal Flow of Electrical Cross-Connections For WDM equipment, the OTU board, tributary board, and line board work together to complete service grooming. Client services are transmitted from the client side of the WDM equipment, and then modulated to the WDM system for transmission after service grooming and convergence. Figure 2-4 considers the OTU board with the GE/Any and ODUk crossconnection function as a module to describe the signal flow of the electrical cross-connections. Figure 2-4 describes the signal flow of the SDH electrical cross-connection service of the OptiX OSN 8800.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


6



Figure 2-4 Signal flow of electrical cross-connections for the OptiX OSN 6800/3800 L2 processing VCTRUNK AP1

RX1/TX1 RXn/TXn

Backplane bus

Optical module

Backplane bus

LP1.1 GE/Any crossconnection

L2 APn

ODUk crossconnection

LP1 OTN

Optical module

IN/OUT

LP1.X

Tributary board Line board OTU board (tributary-and-line-joint board) NOTE

The boards that support the grooming of electrical cross-connections have both external ports and internal ports. These ports are classified into the following types: l TX/RX port: client-side optical port of the board that receives and transmits signals. l IP port: internal port that corresponds to the RX/TX port. It can be regarded as a RX/TX port. l AP port: convergence port that represents the internal port of the L2 module. In this case, the corresponding IP port is an external port. l LP: logical port that functions as the connection point of cross-connections. l OP port: internal port that corresponds to the IN/OUT port. It can be regarded as an IN/OUT port. l IN/OUT port: line-side optical port of the board that receives and transmits signals.

The signals are cross-connected in the following process: 1.

The optical signals are transmitted to the OTU board through the RX/TX port and become electrical signals. After the possible L2 processing, the electrical signals are transmitted to the GE/Any cross-connect module through the AP port and work with the possible crossconnect signals from the backplane, to implement the GE/Any cross-connections.

2.

The electrical signals are transmitted to the ODUk cross-connect module through the LP port and work with the possible ODUk signals from the backplane, to implement the ODUk cross-connections. Then, the signals are transmitted to the optical module through an OP port and added to the WDM line for transmission. NOTE

The OptiX OSN 8800 supports the electrical signals that are transmitted to the ODUk cross-connect module through the LP port and work with the possible ODUk signals from the backplane, to implement the ODUk cross-connections. Then, the signals are transmitted to the optical module through an OP port and added to the WDM line for transmission.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


7



Figure 2-5 Signal flow of electrical cross-connections for the OptiX OSN 8800 SDH Backplane bus

RX1/TX1 RXn/TXn

Optical module

VC4/VC3/ VC12 crossconnection

LP1 SDH

Optical module

IN/OUT

Tributary board Line board

NOTE

The boards that support the grooming of electrical cross-connections have both external ports and internal ports. These ports are classified into the following types: l

TX/RX port: client-side optical port of the board that receives and transmits signals.

l

LP: logical port that functions as the connection point of cross-connections.

l

OP port: internal port that corresponds to the IN/OUT port. It can be regarded as an IN/OUT port.

l

IN/OUT port: line-side optical port of the board that receives and transmits signals.

The signals are cross-connected in the following process: Signals are transmitted to an SDH board through the RX/TX port and become electrical signals. Then, the electrical signals are transmitted to the VC4/VC3/VC12 cross-connect module, and work with the cross-connect signals that may come from the backplane to implement VC-4/ VC-3/VC-12 cross-connections. After being transmitted to the SDH processing module on the SDH board, the electrical signals are transmitted to a WDM-side optical module and become the optical signals that have the DWDM standard wavelengths compliant with ITU-T G.694.1.

For details on how to choose ports of a board for cross-connections, see service configuration descriptions of the board in the Hardware Description.

Restrictions on Cross-Connection Configuration l

The slots that support cross-connections vary according to different types of equipment and boards. – The OptiX OSN 8800 supports only centralized cross-connections with the granularity of ODU0, ODU1, ODU2/ODU2e, ODUflex, and ODU3. – The OptiX OSN 6800 supports both centralized cross-connections and distributed crossconnections. When both types of cross-connections are configured, the system uses distributed cross-connections with preference.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


8



– The granularity of centralized cross-connections can be GE, 10GE, ODU1, or ODU2. – The granularity of distributed cross-connections can be GE, ODU1, OTU1, or Any. Cross-connections can be implemented using boards that are housed in seven groups of paired slots: IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, and IU15 and IU16. – The OptiX OSN 3800 supports both distributed cross-connections and mesh-group cross-connections. – The granularity of distributed cross-connections is GE. Cross-connections can be implemented using boards that are housed in two groups of paired slots: IU2 and IU3, and IU4 and IU5. For the OptiX OSN 3800, only the 52TOM board supports distributed cross-connections. – The granularity of mesh-group cross-connections can be GE, ODU1, or Any. Crossconnections can be implemented using boards that are housed in four slots in the mesh group: IU2, IU3, IU4, and IU5. l

If you configure a cross-connection between the two optical ports on the OTU board, the source of a normal cross-connection can also serve as the source of other normal crossconnections, but its sink cannot be the sink of other cross-connections. The two sources of an SNCP cross-connection cannot be the source of other cross-connections, and its sinks cannot be the sink of other cross-connections.

l

When configuring the electrical cross-connection for a service on the OptiX OSN 3800, OptiX OSN 6800, and OptiX OSN 8800, you must make sure that the WDM-side optical channel numbers at the transmit and receive ends of the service in a direction must be the same. Otherwise, the service fails.

2.1.2 Service Types This topic describes the service types that are supported in the WDM service configuration. Table 2-1 lists the services that can be accessed by the OptiX OSN 8800. Table 2-1 Service access types (OTN) Service Category

Service Type

Reference Standard

SDH/POS/ATM

STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, STM-64, STM-256

ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.691 ITU-T G.957 ITU-T G.693 ITU-T G.783 ITU-T G.825

OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OC-192, OC-768

SONET

GR-253-CORE GR-1377-CORE ANSI T1.105

Ethernet service

FE, GE, 10GE WAN, 10GE LAN

IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z IEEE 802.3ae

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


9



Service Category

Service Type

Reference Standard

SAN service

ESCON

ANSI X3.296

FICON, FICON Express, FC100, FC200, FC400, FC800, FICON 8G, FC1200, FICON 4G

ANSI X3.230

ISC 1G, ISC 2G, ETR, CLO

ANSI X3.303 InfiniBandTM Architecture Release 1.2.1

InfiniBand 2.5G, InfiniBand 5G OTN service

OTU1, OTU2, OTU2e, OTU3

ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.959.1

Video service and others

HD-SDI

SMPTE 292M

DVB-ASI

EN 50083-9

SDI

SMPTE 259M

FDDI

ISO 9314

3G-SDI

SMPTE 424M

FE: fast Ethernet GE: gigabit Ethernet ESCON: enterprise systems connection FICON: fiber connection FC: fiber channel HD-SDI: bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television systems DVB-ASI: digital video broadcasting-asynchronous serial interface SDI: serial digital interface FDDI: fiber distributed data interface 3G-SDI: 3G-serial digital interface NOTE As specified in the SMPTE-259M, SDI is also called SD-SDI.

Table 2-2 lists the services that can be accessed by the OptiX OSN 6800. Table 2-2 Service access types Service Category

Service Type

Reference Standard

SDH/POS/ATM

STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, STM-64, STM-256

ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.691 ITU-T G.957 ITU-T G.693 ITU-T G.783 ITU-T G.825

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


10



Service Category

Service Type

Reference Standard

SONET

OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OC-192, OC-768


Ethernet service

SAN service

FE

IEEE 802.3u

GE

IEEE 802.3z

10GE WAN, 10GE LAN

IEEE 802.3ae

ESCON

ANSI X3.296

FICON, FICON Express, FICON 4G

ANSI X3.230

FC100, FC200, FC400, FC800, FICON 8G, FC1200

InfiniBandTM Architecture Release 1.2.1

ANSI X3.303

ISC 1G, ISC 2G, ETR, CLO InfiniBand 2.5G, InfiniBand 5G OTN service

OTU1, OTU2, OTU2e, OTU3



HD-SDI

SMPTE 292M

DVB-ASI

EN 50083-9

SDI

SMPTE 259M

FDDI

ISO 9314

3G-SDI

SMPTE 424M

FE: fast Ethernet GE: gigabit Ethernet ESCON: enterprise systems connection FICON: fiber connection FC: fiber channel HD-SDI: bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television Systems DVB-ASI: digital video broadcasting-asynchronous serial interface SDI: serial digital interface FDDI: fiber distributed data interface 3G-SDI: 3G-serial digital interface NOTE As specified in the SMPTE-259M, SDI is also called SD-SDI.

Table 2-3 lists the services that can be accessed by the OptiX OSN 3800.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


11



Table 2-3 Service access types Service Category

Service Type

Reference Standard

SDH/POS/ATM

STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, STM-64

ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.691 ITU-T G.957 ITU-T G.783 ITU-T G.825

OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OC-192

SONET


Ethernet service

SAN service

FE

IEEE 802.3u

GE

IEEE 802.3z

10GE WAN, 10GE LAN

IEEE 802.3ae

ESCON

ANSI X3.296

FICON, FICON Express, FICON 4G

ANSI X3.230

FC100, FC200, FC400, FC800, FICON 8G, FC1200

InfiniBandTM Architecture Release 1.2.1

ANSI X3.303

ISC 1G, ISC 2G, ETR, CLO InfiniBand 2.5G, InfiniBand 5G OTN service

OTU1, OTU2, OTU2e



Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

HD-SDI

SMPTE 292M

DVB-ASI

EN 50083-9

SDI

SMPTE 259M

FDDI

ISO 9314

3G-SDI

SMPTE 424M


12



Service Category

Service Type

Reference Standard

FE: fast Ethernet GE: gigabit Ethernet ESCON: enterprise systems connection FICON: fiber connection FC: fiber channel HD-SDI: bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television Systems DVB-ASI: digital video broadcasting-asynchronous serial interface SDI: serial digital interface FDDI: fiber distributed data interface NOTE As specified in the SMPTE-259M, SDI is also called SD-SDI.

Table 2-4 lists the rates of the services that can be accessed by the OptiX OSN 8800. Table 2-4 Service type and service rate Service Category

Service Type

Service Rate

SDH/POS/ ATM

STM-1

155.52 Mbit/s

STM-4

622.08 Mbit/s

STM-16

2.5 Gbit/s

SONET

STM-64

9.95 Gbit/s

STM-256

39.81 Gbit/s

OC-3

155.52 Mbit/s

OC-12

622.08 Mbit/s

OC-48

2.5 Gbit/s

OC-192

9.95 Gbit/s

OC-768

39.81 Gbit/s

FE

125 Mbit/s

GE

1.25 Gbit/s

10GE WAN

9.95 Gbit/s

10GE LAN

10.31 Gbit/s

ESCON

200 Mbit/s

FICON

1.06 Gbit/s

Legend

40G

SAN service

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


STM-256/OC-768

OTU2e OTU2 FC1200 10GE LAN

10G

STM-64/OC-192/10GE WAN FC800/FICON8G

4G

FC400/FICON4G 3G-SDI

2G

1G

0.1G

Ethernet service

OTU3

OTU1 STM-16/OC-48 FICON Express/FC200 HD-SDI GE FICON/FC100 STM-4/OC-12 SDI/DVB-ASI ESCON STM-1/OC-3 FE

13


Service Category

OTN service



Service Type

Service Rate

FICON Express

2.12 Gbit/s

FC100

1.06 Gbit/s

FC200

2.12 Gbit/s

FC400

4.25 Gbit/s

FC800

8.5 Gbit/s

FC1200

10.51 Gbit/s

FICON4G

4.25 Gbit/s

FICON8G

8.5 Gbit/s

ISC 1G

1.06 Gbit/s

ISC 2G

2.12 Gbit/s

ETR

16 Mbit/s

CLO

16 Mbit/s

InfiniBand 2.5G

2.5 Gbit/s

InfiniBand 5G

5 Gbit/s

OTU1

2.67 Gbit/s

OTU2

10.71 Gbit/s

OTU2e

11.10 Gbit/s

OTU3

43.02 Gbit/s

HD-SDI

1.485 Gbit/s

DVB-ASI

270 Mbit/s

SDI

270 Mbit/s

FDDI

125 Mbit/s

3G-SDI

2.97 Gbit/s

Legend

Table 2-5 lists the rates of the services that can be accessed by the OptiX OSN 6800.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


14



Table 2-5 Service type and service rate Service Category

Service Type

Service Rate

SDH/POS/ ATM

STM-1

155.52 Mbit/s

STM-4

622.08 Mbit/s

STM-16

2.5 Gbit/s

SONET

STM-64

9.95 Gbit/s

STM-256

39.81 Gbit/s

OC-3

155.52 Mbit/s

OC-12

622.08 Mbit/s

OC-48

2.5 Gbit/s

OC-192

9.95 Gbit/s

OC-768

39.81 Gbit/s

FE

125 Mbit/s

GE

1.25 Gbit/s

10GE WAN

9.95 Gbit/s

10GE LAN

10.31 Gbit/s

ESCON

200 Mbit/s

FICON

1.06 Gbit/s

FICON Express

2.12 Gbit/s

FC100

1.06 Gbit/s

FC200

2.12 Gbit/s

FC400

4.25 Gbit/s

FC800

8.5 Gbit/s

FC1200

10.51 Gbit/s

FICON4G

4.25 Gbit/s

FICON8G

8.5 Gbit/s

ISC 1G

1.06 Gbit/s

ISC 2G

2.12 Gbit/s

ETR

16 Mbit/s

Legend

40G

SAN service

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


STM-256/OC-768


10G


4G


2G

1G

0.1G

Ethernet service

OTU3


15



Service Category

OTN service


Service Type

Service Rate

CLO

16 Mbit/s

InfiniBand 2.5G

2.5 Gbit/s

InfiniBand 5G

5 Gbit/s

OTU1

2.67 Gbit/s

OTU2

10.71 Gbit/s

OTU2e

11.10 Gbit/s

OTU3

43.02 Gbit/s

HD-SDI

1.485 Gbit/s

DVB-ASI

270 Mbit/s

SDI

270 Mbit/s

FDDI

125 Mbit/s

3G-SDI

2.97 Gbit/s

Legend

Table 2-6 lists the rates of the services that can be accessed by the OptiX OSN 3800. Table 2-6 Service type and service rate Service Category

Service Type

Service Rate

SDH/POS/ ATM

STM-1

155.52 Mbit/s

SONET

STM-4

622.08 Mbit/s

STM-16

2.5 Gbit/s

STM-64

9.95 Gbit/s

STM-256

39.81 Gbit/s

OC-3

155.52 Mbit/s

OC-12

622.08 Mbit/s

OC-48

2.5 Gbit/s

OC-192

9.95 Gbit/s

OC-768

39.81 Gbit/s

Legend

40G

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

FE

STM-256/OC-768


10G


4G


2G

1G

0.1G

Ethernet service

OTU3


125 Mbit/s


16


Service Category

SAN service

OTN service


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


Service Type

Service Rate

GE

1.25 Gbit/s

10GE WAN

9.95 Gbit/s

10GE LAN

10.31 Gbit/s

ESCON

200 Mbit/s

FICON

1.06 Gbit/s

FICON Express

2.12 Gbit/s

FC100

1.06 Gbit/s

FC200

2.12 Gbit/s

FC400

4.25 Gbit/s

FC800

8.5 Gbit/s

FC1200

10.51 Gbit/s

FICON4G

4.25 Gbit/s

FICON8G

8.5 Gbit/s

ISC 1G

1.06 Gbit/s

ISC 2G

2.12 Gbit/s

ETR

16 Mbit/s

CLO

16 Mbit/s

InfiniBand 2.5G

2.5 Gbit/s

InfiniBand 5G

5 Gbit/s

OTU1

2.67 Gbit/s

OTU2

10.71 Gbit/s

OTU2e

11.10 Gbit/s

OTU3

43.02 Gbit/s

HD-SDI

1.485 Gbit/s

DVB-ASI

270 Mbit/s

SDI

270 Mbit/s

FDDI

125 Mbit/s


Legend

17



Service Category

Service Type

Service Rate

3G-SDI

2.97 Gbit/s

Legend

2.1.3 Board Model (Standard Mode and Compatible Mode) Starting from V100R006C01, some boards support new board models. To distinguish new models from existing models, the new board models are marked as standard mode and the existing board models are marked as compatible mode. Compared with the compatible mode, the standard mode facilitates operations and reduces maintenance costs. Service configurations on the NMS vary according to board models.

Boards Supporting Standard Mode Table 2-7 lists the boards that support standard mode, the names of the boards in different modes, and the availability of the boards on different types of equipment. Table 2-7 Names displayed on the NMS and availability on different types of equipment

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Name in Standard Mode (Standard Mode, adding logical board)

Name in Compatibl e Mode (Compatibl e Mode, adding logical board)

Name in Compatibl e Mode (NE Panel)

OptiX OSN OptiX OSN OptiX OSN 8800 6800 3800

53ND2

53ND2 (COMP)

53ND2

Y

Y

N

53NQ2

53NQ2 (COMP)

53ND2

Y

Y

N

53NS2

53NS2 (COMP)

53ND2

Y

Y

Y

11LOA

-

11LOA

Y

Y

Y

54ENQ2 (STND)

54ENQ2

54ENQ2

Y

N

N

55NPO2 (STND)

55NPO2

55NPO2

Y

N

N

55NPO2E

-

55NPO2E

Y

N

N


18



NOTE

l The LOA and NPO2E boards support only the standard mode. l Y indicates that a board is available on the equipment and N indicates that a board is unavailable on the equipment. l The standard mode is applicable only to the boards listed in the table above. The boards not listed in the table support only the compatible mode.

Available Channels in Different Modes The following uses the TN53NS2 board as an example to illustrate available channels on the board in different modes. For the board models of other boards in different modes, see the Hardware Description. l

Compatible mode Figure 2-6 shows the board model of the TN53NS2 board in compatible mode.

Figure 2-6 Board model of the TN53NS2 board in compatible mode Other tributary/ line/PID board

Other tributary/ line/PID board

8 x ODU0

Other tributary/ line/PID board

1 x ODU2/ODU2e

4 x ODU1

161 (ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161 (ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2

Backplane

51 ODU1 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 71 (ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1

164 (ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 164 (ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2

l Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

51 ODU1 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4

1 (IN1/OUT1)-1

ODU2

Crossconnect module

ODU1 mapping path

Multiplexin g module

ODU2 mapping path

Service processing module

Automatic cross-connection, which does not need to be configured on the NMS. For example, if ODU0 signals are required, users only need to configure cross-connections from other boards to the ODU0LP port on the board using the NMS. The board's internal structure enables transmission of the multiplexed signal to the ODU2LP port. Users do not need to configure a cross-connection for transmitting the multiplexed signal.

ODU0 mapping path

Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS to receive ODUk signals from other boards

Standard mode Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

19



Figure 2-7 shows the board model of the TN53NS2 board in standard mode. Figure 2-7 Board model of the TN53NS2 board in standard mode IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1~2) ODUflex:1 2XODUflex

ODU2:1

ODUflex:2

IN/OUT-OCH:1

OCH:1

OCH :1

Other tributary/line/PID board

1 xODU2/ 1xODU 2e

IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4) ODU1:1 4 xODU1

ODU2:1

OCH : 1 IN/OUT

ODU1:4

IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)-ODU0:(1~2)

ODU0:1

ODU0:2 8 xODU0

ODU1:1 ODU2:1

ODU 0:1 ODU 0:2

OCH :1

ODU 1:4

IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1~8) ODU0:1 8 xODU0

ODU2:1

OCH :1

ODU0: 8

Backplane

Cross-connect module

ODU1 mapping path

Multiplexing module

ODU2 mapping path


ODUflex mapping path

ODU0 mapping path (ODU0>ODU1>ODU2)

Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS to receive ODUk signals from other boards

ODU0 mapping path (ODU0>ODU2)

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


20



Table 2-8 Comparison of the two modes Item

Compatible Mode

Standard Mode

Internal logical ports

Internal logical ports are reserved.

Internal logical ports are removed. Instead, all ODU-level internal logical ports are configured as channels for each physical port and they can be ignored during configuration.

Number of timeslots

The number of timeslots allocated to each service is fixed.

Services can be transmitted if there are sufficient timeslots and timeslot continuity is not required. For example, the maximum permitted bandwidth of a TN53NS2 board is 10 Gbit/s. After the board receives one channel of ODU1 services, it can still receive ODU0, ODUflex, or ODU1 services on the remaining bandwidth.

Comparison of NMS GUIs for Different Modes Service creation operations on the NMS vary according to board models. Table 2-9 uses the TN53NS2 board as an example to illustrate the differences in the board operation GUIs. Table 2-9 GUIs on the NMS

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

GUI on the NMS

Navigation Path

Compatible Mode

Standard Mode

Path View

In the NE panel, select a board, double-click the board icon or right-click and choose Path View from the shortcut menu.

See Figure 2-8.

See Figure 2-9.

WDM Interface

In the NE Explorer, select the required board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. tab.

See Figure 2-10.

See Figure 2-11.

Create CrossConnection Service

In the NE Explorer, select the required NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree.

See Figure 2-12.

See Figure 2-13.


21



Figure 2-8 Path View (compatible mode)

Figure 2-9 Path View (standard mode)

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


22



Figure 2-10 WDM Interface (compatible mode)

Figure 2-11 WDM Interface (standard mode)

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


23



Figure 2-12 Create Cross-Connection Service (compatible mode)

Figure 2-13 Create Cross-Connection Service (standard mode)

2.1.4 ODUflex Starting from V100R006C01, the equipment supports the ODUflex (ODUk with variable bandwidth) technology, which enables users to flexibly configure the container capacity based on service sizes, leveraging line bandwidth.

Applicable Boards Only OptiX OSN 8800 supports ODUflex that is applicable to the following boards: Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


24



l

Tributary boards: TN55TQX, TN53TDX and TN54TOA

l

Line boards: TN53NQ2, TN53ND2, and TN53NS2

l

Tributary-line integrated board: LOA NOTE

The TN11LOA, TN53NQ2, TN53ND2, and TN53NS2 boards support ODUflex only when they work in Standard Mode and ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is set to Assign random.

ODUflex Involved Operations The following describes the GUIs for creating services involving ODUflex on the NMS and the navigation paths. Table 2-10 GUIs and navigation paths GUI on the NMS

Description

Navigation Path

WDM Interface

When the board where you want to create services is a line board or the LOA board and the services need to be encapsulated into ODUflex services, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign random.

In the NE Explorer, select the required board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface > Advanced Attributes from the Function Tree.

Create CrossConnection Service

When Level is set to ODUflex, you must set Service Type.

In the NE Explorer, select the required NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree. In the displayed window, click New.

NOTE

l The value of Occupied ODUTUk Slot Count is in the range of 3-7, which indicates that the service rate supported by ODUflex is in the range of 3.75 Gbit/s (3 x 1.25 Gbit/s) to 8.75 Gbit/s (7 x 1.25 Gbit/ s).

ODUflex Configuration Procedure Figure 2-14 shows the ODUflex configuration flowchart.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


25



Figure 2-14 ODUflex configuration flowchart 1

Configure the port working mode

2

Configure the timeslot configuration mode

3

Configure the service type

4

(Optional) Configure ODUflex Tolerance

5

Configure crossconnections

Table 2-11 describes the ODUflex configuration procedure. Table 2-11 Configuration procedure No. 1

Action

Involved Board

Description

Configure the port working mode.

Tributary board or tributary-line integrated board

l Parameter settings: Set Port Working Mode to ODUflex non-convergence mode. l Operation description: In the NE Explorer, select the required board and choose Configuration > Working Mode from the Function Tree. In the displayed window.

2

3

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Configure the timeslot configuration mode.

Line board or tributary-line integrated board

Configure the service type.

Tributary board or tributary-line integrated board

l Parameter settings: Set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign random for the required ports. l Operation description: In the NE Explorer, select the required board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface > Advanced Attributes from the Function Tree. l Parameter settings: Set the service type based on the service plan. l Operation description: Choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.


26



No. 4

Action

Involved Board

Description

(Optional) Configure ODUflex tolerance

Line board or tributary-line integrated board

l Parameter settings: Specifies the tolerance of deviation between the actual client-side service rate and the specified rate when the client-side service type is ODUflex. When the tributary board that connects to the ND2 board receives 3G-SDI services from client equipment, set this parameter to 10. If the tributary board receives other services, set it to 100. l Operation description: Choose Configuration > WDM Interface > Advanced Attributes from the Function Tree.

Configure crossconnections.

5

l Tributary board or line board: interboard crossconnections between tributary and line boards

l Parameter settings:

l Tributary-line integrated board: crossconnections from LP ports to the WDM side

l Operation description: In the NE Explorer, select the required NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree. In the displayed window, click New.

– Set Level to ODUflex and select the source slot, sink slot, source optical port, sink optical port, source optical channel, and sink optical channel. – Set Service Type to the actual clientside signals.

2.2 WDM Service Configuration Flow This section describes the configuration process of boards and services. Before configuring WDM services according to the configuration flow, complete the basic configuration of NEs according to the configuration flow of creating a network. Before configuring a WDM service, ensure that you have finished checking board parameters. To learn the information about the signal flow of each board, see the Hardware Description.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

No.

OTU Boards Without Grooming Functions

OTU Boards With Grooming Functions

Line Boards and Tributary Boards

Boards with Layer 2 Processing Functions

Task Description

1

-

12.8 Configuring the Board Mode



Optional


27


No.





Task Description

2

-

12.3 Configuring the Service Mode



Optional

3

12.2 Configuring the Service Type




Mandatory

-

-

-

10.4.2 Creating EPL Services For details on creating Ethernet services, see 10 Configuring Ethernet Services.

Optional

4

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)



The type of client-side services on boards needs to be set according to the type of services transmitted over the network. Different boards access different types of services. For details, see the client-side specifications of the OTU board and tributary board in the Hardware Description.

In addition to crossconnections, the connections between VCTRUNK ports and PORT ports of the boards with Layer 2 processing functions need to be established.

28


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


No.





Task Description

5

-

Creating crossconnect services (intra-board)

Creating cross-connect services (intra-board)

Creating crossconnections on an Ethernet board (intraboard)

Optional


There is no need to configure crossconnections for the OTU board without grooming functions. Crossconnections must be configured for tributary boards and other OTU boards. For details on how to choose ports of a board for crossconnections, see service configuration descriptions of the board in the Hardware Description.

29


No.





Task Description

6

-

-

Creating cross-connect services (inter-board)

Creating crossconnections on an Ethernet board (interboard)

Optional

12.5 Configuring Service Timeslots

-

Optional

7

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)





When tributary boards work with line boards, the inter-board crossconnections must be configured. For details on how to choose ports of a board for crossconnections, see service configuration descriptions of the board in the Hardware Description.

When the timeslot configuration mode is set to manual, Send Timeslots and Receive Timeslots need to be set for certain boards.

30



No.





Task Description

8

-

Creating WDM trails by using the trail search function



Optional

2.4 Configuring WDM Services for OTU Boards with CrossConnect Capability is provided.

2.5 Configuring WDM Services for Tributary Boards and Line Boards is provided.

2.6 Configuring WDM Services for Boards with the Layer 2 Switching Function is provided.

-

-

2.3 Configuring WDM Services for OTU Boards Without CrossConnect Capability is provided.

Create WDM trails by using the trail search function and check whether service configurations are correct. If the end-to-end services on the client side are correctly configured, the client trails of the corresponding level can be searched out.

NOTE

If a board supports electrical ports, you must configure electrical ports on the U2000 before the board receives electrical signals. See "Configuring Electrical Ports of a Board" in the Commissioning Guide .

2.3 Configuring WDM Services for OTU Boards Without Cross-Connect Capability This section describes how to configure the GE services by using the LDM board, which is a type of OTU board that does not require cross-connection configuration.

2.3.1 Configuration Networking Diagram This section describes how to configure a GE service on a ring network. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


31



Service Requirement See Figure 2-15. Optical NEs (ONEs) A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the ONEs function as OADM stations. User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One bidirectional GE service is available between station A and station B. At station A, the LDM board accesses one GE service. At station B, the LDM board accesses one GE service. Figure 2-15 Configuration networking diagram of the GE service User1 East

12LDM

East

West

12LDM

West

East

A

West

NMS

D

B

West

C

User2 East

:OADM West

East

Board Configuration Information In this example, a 12LDM board must be configured at station A and station B.

2.3.2 Service Signal Flow This section describes how to configure the transparent transmission signal flow of a GE service. There is one bidirectional GE service between stations A and B. NOTE

You do not need to configure cross-connections on the LDM board.

2.3.3 Configuration Process This section describes how to configure a bidirectional GE service at stations A and B.

Prerequisite Fibers are connected correctly according to the network structure. (Namely, OCh trails can be searched out. For details, see Searching for WDM Trails.) Check parameters of the OTU board and ensure that no error is found. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


32



You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended)

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Set Service Type of the client-side ports on the TN12LDM boards at stations A and B to GE. For details, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type. Step 2 Optional: Configure service timeslots of the logical port of the TN12LDM board at station A. For details, see 12.5 Configuring Service Timeslots. Step 3 Optional: Configure service timeslots of the logical port of the TN12LDM board at station B. For details, see 12.5 Configuring Service Timeslots. ----End

Verifying Configurations Check whether service configurations are correct. If the end-to-end services on the client side are correctly configured, the client trails of GE levels can be searched out. For details, see Searching for WDM Trails.

2.4 Configuring WDM Services for OTU Boards with CrossConnect Capability This section describes how to configure GE services by using the LQMS board.

2.4.1 Configuration Networking Diagram This section describes how to configure a GE service on a ring network.

Service Requirement On the network shown in Figure 2-16, ONEs A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the NEs function as OADM stations. The service requirement is as follows: User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One unidirectional GE service is available between station A and station B.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


33



Figure 2-16 Configuration networking diagram of the GE service User1 East

12LQMS

East

West

12LQMS

West

NMS

A

West

East

D

B

West

C

User2 East

:OADM West

East

Board Configuration Information In this example, two 12LQMS boards must be configured at each station.

2.4.2 Service Signal Flow This section describes how to configure the transparent transmission signal flow of a GE service. One bidirectional GE service is available between station A and station B. Figure 2-17 shows the service signal flow between station A and station B. Figure 2-17 Unidirectional service at each station Client side 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1

WDM side 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2

201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1

201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4 Cross-connect module


1(IN1/OUT1)-1

WDM-side optical module

NOTE

ClientLP is a logical port. Cross-connections between client-side RX/TX ports and ClientLP ports need to be configured. There are connections between ClientLP ports and WDM-side IN/OUT ports, and therefore cross-connections do not need to be configured.

2.4.3 Configuration Process This section describes how to configure a bidirectional GE service at stations A and B. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


34



Prerequisite Fibers are connected correctly according to the network structure. (Namely, OCh trails can be searched out. For details, see Searching for Trails.) Check parameters of the OTU board and ensure that no error is found. . You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.


Background Information Different boards have different cross-connection capacities. For details, see the functions and features of each board in the Hardware Description. If the capacity of the configured services is greater than the available cross-connection capacity, the service configuration fails.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Set Board Mode of the TN12LQMS boards at stations A and B to LQM Mode. For details, see 12.8 Configuring the Board Mode. NOTE

After Board Mode is set to LQM Mode, the TN12LQMS board can serve as a tributary and line board and convert four Any services into one OTU1 service.

Step 2 Set Service Mode of the client-side ports on the TN12LQMS boards at stations A and B to Client Mode. For details, see 12.3 Configuring the Service Mode. NOTE

After Service Mode is set to Client Mode, the TN12LQMS board can access services other than OTN services.

Step 3 Set Service Type of the client-side ports on the TN12LQMS boards at stations A and B to GE. For details, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type. Step 4 Configure the service to be added or dropped at station A. 1.

Configure a GE service from the RX/TX port of the LQMS board to the ClientLP port. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections. The following table lists the values of the parameters for station A. Field

Value

Level

GE

NOTE On the Web LCT, this parameter is Service Level.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Service Type

-

Direction

Bidirectional

Source Slot

Shelf0(subrack)-13-12LQMS


35



Field

Value

Source Optical Port

3(RX1/TX1)

NOTE On the Web LCT, this parameter is Source Port.

Source Optical Channel

1

NOTE On the Web LCT, this parameter is Source Optical Path.

Sink Slot


Sink Optical Port

201(ClientLP/ClientLP)

NOTE On the Web LCT, this parameter is Sink Port.

Sink Optical Channel

1

NOTE On the Web LCT, this parameter is Sink Optical Path.

Activate Immediately

Active

NOTE This parameter is valid only on the U2000. It is not applicable to the Web LCT.

NOTE

For details on how to select a port for electrical cross-connection services, see 2.4.2 Service Signal Flow.

Step 5 Click Query. Ensure that the query result is consistent with the configuration. Step 6 Optional: Configure service timeslots of the logical port of the TN12LQMS board at station A. For details, see 12.5 Configuring Service Timeslots. Step 7 Configure the service to be added or dropped at station B. 1.

Configure a GE service from the ClientLP port of the LQMS board to the RX/TX port. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections. The following table lists the values of the parameters for station B. Field

Value

Level

GE


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Service Type

-

Direction

Bidirectional


36



Field

Value

Source Slot


Source Optical Port

3(RX1/TX1)



1


Sink Slot


Sink Optical Port




1



Active


NOTE


Step 8 Click Query. Ensure that the query result is consistent with the configuration. Step 9 Optional: Configure service timeslots of the logical port of the TN12LQMS board at station B. For details on how to configure service timeslots, see 12.5 Configuring Service Timeslots. ----End

Verifying Configurations Check whether service configurations are correct. If the end-to-end services on the client side are correctly configured, the client trails of GE levels can be searched out. For details, see Searching for Trails.

2.5 Configuring WDM Services for Tributary Boards and Line Boards This section describes how to configure GE services by using the TQM and NQ2 boards.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


37




Service Requirement See Figure 2-18. ONEs A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the ONEs function as OADM stations. User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One bidirectional GE service is available between station A and station B. At station A, the TN12TQM board accesses one GE service and multiplexes the GE service into one channel of ODU1 electrical signals, that is, one ODU1 service. Then, the ODU1 service is sent to the TN52NQ2 board and is multiplexed with other services into one OTU2 service. At station B, the TN12TQM board accesses one GE service and multiplexes the GE service into one channel of ODU1 electrical signals, that is, one ODU1 service. Then, the ODU1 service is sent to the TN52NQ2 board and is multiplexed with other services into one OTU2 service. Figure 2-18 Configuration networking diagram of the GE service User1 East East

12TQM 52NQ2 East

West

NMS

East

A

West

B

D West

C

User2 East West 12TQM West 52NQ2

:OADM West

East

Board Configuration Information In this example, a 12TQM board and a 52NQ2 board must be configured at station A and station B.

2.5.2 Service Signal Flow This section describes how to configure the transparent transmission signal flow of a GE service. One bidirectional GE service is available between station A and station B. Figure 2-19 shows the service signal flow between station A and station B. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


38



Figure 2-19 Unidirectional service at each station TQM

NQ2

Client side 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1

WDM side 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1

51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1

201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2

51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-2

201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4

51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-3 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-4

Fixed crossconnection

1(IN/OUT)-1

Servive processing module

NOTE

ClientLP and ODU1LP are logical ports. Cross-connections between client-side RX/TX ports and ClientLP ports need to be configured. ODU1 cross-connections between the ClientLP ports of the TQM board and the ODU1LP ports of the NQ2 board need to be configured. There are connections between the ODU1LP ports of the NQ2 board and WDM-side IN/OUT ports, and therefore cross-connections do not need to be configured.

2.5.3 Configuration Process This section describes how to configure a bidirectional GE service at stations A and B.

Prerequisite Fibers are connected correctly according to the network structure. (Namely, OCh trails can be searched out. For details, see Searching for WDM Trails.) Check parameters of the OTU board and ensure that no error is found. You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.


Background Information Due to the limitations of cross-connections over the backplane, the boards configured with interboard cross-connections must be installed in cross-connection slots. For the limitations of crossconnection slots, see the limitations on cross-connections in 2.1.1 Electrical CrossConnections. The available cross-connection capacity of a board depends on the slot where the board is installed. For the OptiX OSN 6800, the available cross-connection capacity of the slots 1, 4, 11, or 14 is 40 Gbit/s; the available cross-connection capacity of any other slots is 20 Gbit/s. For the OptiX OSN 8800, the available cross-connection capacity of all any slots is 40 Gbit/s. Different boards have different cross-connection capacities. For details, see the functions and features of each board in the Hardware Description. If the capacity of the configured services is greater than the available cross-connection capacity, the service configuration fails.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Set Service Mode of the client-side ports on the TN12TQM boards at stations A and B to Client Mode. For details, see 12.3 Configuring the Service Mode. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


39



NOTE

After Service Mode is set to Client Mode, the TN12TQM board can access services other than OTN services.

Step 2 Set Service Mode of the client-side ports on the TN52NQ2 boards at stations A and B to ODU1. For details, see 12.3 Configuring the Service Mode. NOTE

After Service Mode is set to ODU1, the TN52NQ2 board can access ODU1 services.

Step 3 Set Service Type of the client-side ports on the TN12TQM boards at stations A and B to GE. For details, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type. Step 4 Configure the internal cross-connections for the wavelengths that are added or dropped from the TN12TQM board at station A. 1.

Configure a GE service from the RX/TX port of the TN12TQM board to the ClientLP port. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections. The following table lists the values of the parameters for station A. Field

Value

Level

GE


Service Type

-

Direction

Bidirectional

Source Slot

Shelf0(subrack)-13-12TQM

Source Optical Port

3(RX1/TX1)



1


Sink Slot


Sink Optical Port




1


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


40



Field

Value


Active


NOTE


Step 5 Click Query. Ensure that the query result is consistent with the configuration. Step 6 Configure ODU1 services between the TN52NQ2 board and the TN12TQM board at station A. 1.

Configure an ODU1 service from the ClientLP port of the TN12TQM board to the ODU1LP port of the TN52NQ2 board. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections. The following table lists the values of the parameters for station A. Field

Value

Level

ODU1


Service Type

-

Direction

Bidirectional

Source Slot


Source Optical Port




1


Sink Slot

Shelf0(subrack)-12-52NQ2

Sink Optical Port

51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)



1


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


41



Field

Value


Active


NOTE


Step 7 Click Query. Ensure that the query result is consistent with the configuration. Step 8 Optional: Configure service timeslots of the logical port of the TN12TQM board at station A. For details on how to configure service timeslots, see 12.5 Configuring Service Timeslots. Step 9 Configure the internal cross-connections for the wavelengths that are added or dropped from the TN12TQM board at station B. 1.

Configure a GE service from the RX/TX port of the TN12TQM board to the ClientLP port. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections.

The following table lists the values of the parameters for station B. Field

Value

Level

GE


Service Type

-

Direction

Bidirectional

Source Slot


Source Optical Port

3(RX1/TX1)



1


Sink Slot


Sink Optical Port



Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


42



Field

Value


1



Active


NOTE


Step 10 Click Query. Ensure that the query result is consistent with the configuration. Step 11 Configure ODU1 cross-connections between the TN52NQ2 board and the TN12TQM board at station B. 1.

Configure an ODU1 service from the ClientLP port of the TN12TQM board to the ODU1LP port of the TN52NQ2 board. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections. The following table lists the values of the parameters for station B. Field

Value

Level

ODU1


Service Type

-

Direction

Bidirectional

Source Slot


Source Optical Port




1


Sink Slot

Shelf0(subrack)-12-52NQ2

Sink Optical Port

51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


43



Field

Value


1



Active


NOTE


Step 12 Click Query. Ensure that the query result is consistent with the configuration. Step 13 Optional: Configure service timeslots of the logical port of the TN12TQM board at NE B. For details, see 12.5 Configuring Service Timeslots. ----End

Verifying Configurations Check whether service configurations are correct. If the end-to-end services on the client side are correctly configured, the client trails of GE levels can be searched out. For details, see Searching for WDM Trails.

2.6 Configuring WDM Services for Boards with the Layer 2 Switching Function This section describes how to configure GE services by using the boards with Layer 2 processing functions (the TBE and L4G boards in this example).


Service Requirement See Figure 2-20. The optical NEs (ONEs) A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the ONEs function as OADM stations. User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One bidirectional GE service is available between station A and station B. At station A, the TBE board accesses one GE service and converts the GE service into one channel of GE electrical signals. Then, the GE electrical signals are sent to the L4G board and are multiplexed with other services into one OTU 5G service. At station B, the TBE board accesses one GE service and converts the GE service into one channel of GE electrical signals. Then, the GE electrical signals are sent to the L4G board and are multiplexed with other services into one OTU 5G service. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


44



Figure 2-20 Configuration networking diagram of the GE service User1 EAST EAST

TBE L4G

WEST WEST

TBE L4G

NMS

WEST

EAST

A

WEST B

EAST D

EAST User2

WEST

C

WEST

:OADM

EAST

Board Configuration Information In this example, a TBE board and a L4G board must be configured at station A and station B.

2.6.2 Service Signal Flow This section describes how to configure the transparent transmission signal flow of a GE service. One bidirectional GE service is available between station A and station B. Figure 2-21 shows the service signal flow between station A and station B. Figure 2-21 Unidirectional service at each station TBE

L4G

Client side PORT3 PORT4

PORT11

VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2

101(AP1/AP1)-1

201(LP/LP)-1

102(AP2/AP2)-1

201(LP/LP)-2

VCTRUNK16 116(AP16/AP16)-1 L2 switching module

WDM side

201(LP/LP)-1

201(LP/LP)-3 201(LP/LP)-4

1(IN/OUT)-1

Servive processing WDM-side optical module module

NOTE

LP and AP are logical ports. Cross-connections between client-side PORT ports and VCTRUNK ports need to be configured. AP ports and VCTRUNK ports of the TBE board are bound to each other automatically, and therefore no configuration is required. Cross-connections between AP ports of the TBE board and LP ports of the L4G board need to be configured.

2.6.3 Configuration Process This section describes how to configure a bidirectional GE service at stations A and B. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


45



Prerequisite Fibers are connected correctly according to the network structure. (Namely, OCh trails can be searched out. For details, see Searching for Trails.) You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher.


Background Information Different boards have different cross-connection capacities. Fore details, see the functions and features of each board in the Hardware Description. If the capacity of the configured services is greater than the available cross-connection capacity, the service configuration fails.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Set Service Mode of the line-side ports on the L4G boards at stations A and B to OTN. For details, see 12.3 Configuring the Service Mode. NOTE

The mode of line-side services of the L4G boards on an NE at the local end must be the same as that at the opposite end.

Step 2 Set Service Type of the client-side ports on the TBE boards at stations A and B to GE. For details, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type. Step 3 Configure the internal cross-connections for the wavelengths that are added or dropped from the TBE board at station A. 1.

Configure EPL services from the VCTRUNK to the PORT of the TBE board. For details, see 10.4.2 Creating EPL Services. The following table lists the values of the parameters for station A. Field

Value

Board

Shelf0(subrack)-13-TBE

Service Type

EPL

Direction

Bidirectional

Source Port

PORT3

Source C-VLAN

1

Sink Port

VCTRUNK1

Sink C-VLAN

1

NOTE

For details on how to select a service port, see 2.6.2 Service Signal Flow.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


46


2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station) NOTE

l The services can be unidirectional or bidirectional. l The Enabled/Disabled and TAG fields in Port Type can be set in the Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box or Ethernet Interface. l Values of certain fields in Port Type can be changed. If port attribute settings are complete, retain the default values.

Step 4 Click Query. Ensure that the query result is consistent with the configuration. Step 5 Configure GE services between the L4G board and the TBE board at station A. 1.

Configure a GE service from the AP port of the TBE board to the LP port of the L4G board. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections. The following table lists the values of the parameters for station A. Field

Value

Level

GE


Service Type

-

Direction

Bidirectional

Source Slot


Source Optical Port

101(AP1/AP1)



1


Sink Slot

Shelf0(subrack)-12-L4G

Sink Optical Port

201(LP/LP)



1



Active


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


47


2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station) NOTE


Step 6 Click Query. Ensure that the query result is consistent with the configuration. Step 7 Configure the internal cross-connections for the wavelengths that are added or dropped from the TBE board at station B. 1.

Configure EPL services from the VCTRUNK port to the PORT port of the TBE board. For details, see 10.4.2 Creating EPL Services. The following table lists the values of the parameters for station B. Field

Value

Board


Service Type

EPL

Direction

Bidirectional

Source Port

PORT3

Source C-VLAN

1

Sink Port

VCTRUNK1

Sink C-VLAN

1

NOTE

For details on how to select a service port, see 2.6.2 Service Signal Flow. NOTE

l The services can be unidirectional or bidirectional. l The Enabled/Disabled and TAG fields in Port Type can be set in the Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box or Ethernet Interface. l Values of certain fields in Port Type can be changed. If port attribute settings are complete, retain the default values.

Step 8 Click Query. Ensure that the query result is consistent with the configuration. Step 9 Configure GE services between the L4G board and the TBE board at station B. 1.

Configure a GE service from the AP port of the TBE board to the LP port of the L4G board. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections. The following table lists the values of the parameters for station B. Field

Value

Level

GE


Service Type Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

-


48



Field

Value

Direction

Bidirectional

Source Slot


Source Optical Port

101(AP1/AP1)



1


Sink Slot

Shelf0(subrack)-12-L4G

Sink Optical Port

201(LP/LP)



1



Active


NOTE


Step 10 Click Query. Ensure that the query result is consistent with the configuration. ----End

Verifying Configurations Check whether service configurations are correct. If the end-to-end services on the client side are correctly configured, the client trails of GE levels can be searched out. For details, see Searching for Trails.

2.7 Configuring 10GE LAN Services by Using the TDX and NS2 Boards This section describes how to configure 10GE LAN services by using the TDX and NS2 boards.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


49



2.7.1 Configuration Networking Diagram This section describes how to configure a 10GE LAN service on a ring network.

Service Requirement See Figure 2-22. The optical NEs (ONEs) A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the ONEs function as OADM stations. User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One bidirectional 10GE LAN service is available between station A and station C. At station A, the TN52TDX board accesses one 10GE LAN service and encapsulates the 10GE LAN service into one channel of ODU2 electrical signals, that is, one ODU2 service. The TN52NS2 board accesses the ODU2 service and then outputs one OTU2 service. Station B transparently transmits the OTU2 service. At station C, the TN52NS2 board accesses the OTU2 service and converts the OTU2 service into ODU2 electrical signals, which are groomed to the TN52TDX board and then output as one 10GE LAN service. Figure 2-22 Configuration networking diagram of the GE service User1 East East

52TDX 52NS2 East

East West

West

NMS

52NS2 52NS2 A

West

East

D

B East

West

C

East

West West West

52TDX 52NS2

:OADM :REG

User2

Board Configuration Information In this example, the TN52TDX board and TN52NS2 boards must be configured at stations A and C. Two TN52NS2 boards must be configured at station B.

2.7.2 Service Signal Flow This topic describes how to configure the transmission signal flow of a 10GE LAN service. One bidirectional GE service is available among stations A, B, and C. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


50



Figure 2-23 shows the service signal flow among stations A, B, and C. Figure 2-23 Service at each station backplane side

TDX

A

201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-1

3(RX1/TX1)-1


4(RX2/TX2)-1

backplane side

NS2

WDM side

71(ODU2LP/ ODU2LP)-1

1(IN/OUT)-1


WDM side

NS2

backplane side


B

backplane NS2 side 71(ODU2LP/ ODU2LP)-1

1(IN/OUT)-1

1(IN/OUT)-1 Servive processing module

WDM side

NS2

Servive processing module backplane side


C

WDM side

1(IN/OUT)-1

backplane TDX side

Client side


3(RX1/TX1)-1


4(RX2/TX2)-1


Crossconnection

NOTE

ClientLP and ODU2LP are logical ports. There are cross-connections between client-side RX/TX ports and ClientLP ports and therefore cross-connections do not need to be configured. ODU2 cross-connections between the ClientLP ports of the TDX board and the ODU2LP ports of the NS2 board need to be configured. There are connections between the ODU2LP ports of the NS2 board and WDM-side IN/OUT ports and therefore cross-connections do not need to be configured.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


51



CAUTION l When 10GE LAN signals are received on the client side of the TDX board and Port Mapping of the TDX board is set to Transparent Mapping (11.1 G), Line Rate of the 71 (ODU2LP/ODU2LP)-1 port on the backplane side of the TN52NS2 board that services pass through must be set to Speedup Mode. l When 10GE LAN signals are received on the client side of the TDX board and Port Mapping of the TDX board is set to MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G), Line Rate of the 71(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)-1 port on the backplane side of the TN52NS2 board that services pass through must be set to Standard Mode. l The Service Mode must be set to ODU2 or Automatic.

2.7.3 Configuration Process This section describes how to configure a bidirectional 10GE LAN service at stations A, B, and C.

Prerequisite You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher.


Background Information l

The port mapping mode of 10GE LAN services can be configured as Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) or MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G). Users can select a proper mapping mode according to the service transmission requirements.

l

Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) meets customer requirement for transparent bit transport of 10GE LAN signals. In the Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) mode, transmission of signals are achieved by increasing the OTU frame frequency. This ensures the encoding gain and correction capability of FEC. In this mode, however, the bit rate is higher than the standard bit rate of OTU2 signals.

l

MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) is specific to transparent transmission of 10GE MAC frames as required by customers. In this port mapping mode, a 10GE LAN signal is encapsulated in the GFP-F format and then mapped into a standard OTU frame. This mode supports transparent transmission of only client 10GE MAC frames. In this mode, the signals are in standard OTU2 frames. In addition, the FEC/AFEC code pattern is applicable to 10GE LAN services in this mode. Originally, the FEC/AFEC code pattern is intended for 10G SDH services.

l

The port mapping modes of the upstream and downstream board must be the same.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Configure attributes of client-side ports on the TN52TDX board of station A. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


52



1.

In the NE Explorer, select the TN52TDX board that you want to configure, and then choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.

2.

Click By Board/Port (Channel), and select Channel from the drop-down list.

3.

Select the Basic Attributes tab.

4.

Select the ClientLP port, the service type that needs to be set, and then double-click the corresponding parameter domain to set the following parameters. l Service Type: 10GE LAN l Port Mapping: Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G)

5.

Select the board, click State and choose IS to set Primary, Secondary State.

6.

Click Apply. In the dialog box that is displayed, click OK.

7.

Click Query. Ensure that the query result is consistent with the configuration.

Step 2 Configure attributes of client-side ports on the TN52NS2 board of station A. 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the TN52NS2 board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.

2.

Click By Board/Port (Channel), and then choose Channel from the drop-down list.

3.

Select the Basic Attributes tab.

4.

Select the ODU2LP port. Double-click the Service Type parameter and then select ODU2. NOTE

Set Service Type to ODU2 or Automatic and then the NS2 board can access ODU2 services.

5.

On the Advanced Attributes tab, select the ODU2LP port and then double-click the Line Rate parameter and select Speedup Mode. NOTE

l When Port Mapping of the ClientLP port on the TDX board is set to Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G), Line Rate of the ODU2LP port on the NS2 board must be set to Speedup Mode. l When Port Mapping is set to MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) , Line Rate must be set to Standard Mode.

CAUTION Port Mapping and Line Rate of the boards that services pass must be consistent; otherwise, service interruption occurs. 6.


Step 3 Repeat step 2 to configure attributes of ports on the TN52NS2 board at station B. Step 4 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to configure attributes of ports on the TN52TDX and TN52NS2 boards of station C. Step 5 Configure ODU2 services between the TN52NS2 board and the TN52TDX board at station A. 1.

Configure ODU2 services from the ClientLP port of the TN52TDX board to the ODU2LP port of the TN52NS2 board. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections. The following table lists the values of the parameters.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


53



Field

Value

Level

ODU2

Service Type

-

Direction

Bidirectional

Source Slot

Shelf0(subrack)-13-52TDX

Source Optical Port



1

Sink Slot

Shelf0(subrack)-12-52NS2

Sink Optical Port

71(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)


1


Active

NOTE


Step 6 Click Query. Ensure that the query result is consistent with the configuration. Step 7 Configure ODU2 services between the TN52NS2 boards at station B. The following table lists the values of the parameters.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Field

Value

Level

ODU2

Service Type

-

Direction

Bidirectional

Source Slot


Source Optical Port

71(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)


1

Sink Slot


Sink Optical Port

71(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)


1


Active


54



NOTE


Step 8 Click Query. Ensure that the query result is consistent with the configuration. Step 9 Configure ODU2 services between the TN52NS2 board and the TN52TDX board at station C. 1.

Configure ODU2 services from the ClientLP port of the TN52TDX board to the ODU2LP port of the TN52NS2 board. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections. The following table lists the values of the parameters. Field

Value

Level

ODU2

Service Type

-

Direction

Bidirectional

Source Slot


Source Optical Port



1

Sink Slot


Sink Optical Port

71(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)


1


Active

NOTE


Step 10 Click Query. Ensure that the query result is consistent with the configuration. ----End

2.8 Parameters Describes the parameters involved in the WDM services configuration.

2.8.1 WDM Cross-Connection Configuration In this user interface, you can configure the cross-connections of various WDM services.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


55



Table 2-12 WDM Cross-Connection Configuration Field

Value

Description

Level

Values of parameters vary with different boards and products.

The Level parameter is used to differentiate the service types configured when electrical cross-connections are configured. Click A.20 Level (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration) for more information.

Service Type

For example, FE, STM-1, FICON

When Level of a new service is set to Any, you can select a specific service type.

Direction

Unidirectional, Bidirectional.

The Direction parameter indicates the service direction mode when the service cross-connection is configured. It can be set to either Unidirectional or Bidirectional. Click A.21 Direction (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration) for more information.

Default: Unidirectional

Source Channel

Slot ID-Board Name-Optical The Source Channel Interface ID-Optical Channel parameter is used to query the ID transmit channel of a certain electrical cross-connect Default: Null service (unidirectional service flow). Click A.17 Source Channel (WDM Cross-Connection) for more information.

Sink Channel

Slot ID - Board Name Optical Interface ID - Optical Channel ID Default: Null

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


The Sink Channel parameter is used to query the receive channel of a certain electrical cross-connect service (unidirectional service flow). Click A.18 Sink Channel (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration) for more information.

56



Field

Value

Description

Occupied ODUTUk Slot Count

l When ODUflex Service Type is set to Custom: 1-8 Default: 8

Specifies the number of ODUflex timeslots for received services. This parameter is set based on the type and rate of the service received by the port. The parameter value ranges from 1 to 8.

l When ODUflex Service Type is set to FC400: this patameter is 4 l When ODUflex Service Type is set to FC800: this patameter is 7

NOTE The OptiX OSN 3800/6800 doesn't support this parameter.

l When ODUflex Service Type is set to 3GSDI or InfiniBand 2.5G: this patameter is 3 Service Rate(bit/s)

1249245570-9993964557

The parameter value varies according to the value of Occupied ODUTUk Slot Count in the range of 1249245570 to 9993964557. It cannot be set manually. NOTE The OptiX OSN 3800/6800 doesn't support this parameter.

Activation Status

Active, Inactive Default: Active

Service Origin

Create Manually, Intelligently Generate

The Activation Status parameter is used to display whether the service crossconnection configuration is activated. Click A.19 Activation Status (WDM CrossConnection Configuration) for more information. Displays the mode of creating WDM crossconnections.

2.8.2 WDM Timeslot Configuration In this user interface, you can configure WDM services. You can specify ports and timeslots for transmitting and receiving services, and set the client-side service protocol.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


57



Table 2-13 Parameters of WDM services Parameters

Value

Description

Port

NE-Slot-Board-Optical Interface-Channel

The Port parameter indicates the location of the service timeslots, including the channel, optical interface, board, slot, and NE where the timeslots reside.

Service Type

For example: FE, STM-1, FICON

The Service Type parameter is used to set the type of the services at an optical port when the cross-connections of any services are configured, to match the type of the actual services.

Transmit Timeslot

1 to 32

The Transmit Timeslot parameter is used to select the service timeslots in the transmit direction. The Send Timeslot parameter is used to select the service timeslots in the transmit direction. Click A.22 Service Timeslot (WDM Services) for more information.

Receive Timeslot

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

1 to 32


The Receive Timeslot parameter is used to select the service timeslots on the receive direction. Click A.22 Service Timeslot (WDM Services) for more information.

58


3

3 Configuring the TN11TOM Board (Manually by Station)

Configuring the TN11TOM Board (Manually by Station)

About This Chapter A TN11TOM board can work in cascading or non-cascading mode and be configured with different port working modes. Based on different working modes, the TN11TOM board is applicable to five scenarios. You need to manually configure the TN11TOM board by station on the NMS for the five application scenarios. NOTE

When a TN11TOM board is used to configure ODU1 cross-connections, the TN11TOM board working with the TN12NS2 or the TN52NS2 board in the OptiX OSN 3800 must be installed in the following slots: l IU2 and IU4 l IU2 and IU5 l IU3 and IU4 l IU3 and IU5

3.1 Application Scenario 1: Conversion Between Eight Any Services and Four ODU1 Electrical Signals This configuration example shows how the TN11TOM board is configured to implement conversion between eight channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and four channels of ODU1 electrical signals. 3.2 Application Scenario 2: Conversion Between Four OTU1 Optical Signals and Four ODU1 Electrical Signals This configuration example shows how the TN11TOM board is configured to implement conversion between four channels of OTU1 optical signals and four channels of ODU1 electrical signals. 3.3 Application Scenario 3: Conversion Between Four Any Services and Four OTU1 Optical Signals This configuration example shows how the TN11TOM board is configured to implement conversion between four channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and four channels of OTU1 optical signals. 3.4 Application Scenario 4: Conversion Between Seven Any Services and One OTU1 Optical Signal Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


59



This configuration example shows how the TN11TOM board is configured to implement conversion between seven channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and one channel of OTU1 optical signals. 3.5 Application Scenario 5: Conversion Between Six Any Services and One OTU1 Optical Signal and Dual Feeding and Selective Receiving on the WDM Side This configuration example shows how the TOM board is configured to implement conversion between six channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and one channel of OTU1 optical signals, and how to implement the function of dual feeding and selective receiving on the WDM side.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


60



3.1 Application Scenario 1: Conversion Between Eight Any Services and Four ODU1 Electrical Signals This configuration example shows how the TN11TOM board is configured to implement conversion between eight channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and four channels of ODU1 electrical signals.

3.1.1 Configuration Networking Diagram This section describes how to configure services on a ring network.

Service Requirement See Figure 3-1. The optical NEs (ONEs) A, B, C and D form a ring network. All the ONEs function as OADM stations. User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One bidirectional OTU2 service is available between station A and station B. At station A, the TN11TOM board accesses eight Any services (100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) and then converts them into four ODU1 services. The ODU1 services are then sent to the 12NS2 board at station A, where they are converted into one OTU2 service. Figure 3-1 Networking diagram for the TOM board (tributary board in non-cascading mode) in application scenario 1

User1 SLOT 12 SLOT 15 EAST

12NS2 11TOM

WEST

NMS

User2

WEST

EAST

A D

B C

EAST SLOT 12 SLOT 15

12NS2 11TOM

WEST

WEST

EAST

:OADM

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


61



Board Configuration Information In this example, a TN11TOM board and a 12NS2 board must be configured at stations A and B each.

3.1.2 Service Signal Flow This section provides the signal flow diagram of station A. One OTU2 service is available between station A and station B. Figure 3-2 shows the service signal flow at station A. Figure 3-2 Bidirectional service at station A 11TOM 3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2)

12NS2

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)

51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1


51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-2


51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-3


51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-4

5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4)

1(IN/OUT)

7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6) 9(RX7/TX7) 10(RX8/TX8)

: Client-side services : WDM-side services : Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS : Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

3.1.3 Configuration Process This section considers station A as an example to describe the configuration process of the TN11TOM board.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.


Precautions NOTE

The value of Board Mode is Non-cascading mode by default. In this case, the 201 (ClientLP1/ ClientLP1) and 203 (ClientLP3/ ClientLP3) ports can access a maximum of four services, and the 202 (ClientLP2/ ClientLP2) and 204 (ClientLP4/ ClientLP4) ports can access a maximum of two services.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


62



NOTE

A ClientLP port can access only one service that has a rate higher than 1.25 Gbit/s, and this service can be configured in only the first channel of the ClientLP port. The total rate of services accessed by a ClientLP port must be equal to or lower than 2.5 Gbit/s. The client-side eight pairs of optical ports can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s. The client-side ports can be grouped as required.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Set Board Mode to Non-cascading. 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the TN11TOM board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.

2.

Click By Board/Port (Channel) and choose Board from the drop-down list.

3.

Click the Board Mode and select Non-cascading from the drop-down list. NOTE

If a cross-connection is configured on the board, delete the cross-connection on the board before setting Board Mode. NOTE

If the Board Mode of the board is changed, the default port configuration data and service configuration data will be restored, and as a result the services will be interrupted.

4.


5.

Click Apply.

Step 2 Configure Service Type at the WDM-side port of the TN11TOM board according to the service planning. For details, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type. Step 3 Configure the intra-board electrical cross-connections of Any services for the TN11TOM board. 1.

Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the TN11TOM board for the Any services that are input to the board. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections. NOTE

The service type must be the same as Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TN11TOM board.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


63



2.

Click Query. Confirm that the query results are the same as the values that are set.

3.

Repeat Step 3.1 to configure the remaining seven Any services.

4.

Optional: Configure service timeslots of the logical port. For details on how to configure service timeslots, see 12.5 Configuring Service Timeslots.

Step 4 Configure electrical cross-connections for the ODU1 service between the TN11TOM and 12NS2 boards. 1.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Configure electrical cross-connections for the ODU1 service between the TN11TOM and 12NS2 boards. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections.


64



2.


3.

Repeat Step 4.1 to configure the remaining cross-connect services between the TN11TOM and 12NS2 boards.

4.


----End

3.2 Application Scenario 2: Conversion Between Four OTU1 Optical Signals and Four ODU1 Electrical Signals This configuration example shows how the TN11TOM board is configured to implement conversion between four channels of OTU1 optical signals and four channels of ODU1 electrical signals.


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


65



Service Requirement See Figure 3-3. The optical NEs (ONEs) A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the ONEs function as OADM stations. User1, User2, and User3 communicate with each other through one OTU2 service each. At station A, the TN11TOM board accesses four OTU1 services and then converts them into four ODU1 services. The four ODU1 services are then sent to two 12NS2 boards at station A according to the actual service requirement. Each 12NS2 board converges the received ODU1 services and other accessed services into one OTU2 service. Figure 3-3 Networking diagram for the TN11TOM board (tributary board in non-cascading mode) in application scenario 2 User1 SLOT 12 SLOT 13 SLOT 15 EAST

12NS2 12NS2 11TOM

WEST

NMS

User2

WEST

EAST

A D

B C


12NS2 11TOM

User3

WEST SLOT 13 SLOT 15

WEST

12NS2 11TOM

EAST

:OADM

Board Configuration Information In this example, a TN11TOM board and two 12NS2 boards must be configured at station A, and a TN11TOM board and a 12NS2 board must be configured at stations B and C each.

3.2.2 Service Signal Flow This section provides the signal flow diagram of station A. One OTU2 service is available between station A and station B. Another OTU2 service is available between station A and station C. Figure 3-4 shows the service signal flow at station A. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


66



Figure 3-4 Bidirectional service at station A




Precautions NOTE

The client-side optical ports can be selected as required. A ClientLP port can access only one service that has a rate higher than 1.25 Gbit/s, and this service can be configured on only the first channel of the ClientLP port.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Set Service Mode of the TN11TOM board to OTN Mode. For details, see 12.3 Configuring the Service Mode. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


67



NOTE

When the TN11TOM board accesses OTU1 services on the client side, you first need to set the Service Mode of the TN11TOM board to OTN Mode.

Step 2 Configure Service Type at the WDM side port of the TN11TOM board as OTU1. For details, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type. Step 3 Configure the intra-board electrical cross-connections of OTU1 services for the TN11TOM board. 1.

Configure an OTU1 cross-connection between the 3(RX1/TX1) port and the 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1) port on the TN11TOM board. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections. NOTE


2.


3.

Repeat Step 3.1 to configure the remaining three OTU1 services.

4.


Step 4 Configure electrical cross-connections for the ODU1 service between the TN11TOM and 12NS2 boards. 1.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Configure electrical cross-connections for the ODU1 service between the TN11TOM and 12NS2 boards. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

68



2.


3.

Repeat Step 4.1 to configure the remaining cross-connect services between the TN11TOM and 12NS2 boards.

4.


----End

3.3 Application Scenario 3: Conversion Between Four Any Services and Four OTU1 Optical Signals This configuration example shows how the TN11TOM board is configured to implement conversion between four channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and four channels of OTU1 optical signals.


Service Requirement See Figure 3-5. The optical NEs (ONEs) A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the ONEs function as OADM stations. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


69



User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One bidirectional OTU1 service is available between station A and station B. At station A, the TN11TOM board accesses four GE services and then converts them into four OTU1 services. Figure 3-5 Networking diagram for the TN11TOM board (tributary-line board in non-cascading mode) in application scenario 3

User1

SLOT 14 EAST

11TOM

WEST

NMS

User2

EAST

A

WEST

D

B C

EAST SLOT 14

WEST

11TOM WEST

EAST :OADM

Board Configuration Information In this example, a TN11TOM board must be configured at station A and station B each.

3.3.2 Service Signal Flow This section provides the signal flow diagram of station A. Four OTU1 services are available between station A and station B. Figure 3-6 shows the service signal flow at station A.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


70



Figure 3-6 Bidirectional service at station A 11TOM 3(RX1/TX1)


51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)

7(RX5/TX5)

4(RX2/TX2)


52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)

8(RX6/TX6)

5(RX3/TX3)


53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3)

9(RX7/TX7)

6(RX4/TX4)


54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)

10(RX8/TX8)





Precautions NOTE

The client-side optical ports and WDM-side optical ports can be selected as required. A ClientLP port can access only one service that has a rate higher than 1.25 Gbit/s, and this service can be configured on only the first channel of the ClientLP port. NOTE

When the service type on both the client side and the WDM side of the TOM board is OTU1, the TOM board also can regenerate the OTU1 service. l

In cascading mode, the TOM implements the electrical regeneration of one channel of OTU1 signal. Only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical ports.

l

In non-cascading mode, the TOM implements the electrical regeneration of four channels of OTU1 signals. Any four of RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 can be configured as WDM-side optical ports.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Set the type of ports 7 (RX5/TX5), 8 (RX6/TX6), 9 (RX7/TX7), and 10 (RX8/TX8) to Line Side Color Optical Port. For details, see 11.1 Modifying Port. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


71



NOTE

When the TOM board is used as a tributary-line board, a corresponding WDM-side optical module must be inserted in the WDM-side optical port, and the Type of this optical port must be changed to Line Side Color Optical Port.


Configure the Any cross-connection between the 3(RX1/TX1) port and the 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1) port on TN11TOM board. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating CrossConnections. NOTE


2.


3.

Repeat Step 3.1 to configure the remaining three Any services.

4.


Step 4 Configure the intra-board electrical cross-connections for the OTU1 services on the TN11TOM board. 1.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Configure electrical cross-connections for the OTU1 service on the TN11TOM board. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

72



2.


3.

Repeat Step 4.1 to configure the remaining three OTU1 services.

4.


----End

3.4 Application Scenario 4: Conversion Between Seven Any Services and One OTU1 Optical Signal This configuration example shows how the TN11TOM board is configured to implement conversion between seven channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and one channel of OTU1 optical signals.


Service Requirement See Figure 3-7. The optical NEs (ONEs) A, B, C and D form a ring network. All the ONEs function as OADM stations.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


73



User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One bidirectional OTU1 service is available between station A and station B. At station A, the TN11TOM board accesses seven Any services (100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) and then converts them into one OTU1 service. Figure 3-7 Networking diagram for the TN11TOM board (tributary-line board in cascading mode) in application scenario 4

User 1

SLOT 15 EAST

11TOM

WEST

NMS

User 2

EAST

A

WEST

D

B C

EAST SLOT 15

WEST

11TOM WEST

EAST :OADM


3.4.2 Service Signal Flow This section provides the signal flow diagram of station A. One OTU1 service is available between station A and station B. Figure 3-8 shows the service signal flow at station A.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


74




201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1

4(RX2/TX2)


5(RX3/TX3)


6(RX4/TX4)


7(RX5/TX5)


8(RX6/TX6)


9(RX7/TX7)


51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)

10(RX8/TX8)

: Client-side services : Client-side services : WDM-side services : Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS : Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS




Precautions NOTE

For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, FC200, FICON Express, HD-SDI), the client-side ports can access up to only one channel. And this service can be configured in the first optical channel at the ClientLP port. The client-side seven pairs of optical ports can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. NOTE

In cascading mode, only RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical ports.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


75



NOTE

When the service type on both the client side and the WDM side of the TOM board is OTU1, the TOM board also can regenerate the OTU1 service. l

In cascading mode, the TOM implements the electrical regeneration of one channel of OTU1 signal. Only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical ports.

l

In non-cascading mode, the TOM implements the electrical regeneration of four channels of OTU1 signals. Any four of RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 can be configured as WDM-side optical ports.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Set Board Mode to Cascading mode. 1.


2.


3.

Click the Board Mode and select Cascading mode from the drop-down list. NOTE



4.


5.

Click Apply.

Step 2 Set the type of ports 10 (RX8/TX8) to Line Side Color Optical Port. For details, see 11.1 Modifying Port. NOTE


Step 3 Configure Service Type at the WDM-side port of the TN11TOM board according to the service planning. For details, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type. Step 4 Configure the intra-board electrical cross-connections of Any services for the TN11TOM board 1.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Configure the intra-board electrical cross-connections as the figure below.


76



NOTE

The service type must be the same as Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TOM board.

2.


3.

Repeat Step 4.1 to configure the remaining six Any services.

4.


Step 5 Configure the intra-board electrical cross-connections of OTU1 services for the TN11TOM board 1.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Configure electrical cross-connections for the OTU1 service on the TN11TOM board. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections.


77



2.


3.


----End

3.5 Application Scenario 5: Conversion Between Six Any Services and One OTU1 Optical Signal and Dual Feeding and Selective Receiving on the WDM Side This configuration example shows how the TOM board is configured to implement conversion between six channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and one channel of OTU1 optical signals, and how to implement the function of dual feeding and selective receiving on the WDM side.




78



User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One bidirectional OTU1 service is available between station A and station B. At station A, the TN11TOM board accesses six Any services (100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) and then converts them into one OTU1 service. On the WDM side, the TN11TOM board performs dual feeding and selective receiving. Figure 3-9 Networking diagram for the TN11TOM board (tributary-line board in cascading mode) in application scenario 5

User1

SLOT 14 EAST

11TOM

WEST

NMS

User2

EAST

A

WEST

D

B C

EAST SLOT 14

WEST

11TOM WEST

EAST :OADM

Board Configuration Information In this example, a TN11TOM board must be configured at station A and station B.

3.5.2 Service Signal Flow This section provides the signal flow diagram of station A. One OTU1 service is available between station A and station B. Figure 3-10 shows the service signal flow at station A.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


79





4(RX2/TX2)


5(RX3/TX3)


9(RX7/TX7) 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)

6(RX4/TX4)


7(RX5/TX5)


10(RX8/TX8)

8(RX6/TX6) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6 : Client-side services : Client-side services : WDM-side services : Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS : Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS




Precautions NOTE

For the client services at a rate greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, FC200, FICON Express, HD-SDI), the client-side ports can access up to only one channel. And this service can be configured in the first optical channel at the ClientLP port. The client-side six pairs of optical ports can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. NOTE

In cascading mode, only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical ports.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Set Board Mode to Cascading mode. 1.


2.


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


80


3.


Click the Board Mode and select Cascading mode from the drop-down list. NOTE



4.


5.

Click Apply.

Step 2 Set the type of ports 9 (RX7/TX7) and 10 (RX8/TX8) to Line Side Color Optical Port. For details, see 11.1 Modifying Port. NOTE



Configure the Any cross-connection between the 3(RX1/TX1) port and the 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1) port on TN11TOM board. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating CrossConnections. NOTE

The service type must be the same as Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TOM board.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


81



2.


3.

Repeat Step 4.1 to configure the remaining five Any services.

4.


Step 5 Configure two separate cross-connections from the internal logical port to ports 9 (RX7/TX7) and 10 (RX8/TX8) for the TN11TOM board to achieve dual feeding. 1.

Configure the OTU1 cross-connection between the ODU1LP port and the RX/TX port on TN11TOM board. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections. NOTE

The working channel port and the protection channel port are the two ports for dual feeding. The service on the working channel must be set as bidirectional, and the service on the protection channel must be set as unidirectional. In this example, port 9 (RX7/TX7) is the working channel port, and port 10 (RX8/TX8) is the protection channel port.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


82


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)



83



2.


3.


Step 6 Configure selective receiving on the WDM side of the TN11TOM board. 1.

In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Port Protection from the Function Tree.

2.

In the Port Protection window, click New. In the displayed Confirm dialog box, click OK. The Create Protection Group dialog box displayed. Select Intra-Board 1+1 Protection from Protection Type. Enter the other parameters of the protection group. For details of parameters, see the Feature Description.

3.

Click OK. In the window that is displayed, click Close. The created protection group is displayed in the window.

4.

Confirm that the values of the parameters for the protection group are the same as the values that are set.

----End

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


84


4


Configuring the TN52TOM Board (Manually by Station)

About This Chapter A TN52TOM board can work in cascading or non-cascading mode and be configured with different port working modes. Based on different working modes, the TN52TOM board is applicable to 12 scenarios. You need to manually configure the TN52TOM board by station on the NMS for the 12 application scenarios. 4.1 Overview of the Working Modes This section describes the board working mode and port working mode. A specific service signal flow of a board is available when the board working mode and port working mode are set to specific values. 4.2 Configuration Principles This section describes the principles for configuring the TN52TOM board. 4.3 Application Scenario 1: Conversion Between Eight Any Services and Two ODU0 or One ODU1 Electrical Signals This configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implement conversion between eight channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and two ODU0 or one ODU1 (with ODU0 mapping) electrical signals. 4.4 Application Scenario 2: Conversion Between Six Any Services and One OTU1 Optical Signal (with ODU0 Mapping) This configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implement conversion between six channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and one channel of OTU1 optical signals (with ODU0 mapping), and how to implement the function of dual feeding and selective receiving on the WDM side. If only one of optical ports 9 (RX7/ TX7) or 10 (RX8/TX8) is used as the WDM-side optical port, the TN52TOM board can implement conversion between seven Any services and one channel of OTU1 optical signals (with ODU0 mapping). Perform the configurations by referring to the following steps. 4.5 Application Scenario 3: Conversion Between Eight Any Services and One ODU1 Electrical Signal

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


85



This configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implement conversion between eight channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and one ODU1 electrical signal. 4.6 Application Scenario 4: Conversion Between Six Any Services and One OTU1 Optical Signal (with ODU1 Mapping) This configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implement conversion between six channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and one channel of OTU1 optical signals (with ODU1 mapping), and how to implement the function of dual feeding and selective receiving at the WDM side. If only one of optical ports 9 (RX7/ TX7) and 10 (RX8/TX8) is used as the WDM-side optical port, the TN52TOM board can implement conversion between seven Any services and one channel of OTU1 optical signals (with ODU0 mapping). Perform the configurations by referring to the following steps. 4.7 Application Scenario 5: Conversion Between Eight Any Services and Eight ODU0 or Four ODU1 Electrical Signals This configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implement conversion between eight channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and eight channels of ODU0 electrical signals or four channels of ODU1 electrical signals. 4.8 Application Scenario 6: Conversion Between Four Any Services and Two OTU1 Optical Signals This configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implement conversion between four channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and two channels of OTU1 optical signals, and how to implement the function of dual feeding and selective receiving at the WDM side. If only two of optical ports 7 (RX5/TX5), 8 (RX6/ TX6), 9 (RX7/TX7), or 10 (RX8/TX8) are used as the WDM-side optical ports, the TN52TOM can implement conversion between six Any services and two channels of OTU1 optical signals. Perform the configurations by referring to the following steps. 4.9 Application Scenario 7: Conversion Between Eight Any or Four OTU1 Services and Four ODU1 Electrical Signals This configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implement conversion between eight channels of Any or four channels of OTU1 services and four channels ODU1 electrical signals. 4.10 Application Scenario 8: Conversion Between Four OTU1 Services and Eight ODU0 Electrical Signals This configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implement conversion between four channels of OTU1 services and eight channels of ODU0 electrical signals. 4.11 Application Scenario 9: Conversion Between Four OTU1 Optical Signals and Eight ODU0 Electrical Signals (Through Any Re-Encapsulation) This configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implement conversion between four channels OTU1 optical signals and eight channels of ODU0 electrical signals through Any re-encapsulation. 4.12 Application Scenario 10: Conversion Between Four OTU1 Optical Signals and Four ODU1 Electrical Signals (Through Any Re-Encapsulation) This configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implement conversion between four channels OTU1 optical signals and four channels of ODU1 electrical signals through Any re-encapsulation. 4.13 Application Scenario 11: Conversion Between Two OTU1 Optical Signals and Two OTU1 Optical Signals (Through Any Re-Encapsulation) Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


86



This configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implement conversion between two channels OTU1 optical signals and two channels OTU1 optical signals through Any re-encapsulation. 4.14 Application Scenario 12: Regeneration of Four OTU1 Optical Signals This configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implement electrical regeneration of four OTU1 optical signals. If you set only two of the 7(RX5/TX5), 8 (RX6/TX6), 9(RX7/TX7), and 10(RX8/TX8) optical ports as WDM-side optical ports, the TN52TOM board can implement conversion between six Any services and two channels of OTU1 optical signals. If the 7(RX5/TX5) and 8(RX6/TX6) optical ports are configured as one protection group and the 9(RX7/TX7) and 10(RX8/TX8) optical ports are configured are another protection group, the TN52TOM board can implement conversion between four Any services and two channels of OTU1 optical signals and implement the function of dual feeding and selective receiving at the WDM side.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


87



4.1 Overview of the Working Modes This section describes the board working mode and port working mode. A specific service signal flow of a board is available when the board working mode and port working mode are set to specific values.

Board Working mode The TN11TOM and TN52TOM boards support the cascading and non-cascading modes. l

In cascading mode, a maximum of eight multi-rate (< 2.5 Gbit/s) Any services can be input to the TN11TOM or TN52TOM board through the SFP module on the client side. The services are then multiplexed into different timeslots of one or two ODU0 services or one ODU1 service. Each group of ClientLP ports, for example, 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 ports, can access a maximum of eight Any services.

l

In non-cascading mode, a maximum of eight multi-rate (< 2.5 Gbit/s) Any services can be input to the TN11TOM or TN52TOM board through the SFP module on the client side. The services are then multiplexed into different timeslots of one to eight ODU0 services or one to four ODU1 services. Each group of ClientLP ports, for example, 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-1 to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 ports, can access a maximum of four Any services. NOTE

l The navigation path for setting the TN11TOM board is Configuration > WDM Interface > By Board/ Port(Channel) > Board. l The navigation path for setting the TN52TOM board is Configuration > Working Mode. A specific service signal flow of the TN52TOM board is available only when both the board working mode and port working mode are set to specific values.

Port Working Mode The TN52TOM board should be set to the cascading or non-cascading mode. In addition, application scenarios such as the ODU0 or ODU1 mapping mode and tributary-line mode of the ports on the board should be set. As shown in Table 4-1, the TN52TOM board supports 14 working modes. Table 4-1 Mapping between the working modes and signal flows of the TN52TOM board Board Working mode

Cascading

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Port Working Mode

Signal Flow

Flow Chart

ODU0 mode

Any->ODU0[>ODU1]

4.3.2 Service Signal Flow

ODU0 TributaryLine Mode

Any->ODU0>ODU1->OTU1


ODU1 Mode

Any->ODU1



Any->ODU1>OTU1



88



Board Working mode

Non-Cascading

Port Working Mode

Signal Flow

Flow Chart

None (not for ports)

-

-

ODU0 mode

Any->ODU0[>ODU1]



Any->ODU0>ODU1->OTU1


ODU1 Mode

OTU1/Any->ODU1


ODU1_ODU0 mode

OTU1->ODU1>ODU0


ODU1_ANY_ODU 0 re-encapsulation mode

OTU1->ODU1>Any->ODU0


ODU1_ANY_ODU 0_ODU1 reencapsulation mode

OTU1->ODU1>Any->ODU0>ODU1


ODU1_ANY_ODU 0_ODU1 reencapsulation tributary-line mode

OTU1->ODU1>Any->ODU0>ODU1->OTU1


ODU1 tributary-line mode

OTU1/Any>ODU1->OTU1



-

-

NOTE

l [->ODU1]: indicates that "ODU1" is optional. For example, in non-cascading ODU0 tributary mode, there are two service signal flows: Any->ODU0 and Any->ODU0->ODU1. l None (not for ports): indicates that the resources at this port are not used and are released to other ports.

4.2 Configuration Principles This section describes the principles for configuring the TN52TOM board. The rules for configuring the TN52TOM board are as follows: l

The OptiX OSN 8800 does not support distributed cross-connection.

l

For the OptiX OSN 6800, – The TN52TOM board can groom a maximum of six Any services through the backplane. – The TN52TOM board can groom Any services on the opposite board.

l Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

For the OptiX OSN 3800, Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

89



– The TN52TOM board can groom a maximum of six Any services through the backplane. – The TN52TOM board cannot groom Any services throughout the full-mesh network. – Inter-board ODU1 cross-connections between the TN52TOM and TN52NS2 boards, if required, should be configured in such a manner that the ClientLP3-1 port on the TN52TOM board is cross-connected to the ODU1LP1-3 port on the TN52NS2 board, the ClientLP5-1 port on the TN52TOM board is cross-connected to the ODU1LP1-2 port on the TN52NS2 board. – When a TN52TOM board is used to configure GE service and Any service crossconnections, the TN52TOM board working with another board must be installed in the following slots: – IU2 and IU3 – IU4 and IU5 – When a TN52TOM board is used to configure ODU1 cross-connections, the TN52TOM board working with another board must be installed in the following slots: – IU2 and IU4 – IU2 and IU5 – IU3 and IU4 – IU3 and IU5 l

When the board works in any mode, the source and sink channel IDs for services must be consistent. For example, if a client-side service is configured at ClientLPX.1, the service must be also configured at ClientLPY.1 on the interconnected board. If a client-side service is configured at ClientLPX.2, the service must be also configured at ClientLPY.2 on the interconnected board. That is, service interconnection must be implemented at channels with the same ID (port numbers may be different). This is due to hardware limitations.

l

In non-cascading board working mode, the ports on the board can be set to different port working modes.

l

In tributary-line mode, the ODU1 service does not support centralized cross-connection.

l

When the cross-connect board is the XCS board, the ODU0 scheduling is not supported and thus the following port working mode application scenarios are not supported: – Application Scenario 8: Non-cascading ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0) – Application Scenario 9: Non-cascading ODU1_ANY_ODU0 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0)

l

When the cross-connect board is the XCM or XCH board, the following port working mode application scenario is not supported: – Application Scenario 10: Non-cascading ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 reencapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1)

4.3 Application Scenario 1: Conversion Between Eight Any Services and Two ODU0 or One ODU1 Electrical Signals This configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implement conversion between eight channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and two ODU0 or one ODU1 (with ODU0 mapping) electrical signals.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


90



4.3.1 Configuration Networking Diagram This section describes how to configure the TN52TOM board on a ring network.

Service Requirement See Figure 4-1. The optical NEs (ONEs) A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the ONEs function as OADM stations. User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One bidirectional OTU2 service is available between station A and station B. At station A, the TN52TOM board accesses eight Any services (100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) and then converts them into two ODU0 services or one ODU1 service. The two ODU0 services or one ODU1 service is accessed by the TN52NS2 board at station A, and is then converged with other accessed services as one OTU2 service. Figure 4-1 Networking diagram for the TN52TOM board (ODU0 mode in cascading mode) in application scenario 1 User1 SLOT 15 SLOT 12 EAST

52TOM 52NS2

WEST

NMS

User2

WEST

EAST

A D

B C


WEST

52NS2 52TOM WEST

EAST

:OADM

Board Configuration Information In this example, a TN52TOM board and a TN52NS2 board must be configured at station A and station B each.

4.3.2 Service Signal Flow This section describes the service signal flow at station A. One OTU2 service is available between station A and station B. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


91



When the cross-connect board is the XCM or XCH board, the signal flow at station A is as shown in Figure 4-2. When the cross-connect board is the XCS board, the signal flow at station A is as shown in Figure 4-3. Figure 4-2 Signal flow at station A when the cross-connect board is the XCM or XCH board A 52NS2

A 52TOM 3(RX1/TX1)

161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)

161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1

5(RX3/TX3)



6(RX4/TX4)

162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-2 1(IN/OUT)

7(RX5/TX5)

163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-1



8(RX6/TX6)


9(RX7/TX7)



10(RX8/TX8)


: Client-side services : WDM-side services : Working service direction : Virtual channel

Figure 4-3 Signal flow at station A when the cross-connect board is the XCS board 52NS2

52TOM 3(RX1/TX1) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1


4(RX2/TX2) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1

5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4)



1(IN/OUT)

161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 7(RX5/TX5)







10(RX8/TX8)

: Client-side services : WDM-side services : Working service direction : Virtual channel




Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


92



Precautions NOTE

l When the cross-connect board is the XCM or XCH board, the TN52TOM board cannot groom the ODU1 service in cascading ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]). l When the cross-connect board is the XCS board, the TN52TOM board cannot groom the ODU0 service in cascading ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]). NOTE

The client-side optical port cannot be set to Line Side Color Optical Port or Line Side Colorless Optical Port. NOTE

Services can be input at each client-side optical port at a maximum rate of 1.25 Gbit/s. NOTE

Services can be input at the eight pairs of client-side optical ports at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. NOTE

l The total rate of services that are input at each group of ClientLP ports, such as 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-1 to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP)-8, cannot be higher than 1.25 Gbit/s. l Only one GE service can be input at each group of ClientLP ports. NOTE

If a channel of the ClientLP1 port and a channel of the ClientLP2 port are identified by the same number, these two channels cannot be used at the same time. For example, if the 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 channel is configured with a service type, you cannot configure a service type for the 202(ClientLP2/ ClientLP2)-1 channel.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Set the Working Mode of the TN52TOM board: Set Board Working mode to Cascading and then set Port Working Mode to ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]). For details, see 12.1 Configuring Working Modes. Step 2 Configure the Service Type at the WDM Interface of the TN52TOM according to the service planning. For details, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type. Step 3 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the TN52TOM board for the Any services of the board. 1.


In this configuration, you can set Level to GE or ANY. If you set Level to ANY, you can set Service Type to only FE, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, or FDDI. The service type must be the same as Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TN52TOM board.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


93


2.


Repeat Step 3.1 to configure the remaining Any services.

Step 4 Configure electrical cross-connections for the two ODU0 services between the TN52TOM and TN52NS2 boards. NOTE

In cascading ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]), this configuration is supported only when the crossconnect board is the XCM or XCH board.

1.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Configure a cross-connection for one ODU0 service between the TN52TOM and TN52NS2 boards. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections.


94


2.


Repeat Step 4.1 to configure a cross-connection for the other ODU0 service between the TN52TOM and TN52NS2 boards.

Step 5 Configure electrical cross-connections for the ODU1 services between the TN52TOM and TN52NS2 boards.For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections. NOTE

In cascading ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]), this configuration is supported only when the crossconnect board is the XCM or XCH board. When ODU1 cross-connections are created, ODU0 cross-connections from the ClientLP port to ODU0LP on the TN52TOM board are automatically created.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


95



----End

4.4 Application Scenario 2: Conversion Between Six Any Services and One OTU1 Optical Signal (with ODU0 Mapping) This configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implement conversion between six channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and one channel of OTU1 optical signals (with ODU0 mapping), and how to implement the function of dual feeding and selective receiving on the WDM side. If only one of optical ports 9 (RX7/ TX7) or 10 (RX8/TX8) is used as the WDM-side optical port, the TN52TOM board can implement conversion between seven Any services and one channel of OTU1 optical signals (with ODU0 mapping). Perform the configurations by referring to the following steps.


Service Requirement See Figure 4-4. The optical NEs (ONEs) A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the ONEs function as OADM stations. User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One bidirectional OTU1 service is available between station A and station B. At station A, the TN52TOM board accesses six Any services Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


96



(100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) and then converts them into one OTU1 service. On the WDM side, the TN52TOM board performs dual feeding and selective receiving. Figure 4-4 Networking diagram for the TN52TOM board (ODU0 tributary-line mode in cascading mode) in application scenario 2 User1

SLOT 15 EAST

52TOM

WEST

NMS

User2

WEST

EAST

A D

B C

EAST SLOT 15

WEST

52TOM WEST

EAST

:OADM


4.4.2 Service Signal Flow This section describes the service signal flow at station A. One OTU1 service is available between station A and station B. Figure 4-5 shows the service signal flow at station A. Figure 4-5 Bidirectional service at station A 52TOM 3(RX1/TX1)

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1

4(RX2/TX2)

5(RX3/TX3)


201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8

9(RX7/TX7) 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1

6(RX4/TX4)


7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6)


202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2



Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


97






Precautions NOTE

l

Two channels with the same type of services at the ClientLP1 and ClientLP2 ports each cannot be used at the same time. For example, if the 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 service type is configured, the 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 service type cannot be configured.

l

The total rate of services that are input at each group of ClientLP ports, such as 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-1 to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP)-8, cannot be higher than 1.25 Gbit/s.

l

Only one GE service can be input through each group of ClientLP ports.

l

Services can be input at the six pairs of client-side optical ports at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.

l

Services can be input at each client-side optical port at a maximum rate of 1.25 Gbit/s.

l

In cascading mode, only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical ports.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Set the Working Mode of the TN52TOM board: Set Board Working mode to Cascading and then set Port Working Mode to ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode(Any->ODU0->ODU1>OTU1). For details, see 12.1 Configuring Working Modes. Step 2 Set the type of ports 9 (RX7/TX7) and 10 (RX8/TX8) to Line Side Color Optical Port. For details, see 11.1 Modifying Port. NOTE

When the TN52TOM board is used as a tributary-line board, Type of this optical port used as the WDM side port must be changed to Line Side Color Optical Port.

Step 3 Configure Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TN52TOM board according to the service planning. For details, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type. Step 4 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the TN52TOM board for the Any services of the board. 1.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the TN52TOM board for the Any services of the board. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating CrossConnections.


98


4 Configuring the TN52TOM Board (Manually by Station) NOTE


2.


Step 5 Configure two separate cross-connections from the internal logical port to ports 9 (RX7/TX7) and 10 (RX8/TX8) for the TN52TOM board to achieve dual feeding. 1.

Configure two separate cross-connections from the internal logical port to ports 9 (RX7/ TX7) and 10 (RX8/TX8) for the TN52TOM board to achieve dual feeding. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections. NOTE


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


99


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)



100



Step 6 Configure selective receiving at the WDM side of the TN52TOM board. 1.

In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Port Protection.

2.


3.


----End

4.5 Application Scenario 3: Conversion Between Eight Any Services and One ODU1 Electrical Signal This configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implement conversion between eight channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and one ODU1 electrical signal.


Service Requirement See Figure 4-6. The optical NEs (ONEs) A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the ONEs function as OADM stations. User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One bidirectional OTU2 service is available between station A and station B. At station A, the TN52TOM board accesses eight Any services Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


101



(100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) and then converts them into one ODU1 service. The ODU1 service is accessed by the TN52NS2 board at station A, and is then converged with other accessed services as one OTU2 service. Figure 4-6 Networking diagram for the TN52TOM board (ODU1 mode in cascading mode) in application scenario 3 User1 SLOT 15 SLOT 12 EAST

52TOM 52NS2

WEST

NMS

User2

WEST

EAST

A D

B C


WEST

52NS2 52TOM WEST

EAST

:OADM

Board Configuration Information In this example, a TN52TOM board and a TN52NS2 board must be configured at station A and station B each.

4.5.2 Service Signal Flow This section describes the service signal flow at station A. One OTU2 service is available between station A and station B. Figure 4-7 shows the service signal flow at station A.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


102



Figure 4-7 Bidirectional service at station A 52TOM

52NS2

3(RX1/TX1)


201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 4(RX2/TX2) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 5(RX3/TX3)


6(RX4/TX4)

1(IN/OUT) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1

7(RX5/TX5)


8(RX6/TX6) 9(RX7/TX7)



10(RX8/TX8) : Client-side services : WDM-side services : Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS : Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS




Precautions NOTE

The client-side optical port cannot be set to Line Side Color Optical Port or Line Side Colorless Optical Port. NOTE

A ClientLP port can access only one service that has a rate higher than 1.25 Gbit/s, and this service can be configured on only the first channel of the ClientLP port. NOTE

Services can be input at the eight pairs of client-side optical ports at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Set Working Mode of the TN52TOM board: Set Board Working mode to Cascading and then set Port Working Mode to ODU1 mode (Any->ODU1). For details, see 12.1 Configuring Working Modes. Step 2 Configure the Service Type at the WDM Interface of the TN52TOM according to the service planning. For details, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type. Step 3 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the TN52TOM board for the Any services of the board. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


103


1.



In this configuration, you can set Level to GE or ANY. If you set Level to ANY, you can set Service Type to only FE, STM-1,.STM-4,.STM-16,.OC-3,.OC-12,.OC-48,.FC100,.FC200,.FICON,.FICON Express,.HD-SDI,.DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, or FDDI. The service type must be the same as Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TN52TOM board.

2.


Step 4 Configure electrical cross-connections for the ODU1 services between the TN52TOM and TN52NS2 boards. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


104



----End

4.6 Application Scenario 4: Conversion Between Six Any Services and One OTU1 Optical Signal (with ODU1 Mapping) This configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implement conversion between six channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and one channel of OTU1 optical signals (with ODU1 mapping), and how to implement the function of dual feeding and selective receiving at the WDM side. If only one of optical ports 9 (RX7/ TX7) and 10 (RX8/TX8) is used as the WDM-side optical port, the TN52TOM board can implement conversion between seven Any services and one channel of OTU1 optical signals (with ODU0 mapping). Perform the configurations by referring to the following steps.


Service Requirement See Figure 4-8. The optical NEs (ONEs) A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the ONEs function as OADM stations. User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One bidirectional OTU1 service is available between station A and station B. At station A, the TN52TOM board accesses six Any services Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


105



(100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) and then converts them into one OTU1 service. On the WDM side, the TN52TOM board performs dual feeding and selective receiving. Figure 4-8 Networking diagram for the TN52TOM board (ODU1 tributary-line mode in cascading mode) in application scenario 4 User1

SLOT 15 EAST

52TOM

WEST

NMS

User2

WEST

EAST

A D

B C

EAST SLOT 15

WEST

52TOM WEST

EAST

:OADM



Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


106



Figure 4-9 Bidirectional service at station A 52TOM 3(RX1/TX1) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)



6(RX4/TX4) 7(RX5/TX5)

51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)

9(RX7/TX7 ) 10(RX8/TX8)


8(RX6/TX6)





Precautions NOTE

The client-side six pairs of optical ports can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s, the client-side ports can access up to only one channel. This service can be configured at only the first ClientLP port. In cascading mode, only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical ports.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Set the Working Mode of the TN52TOM board: Set Board Working mode to Cascading and then set Port Working Mode to ODU1 Tributary-Line Mode(Any->ODU1->OTU1). For details, see 12.1 Configuring Working Modes. Step 2 Set the type of ports 9 (RX7/TX7) and 10 (RX8/TX8) to Line Side Color Optical Port. For details, see 11.1 Modifying Port. NOTE

When the TN52TOM board is used as a tributary-line board, Type of this optical port used as the WDM side port must be changed to Line Side Color Optical Port.

Step 3 Configure Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TN52TOM board according to the service planning. For details, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


107



Step 4 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the TN52TOM board for the Any services of the board. 1.

Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the TN52TOM board for the Any services of the board. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating CrossConnections. NOTE

In this configuration, you can set Level to GE or ANY. If you set Level to ANY, you can set Service Type to only FE, STM-1,.STM-4,.STM-16,.OC-3,.OC-12,.OC-48,.FC100,.FC200,.FICON,.FICON Express,.HD-SDI,.DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, or FDDI. The service type must be the same as Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TN52TOM board.

2.


Step 5 Configure two separate cross-connections from the internal logical port to ports 9 (RX7/TX7) and 10 (RX8/TX8) for the TN52TOM board to achieve dual feeding. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections. NOTE


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


108


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)



109





2.


3.


4.


----End

4.7 Application Scenario 5: Conversion Between Eight Any Services and Eight ODU0 or Four ODU1 Electrical Signals This configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implement conversion between eight channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and eight channels of ODU0 electrical signals or four channels of ODU1 electrical signals.




110



User1, User2, and User3 communicate with each other through one OTU2 service each. At station A, the TN52TOM board accesses eight Any services and then converts them into eight ODU0 or four ODU1 services. The eight ODU0 or four ODU1 services are then sent to two TN52NS2 boards at station A based on the actual service requirement. Each TN52NS2 board converges the received ODU0 or ODU1 services and other accessed services into one OTU2 service. Figure 4-10 Networking diagram for the TN52TOM board (ODU0 mode in non-cascading mode) in application scenario 5 User1 SLOT 15 SLOT 12 SLOT 13 EAST

52TOM 52NS2 52NS2

WEST

NMS

WEST

User2

EAST

A D

B C


User3

WEST

52NS2 52TOM

SLOT 12 SLOT 15 WEST

52NS2 52TOM

EAST

:OADM

Board Configuration Information In this example, a TN52TOM board and two TN52NS2 boards must be configured at station A. A TN52TOM board and a TN52NS2 board must be configured at station B and station D each.

4.7.2 Service Signal Flow This section describes the service signal flow at station A. One OTU2 service is available between station A and station B. When the cross-connect board is the XCM or XCH board, the signal flow at station A is as shown in Figure 4-11. When the cross-connect board is the XCS board, the signal flow at station A is as shown in Figure 4-12.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


111



Figure 4-11 Signal flow at station A when the cross-connect board is the XCM or XCH board 52TOM 3(RX1/TX1)

52NS2 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1


4(RX2/TX2)



5(RX3/TX3)

6(RX4/TX4)

7(RX5/TX5)








1(IN/OUT) 163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3




9(RX7/TX7)

10(RX8/TX8)








Figure 4-12 Signal flow at station A when the cross-connect board is the XCS board 52TOM 3(RX1/TX1)

52NS2


















5(RX3/TX3)

6(RX4/TX4)

7(RX5/TX5)






1(IN/OUT)









9(RX7/TX7)

10(RX8/TX8)





Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended) Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


112



Precautions NOTE

When the cross-connect board is the XCM or XCH board, the TN52TOM board cannot groom the ODU1 service in non-cascading ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]). When the cross-connect board is the XCS board, the TN52TOM board cannot groom the ODU0 service in non-cascading ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]). NOTE

The total rate of services that are input at each group of ClientLP ports, such as 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP)-4, cannot be higher than 1.25 Gbit/s. Only one GE service can be input at each group of ClientLP ports. The client-side eight pairs of optical ports can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s. If a channel of the ClientLP1 port and a channel of the ClientLP2 port are identified by the same number, these two channels cannot be used at the same time. For example, if the 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 channel is configured with a service type, you cannot configure a service type for the 202(ClientLP2/ ClientLP2)-1 channel. Service configurations at the ClentLP3 and ClientLP4, ClientLP5 and ClientLP6, and ClientLP7 and ClientLP8 ports must also comply with this restriction.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Set Working Mode of the TN52TOM board: Set Board Working mode to Non-Cascading and then set Port Working Mode of all the ClientLP ports to ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[>ODU1]). For details, see 12.1 Configuring Working Modes. Step 2 Configure the Service Type at the WDM Interface of the TN52TOM according to the service planning. For details, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type. Step 3 Configure the cross-connections for the eight Any services that are input to the TN52TOM board. 1.



Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


113


2.



Step 4 Configure cross-connections for the eight ODU0 services between the TN52TOM and TN52NS2 boards. NOTE

In non-cascading ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]), this configuration is supported only when the cross-connect board is the XCM or XCH board.

1.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Configure a cross-connection for one ODU0 service between the TN52TOM and TN52NS2 boards. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections.


114


2.


Repeat Step 4.1 to configure a cross-connection for the other ODU0 service between the TN52TOM and TN52NS2 boards.

Step 5 Configure cross-connections for the four ODU1 services between the TN52TOM and TN52NS2 boards. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections. NOTE

In non-cascading ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]), this configuration is supported only for OptiX OSN 6800 and 3800. When an ODU1 cross-connection is created, an intra-board ODU0 cross-connection is created automatically from the ClientIP port to the ODU0LP port on the TN52TOM board.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


115



----End

4.8 Application Scenario 6: Conversion Between Four Any Services and Two OTU1 Optical Signals This configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implement conversion between four channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and two channels of OTU1 optical signals, and how to implement the function of dual feeding and selective receiving at the WDM side. If only two of optical ports 7 (RX5/TX5), 8 (RX6/ TX6), 9 (RX7/TX7), or 10 (RX8/TX8) are used as the WDM-side optical ports, the TN52TOM can implement conversion between six Any services and two channels of OTU1 optical signals. Perform the configurations by referring to the following steps.


Service Requirement See Figure 4-13. The optical NEs (ONEs) A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the ONEs function as OADM stations. User1 and User2 communicate with each other. Two bidirectional OTU1 services are available between station A and station B. At station A, the TN52TOM board accesses four Any services and then converts them into two OTU2 services. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


116



Figure 4-13 Networking diagram for the TN52TOM board (ODU0 tributary-line mode in noncascading mode) in application scenario 6 User1

SLOT 15 EAST

52TOM

WEST

NMS

User2

WEST

EAST

A D

B C

EAST SLOT 15

WEST

52TOM WEST

EAST

:OADM


4.8.2 Service Signal Flow This section describes the service signal flow at station A. Two OTU1 services are available between station A and station B. Figure 4-14 shows the service signal flow at station A. Figure 4-14 Bidirectional service at station A 52TOM 3(RX1/TX1)


7(RX5/TX5)



5(RX3/TX3)

6(RX4/TX4)











202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-4 9(RX7/TX7) 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1



Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


117






Precautions NOTE

The total rate of services that are input at each group of ClientLP ports, such as 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP)-4, cannot be higher than 1.25 Gbit/s. Only one GE service can be input at each group of ClientLP ports. The client-side optical ports can access services at a maximum rate of 5 Gbit/s. When the number of a route of the ClientLP1 or ClientLP3 port is the same as that of a route of the ClientLP2 or ClientLP4 port, the two routes cannot be configured with cross-connections at the same time. For example, if the 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 service type is configured, the 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 service type cannot be configured. NOTE

The client-side optical ports and WDM-side optical ports can be selected as required. NOTE

l The ClientLP5 and ClientLP7 do not support the non-cascading ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode(Any>ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) mode. l Before the working modes of the ClientLP1 and ClientLP3 ports are set to ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode(Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1), the working modes of the ClientLP5 and ClientLP7 ports must be set to NONE Mode(Not for Port).

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Set Working Mode of the TN52TOM board: Set Board Working mode to Non-Cascading and then set Port Working Mode of all the ClientLP ports to ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1). For details, see 12.1 Configuring Working Modes. Step 2 Set the type of ports 7 (RX5/TX5), 8 (RX6/TX6), 9 (RX7/TX7) and 10 (RX8/TX8) to Line Side Color Optical Port. For details, see 11.1 Modifying Port. NOTE

When the TN52TOM board is used as a tributary-line board, Type of the optical port used as the WDM side port must be changed to Line Side Color Optical Port.

Step 3 Configure the Service Type at the WDM Interface of the TN52TOM according to the service planning. For details, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type. Step 4 Configure the cross-connections for the four Any services that are input to the TN52TOM board. 1.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the TN52TOM board for the Any services that are input to the board. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

118


4 Configuring the TN52TOM Board (Manually by Station) NOTE


2.


Step 5 Configure two separate cross-connections from the ODU1LP port to WDM side ports on the TN52TOM board to achieve dual feeding. 1.

Configure two separate cross-connections from the ODU1LP port to ports 7 (RX5/TX5) and 8 (RX6/TX6) for the TN52TOM board to achieve dual feeding. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections. NOTE


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


119


2.


Repeat Step 5.1 to configure two separate cross-connections from the internal logical port to ports 9 (RX7/TX7) and 10 (RX8/TX8) for the TN52TOM board to achieve dual feeding.



2.

In the Port Protection user port, click New. In the displayed Confirm dialog box, click OK. The Create Protection Group dialog box displayed. Select Intra-Board 1+1 Protection from Protection Type. Enter the other parameters of the protection group. For details on the parameters, see the Feature Description.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


120



3.


4.


5.

Repeat Step 6.2 and Step 6.3 to configure the selective receiving feature of the ports 9 (RX7/TX7) and 10 (RX8/TX8) for the TN52TOM board.

----End

4.9 Application Scenario 7: Conversion Between Eight Any or Four OTU1 Services and Four ODU1 Electrical Signals This configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implement conversion between eight channels of Any or four channels of OTU1 services and four channels ODU1 electrical signals.


Service Requirement See Figure 4-15. The optical NEs (ONEs) A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the ONEs function as OADM stations. User1, User2, and User3 communicate with each other through one OTU2 service each. At station A, the TN52TOM board accesses eight Any services (100Mbit/s - 2.5Gbit/s) or four OTU1 services and then converts them into four ODU1 services. The four ODU1 services are Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


121



then sent to two TN52NS2 boards at station A based on the actual services requirement. Each TN52NS2 board converges the received ODU1 services and other accessed services into one OTU2 service. Figure 4-15 Networking diagram for the TN52TOM board (ODU1 mode in non-cascading mode) in application scenario 7 User1 SLOT 15 SLOT 12 SLOT 13 EAST

52TOM 52NS2 52NS2

WEST

NMS

WEST

User2

EAST

A D

B C


User3

WEST

52NS2 52TOM


52NS2 52TOM

EAST

:OADM



Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


122



Figure 4-16 Bidirectional service at station A 52NS2 52TOM

3(RX1/TX1)




4(RX2/TX2)


5(RX3/TX3)


6(RX4/TX4)



7(RX5/TX5)

9(RX7/TX7)



52NS2 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1

8(RX6/TX6)

1(IN/OUT)


205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-4 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2


10(RX8/TX8)


1(IN/OUT) 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3

51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 : Client-side services : WDM-side services : Working service direction : Virtual channel




Precautions NOTE

A ClientLP port can access only one service that has a rate higher than 1.25 Gbit/s, and this service can be configured on only the first channel of the ClientLP port. The client-side eight pairs of optical ports can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Set Working Mode of the TN52TOM board: Set Board Working mode to Non-Cascading and then set Port Working Mode to ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1). For details, see 12.1 Configuring Working Modes. Step 2 Configure the Service Type at the WDM Interface of the TN52TOM according to the service planning. For details, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


123



Step 3 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the TN52TOM board for the Any services of the board. 1.

Configure the cross-connections from the 3(RX1/TX1) ports to the 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1) ports on the TN52TOM board for the Any or OTU1 services of the board. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections. NOTE

In this configuration, you can set Level to GE, OTU1 or ANY. If you set Level to ANY, you can set Service Type to only FE, STM-1,.STM-4,.STM-16,.OC-3,.OC-12,.OC-48,.FC100,.FC200,.FICON,.FICON Express,.HD-SDI,.DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, or FDDI. The service type must be the same as Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TN52TOM board.

2. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Repeat Step 3.1 to configure the remaining Any services. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

124



Step 4 Configure electrical cross-connections for the ODU1 services between the TN52TOM and TN52NS2 boards. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections.

Step 5 See the steps above to configure the station B, C, and D. Inter-board ODU1 cross-connections between the 52TOM and 52NS2 boards must be configured in the manner below. Product

52TOM board

52NS2 board

OptiX OSN 3800


51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1


51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-2


51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-3


51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-4


51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1


51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-2


51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-3


51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-4

OptiX OSN 6800/ OptiX OSN 8800

----End

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


125



4.10 Application Scenario 8: Conversion Between Four OTU1 Services and Eight ODU0 Electrical Signals This configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implement conversion between four channels of OTU1 services and eight channels of ODU0 electrical signals.


Service Requirement See Figure 4-17. The optical NEs (ONEs) A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the ONEs function as OADM stations. User1, User2, and User3 communicate with each other through one OTU2 service each. At station A, the TN52TOM board accesses four OTU1 services and then converts them into eight ODU0 services. The eight ODU0 services are then sent to two TN52NS2 boards at station A based on the actual services requirement. Each TN52NS2 board converges the received ODU0 services and other accessed services into one OTU2 service. Figure 4-17 Networking diagram for the TN52TOM board (ODU1_ODU0 mode in noncascading mode) in application scenario 8 User1 SLOT 15 SLOT 12 SLOT 13 EAST

52TOM 52NS2 52NS2

WEST

NMS

WEST

User2

EAST

A D

B C


User3

WEST

52NS2 52TOM


52NS2 52TOM

EAST

:OADM

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


126




4.10.2 Service Signal Flow This section describes the service signal flow at station A. One OTU2 service is available between station A and station B. Figure 4-18 shows the service signal flow at station A. Figure 4-18 Bidirectional service at station A when the cross-connect board is the XCM or XCH board 52TOM

3(RX1/TX1)

5(RX3/TX3)



52NS2 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1














1(IN/OUT) 7(RX5/TX5)

9(RX7/TX7)
















Precautions NOTE

When the cross-connect board is the XCS board, the TN52TOM board does not support ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0) in non-cascading mode.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


127



NOTE

A ClientLP port can access only one service that has a rate higher than 1.25 Gbit/s, and this service can be configured on only the first channel of the ClientLP port. The client-side eight pairs of optical ports can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s. NOTE

The client-side optical ports can be selected as required.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Set Working Mode of the TN52TOM board: Set Board Working mode to Non-Cascading and then set Port Working Mode of all the ClientLP ports to ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1>ODU1->ODU0). For details, see 12.1 Configuring Working Modes. Step 2 Set Service Mode of the client-side port of TN52TOM as OTN Mode. For details, see 12.3 Configuring the Service Mode. NOTE


Step 3 Configure the Service Type at the WDM Interface of the TN52TOM as OTU1 according to the service planning. For details, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type. Step 4 Configure the OTU1 cross-connection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports on the TN52TOM board. 1.

Configure an OTU1 cross-connection between the 3(RX1/TX1) port and the 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1) port on TN52TOM board. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating CrossConnections.

2.

Repeat Step 4.1 to configure the remaining OTU1 services

Step 5 Configure ODU0 cross-connections between the TN52TOM and TN52NS2 boards. 1.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Configure an ODU0 cross-connection between the 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1) port on TN52TOM board and the 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1) port on TN52NS2 board. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

128


2.


Repeat Step 5.1 to configure ODU0 cross-connections between other TN52TOM and TN52NS2 boards.

----End

4.11 Application Scenario 9: Conversion Between Four OTU1 Optical Signals and Eight ODU0 Electrical Signals (Through Any Re-Encapsulation) This configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implement conversion between four channels OTU1 optical signals and eight channels of ODU0 electrical signals through Any re-encapsulation.


Service Requirement See Figure 4-19. The optical NEs (ONEs) A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the ONEs function as OADM stations. User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One bidirectional OTU2 service is available between station A and station B. At station A, the TN52TOM board accesses four OTU1 services and then converts them into eight ODU0 services through Any re-encapsulation. The ODU0 services are then sent to the TN52NS2 board at station A, where they are converted into one OTU2 service.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


129



Figure 4-19 Networking diagram for the TN52TOM board (ODU1_ANY_ODU0 reencapsulation mode in non-cascading mode) in application scenario 9 User1 SLOT 15 SLOT 14 SLOT 12 EAST

52TOM 52TOM 52NS2

WEST

NMS

User2

WEST

EAST

A D

B C


WEST

52NS2 52TOM WEST

EAST

:OADM

Board Configuration Information In this example, two TN52TOM boards and a TN52NS2 board must be configured at station A. A TN52TOM board and a TN52NS2 board must be configured at station B.


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


130



Figure 4-20 Bidirectional service at station A 52TOM

52NS2 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-1

233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-1 3(RX1/TX1)

237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-1



















201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-8

238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-8 239(AnyLP7/AnyLP7)-1






240(AnyLP8/AnyLP8)-8 1(IN/OUT)


















Precautions NOTE

When the cross-connect board is the XCM or XCH board, the TN52TOM board does not support ODU1_ANY_ODU0 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0) in non-cascading mode. NOTE

Each optical port supports access of services at a maximum rate of 1.25 Gbit/s. The client-side eight pairs of optical ports can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s. NOTE

When the Any service is mapped into the ODU0 service, the TN52TOM board supports de-encapsulation and then re-encapsulation of only 10 Any services.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Set Working Mode of the TN52TOM board: Set Board Working mode to Non-Cascading and then set Port Working Mode of all the ClientLP ports to ODU1_ANY_ODU0 reIssue 02 (2011-10-31)


131



encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0). For details, see 12.1 Configuring Working Modes. Step 2 Set Service Mode of the client-side port of TN52TOM as OTN Mode. For details, see 12.3 Configuring the Service Mode. NOTE


Step 3 Set Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TN52TOM board to OTU1. For details, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type. Step 4 Configure the OTU1 cross-connection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports on the TN52TOM board. 1.


2.

Repeat Step 4.1 to configure the remaining OTU1 services.

Step 5 Set Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TN52TOM board. For details, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type. NOTE

When configuring internal cross-connections for Any services on the TN52TOM board. set the service type to the same as the type of services, which are encapsulated into the OTU1 services received on the client side of the TN52TOM board. For example, if FE services are encapsulated into OTU1 services on the upstream board of the TN52TOM board, set the service type to FE when configuring the internal crossconnections for Any services on the TN52TOM board.

Step 6 Configure internal cross-connections of the Any service on the TN52TOM board. 1.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Configure an Any cross-connection on the TN52TOM board. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections.


132



NOTE

Services of the AnyLP1 port can only be configured at the AnyLP5 and AnyLP6 ports. Services of the AnyLP2 port can only be configured at the AnyLP7 and AnyLP8 ports, and so on.

2.



Configure an ODU0 cross-connection between the 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5) port on TN52TOM board and the 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1) port on TN52NS2 board. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections.

2.


----End Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


133



4.12 Application Scenario 10: Conversion Between Four OTU1 Optical Signals and Four ODU1 Electrical Signals (Through Any Re-Encapsulation) This configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implement conversion between four channels OTU1 optical signals and four channels of ODU1 electrical signals through Any re-encapsulation.


Service Requirement See Figure 4-21. The optical NEs (ONEs) A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the ONEs function as OADM stations. User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One bidirectional OTU2 service is available between station A and station B. At station A, the TN52TOM board accesses four OTU1 services and then converts them into four ODU1 services through Any re-encapsulation. The ODU1 services are then sent to the TN52NS2 board at station A, where they are converted into one OTU2 service. Figure 4-21 Networking diagram for the TN52TOM board (ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 reencapsulation mode in non-cascading mode) in application scenario 10 User1 SLOT 15 SLOT 14 SLOT 12 EAST

52TOM 52TOM 52NS2

WEST

NMS

User2

WEST

EAST

A D

B C


WEST

52NS2 52TOM WEST

EAST

:OADM

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


134



Board Configuration Information In this example, two TN52TOM boards and a TN52NS2 board must be configured at station A. A TN52TOM board and a TN52NS2 board must be configured at station B.

4.12.2 Service Signal Flow This section describes the service signal flow at station A. One OTU2 service is available between station A and station B. Figure 4-22 shows the service signal flow at station A. Figure 4-22 Bidirectional service at station A 52NS2

52TOM 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-1




























240(AnyLP8/AnyLP8)-8 1(IN/OUT)


















Precautions NOTE

When the cross-connect board is the XCM or XCH board, the TN52TOM board does not support ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1) in noncascading mode.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


135



NOTE

A ClientLP port can access only one service that has a rate higher than 1.25 Gbit/s, and this service can be configured on only the first channel of the ClientLP port. NOTE

The client-side eight pairs of optical ports can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s. NOTE

When the Any service is mapped into the ODU0 service, the TN52TOM board supports de-encapsulation and then re-encapsulation of only 10 Any services.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Set Working Mode of the TN52TOM board: Set Board Working mode to Non-Cascading and then set Port Working Mode of all the ClientLP ports to ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 reencapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1). Step 2 Set Service Mode of the client-side port of TN52TOM as OTN Mode. For details, see 12.3 Configuring the Service Mode. NOTE


Step 3 Set Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TN52TOM board to OTU1. For details, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type. Step 4 Configure the OTU1 cross-connection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports on the TN52TOM board. 1.


2.


Step 5 Set Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TN52TOM board. For details, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


136



NOTE


Step 6 Configure internal cross-connections of the Any service on the TN52TOM board. 1.


NOTE


2.



Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Configure an ODU1 cross-connection between the 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1) port on TN52TOM board and the 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP) port on TN52NS2 board. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections.


137


2.



----End

4.13 Application Scenario 11: Conversion Between Two OTU1 Optical Signals and Two OTU1 Optical Signals (Through Any Re-Encapsulation) This configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implement conversion between two channels OTU1 optical signals and two channels OTU1 optical signals through Any re-encapsulation.


Service Requirement See Figure 4-23. The optical NEs (ONEs) A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the ONEs function as OADM stations. User1 and User2 communicate with each other. Two bidirectional OTU1 services are available between station A and station B. At station A, the TN52TOM board accesses two OTU1 services and then converts them into two OTU1 services through Any re-encapsulation.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


138



Figure 4-23 Networking diagram for the TN52TOM board (ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 reencapsulation tributary-line mode in non-cascading mode) in application scenario 11 User1

SLOT 15 EAST

52TOM

WEST

NMS

WEST

User2

EAST

A D

B C

EAST SLOT 15

WEST

52TOM WEST

EAST

:OADM

Board Configuration Information In this example, a TN52TOM board must be configured at station A and station B.

4.13.2 Service Signal Flow This section describes the service signal flow at station A. Two OTU1 services are available between station A and station B. Figure 4-24 shows the service signal flow at station A. Figure 4-24 Bidirectional service at station A 52TOM 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-1








7(RX5/TX5)








9(RX7/TX7)











Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


139






Precautions NOTE

The client-side optical ports only can access two OTU1 services, and the OTU1 service can be configured on only the first channel of the ClientLP port. When the Any service is mapped into the ODU0 service, the TN52TOM board supports de-encapsulation and then re-encapsulation of only 10 Any services. NOTE

The client-side optical ports and WDM-side optical ports can be selected as required.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Set Working Mode of the TN52TOM board: Set Board Working mode to Non-Cascading and then set Port Working Mode of ClientLP1 and ClientLP3 to ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1). NOTE

l The ClientLP5 and ClientLP7 ports do not support the Non-Cascading ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 reencapsulation tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1) mode l Before the working mode of the ClientLP1 and ClientLP3 are set to ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 reencapsulation tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1), the working modes of the ClientLP5 and ClientLP7 ports must be set to NONE Mode (Not for Port).

Step 2 Set the type of ports 9 (RX7/TX7) and 10 (RX8/TX8) to Line Side Color Optical Port. For details, see 11.1 Modifying Port. NOTE

When the TN52TOM board is used as a tributary & line board, a corresponding WDM-side optical module must be inserted in the WDM-side optical port, and the Type of this optical port must be changed to Line Side Color Optical Port.

Step 3 Set Service Mode of the client-side port of TN52TOM as OTN Mode. For details, see 12.3 Configuring the Service Mode. NOTE


Step 4 Set Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TN52TOM board to OTU1. For details, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


140



Step 5 Configure OTU1 cross-connections between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports on the TN52TOM board. 1.


2.


Step 6 Set Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TN52TOM board. For details, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type. NOTE


Step 7 Configure internal cross-connections for Any services on the TN52TOM board. 1.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)



141



NOTE


2.


Step 8 Configure OTU1 cross-connections between the ODU1LP and RX/TX ports on the TN52TOM board. 1.

Configure an OTU1 cross-connection between the 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) and 9(RX7/ TX7) ports on the TN52TOM board. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating CrossConnections.

NOTE


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


142


2.



----End

4.14 Application Scenario 12: Regeneration of Four OTU1 Optical Signals This configuration example shows how the TN52TOM board is configured to implement electrical regeneration of four OTU1 optical signals. If you set only two of the 7(RX5/TX5), 8 (RX6/TX6), 9(RX7/TX7), and 10(RX8/TX8) optical ports as WDM-side optical ports, the TN52TOM board can implement conversion between six Any services and two channels of OTU1 optical signals. If the 7(RX5/TX5) and 8(RX6/TX6) optical ports are configured as one protection group and the 9(RX7/TX7) and 10(RX8/TX8) optical ports are configured are another protection group, the TN52TOM board can implement conversion between four Any services and two channels of OTU1 optical signals and implement the function of dual feeding and selective receiving at the WDM side.


Service Requirement See Figure 4-25. The optical NEs (ONEs) A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the ONEs function as OADM stations. User1 and User2 communicate with each other. Four bidirectional OTU1 services are available between station A and station B. At station A, the TN52TOM board accesses four OTU1 services, decapsulates them into four ODU1 electrical signals, and then converts them into four OTU1 services. In this manner, the electrical regeneration is implemented.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


143



Figure 4-25 Networking diagram for the TN52TOM board (ODU1 tributary-line mode in noncascading mode) in application scenario 12 User1

SLOT 15 EAST

52TOM

WEST

NMS

User2

WEST

EAST

A D

B C

EAST SLOT 15

WEST

52TOM WEST

EAST

:OADM


4.14.2 Service Signal Flow This section describes the service signal flow at station A. Four OTU1 services are available between station A and station B. Figure 4-26 shows the service signal flow at station A. Figure 4-26 Bidirectional service at station A TOM 3(RX1/TX1)



7(RX5/TX5)

4(RX2/TX2)



8(RX6/TX6)

5(RX3/TX3)



9(RX7/TX7)

6(RX4/TX4)



10(RX8/TX8)


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


144



4.14.3 Configuration Process This section considers station A at which the TN52TOM board accesses four OTU1 services as an example to describe the configuration process of the TN52TOM board.



Precautions NOTE

The client-side optical ports and WDM-side optical ports can be selected as required.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Set Working Mode of the TN52TOM board: Set Board Working mode to Non-Cascading and then set Port Working Mode of all the ClientLP ports to ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1). For details, see 12.1 Configuring Working Modes. Step 2 Set the type of ports 7 (RX5/TX5), 8 (RX6/TX6), 9 (RX7/TX7) and 10 (RX8/TX8) to Line Side Color Optical Port. For details, see 11.1 Modifying Port. NOTE

When the TN52TOM board is used as a tributary-line board, a corresponding WDM-side optical module must be inserted in the WDM-side optical port, and the Type of this optical port must be changed to Line Side Color Optical Port.

Step 3 Set Service Mode of the TN52TOM board to OTN Mode. For details, see 12.3 Configuring the Service Mode. NOTE


Step 4 Configure Service Type at the WDM-side port of the TN52TOM board as OTU1 according to the service planning. For details, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type. Step 5 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the TN52TOM board for the OTU1 services of the board. 1.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports for the OTU1 services that are input to the TN52TOM board. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating CrossConnections.


145



NOTE


2.

Repeat Step 5.1 to configure cross-connections for the other OTU1 services.

Step 6 Configure the OTU1 cross-connections between the ODU1LP and RX/TX port on the TN52TOM board. 1.

Configure an OTU1 cross-connection between the 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) and the 7 (RX5/TX5) on the TN52TOM board. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating CrossConnections.

NOTE


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


146


2.



----End

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


147


5


Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

About This Chapter The THA/TOA board can be configured with different port working modes and is applicable to various scenarios accordingly. You need to manually configure the board by station on the NMS for the application scenarios. The THA and TOA boards are almost the same except for the number of optical ports. The THA board provides 16 optical ports while the TOA board provides 8 optical ports. This chapter uses the TOA board as an example for illustration. The descriptions and configuration of the THA board are similar to those of the TOA board. The THA board differs from the TOA board in the following aspects: l

The first eight client-side ports on the THA board can be configured with cross-connections only to the first eight LP ports; the last eight client-side ports on the THA board can be configured with cross-connections only to the last eight LP ports.

l

The THA board cannot receive SDI and HD-SDI services on the client side.

l

The THA board does not support ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex). Therefore, all configurations related to this port working mode are applicable only to the TOA board.

5.1 Overview of the Working Mode Each port on the TOA board can work in different modes so that services can be processed on different paths. 5.2 Configuration Procedures Six port working modes are available for the TOA board on the NMS. The port for the None (not for ports) mode does not require configurations. The other five modes require configurations. 5.3 Application Scenario 1: ODU0 Non-Convergence Mode When using the ODU0 non-convergence mode, the TOA board performs conversion between eight channels of optical signals with arbitrary bit rates (125 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s) and eight channels of ODU0 electrical signals. 5.4 Application Scenario 2: ODU1 Non-Convergence Mode Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


148



When using the ODU1 non-convergence mode, the TOA board performs conversion between eight channels of optical signals with arbitrary bit rates (1.49 Gbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s) and eight channels of ODU1 electrical signals. 5.5 Application Scenario 3: ODU1 Convergence Mode When using the ODU1 convergence mode, the TOA board performs conversion between eight channels of optical signals with arbitrary bit rates (125 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) and eight channels of ODU1 electrical signals. 5.6 Application Scenario 4: ODU1_ODU0 Mode In ODU1_ODU0 mode, the TOA board performs conversion between eight channels of OTU1 optical signals and 16 channels of ODU0 electrical signals. 5.7 Application Scenario 5: ODUflex Non-Convergence Mode When using the ODUflex non-convergence mode, the TOA board performs conversion between four channels of FC400 optical signals and four channels of ODUflex electrical signals or conversion between five channels of 3G-SDI optical signals and five channels of ODUflex electrical signals.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


149



5.1 Overview of the Working Mode Each port on the TOA board can work in different modes so that services can be processed on different paths. The TOA board supports six port working modes listed in Table 5-1. You can set the port working modes on the NMS. Table 5-1 Port working modes on the TOA board Port Working Mode

Signal Flow

ODU0 non-convergence mode

Any->ODU0


OTU1/Any->ODU1

ODU1 convergence mode

n x Any->ODU1 (1 ≤ n ≤ 8)

ODU1_ODU0 mode

OTU1->ODU1->ODU0

ODUflex non-convergence mode

Any->ODUflex


-

NOTE

None (not for ports): indicates that the resources at the port in this mode are not used and are released to other ports.

5.2 Configuration Procedures Six port working modes are available for the TOA board on the NMS. The port for the None (not for ports) mode does not require configurations. The other five modes require configurations.

General Configuration Procedure Figure 5-1 shows the general configuration procedure for the port working modes on the TOA board.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


150



Figure 5-1 General configuration procedure Configure the port working mode

Configure the port type

Configure the timeslot configuration mode for the line board


Configure the service mode

Configure crossconnections from the client side to LP ports

Configure interboard crossconnections

Mandatory Optional

In the flowchart, the mandatory actions are required for each port working mode and optional actions vary according to port working modes. The optional actions must be configured in the following scenarios: l

Configure the port type: Port Type must be set to Client Side Color Optical Port when colored optical signals are received on the client side.

l

Configure the timeslot configuration mode: ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode must be set for the line board that is interconnected with the TOA board. – When the port working mode of the TOA board is ODUflex, ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode must be set to Assign random for the line board that is interconnected with the TOA board. – In other port working modes, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode for the line board to the same as the value that is set on the interconnected line board. The recommended value is Assign random.

l

Configure the service mode: When Service Type is set to OTU1, Service Mode must be set to OTN Mode.

l

Configure cross-connections from the client side to LP ports: This action is required only for the ODU0 non-convergence mode and ODU1 convergence mode.

The following describes the configuration procedure and involved parameter settings for each mode. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


151



l

Table 5-2 describes the configuration procedure for the ODU0 non-convergence mode.

l


l

Table 5-4 describes the configuration procedure for the ODU1 convergence mode.

l

Table 5-5 describes the configuration procedure for the ODU1_ODU0 mode.

l

Table 5-6 describes the configuration procedure for the ODUflex non-convergence mode.

Configuration Procedure for the ODU0 Non-Convergence Mode Table 5-2 Configuration procedure No.

Action

Description

1


Optional l Parameter settings: The default value of Port Working Mode is ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0). If the default value is used, skip this step. l Operation description: For details about the configuration procedure, see Configuring the Working Mode.

2

Configure the port type.

Optional l Parameter settings: The default value of Port Type is Client Side Grey Optical Port. If colored optical signals are received on the client side, set Port Type to Client Side Color Optical Port. l Operation description: For details about the configuration procedure, see Modifying Port.

3


Mandatory l Parameter settings: The available values for Service Type are FE, FDDI, GE(GFP-T), GE(TTT-AGMP), STM-1, STM-4, OC-3, OC-12, FC100, FICON, DVBASI, ESCON, and SDI. l Operation description: Configure the service type based on the service plan. For details about the configuration procedure, see Configuring the Service Type. NOTE Two channels (channel 1 and channel 2) are available at each LP port. Set the service type for only one of the two channels. When the TOA board is interconnected with a TN52TOM board, the channel where you set the service type must be the same as the channel where the service type is set on the TN52TOM board. When the TOA board is interconnected with another board, set the service type for channel 1.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


152



No.

Action

Description

4

Configure crossconnections from the client side to LP ports on the TOA board.

Mandatory l Parameter settings: – Level and Service Type: – If you set Service Type to GE(GFP-T) or GE (TTT-AGMP) in step 3, retain the default value (GE) for Level. – If you set Service Type to a value other than GE in step 3, set Level to Any and then set Service Type to the same value that you set in step 3. – Direction: Set it to Bidirectional. – Source Slot/Sink Slot: Set the two parameters to the ID of the slot where the TOA board is housed. – Source Optical Port: Set it to a port in the range of 3 (RX1/TX1) to 10(RX8/TX8). – Source Optical Channel: Set it to 1. – Sink Optical Port: Set it to a port in the range of 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1) to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8). Ensure that the client-side port matches an LP port. That is, if you set the source optical port to RXi/TXi, set the sink optical port to ClientLPi. – Sink Optical Channel: 1 or 2. Set it to the channel for which you configure the service type in step 3. l Operation description: Configure cross-connections from the client side to each LP port. For details about the configuration procedure, see Creating CrossConnections. NOTE Set Port Working Mode to ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0) for each sink optical port.

5

Configure inter-board cross-connections.

Mandatory l Parameter settings: See Table 5-7. l Operation description: Configure cross-connections from each LP port on the TOA board to other boards. For details about the configuration procedure, see Creating CrossConnections.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


153



Configuration Procedure for the ODU1 Non-Convergence Mode Table 5-3 Configuration procedure No.

Action

Description

1


Mandatory l Parameter settings: Set Port Working Mode to ODU1 non-convergence mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1). l Operation description: For details about the configuration procedure, see Configuring the Working Mode.

2



3


Mandatory l Parameter settings: The available values for Service Type are HD-SDI, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FICON Express, and OTU1. The total received service bandwidth cannot exceed 20 Gbit/s. l Operation description: Configure the service type based on the service plan. For details about the configuration procedure, see Configuring the Service Type.

4

Configure the service mode.

Optional l Parameter settings: The default value of Service Mode is Client Mode. When you set Service Type to OTU1, set Service Mode to OTN Mode. l Operation description: For details about the configuration procedure, see Configuring the Service Mode.

5



Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


154



Configuration Procedure for the ODU1 Convergence Mode Table 5-4 Configuration procedure No.

Action

Description

1


Mandatory l Parameter settings: Set Port Working Mode to ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1). l Operation description: For details about the configuration procedure, see Configuring the Working Mode.

2



3


Mandatory l Parameter settings: The available values for Service Type are ANY, FE, FDDI, GE(GFP-T), FC100, FC200, DVB-ASI, ESCON, STM-1, STM-4, OC-3, OC-12, SDI, HD-SDI, FICON, and FICON Express. l Operation description: Configure the service type based on the service plan. For details about the configuration procedure, see Configuring the Service Type. NOTE l Only channel 1, for example, 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1, in each group of ClientLP ports can receive services with rates higher than 1.25 Gbit/s. l The total rate of services received by each group of ClientLP ports, for example, 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 to 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8, cannot exceed 2.5 Gbit/s. l The total rate of services received by all ClientLP ports from 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 to 208(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8, cannot exceed 20 Gbit/s.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


155



No.

Action

Description

4

Configure crossconnections from the client side to LP ports on the TOA board.

Mandatory l Parameter settings: – Level and Service Type: – If you set Service Type to GE(GFP-T) in step 3, retain the default value (GE) for Level. – If you set Service Type to a value other than GE in step 3, set Level to Any and then set Service Type to the same value that you set in step 3. – Direction: Set it to Bidirectional. – Source Slot/Sink Slot: Set the two parameters to the ID of the slot where the TOA board is housed. – Source Optical Port: Set it to a port in the range of 3 (RX1/TX1) to 10(RX8/TX8). – Source Optical Channel: Set it to 1. – Sink Optical Port: Set it to a port in the range of 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1) to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8). There is no mapping between client-side ports and LP ports. For example, if you set the source optical port to 3(RX1/TX1), you can set the sink optical port to any of the ports from 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8). – Sink Optical Channel: Set it to a value in the range of 1 to 8, which is the ID of the channel for which you configure the service type in step 3. l Operation description: Configure cross-connections from the client side to each LP port. For details about the configuration procedure, see Creating CrossConnections. NOTE Set Port Working Mode to ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any>ODU1) for each sink optical port.

5



Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


156



Configuration Procedure for the ODU1_ODU0 Mode Table 5-5 Configuration procedure No.

Action

Description

1


Mandatory l Parameter settings: Set Port Working Mode to ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0). l Operation description: For details about the configuration procedure, see Configuring the Working Mode.

2



3


Mandatory l Parameter settings: Set Service Type to OTU1. l Operation description: For details about the configuration procedure, see Configuring the Service Type.

4


Mandatory l Parameter settings: Set Service Mode to OTN Mode. l Operation description: For details about the configuration procedure, see Configuring the Service Mode.

5


Mandatory l Parameter settings: See Table 5-7. l Operation description: Configure cross-connections from each ODU0LP port on the TOA board to other boards. For details about the configuration procedure, see Creating Cross-Connections.

Configuration Procedure for the ODUflex Non-Convergence Mode Table 5-6 Configuration procedure No.

Action

Description

1


Mandatory l Parameter settings: Set Port Working Mode to ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex). l Operation description: For details about the configuration procedure, see Configuring the Working Mode.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


157



No.

Action

Description

2



3

4

Configure the timeslot configuration mode for the line board that is interconnected with the TOA board.

Mandatory


Mandatory

l Parameter settings: The default value of ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random. If the default value is used, skip this step. l Operation description: In the NE Explorer, select the line board that is interconnected with the TOA board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface > Advanced Attributes from the Function Tree. In the displayed window, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign random for the required ports.

l Parameter settings: The available values for Service Type are 3G-SDI and FC400. l Operation description: Configure the service type based on the service plan. For details about the configuration procedure, see Configuring the Service Type.

5



Table 5-7 Parameters for configuring inter-board cross-connections

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Param eter

ODU0 NonConvergence Mode

ODU1 NonConvergen ce Mode

ODU1 Convergence Mode

ODU1_OD U0 Mode

ODUflex NonConvergen ce Mode

Level

ODU0

ODU1

ODU1

ODU0

ODUflex


158



Param eter




ODU1_OD U0 Mode


Service Type

-

-

-

-

Custom, PACKET, FC400, FC800, 3GSDI, InfiniBand 2.5G, or CPRI4 NOTE For the V100R006C 01 version, only support FC400, FC800, and 3GSDI.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Directi on

Bidirectional

Bidirectional

Bidirectional

Bidirectional

Bidirectional

Source Slot

ID of the slot where the TOA board is housed





Source Optical Port

201 (ClientLP1/ ClientLP1) to 208 (ClientLP8/ ClientLP8)



161 (ODU0LP1/ ODU0LP1) to 168 (ODU0LP8/ ODU0LP8)


Source Optical Channe l

1

1

1

1 or 2

1

Sink Slot

ID of the slot where the interconnected board is houseda

ID of the slot where the interconnecte d board is houseda

ID of the slot where the interconnected board is houseda

ID of the slot where the interconnecte d board is houseda

TN53NQ2, TN53ND2, TN53NS2

Sink Optical Port

Example: 161 (ODU0LP1/ ODU0LP1)




1(IN1/ OUT1) to 2 (IN2/OUT2)


159


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


Param eter




ODU1_OD U0 Mode


Sink Optical Channe l

1 or 2

1 to 4

1 to 4

1 or 2

OCH:1ODU2:1ODUflex:1 to OCH:1ODU2:1ODUflex:2


160



Param eter




ODU1_OD U0 Mode


Occupi ed ODUT Uk Slot Count

-

-

-

-

l The value is 4 when the service type is FC400. l The value is 7 when the service type is FC800. l The value is 3 when the service type is 3GSDI. l The value is 3 when the service type is InfiniBan d 2.5G. l The value is 3 when the service type is CPRI4. l The value needs to be set to 1 to 8 based on the actual service when the service type is Custom or PACKET .

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


161



Param eter




ODU1_OD U0 Mode


Service Rate (bit/s)

-

-

-

-

The parameter value is automatically displayed according to the value of Occupied ODUTUk Slot Count.

l There is no mapping between source optical ports and sink optical ports. For example, if you set the source optical port to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1), you can set the sink optical port to 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1) or any other ODU0LP port on the board in the sink slot. l a: The interconnected board can be TN52ND2, TN52NQ2, TN54NQ2, TN52NS2, TN53ND2, TN53NQ2, TN53NS2, TN52NS3, TN54NS3, TN54ENQ2, TN54NPO2, or TN55NPO2.

NOTE

To better understand the service signal flow and ports required for configuring cross-connections, see the section "Board Service Configuration" for each board in the Hardware Description, where detailed port models and working modes are provided.

5.3 Application Scenario 1: ODU0 Non-Convergence Mode When using the ODU0 non-convergence mode, the TOA board performs conversion between eight channels of optical signals with arbitrary bit rates (125 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s) and eight channels of ODU0 electrical signals.

5.3.1 Networking Diagram This section describes the networking diagram of TOA board in ODU0 non-convergence mode.

Service Requirement As shown in Figure 5-2, optical NEs A, B, C and D form a ring network, and all the NEs function as OADM stations. The service requirements are as follows: l

User1 and User2 communicate with each other.

l

One bidirectional OTU2 service is available between NE A and NE B.

l

At NE A, the TOA board receives eight Any services (125 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s) and converts them into eight ODU0 services. The TOA board then transmits the eight ODU0

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


162



services to the TN52NQ2 board, where the ODU0 services are converged into one OTU2 service. Figure 5-2 Networking diagram for the TOA board (ODU0 Non-Convergence Mode) User 1 SLOT 12 SLOT 15 East

TN52NQ2 TN54TOA

West

NMS

West

User 2

East

A D

B C

West

East SLOT 12 SLOT 15

TN52NQ2 TN54TOA

West

East

:OADM

Board Configuration Information In this example, a TOA board and a TN52NQ2 board should be configured on both station A and station B.

5.3.2 Service Signal Flow This section describes the service signal flow of TOA board in ODU0 non-convergence mode. One OTU2 service is available between station A and station B. Figure 5-3 shows the service signal flow on station A. Figure 5-3 Bidirectional service on station A TN54TOA 3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4) 7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6) 9(RX7/TX7) 10(RX8/TX8)

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-2 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-2 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-1 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-2 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-2 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2

TN52NQ2 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-2


51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 1(IN1/OUT1)


2(IN2/OUT2)


3(IN3/OUT3)


4(IN4/OUT4)






Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


163



5.3.3 Configuration Process This section describes how to configure the TOA board in ODU0 non-convergence mode.


Tools, Equipment and Materials U2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended)

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Set the Port Working Mode to ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0) for the TOA board. For details, see Configuring the Working Mode. Step 2 Configure the Service Type at the WDM Interface of the TOA according to the service planning. For details, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type. Step 3 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the TOA board for the Any services that are input to the board. NOTE

In this scenario, If you set the Level to ANY, the Service Type must be the same as the Service Type at the WDM interface of the TOA board.

Step 4 Configure electrical cross-connections for the ODU0 services between the TOA and TN52NQ2 boards. 1.

Configure a cross-connection for one ODU0 service between the TOA and TN52NQ2 boards. For details, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections.

2.

Repeat 4.a to configure a cross-connection for the other ODU0 services between the TOA and TN52NQ2 boards.

----End

5.4 Application Scenario 2: ODU1 Non-Convergence Mode When using the ODU1 non-convergence mode, the TOA board performs conversion between eight channels of optical signals with arbitrary bit rates (1.49 Gbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s) and eight channels of ODU1 electrical signals.

5.4.1 Networking Diagram This section describes the networking diagram of TOA board in ODU1 non-convergence mode.

Service Requirement As shown in Figure 5-4, optical NEs A, B, C and D form a ring network, and all the NEs function as OADM stations. The service requirements are as follows: Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


164



l


l


l

At NE A, the TOA board receives eight Any services (1.49 Gbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s) and converts them into eight channels of ODU1 services. The TOA board then transmits the eight ODU1 services to the TN52NQ2 board, where the ODU1 services are converged into two OTU2 services.

Figure 5-4 Networking diagram for the TOA board (ODU1 Non-Convergence Mode) User 1 SLOT 12 SLOT 15 East

TN52NQ2 TN54TOA

West

NMS

User 2

West

East

A D

B C

West


TN52NQ2 TN54TOA

West

East

:OADM


5.4.2 Service Signal Flow This section describes the service signal flow of TOA board in ODU1 non-convergence mode. One OTU2 service is available between station A and station B. Figure 5-5 shows the service signal flow on station A.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


165



Figure 5-5 Bidirectional service on station A TN54TOA

TN52NQ2

3(RX1/TX1)



4(RX2/TX2)



5(RX3/TX3)



6(RX4/TX4)



7(RX5/TX5)



8(RX6/TX6)



9(RX7/TX7)



10(RX8/TX8)




1(IN1/OUT1)


2(IN2/OUT2)


3(IN3/OUT3)


4(IN4/OUT4)


5.4.3 Configuration Process This section describes how to configure the TOA board in ODU1 non-convergence mode.



Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Set the Port Working Mode to ODU1 non-convergence mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1) for the TOA board. For details, see Configuring the Working Mode. Step 2 Configure the Service Type at the WDM Interface of the TOA according to the service planning. For details, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type. Step 3 Configure electrical cross-connections for the ODU1 services between the TOA and TN52NQ2 boards. 1.


2.


----End

5.5 Application Scenario 3: ODU1 Convergence Mode When using the ODU1 convergence mode, the TOA board performs conversion between eight channels of optical signals with arbitrary bit rates (125 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) and eight channels of ODU1 electrical signals. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


166



5.5.1 Networking Diagram This section describes the networking diagram of TOA board in ODU1 convergence mode.

Service Requirement As shown in Figure 5-6, optical NEs A, B, C and D form a ring network, and all the NEs function as OADM stations. The service requirements are as follows: l


l

One bidirectional OTU2 service is available between station A and station B.

l

At NE A, the TOA board receives eight Any services (125 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) and converts them into eight channels of ODU1 services. The TOA board then transmits the eight ODU1 services to the TN52NQ2 board, where the ODU1 services are converged into two OTU2 services.

Figure 5-6 Networking diagram for the TOA board (ODU1 Convergence Mode) User 1 SLOT 12 SLOT 15 East

TN52NQ2 TN54TOA

West

NMS

User 2

West

East

A D

B C

West


TN52NQ2 TN54TOA

West

East

:OADM


5.5.2 Service Signal Flow This section describes the service signal flow of TOA board in ODU1 convergence mode. One OTU2 service is available between station A and station B. Figure 5-7 shows the service signal flow on station A. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


167



Figure 5-7 Bidirectional service on station A TN54TOA 3(RX1/TX1)


8(RX6/TX6)


1(IN1/OUT1)


2(IN2/OUT2)


3(IN3/OUT3)


4(IN4/OUT4)






9(RX7/TX7) 10(RX8/TX8)

71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-1


6(RX4/TX4) 7(RX5/TX5)


4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3)

TN52NQ2



208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-8 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-4


5.5.3 Configuration Process This section describes how to configure the TOA board in ODU1 convergence mode.



Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Set Port Working Mode to ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1) for the TOA board. For details, see Configuring the Working Mode. Step 2 Configure the Service Type at WDM Interface of the TOA according to the service planning. For details, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type. Step 3 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the TOA board for the Any services that are input to the board. NOTE

In this scenario, If you set the Level to ANY, Service Type must be the same as Service Type at WDM interface of the TOA board. To configure an indirect cross-connection between a TX/RX port and a ClientLP port, you must set Port Working Mode of the direct ClientLP port corresponding to the TX/RX port to ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1) or None (not for ports).

Step 4 Configure electrical cross-connections for the ODU1 services between the TOA and TN52NQ2 boards. 1.


2.


----End Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


168



5.6 Application Scenario 4: ODU1_ODU0 Mode In ODU1_ODU0 mode, the TOA board performs conversion between eight channels of OTU1 optical signals and 16 channels of ODU0 electrical signals.

5.6.1 Networking Diagram This section describes the networking diagram of TOA board in ODU0_ODU1 mode.

Service Requirement As shown in Figure 5-8, optical NEs (ONEs) A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the ONEs function as OADM stations. The service requirements are as follows: l


l


l

At NE A, the TOA board receives eight OTU1 services and converts them into 16 ODU0 services. The TOA board then transmits the 16 ODU0 to the TN52NQ2 board, where the ODU0 services are converged into two OTU2 services.

Figure 5-8 Networking diagram for the TOA board (ODU0_ODU1 Mode) User1 SLOT 12 SLOT 15 EAST

TN52NQ2 TN54TOA

WEST

NMS

User2

WEST

EAST

A D

B C


TN52NQ2 TN54TOA

WEST

WEST

EAST

OADM

Board Configuration Information In this example, a TOA board and a TN52NQ2 board must be configured at station A and station B each. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


169



5.6.2 Service Signal Flow This section describes the service signal flow of TOA board in ODU0_ODU1 mode. One OTU2 service is available between station A and station B. The signal flow at station A is as shown inFigure 5-9. Figure 5-9 Signal flow at station A TN54TOA 3(RX1/TX1)

4(RX2/TX2)



9(RX7/TX7)


10(RX8/TX8)


TN52NQ2 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1
















1(IN1/OUT1)


2(IN2/OUT2)


3(IN3/OUT3)


4(IN4/OUT4)




Client-side services WDM-side services Services cross-connection, which nedds to be configured on the NMS Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

5.6.3 Configuration Process This section describes how to configure the TOA board in ODU1_ODU0 mode.



Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Configure the port working modes for the TOA board. Set Port Working Mode to ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0). For details, see Configuring the Working Mode. Step 2 Configure the Service Type at the WDM Interface of the TOA as OTU1 according to the service planning. For details, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type. Step 3 Configure electrical cross-connections for the two ODU0 services between the TOA and TN52NQ2 boards. 1.


2.

Repeat 3.a to configure cross-connection for the other ODU0 service between the TOA and TN52NQ2 boards.

----End Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


170



5.7 Application Scenario 5: ODUflex Non-Convergence Mode When using the ODUflex non-convergence mode, the TOA board performs conversion between four channels of FC400 optical signals and four channels of ODUflex electrical signals or conversion between five channels of 3G-SDI optical signals and five channels of ODUflex electrical signals.

5.7.1 Networking Diagram This section describes the networking diagram of the TOA board in ODUflex mode.

Service Requirement As shown in Figure 5-10, optical NEs A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the NEs function as OADM stations. The service requirements are as follows: l


l

Four bidirectional OTU2 service is available between station A and station B.

l

FC400 services are used as an example. At station A, the TOA board receives four FC400 services and converts them into four ODUflex services. The TOA board then transmits the four ODUflex services to the TN53NQ2 board at station A. Then the TN53NQ2 board converges the four ODUflex services into four OTU2 services.

Figure 5-10 Networking diagram for the TOA board (ODUflex mode) User1 SLOT 12 SLOT 15 EAST

TN53NQ2 TN54TOA

WEST

NMS

User2

WEST

EAST

A D

B C


TN53NQ2 TN54TOA

WEST

WEST

EAST

OADM

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


171



Board Configuration Information In this example, one TOA board and one TN53NQ2 board must be configured at stations A and B each.

5.7.2 Service Signal Flow This section describes the service signal flow of the TOA board in ODUflex mode. One OTU2 service is available between station A and station B. Figure 5-11 shows the service signal flow at station A. Figure 5-11 Bidirectional service at station A TN53NQ2

TN54TOA 3(RX1/TX1)

4(RX2/TX2)



ODUflex-1 ODUflex-2

IN1/OUT1-OCH:1-ODUflex:1

ODUflex-1

ODUflex:1

ODUflex-2

ODUflex:2

ODU2:1

1(IN1/OUT1) OCH:1 2(IN2/OUT2)

ODUflex:1

ODU2:4

OCH:4

ODUflex:2 9(RX7/TX7)


10(RX8/TX8)


ODUflex-1 ODUflex-2 ODUflex-1

Multiplexing Service processing module module IN4/OUT4-OCH:4-ODUflex:2

3(IN3/OUT3)

4(IN4/OUT4)

ODUflex-2

Client-side services WDM-side services Services cross-connection, which nedds to be configured on the NMS Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

5.7.3 Configuration Process This section describes how to configure the TOA board in ODUflex mode.


Precautions After configurate cross-connections for four ODUflex services for the TOA board (service type is FC-400), any cross-connections cannot be configurated for the other ports of the TOA board.


Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Set Port Working Mode to ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex) for the TOA board. For details about the configuration procedure, see Configuring the Working Mode. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


172



Step 2 Set the service type of the ClientLP ports on the TOA board to FC-400 based on the service plan. For details about the configuration procedure, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type. Step 3 Set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign random for the TN53NQ2 board. Choose Configuration > WDM Interface > Advanced Attributes from the Function Tree. In the displayed window, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign random for the required ports. Step 4 Configure cross-connections for the ODUflex services between the TOA and TN53NQ2 boards. 1.

Configure the cross-connection for the first ODUflex service between the TOA and TN53NQ2 boards. The following figure shows the parameters that you need to set. For details about the configuration procedure, see 12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections.

2.

Repeat 4.a to configure cross-connections for the other three ODUflex services between the TOA and TN53NQ2 boards.

----End

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


173


6

6 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

About This Chapter The LOA board can be configured with different port working modes and is applicable to five scenarios accordingly. You need to manually configure the board by station on the NMS for the application scenarios. 6.1 Overview of the Working Mode Each port on the LOA board can work in different modes so that services can be processed on different paths. 6.2 Configuration Procedures Six port working modes are available for the LOA board on the NMS. The port for the None (not for ports) mode does not require configurations. The other five modes require configurations. 6.3 Application Scenario 1: Conversion Between Eight Any Services and One OTU2 Optical Signals (with ODU0 Mapping) This configuration example describes how the LOA board is configured to implement conversion between eight channels of optical signals at any rate from 125 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s and one channel of ODU2 optical signals by means of ODU0 mapping. 6.4 Application Scenario 2: Conversion Between Four Any Services and One OTU2 Optical Signals This configuration example describes how the LOA board is configured to implement conversion between four channels of optical signals at any rate from 1.49 Gbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s and one channel of ODU2 optical signals by means of ODU1 mapping. 6.5 Application Scenario 3: Conversion Between Four OTU1 Services and One OTU2 Optical Signals (with ODU0 Mapping) This configuration example describes how the LOA board is configured to implement conversion between four channels of OTU1 optical signals and one channel of ODU2 optical signals by means of ODU0 mapping. 6.6 Application Scenario 4: Conversion Between Two 3G-SDI Services and One OTU2 Optical Signals Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


174



This configuration example describes how the LOA board is configured to implement conversion between two channels of 3G-SDI optical signals and one channel of ODU2 optical signals by means of ODU0 mapping. 6.7 Application Scenario 5: Conversion Between One FC800 Services and One OTU2 Optical Signals This configuration example describes how the LOA board is configured to implement conversion between one channels of FC800 optical signals and one channel of ODU2 optical signals by means of ODU0 mapping.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


175



6.1 Overview of the Working Mode Each port on the LOA board can work in different modes so that services can be processed on different paths. The LOA board supports six port working modes listed in Table 6-1. You can set the port working modes on the NMS. Table 6-1 Port working modes on the LOA board Port Working Mode

Signal Flow


Any->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2


OTU1/Any->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2

ODU1_ODU0 mode

OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2>OTU2

ODUflex non-convergence mode

Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2


Any->ODU2->OTU2


-

NOTE

l [->ODU1]: indicates that "ODU1" is optional. For example, in ODU0 non-convergence mode, two service signal flows are available: Any->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2 and Any->ODU0->ODU1->ODU2>OTU2. l None (not for ports): indicates that the resources at the port in this mode are not used and are released to other ports.

6.2 Configuration Procedures Six port working modes are available for the LOA board on the NMS. The port for the None (not for ports) mode does not require configurations. The other five modes require configurations.

General Configuration Procedure Figure 6-1 shows the general configuration procedure for the port working modes on the LOA board.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


176



Figure 6-1 General configuration procedure Configure the port working mode

Configure the port type

Configure the timeslot configuration mode


Configure the service mode

Configure crossconnections from the client side to LP ports

Configure ODU0-level cross-connections from LP ports to the WDM side

Mandatory Optional

In the flowchart, the mandatory actions are required for each port working mode and optional actions vary according to port working modes. The optional actions must be configured in the following scenarios: l

Configure the port type: Port Type must be set to Client Side Color Optical Port when colored optical signals are received on the client side.

l

Configure the timeslot configuration mode: ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode must be set for the line side of the LOA board. – When the signal flow is from ODU0 or ODUflex to ODU2, ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode must be set to Assign random. – When the signal flow is ODU0 -> ODU1 -> ODU2, ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode must be set to Assign consecutive. – When the signal flow is from Any or ODU1 to ODU2 directly, ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode can be set to Assign consecutive or Assign random. However, the value must be the same as the value that is set on the interconnected LOA or line board.

l

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Configure the service mode: When Service Type is set to OTU1, Service Mode must be set to OTN Mode. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

177


l


Configure cross-connections from the client side to LP ports: This action is required only for the ODU0 non-convergence mode and ODU1 convergence mode.

The following describes the configuration procedure and involved parameter settings for each mode. l


l


l

Table 6-4 describes the configuration procedure for the ODU1_ODU0 mode.

l

Table 6-5 describes the configuration procedure for the ODUflex non-convergence mode.

l


Configuration Procedure for the ODU0 Non-Convergence Mode Table 6-2 Configuration procedure N o.

Action

Description

1


Optional l Parameter settings: The default value of Port Working Mode is ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[>ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2). If the default value is used, skip this step. l Operation description: For details about the configuration procedure, see Configuring the Working Mode.

2



3


Optional l Parameter settings: The value of ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode varies according to the two signal flows in the ODU0 non-convergence mode. – When the signal flow is Any->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign random. – When the signal flow is Any->ODU0->ODU1->ODU2>OTU2, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign consecutive. l Operation description: In the NE Explorer, select the LOA board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface > Advanced Attributes from the Function Tree. In the displayed window, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode for the WDM side port.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


178



N o.

Action

Description

4


Mandatory l Parameter settings: The available values for Service Type are FE, GE(TTT-AGMP), GE(GFP-T), STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/ OC-12, FC100, ESCON, FICON, FDDI, SDI, and DVB-ASI. l Operation description: For details about the configuration procedure, see Configuring the Service Type. NOTE Two channels (channel 1 and channel 2) are available at each LP port. Set the service type for only one of the two channels. When the LOA board is interconnected with a TN52TOM board, the channel where you set the service type must be the same as the channel where the service type is set on the TN52TOM board. When the LOA board is interconnected with another board, set the service type for channel 1.

5

Configure crossconnections from the client side to LP ports on the LOA board.

Mandatory l Parameter settings: – Level and Service Type: – If you set Service Type to GE in step 4, retain the default value (GE) for Level. – If you set Service Type to a value other than GE in step 4, set Level to Any and then set Service Type to the same value that you set in step 4. – Direction: Set it to Bidirectional. – Source Slot/Sink Slot: Set the two parameters to the ID of the slot where the LOA board is housed. – Source Optical Port: Set it to a port in the range of 3(RX1/ TX1) to 10(RX8/TX8). – Source Optical Channel: Set it to 1. – Sink Optical Port: Set it to a port in the range of 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1) to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8). Ensure that the client-side port matches an LP port. That is, if you set the source optical port to RXi/TXi, set the sink optical port to ClientLPi. – Sink Optical Channel: 1 or 2. Set it to the channel for which you configure the service type in step 4. l Operation description: Configure cross-connections from the client side to each LP port. For details about the configuration procedure, see Creating Cross-Connections.

6

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Configure ODU0level crossconnections from LP ports to the WDM side on the LOA board.

Mandatory l Parameter settings: See Table 6-7. l Operation description: Configure cross-connections from each LP port to the WDM side. For details about the configuration procedure, see Creating Cross-Connections.


179




Action

Description

1


Mandatory l Parameter settings: Set Port Working Mode to ODU1 nonconvergence mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2). l Operation description: For details about the configuration procedure, see Configuring the Working Mode.

2



3

4



Optional l Parameter settings: Set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign consecutive or Assign random. l Operation description: In the NE Explorer, select the LOA board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface > Advanced Attributes from the Function Tree. In the displayed window, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode for the WDM side port. Mandatory l Parameter settings: The available values for Service Type are HD-SDI, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, STM16, or OC-48. l Operation description: For details about the configuration procedure, see Configuring the Service Type.

5


Optional l Parameter settings: The default value of Service Mode is Client Mode. When you set Service Type to OTU1, set Service Mode to OTN Mode. l Operation description: For details about the configuration procedure, see Configuring the Service Mode.

6

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Configure ODUklevel crossconnections from LP ports to the WDM side on the LOA board.



180



Configuration Procedure for the ODU1_ODU0 Mode Table 6-4 Configuration procedure N o.

Action

Description

1


Mandatory l Parameter settings: Set Port Working Mode to ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2>OTU2). l Operation description: For details about the configuration procedure, see Configuring the Working Mode.

2



3


Optional l Parameter settings: The value of ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode varies according to the two signal flows in the ODU1_ODU0 mode. – When the signal flow is OTU1->ODU1->ODU0->ODU2>OTU2, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign random. – When the signal flow is OTU1->ODU1->ODU0->ODU1>ODU2->OTU2, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign consecutive. l Operation description: In the NE Explorer, select the LOA board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface > Advanced Attributes from the Function Tree. In the displayed window, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode for the WDM side port.

4


Mandatory l Parameter settings: The available values for Service Type is OTU1 only. l Operation description: For details about the configuration procedure, see Configuring the Service Type.

5


Mandatory l Parameter settings: Set Service Mode to OTN Mode. l Operation description: For details about the configuration procedure, see Configuring the Service Mode.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


181



N o.

Action

Description

6



Configuration Procedure for the ODUflex Non-Convergence Mode Table 6-5 Configuration procedure N o.

Action

Description

1


Mandatory l Parameter settings: Set Port Working Mode to ODUflex nonconvergence mode (Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2). l Operation description: For details about the configuration procedure, see Configuring the Working Mode. NOTE When the RX1/TX1 port receives the FC800 service, set Port Working Mode to ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex->ODU2>OTU2) only for port LP1. And set Port Working Mode to None (not for ports) for the other seven LP ports.

2



3


Mandatory l Parameter settings: The default value of ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random. If the default value is used, skip this step. l Operation description: In the NE Explorer, select the LOA board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface > Advanced Attributes from the Function Tree. In the displayed window, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign random for the WDM side port.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


182



N o.

Action

Description

4


Mandatory l Parameter settings: The available values for Service Type are 3GSDI, FC-400, or FC-800. FC-800 is only for the RX1/TX1 port. l Operation description: For details about the configuration procedure, see Configuring the Service Type.

5




Action

Description

1


Mandatory l Parameter settings: Before setting Port Working Mode to ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU2->OTU2) for port LP1, set to None (not for ports) for the other seven LP ports. l Operation description: For details about the configuration procedure, see Configuring the Working Mode.

2



3

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


Mandatory l Parameter settings: Set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign random or Assign consecutive. l Operation description: In the NE Explorer, select the LOA board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface > Advanced Attributes from the Function Tree. In the displayed window, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode for the WDM side port.


183



N o.

Action

Description

4


Mandatory l Parameter settings: Set Service Type to FC800 only for the RX1/TX1 port. l Operation description: For details about the configuration procedure, see Configuring the Service Type.

5



Table 6-7 Parameters for configuring ODUk-level cross-connections from LP ports to the WDM side Paramete r

ODU0 NonConvergenc e Mode


ODU1_OD U0 Mode

ODUflex NonConvergenc e Mode


Level

ODU0

ODU1

ODU0

ODUflex

ODU2

Service Type

-

-

-

Custom, PACKET, FC400, FC800, 3GSDI, InfiniBand 2.5G, or CPRI4

-

NOTE For the V100R006C 01 version, only support FC400, FC800, and 3GSDI.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Direction

Bidirectional

Bidirectional

Bidirectional

Bidirectional

Bidirectional

Source Slot/Sink Slot

ID of the slot where the LOA board is housed






184


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


Paramete r



ODU1_OD U0 Mode



Source Optical Port




201 (ClientLP1/ ClientLP1) to 208 (ClientLP8/ ClientLP8)a

201 (ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)


1 or 2

1

1

1

1

Sink Optical Port

1(IN1/ OUT1)

1(IN1/ OUT1)

1(IN1/ OUT1)

1(IN1/ OUT1)

1(IN1/ OUT1)


OCH:1ODU2:1ODU0:1 to OCH:1ODU2:1ODU0:8 or OCH:1ODU2:1ODU1:1ODU0:1 to OCH:1ODU2:1ODU1:1ODU0:8

OCH:1ODU2:1ODU1:1 to OCH:1ODU2:1ODU1:8

OCH:1ODU2:1ODU0:1 to OCH:1ODU2:1ODU0:8 or OCH:1ODU2:1ODU1:1ODU0:1 to OCH:1ODU2:1ODU1:1ODU0:8

OCH:1ODU2:1ODUflex:1a

OCH:1ODU2:1


OCH:1ODU2:1ODUflex:2

185



Paramete r



ODU1_OD U0 Mode



Occupied ODUTUk Slot Count

-

-

-

l The value is 4 when the service type is FC400.

-

l The value is 7 when the service type is FC800. l The value is 3 when the service type is 3GSDI. l The value is 3 when the service type is InfiniBan d 2.5G. l The value is 3 when the service type is CPRI4. l The value needs to be set to 1 to 8 based on the actual service when the service type is Custom or PACKET .

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


186



Paramete r



ODU1_OD U0 Mode



Service Rate(bit/s)

-

-

-

The parameter value is automatically displayed according to the value of Occupied ODUTUk Slot Count.

-

l a: When the LOA board receives FC800 services, set Source Optical Port only to 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1) and Sink Optical Channel only to OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex: 1.

NOTE

To better understand the service signal flow and ports required for configuring cross-connections, see the section "Physical and Logical Ports" for each board in the Hardware Description, where detailed port models and working modes are provided.

6.3 Application Scenario 1: Conversion Between Eight Any Services and One OTU2 Optical Signals (with ODU0 Mapping) This configuration example describes how the LOA board is configured to implement conversion between eight channels of optical signals at any rate from 125 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s and one channel of ODU2 optical signals by means of ODU0 mapping.

6.3.1 Networking Diagram This section describes how to configure the LOA board on a ring network.



l


l

At station A, the LOA board receives eight services at any rate from 125 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s (GE services are used as an example) and converts them into one OTU2 service.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


187



Figure 6-2 Networking diagram for the LOA board (ODU0 Non-Convergence Mode) User 1 LOA

SLOT 15 East

West

NMS

User 2

West

East

A D

B C

West

East SLOT 15

LOA

West

East

:OADM

Board Configuration Information In this example, one LOA board must be configured at stations A and B each.

6.3.2 Service Signal Flow This section describes the service signal flow of the LOA board in ODU0 non-convergence mode. One OTU2 service is available between station A and station B. Figure 6-3 shows the service signal flow (GE->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2) at station A. And Figure 6-4 shows the service signal flow (GE->ODU0->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2) at station A. Figure 6-3 Bidirectional service at station A (GE->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2) Client Side

3(RX1/TX1)-1

WDM Side

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1/ 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1/ 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1

IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1 to 8) ODU0:1

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 4(RX2/TX2)-1

. . . 10(RX8/TX8)-1

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


ODU0:2


. . .

. . . 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1

ODU2:1

OCH:1

IN/OUT

ODU0:8



188



Figure 6-4 Bidirectional service at station A (GE->ODU0->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2) Client Side

WDM Side

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1/ 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1/ 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2

3(RX1/TX1)-1

201(ClientLP/ ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-2

4(RX2/TX2)-1

202(ClientLP2/ ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ ClientLP2)-2

IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1 to 4)-ODU0:(1 to 2) ODU0:1 ODU1:1 ODU0:2

ODU2:1

9(RX7/TX7)-1

10(RX8/TX8)-1


IN/OUT

ODU0:1

207(ClientLP7/ ClientLP7)-2 208(ClientLP8/ ClientLP8)-1

OCH:1

ODU1:4 ODU0:2


6.3.3 Configuration Process This section uses station A as an example to describe the configuration process of the LOA board.



Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Set Port Working Mode to ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2>OTU2) (the default value) for the LOA board. If the default value is used, skip this step. For details about the configuration procedure, see Configuring the Working Mode. Step 2 If the service signal flow is GE->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign random (the default value) for the LOA board. If the service signal flow is GE->ODU0->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign consecutive for the LOA board. If the default value is used, skip this step. To set the parameter, select the LOA board in the NE Explorer and choose Configuration > WDM Interface > Advanced Attributes from the Function Tree. In the displayed window, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign random or Assign consecutive for the "1(IN/ OUT)-OCh:1" port. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


189



Step 3 Set the service type of the ClientLP ports on the LOA board to GE(TTT-AGMP) based on the service plan. For details about the configuration procedure, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type. NOTE

l The GE services that the LOA board supports include GE(GFP-T) and GE(TTT-AGMP). The recommended service type is GE(TTT-AGMP). l Two channels (channel 1 and channel 2) are available at each LP port. You can set the service type for only one of the two channels. When the LOA board is interconnected with a TN52TOM board, the channel where you set the service type must be the same as the channel where the service type is set on the TN52TOM board. When the LOA board is interconnected with another board, set the service type for channel 1.

Step 4 Configure cross-connections from the client side to LP ports on the LOA board. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree. In the displayed window, click New to display the Create CrossConnection Service window. 1.

2.

Configure the cross-connection for the first GE service. See the following table to set the parameters. Parameter

Value

Level

GE

Direction

Bidirectional

Source Slot

Subrack 0(subrack)-15-LOA

Source Optical Port

3(RX1/TX1)


1

Sink Slot


Sink Optical Port



1

Repeat substep a in step 4 to configure cross-connections for the other seven GE services. Retain the same values for the other parameters except Source Optical Port and Sink Optical Port. For each of the remaining seven GE services, set Source Optical Port to a value in the range of 4(RX2/TX2) to 10(RX8/TX8) and Sink Optical Port to a value in the range of 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2) to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8). The sink optical port number must match the source optical port number. That is, if the source optical port is RXi/TXi, the sink optical port must be ClientLPi.

Step 5 Configure ODU0-level cross-connections from LP ports to the WDM side on the LOA board. Perform the following configurations in the Create Cross-Connection Service window. 1. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Configure the first ODU0 cross-connection. See the following table to set the parameters. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

190


2.


Parameter

Value

Level

ODU0

Direction

Bidirectional

Source Slot


Source Optical Port



1

Sink Slot


Sink Optical Port

1(IN1/OUT1)


OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1

Repeat substep a in step 5 to configure the other seven ODU0 cross-connections. Retain the same values for the other parameters except Source Optical Port and Sink Optical Port. For each of the remaining seven ODU0 cross-connections, set Source Optical Port to a value in the range of 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2) to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8) and Sink Optical Port to a value in the range of OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:2 to OCH:1ODU2:1-ODU0:8. The sink optical port number does not need to match the source optical port number.

----End

6.4 Application Scenario 2: Conversion Between Four Any Services and One OTU2 Optical Signals This configuration example describes how the LOA board is configured to implement conversion between four channels of optical signals at any rate from 1.49 Gbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s and one channel of ODU2 optical signals by means of ODU1 mapping.




l


l

At station A, the LOA board receives four services at any rate from 1.49 Gbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s (STM-16 services are used as an example) and converts them into one OTU2 service.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


191




SLOT 15 East

West

NMS

User 2

West

East

A D

B C

West

East SLOT 15

LOA

West

East

:OADM


6.4.2 Service Signal Flow This section describes the service signal flow of the LOA board in ODU1 non-convergence mode. One OTU2 service is available between station A and station B. Figure 6-6 shows the service signal flow (STM-16->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2) at station A. Figure 6-6 Bidirectional service at station A Client Side

3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1

WDM Side IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1 to 4)


ODU1:1


ODU1:2

ODU2:1

9(RX7/TX7)-1 10(RX8/TX8)-1

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


ODU1:3


ODU1:4


OCH:1

IN/OUT

192






Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Set Port Working Mode to ODU1 non-convergence mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->ODU2>OTU2) for the LOA board. For details about the configuration procedure, see Configuring the Working Mode. Step 2 Set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign consecutive. To set the parameter, select the LOA board in the NE Explorer and choose Configuration > WDM Interface > Advanced Attributes from the Function Tree. In the displayed window, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign consecutive for the "1(IN/OUT)-OCh:1" port. Step 3 Set the service type of the ClientLP ports on the LOA board to STM-16 based on the service plan. For details about the configuration procedure, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type. Step 4 Configure ODU1-level cross-connections from LP ports to the WDM side on the LOA board. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree. In the displayed window, click New to display the Create CrossConnection Service window. 1.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Configure the first ODU1 cross-connection. See the following table to set the parameters. Parameter

Value

Level

ODU1

Direction

Bidirectional

Source Slot


Source Optical Port



1

Sink Slot


Sink Optical Port

1(IN1/OUT1)


193


2.


Parameter

Value


OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1

Repeat substep a in step 4 to configure the other three ODU1 cross-connections. Retain the same values for the other parameters except Source Optical Port and Sink Optical Port. For each of the remaining three ODU1 cross-connections, set Source Optical Port to a value in the range of 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2) to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8) and Sink Optical Port to a value in the range of OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 to OCH:1-ODU2:1ODU1:4. The sink optical port number does not need to match the source optical port number.

----End

6.5 Application Scenario 3: Conversion Between Four OTU1 Services and One OTU2 Optical Signals (with ODU0 Mapping) This configuration example describes how the LOA board is configured to implement conversion between four channels of OTU1 optical signals and one channel of ODU2 optical signals by means of ODU0 mapping.




l


l

At station A, the LOA board receives four OTU1 services and converts them into one OTU2 service.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


194



Figure 6-7 Networking diagram for the LOA board (ODU1_ODU0 Mode) User 1 LOA

SLOT 15 East

West

NMS

User 2

West

East

A D

B C

West

East SLOT 15

LOA

West

East

:OADM


6.5.2 Service Signal Flow This section describes the service signal flow of the LOA board in ODU1_ODU0 mode. One OTU2 service is available between station A and station B. Figure 6-8 shows the service signal flow (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2) at station A. Figure 6-8 Bidirectional service at station A Client side

3(RX1/TX1)-1

4(RX2/TX2)-1

10(RX8/TX8)-1

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)~ IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0(1~8) 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8) 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-1 ODU0:1 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-2

ODU0:2


ODU0:3


ODU0:4

ODU2:1

208(ClientLP8 /ClientLP8)-1

ODU0:7

208(ClientLP8 /ClientLP8)-2

ODU0:8


OCH:1

WDM side

IN/OUT

195






Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Set Port Working Mode to ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[->ODU1]>ODU2->OTU2) for the LOA board. For details about the configuration procedure, see Configuring the Working Mode. Step 2 Set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign random (the default value) for the LOA board. If the default value is used, skip this step. To set the parameter, select the LOA board in the NE Explorer and choose Configuration > WDM Interface > Advanced Attributes from the Function Tree. In the displayed window, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign random for the "1(IN/OUT)-OCh:1" port. Step 3 Set the service type of the ClientLP ports on the LOA board to OTU1 based on the service plan. For details about the configuration procedure, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type. Step 4 Set the client ports of the LOA board Service Mode to OTN Mode. For details about the configuration procedure, see Configuring the Service Mode. Step 5 Configure ODU0-level cross-connections from LP ports to the WDM side on the LOA board. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree. In the displayed window, click New to display the Create CrossConnection Service window. 1.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Configure the first ODU0 cross-connection. See the following table to set the parameters. Parameter

Value

Level

ODU0

Direction

Bidirectional

Source Slot


Source Optical Port



1


196


2.


Parameter

Value

Sink Slot


Sink Optical Port

1(IN1/OUT1)


OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1

Repeat substep a in step 5 to configure the other seven ODU0 cross-connections. Retain the same values for the other parameters except Source Optical Port and Sink Optical Port. For each of the remaining seven ODU0 cross-connections, set Source Optical Port to a value in the range of 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2) to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8) and Sink Optical Port to a value in the range of OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:2 to OCH:1ODU2:1-ODU0:8. The sink optical port number does not need to match the source optical port number.

----End

6.6 Application Scenario 4: Conversion Between Two 3GSDI Services and One OTU2 Optical Signals This configuration example describes how the LOA board is configured to implement conversion between two channels of 3G-SDI optical signals and one channel of ODU2 optical signals by means of ODU0 mapping.




l


l

At station A, the LOA board can receives two 3G-SDI or FC400 services, or receives one FC800 service and converts them into one OTU2 service. 3G-SDI services are used as an example.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


197



Figure 6-9 Networking diagram for the LOA board (ODUflex Non-Convergence Mode) User 1 LOA

SLOT 15 East

West

NMS

User 2

West

East

A D

B C

West

East SLOT 15

LOA

West

East

:OADM


6.6.2 Service Signal Flow This section describes the service signal flow of the LOA board in ODUflex non-convergence mode. One OTU2 service is available between station A and station B. Figure 6-10 shows the service signal flow (3G-SDI->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2) at station A. Figure 6-10 Bidirectional service at station A Client Side

3(RX1/TX1)-1

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) to 208(ClientLP2/ClientLP8) 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-1

WDM Side IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1 to 2)

ODUflex:1 ODU2:1

10(RX8/TX8)-1

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


OCH:1

IN/OUT

ODUflex:2


198






Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Set Port Working Mode to ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex->ODU2>OTU2) for the LOA board. For details about the configuration procedure, see Configuring the Working Mode. Step 2 Set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign random (the default value) for the LOA board. If the default value is used, skip this step. To set the parameter, select the LOA board in the NE Explorer and choose Configuration > WDM Interface > Advanced Attributes from the Function Tree. In the displayed window, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign random for the "1(IN/OUT)-OCh:1" port. Step 3 Set the service type of the ClientLP ports on the LOA board to 3GSDI based on the service plan. For details about the configuration procedure, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type. Step 4 Set ODUflex Tolerance (ppm) to 10. To set the parameter, select the LOA board in the NE Explorer and choose Configuration > WDM Interface > Advanced Attributes from the Function Tree. In the displayed window, set ODUflex Tolerance (ppm) to 10 for the ODUflex port. Step 5 Configure ODUflex-level cross-connections from LP ports to the WDM side on the LOA board. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree. In the displayed window, click New to display the Create CrossConnection Service window. 1.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Configure the first ODUflex cross-connection. See the following table to set the parameters. Parameter

Value

Level

ODUflex

Service Type

3GSDI

Direction

Bidirectional

Source Slot

Subrack 0(subrack)-7-11LOA

Source Optical Port



199


2.


Parameter

Value


1

Sink Slot


Sink Optical Port

1(IN/OUT)


Och:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1

Repeat substep a in step 5 to configure the other ODUflex cross-connection. Retain the same values for the other parameters except Source Optical Port and Sink Optical Port. For the other ODUflex cross-connection, set Source Optical Port to a value in the range of 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2) to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8) and Sink Optical Port to OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2. The sink optical port number does not need to match the source optical port number.

----End

6.7 Application Scenario 5: Conversion Between One FC800 Services and One OTU2 Optical Signals This configuration example describes how the LOA board is configured to implement conversion between one channels of FC800 optical signals and one channel of ODU2 optical signals by means of ODU0 mapping.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


200






l


l

At station A, the LOA board receives one FC800 service and converts the service into one OTU2 service.


SLOT 15 East

West

NMS

User 2

West

East

A D

B C

West

East SLOT 15

LOA

West

East

:OADM


6.7.2 Service Signal Flow This section describes the service signal flow of the LOA board in ODU2 non-convergence mode. One OTU2 service is available between station A and station B. Figure 6-12 shows the service signal flow (FC800->ODU2->OTU2) at station A. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


201



Figure 6-12 Bidirectional service at station A WDM Side

Client Side

3(RX1/TX1)-1

IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1


ODU2:1

OCH:1

IN/OUT




Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Set Port Working Mode to None (not for ports) for the 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2) to 208 (ClientLP8/ClientLP8) ports and then set the parameter to ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU2->OTU2) for the 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) port. For details about the configuration procedure, see Configuring the Working Mode. Step 2 Set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign random (the default value) for the LOA board. If the default value is used, skip this step. To set the parameter, select the LOA board in the NE Explorer and choose Configuration > WDM Interface > Advanced Attributes from the Function Tree. In the displayed window, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign random for the "1(IN/OUT)-OCh:1" port. Step 3 Set the service type of the ClientLP ports on the LOA board to FC-800 based on the service plan. For details about the configuration procedure, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type. Step 4 Configure ODU2-level cross-connections from LP ports to the WDM side on the LOA board. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree. In the displayed window, click New to display the Create CrossConnection Service window. 1. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Configure one ODU2 cross-connection. See the following table to set the parameters. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

202



Parameter

Value

Level

ODU2

Direction

Bidirectional

Source Slot


Source Optical Port



1

Sink Slot


Sink Optical Port

1(IN/OUT)


Och:1-ODU2:1

----End

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


203


7

7 Configuring WDM Services (by Station Service Package)

Configuring WDM Services (by Station Service Package)

About This Chapter This chapter describes how to configure the TN52TOM, THA/TOA, and LOA boards in station service package mode to achieve one-click configuration. In station service package mode, multiple configurations such as configuring port working modes and service types are performed on a single NMS GUI, facilitating operations and improving configuration efficiency. The station service package mode is applicable only to some fixed scenarios. NOTE

You can also configure the TN52TOM, THA/TOA, and LOA boards in manual station mode. In this mode, you need to perform various operations such as configuring port working modes and service types on multiple NMS GUIs. The configuration process is complex but applicable to various scenarios. For details about the manual station mode, see the related sections for manually configuring the TN52TOM, THA/ TOA, and LOA boards by station.

7.1 Overview of the Service Packages Service packages enable one-click configuration of typical services by issuing multiple configuration commands in batches, facilitating product deployment commissioning and reducing maintenance costs. The configuration commands include commands for configuring working modes, service types, cross-connections, and port types. Configuration contents vary according to boards and service packages. Currently, service packages are available to the TN52TOM, THA/TOA, and LOA boards. 7.2 Configuring Service Packages You can configure service packages for multiple boards in batches or configure the service package for each board separately.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


204



7.1 Overview of the Service Packages Service packages enable one-click configuration of typical services by issuing multiple configuration commands in batches, facilitating product deployment commissioning and reducing maintenance costs. The configuration commands include commands for configuring working modes, service types, cross-connections, and port types. Configuration contents vary according to boards and service packages. Currently, service packages are available to the TN52TOM, THA/TOA, and LOA boards.

7.1.1 Service Packages for the TN52TOM Board Configuration contents vary according to service packages. Table 7-1 lists the service packages for the TN52TOM board and the corresponding configuration contents. Table 7-1 Service packages for the TN52TOM board and the corresponding configuration contents

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Service Package Name

Board Working Mode

Port Working Mode

Service Type

Port Type

CrossConnectio n Configurat ion

Tributary 4*STM-16/ OC48>4*ODU1

NonCascading mode

Port Working Mode is set to ODU1 Mode (OTU1/ Any>ODU1) for ports ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5, and ClientLP7.

Service Type is set to STM-16/ OC48 for channel 1 of ports ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5, and ClientLP7.

-

Bidirectional ANY-level crossconnections are configured between ports from RX1/TX1 to RX4/TX4 and channel 1 of ports ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5, and ClientLP7.


205




Board Working Mode

Port Working Mode

Service Type

Port Type


Tributary 8*GE>8*ODU0

NonCascading mode

Port Working Mode is set to ODU0 Mode (Any>ODU0[>ODU1]) for ports ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5, and ClientLP7.

Service Type is set to GE for channel 1 of ports from ClientLP1 to ClientLP8.

-

l Bidirecti onal GElevel crossconnectio ns are configure d between ports RX1/ TX1, RX3/ TX3, RX5/ TX5, and RX7/ TX7 and channel 1 of ports ClientLP 1, ClientLP 3, ClientLP 5, and ClientLP 7. l Bidirecti onal GElevel crossconnectio ns are configure d between ports RX2/ TX2, RX4/ TX4, RX6/ TX6, and RX8/ TX8 and

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


206




Board Working Mode

Port Working Mode

Service Type

Port Type

CrossConnectio n Configurat ion channel 2 of ports ClientLP 2, ClientLP 4, ClientLP 6, and ClientLP 8.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


207




Board Working Mode

Port Working Mode

Service Type

Port Type


Tributary line 7*STM-1/ OC3>ODU1

Cascading mode

Port Working Mode is set to ODU1 tributaryline (OTU1/ Any>ODU1>OTU1) for port ClientLP1.

Service Type is set to STM-1/ OC3 for channels 1 to 4 of port ClientLP1.

Port Type is set to Line Side Color Optical Port for port RX8/TX8.

l Bidirecti onal ANYlevel crossconnectio ns are configure d between ports from RX1/ TX1 to RX7/ TX7 and channels 1 to 7 of port ClientLP 1. l Bidirecti onal OTU1level crossconnectio ns are configure d between port RX8/ TX8 and channel 1 of port ODU1LP 1.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


208




Board Working Mode

Port Working Mode

Service Type

Port Type


Tributary line 7*FE>ODU0

Cascading mode

Port Working Mode is set to ODU0 tributaryline (Any>ODU0>ODU1>OTU1) for port ClientLP1.

l Service Type is set to FE for channels 1 to 4 of port ClientLP 1 and channels 5 to 7 for port ClientLP 2.

Port Type is set to Line Side Color Optical Port for port RX8/TX8.

l Bidirecti onal ANYlevel crossconnectio ns are configure d between ports from RX1/ TX1 to RX7/ TX7 and channels 1 to 4 of port ClientLP 1 and channels 5 to 7 of port ClientLP 2. l Bidirecti onal OTU1level crossconnectio ns are configure d between port RX8/ TX8 and channel 1 of port ODU1LP 1.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


209




Board Working Mode

Port Working Mode

Service Type

Port Type


4*OTU1 REG

NonCascading mode

Port Working Mode is set to ODU1 tributaryline (OTU1/ Any>ODU1>OTU1) for ports ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5, and ClientLP7.

Service Type is set to OTU1 for channel 1 of ports ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5, and ClientLP7.

Port Type is set to Line Side Color Optical Port for ports from RX5/TX5 to RX8/TX8.

l Bidirecti onal OTU1level crossconnectio ns are configure d between ports from RX1/ TX1 to RX4/ TX4 and channel 1 of ports ClientLP 1, ClientLP 3, ClientLP 5, and ClientLP 7. l Bidirecti onal OTU1level crossconnectio ns are configure d between ports from RX5/ TX5 to RX8/ TX8 and channel 1 of ports from ODU1LP

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


210




Board Working Mode

Port Working Mode

Service Type

Port Type

CrossConnectio n Configurat ion 1 to ODU1LP 4.

Tributary 4*OTU1>ODU1 (reencapsulated into ODU0)

NonCascading mode

Port Working Mode is set to ODU1_AN Y_ODU0_O DU1 reencapsulati on tributaryline mode (OTU1>ODU1>Any>ODU0>ODU1>OTU1) for ports ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5, and ClientLP7.

Service Type is set to OTU1 for channel 1 of ports ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5, and ClientLP7.

-

Bidirectional OTU1-level crossconnections are configured between ports from RX1/TX1 to RX4/TX4 and channel 1 of ports ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5, and ClientLP7.

7.1.2 Service Packages for the THA/TOA Board Configuration contents vary according to service packages. Table 7-2 lists the service packages for the TOA board and the corresponding configuration contents. Table 7-2 Service packages for the TOA board and the corresponding configuration contents

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


Port Working Mode

Service Type

8*GE->8*ODU0

Port Working Mode is set to ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0) for ports from ClientLP1 to ClientLP8.

Service Type is set to GE for ports from ClientLP1 to ClientLP8.


211




Port Working Mode

Service Type

8*STM-16/OC48>4*ODU1


Service Type is set to STM-16/OC48 for ports from ClientLP1 to ClientLP8.

Table 7-3 lists the service packages for the THA board and the corresponding configuration contents. Table 7-3 Service packages for the THA board and the corresponding configuration contents Service Package Name

Port Working Mode

Service Type

16*GE->16*ODU0



16*STM-16/OC48>8*ODU1


Service Type is set to STM-16/OC48 for ports from ClientLP1 to ClientLP16.

7.1.3 Service Packages for the LOA Board The LOA board supports only one service package (8 x GE->8 x ODU0). The configuration contents of the service package include port working modes, service types, ODU timeslot configuration modes, and cross-connections from the client side to LP ports, and crossconnections from the LP ports to the WDM side. Table 7-4 lists the service packages for the LOA board and the corresponding configuration contents.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


212



Table 7-4 Service packages for the LOA board and the corresponding configuration contents Service Package Name

Port Working Mode

Service Type

ODU Timeslot Configurati on Mode

CrossConnection s from the Client Side to LP Ports

CrossConnection s from the LP ports to the WDM side

8*GE>8*ODU0

Port Working Mode is set to ODU0 nonconvergence mode (Any>ODU0) for ports from ClientLP1 to ClientLP8.


ODU Timeslot Configurati on Mode is set to Assign random for WDM side ports IN/ OUT-OCH: 1.

Bidirectional GE-level crossconnections are configured between ports from RX1/TX1 to RX8/TX8 and channel 1 at each port from ClientLP1 to ClientLP8.

Bidirectional ODU0-level crossconnections are configured between ports from OCH:1ODU2:1ODU0:1 to OCH:1ODU2:1ODU0:8 and channel 1 at each port from ClientLP1 to ClientLP8.

7.2 Configuring Service Packages You can configure service packages for multiple boards in batches or configure the service package for each board separately.

Prerequisite l

You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher.

l

The boards that support service packages must be created.

l

No cross-connection or protection is configured on the board.

l

Port Type is not set to Line Side Color Optical Port for the port in tributary-line integrated mode on the TN52TOM board.

l

Existing services on a board will be interrupted if you configure service packages on the board.

l

After a service package is configured for a board, you can change the working mode, service type, and cross-connections at a port as required. After the change, the configurations on the board will be different from the fixed configuration contents of the service package.

Precautions

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


213



Configuration Process Figure 7-1 Service package configuration process Start

Are cross-connections and protection configured for the board?

No

Yes Delete cross-connections and protection configured on the board

Select the required service package

Configure WDM services in one-click mode using the service package

Are the configurations successful?

No

Yes End

NOTE

The following describes how to configure a service package in two modes.

NE Batch Configuration This mode helps you configure service packages for all involved boards in batches on the NMS. Step 1 Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Batch Service Package Configuration from the main menu. Step 2 In the Batch Service Package Configuration window, click the Board Type drop-down list to select the required board type.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


214



Step 3 In the Service Package window, select the name of the service package that you want to configure and click Apply To.... In the Select Board dialog box that is displayed, all subnets containing the selected board type are displayed. Select the boards where you want to configure the service package and click OK.

TIP

To configure service packages for all boards on the NMS, click the Physical Root check box. TIP

When configuring service packages, you can choose whether creating cross-connection or not.

Step 4 Click OK in the Confirm dialog box that is displayed asking you "Board services will be interrupted if you configure a service package. Are you sure you want to continue?" The Confirm dialog box will be displayed again for confirmation. Click OK.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


215



Step 5 The Configuring Service Package for Boards dialog box is displayed to show the operation progress. After the operation is completed, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. ----End

Separate Board Configuration This mode helps you to configure a service package for a separate board. Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the required board and choose Configuration > Service Package from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select a service package from Service Package on the right and click Apply. Step 3 Click OK in the Confirm dialog box that is displayed asking you "Board services will be interrupted if you configure a service package. Are you sure you want to continue?" The Confirm dialog box will be displayed again for confirmation. Click OK. Step 4 The Configuring Service Package for Boards dialog box is displayed to show the operation progress. After the operation is completed, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. ----End

Operation Result l

If "Operation succeeded" is displayed in the Operation Result dialog box, click Close to complete the operation.

l

If "Operation failed" or "Operation partially succeeded" is displayed in the Operation Result dialog box, click Details to view the cause. The possible causes are listed in the following table. Handle the problem based on the displayed cause. Cause

Solution

Cross connection already exists

Delete all cross-connections on the board corresponding to the value of Object.

Invalid port type

Change the port type of all ports on the board corresponding to the value of Object to client-side ports.

Configuration Verification After a service package is completed, verify that the service package is successfully configured. Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the board where the service package is configured and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Verify that the value of Service Type is correctly set for the required ports according to the configured service package. Step 2 In the NE Explorer, select the board where the service package is configured and choose Configuration > Working Mode from the Function Tree. Verify that the values of Board Working Mode and Port Working Mode are correctly set according to the configured service package. NOTE

Verify the value of Board Working Mode only for the TN52TOM board.

Step 3 If the board is TN52TOM, select the required NE in the NE Explorer and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree. Click the WDM CrossIssue 02 (2011-10-31)


216



Connection Configuration tab and verify that the WDM cross-connections are correctly configured according to the configured service package. Step 4 If the board is TN52TOM and the configured service package is Tributary line 7*STM-1/OC3>ODU1, Tributary line 7*FE->ODU0, or 4*OTU1 REG, select the NE where the service package is configured in the Main Topology. Double-click the NE icon to open the NE panel. In the NE panel, select and right-click the required board, and then choose Path View from the shortcut menu that is displayed. Right-click the required port and choose Modify Port from the shortcut menu that is displayed. Verify that the value of Type is correctly set according to the configured service package. ----End

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


217


8


Configuring WDM Services (by Trail)

About This Chapter You can configure WDM services in end-to-end mode by searching for trails and creating trails at different layers. In addition, the NMS provides the signal flow diagram that visually displays the signal flow and the transmission media layer route of trails. This facilitates operations and improves the maintenance efficiency. 8.1 WDM Trail The concept, type, and relevant information about trails are described here. 8.2 Creating OCh Trails by Trail Search After you create fiber connections and configure services for WDM equipment on the U2000, the trail information does not exist in the network layer of the U2000. To manage OCh trails, you need to search for the data of cross-connections and fiber connections over the network to generate end-to-end WDM trails at the network layer of the U2000. 8.3 Configuration Example After you create fibers and configure services for WDM equipment on the U2000, the trail information does not exist in the network layer of the U2000. To manage WDM trails, you need to search for the data of cross-connections and fiber connections over the network to generate end-to-end WDM trails at the network layer of the U2000. 8.4 Parameters: End to End Service Configuration In this user interface, you can configure WDM trails.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


218



8.1 WDM Trail The concept, type, and relevant information about trails are described here. Currently, the NMS provides the following OTN trail modules that comply with ITU-T G.872: l

Client trail

l

ODUk trail: optical channel data unit (ODUk) trail

l

OTUk trail: optical channel transport unit (OTUk) trail

l

OCh trail: optical channel trail

l

OMS trail: optical multiplexing section trail

l

OTS trail: optical transmission section trail

l

OSC trail: optical supervisory channel (OSC) trail

l

The first six types are related to services, and the OSC trail is related to supervisory signals.

l

The OTS trail cannot be deleted from the NMS. You must delete the fiber connection before deleting the OTS trail.

l

The rate level varies with the value of "k" in ODUk/OTUk. For details, see Table 8-1. ODU5G/OTU5G is a level customized by Huawei.

Table 8-1 ODUk rate level Trail Level

Rate (Gbit/s)

ODU0

1.25

ODU1/OTU1

2.5

ODU5G/OTU5G

5

ODU2/OTU2

10

ODU3/OTU3

40

ODUflex

1.25 to 10 (n x 1.25)

Trail Module Figure 8-1 and Figure 8-2 illustrate the relationship and location of the trails.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


219



Figure 8-1 Trail Client ODUk OTUk OCh OMS OTS

:OTU

:MUX

:DMUX

:OA

NOTE

In the case of the NG WDM equipment, an OMS trail terminates at the MUX and DMUX cards.

Figure 8-2 OSC Trail OSC Trail

TM

RM

OTM

:OSC

OSC Trail

TM

RM

OLA

OTM

:FIU

ODUk Trail Different from other trails, an ODUk/OTUk sets the source and sink at the internal ports of an OTU card, a tributary card or a line card. Figure 8-3 displays a typical ODUk trail module whose source and sink are set on the internal ports of tributary ports or of line cards.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


220



Figure 8-3 ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, ...) trail TQS STM-16

NS2

ODU0

LP1

RX1

NS2

ODU1

O D U 1

O D U 2

O T U 2

OUT

O T U 2

IN

TQS

ODU1

LP1

O D U 2

O D U 1

ODU0

STM-16 TX1

OCh Trail OTU2 Trail ODU2 Trail ODU1 Trail ODU0 Trail Client Trail

Electrical Signal Optical Signal

In the case of the client-side service whose rate is less than 1.25 Gbit/s, an ODU0 trail is added, as shown in Figure 8-4. Figure 8-4 ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, ...) trail 52NS2

52TOM GE

ODU0

RX1

LP1

ODU1

O D U 1

O D U 2

O T U 2

52TOM

52NS2

OUT

IN

O T U 2

ODU1

LP1

O D U 2

O D U 1

GE

ODU0

TX1

OCh Trail OTU2 Trail ODU2 Trail ODU1 Trail ODU0 Trail Client Trail

Electrical Signal Optical Signal

NOTE

The service rate of an ODUflex is in the range of 1.25 Gbit/s to 10 Gbit/s. Therefore, an ODUflex trail is a trail ranging from ODU0 to ODU2.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


221



Inverse Multiplexing Trail The rate of the client layer of an inverse multiplexing trail is greater than the rate of the server layer. Hence, an inverse multiplexing client trail needs multiple trails to serve as its server layer. Currently, you can only search for an inverse multiplexing trail, but you cannot create an endto-end inverse multiplexing trail. An inverse multiplexing client trail can take an ODU1 or ODU2 trail as the server trail. That is, an inverse multiplexing client trail cannot take ODU1 and ODU2 trails as the server trails at the same time.

40G inverse multiplexing trail model The transmission rate of a single wavelength is 40G, but a single wavelength cannot be used for long-distance transmission due to an optical layer index (such as dispersion) restriction. In a 40G inverse multiplexing transmission scheme, a 40G signal is converted to four 10G ODU2 signals, each of which uses one wavelength. This is equal to four 10G signals on the line side and lowers the optical layer index requirement. Figure 8-5 shows the inverse multiplexing trail model of the TSXL card. You cannot dynamically adjust the bandwidth of STM-256 or OC768 services whose rate is 40G. Hence, you can search for a client trail only after you configure four ODU2 trails. If you configure only one, two or three ODU2 trails, services are unavailable and you fail to search for the client trail. Figure 8-5 40G Inverse Multiplexing Trail

10G Inverse Multiplexing Trail Model The TDX card is a 10G inverse multiplexing tributary card that has two individual transmission paths. Each path inversely multiplexes a 10G service to multiple ODU1 signals, which are crossconnected to a line card for transmission. The 10G service uses any or all of the four ODU1 signals according to bandwidth status. When the 10G service does not use all of the four ODU1 signals, the 10G service share an ODU2 trail with other ODU1 signals. This saves line resources. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


222



Figure 8-6 shows the inverse multiplexing trail model of the IP3 port on the TDX card. A 10G service is an Ethernet service for which you can dynamically adjust bandwidth. The server layer allows one, two, three or four ODU1 trails. Hence, the client trail that you search out is of different rate levels. Figure 8-6 10G inverse multiplexing trail

8.2 Creating OCh Trails by Trail Search After you create fiber connections and configure services for WDM equipment on the U2000, the trail information does not exist in the network layer of the U2000. To manage OCh trails, you need to search for the data of cross-connections and fiber connections over the network to generate end-to-end WDM trails at the network layer of the U2000.

Prerequisite l

You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher.

l

Fiber connections must be created correctly for the WDM equipment.

l

If certain cross-connections exist, you can create an optical-layer trail by using any of the following methods:

Precautions

– Delete the original cross-connection and create the optical-layer trail by using the trail function. This method affects services. – Complement cross-connections on NEs and search for the trail. l

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

You can create only single-NE optical cross-connections from the AM port to the OUT port of the RMU9 board, from the IN port to the DM port of the RDU9 board, from the AM port to the OUT port of the WSMD4/WSMD2 board and from the IN port to the DM port of the WSMD4/WSMD2 board. In this case, the board optical cross-connection is not supported. These single-NE optical cross-connections do not affect services. You need to create such single-NE optical cross-connections and search for trails if you want to manage the services transmitted in the cross-connections by using the trail management function. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

223



Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000

Procedure on the U2000 Step 1 In the Main Topology view, choose Service > WDM Trail > Search for WDM Trail from the Main Menu. Step 2 Under Advanced settings, set the search policies. NOTE

In the mode of searching by subnet, the selected subnet range must be independent from the networking aspect. That is, no fiber connection exists between the selected subnet range and the area that is beyond the selected subnet range.

Step 3 Click Next to begin to search for trails. The U2000 takes some time to return the results, depending on the number of services. NOTE

l If there are cross-connections that are collisions and these cross-connections cannot form end to end trails, the U2000 shows the conflicting trails after you perform the search operation. l The principles of verifying a conflict trail are as follows: The networking changes. The trail may cause interruption of service flow. For example, the key information of the trail, including deleting a crossconnection or fiber, is verified.

Step 4 Optional: Click Next to view the conflicting trail information. If you want to set a trail management flag, check the Management Flag check box or right-click it and select the management flag. NOTE

Skip this step if the policy of automatically creating trails after searching is selected in Step 2.

Step 5 Click Next to view all discrete services in the network. NOTE

If Step 4 is executed, the U2000 deletes trails that do not have the management flag from the network layer. This does not affect services of the actual NE or the data of an individual NE on the U2000.

Step 6 After the search is complete, click Finish. ----End

Follow-up Procedure Step 1 In the Main Topology view, choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu. Step 2 On the Basic Settings tab, select the level of the service being queried for Level. Step 3 Optional: On the Subnet Settings tab, select the subnet being queried. Step 4 Click Filter All. In Manage WDM Trail, check whether the trails on the subnet being queried are consistent with the network design. ----End Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


224



8.3 Configuration Example After you create fibers and configure services for WDM equipment on the U2000, the trail information does not exist in the network layer of the U2000. To manage WDM trails, you need to search for the data of cross-connections and fiber connections over the network to generate end-to-end WDM trails at the network layer of the U2000.

8.3.1 Configuration Networking Diagram This section describes how to configure end-to-end GE services on a ring network.

Service Requirements On the network shown in Figure 8-7, ONEs A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the NEs function as OADM stations. The service requirements are as follows: l

User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One bidirectional OTN service is configured between station A and station C.

l

One GE service is added and dropped for User1 and User2 each.

l

ODUk SNCP protection is configured.

Figure 8-7 Network diagram of end-to-end services User1

E

W 16NQ2 04NQ2

21-TOM 04- 16NQ2 NQ2

W

NMS

E 04NQ2 16NQ2

A D

B C

W

E

Working service route

W

Protection service route

16- 04NQ2 NQ2 21-TOM

E

OADM User2

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


225



Boards Configured Two NQ2 boards and one TOM board must be configured at stations A and C each. Two NQ2 boards must be configured at stations B and D each.

8.3.2 Service Signal Flow This section describes the service signal flow of end-to-end GE services. One OTN service is configured between NEs A and C. Figure 8-8 shows the service signal flow between station A and station C. Figure 8-8 Unidirectional service at each station TOM 3(RX1/TX1)

NQ2 51(ODU1L P/ODU1LP)

201(ClientLP1/Cli entLP1)-1

4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 7(RX5/TX5)


8(RX6/TX6) 9(RX7/TX7)


10(RX8/TX8)

1(IN1/ OUT1)

72(ODU2L P/ODU2LP)

2(IN2/ OUT2)

53(ODU1L P/ODU1LP)

73(ODU2L P/ODU2LP)

3(IN2/ OUT2)

54(ODU1L P/ODU1LP)

74(ODU2L P/ODU2LP)

4(IN2/ OUT2)

52(ODU1L P/ODU1LP)


6(RX4/TX4)

71(ODU2L P/ODU2LP)

A NQ2

NQ2 51(ODU1L P/ODU1LP)

51(ODU1L P/ODU1LP)

52(ODU1L P/ODU1LP)

52(ODU1L P/ODU1LP)

73(ODU2L P/ODU2LP)

53(ODU1L P/ODU1LP)

74(ODU2L P/ODU2LP)

54(ODU1L P/ODU1LP)

1(IN1/ OUT1)

71(ODU2L P/ODU2LP)

2(IN2/ OUT2)

72(ODU2L P/ODU2LP)

3(IN2/ OUT2) 4(IN2/ OUT2)

71(ODU2L P/ODU2LP)

1(IN1/ OUT1)

72(ODU2L P/ODU2LP)

2(IN2/ OUT2)

53(ODU1L P/ODU1LP)

73(ODU2L P/ODU2LP)

3(IN2/ OUT2)

54(ODU1L P/ODU1LP)

74(ODU2L P/ODU2LP)

4(IN2/ OUT2)

B NQ2 1(IN1/ OUT1)

71(ODU2L P/ODU2LP)

2(IN2/ OUT2)

72(ODU2L P/ODU2LP)

3(IN2/ OUT2)

73(ODU2L P/ODU2LP)

4(IN2/ OUT2)

74(ODU2L P/ODU2LP)

TOM 51(ODU1L P/ODU1LP)


3(RX1/TX1)

52(ODU1L P/ODU1LP)


5(RX3/TX3)

53(ODU1L P/ODU1LP)


7(RX5/TX5)

54(ODU1L P/ODU1LP)


9(RX7/TX7)

4(RX2/TX2) 6(RX4/TX4) 8(RX6/TX6) 10(RX8/TX8)

C

:Client-side services

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

:WDM-side services


:Vritual channel

226


l


At station A: Use the Rx1/Tx1 optical port on the TN52TOM board at station A to add a service.

l

At station C: Use the Rx1/Tx1 optical port on the TN52TOM board at station C to drop a service.

8.3.3 Configuration Process After searching for the relevant trail information on the U2000, you can create OCh, ODUk, or client trails by specifying the sources and sinks of the trails. This section describes how to configure an end-to-end GE service between NEs A and C.

Prerequisite l

You must be an NM user with "NE administrator" authority or higher.

l

A license for trail management must be available.

l

The OCh server trail must be searched out.

l

The physical and logical fiber connections between and inside all relevant stations must be established correctly.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000

Precautions NOTE

The value of TN52TOM Board Mode is NON-Cascading mode by default. In this case, the 201 (ClientLP1/ ClientLP1) and 205(ClientLP5/ ClientLP5) ports can access a maximum of four services, and the 203 (ClientLP3/ ClientLP3) and 207 (ClientLP7/ ClientLP7) ports can access a maximum of two services. NOTE

A ClientLP port can access only one service that has a rate higher than 1.25 Gbit/s, and this service can be configured in only the first channel of the ClientLP port. The total rate of services accessed by a ClientLP port must be equal to or lower than 2.5 Gbit/s. The client-side eight pairs of optical ports can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s. The client-side ports can be grouped as required.

Background Information ODUk SNCP is classified into three types: SNC/I, SNC/N, and SNC/S. The difference among the three types is that they have different monitoring abilities and therefore are triggered by different conditions. l

SNC/I (inherent monitoring): inherent monitoring; the trigger condition is the state of overheads in the SM section. When there is neither need for ODU end to end protection nor need for TCM subnet application, select SNC/I.

l

SNC/S (sub-layer monitoring): sub-layer monitoring; the trigger condition is the state of overheads in the SM and TCM sections. When there is no need for ODU end to end protection but there is need for TCM subnet application, select SNC/S.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


227


l


SNC/N (non-intrusive monitoring): non-intrusive monitoring; the trigger condition is the state of overheads in the SM, TCM or PM sections. When there is need for ODU end to end protection, select SNC/N.

For details on ODUk SNCP protection, see the Feature Description.

Procedure on the U2000 Step 1 Configure board attributes. 1.

Configure port attributes of the TN52TOM boards in slot 21 at stations A and C. l Set Board Working mode to Non-cascading. For details, see Configuring the Working Mode. l Set Service Type of TOM-201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP)-1 to GE. For details, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type.

2.

Configure port attributes of the NQ2 boards in slots 4 and 16 at stations A, B, C, and D. l Set Configuring Non-Intrusive Monitoring of NQ2-51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP)ODU1-1 to ENABLED. For details, see 12.14 Configuring Non-Intrusive Monitoring. l Set Service Mode of NQ2-51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP)-ODU1 to ODU1. For details, see 12.3 Configuring the Service Mode.

CAUTION l If you need to change Service Mode of a board, deactivate the services on the board first. Note that deactivation interrupts the services. l For a 51NQ2 board, the default value of Service Mode is ODU1. For a 52NQ2 board, the default value of Service Mode is AUTO. You can change the value to ODU1 or retain the default value. Step 2 Create ODU1 server trails. 1.

Choose Service > WDM Trail > Create WDM Trail from the Main Menu.

2.

Make the following settings in the Create WDM Trail window: l Level: ODU1 l Direction: Bidirectional l Rate: ODU1

3.

Double-click NE A in the Physical Root. Then, select the TOM board in slot 21 in the displayed Select Board Port window and make the following settings: l Available Timeslots/Port: 201(ClientLP1) l Channel: 1

4.

Click OK.

5.

Double-click NE C in the Physical Root. Then, select the TOM board in slot 21 in the displayed Select Board Port window and make the following settings: l Available Timeslots/Port: 201(ClientLP1) l Channel: 1

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


228



6.

Click OK.

7.

Check values of Source and Sink in Route Information and ensure that the route is the design route.

8.

Optional: Click a server tail between the source and sink NEs, and select the included server trail in the displayed dialog box. You can click the trail again, and cancel the selected server trail in the displayed dialog box.

9.

Optional: Double-click the other NE in the subnet to specify the NE that the route cannot pass through. The selection.

sign is shown on the NE. Double-click the NE again to cancel your

10. Optional: Click Specify Route Channel and the Specify Route Channel dialog box is displayed. Select a path and click OK. 11. Click the Protection Setting tab, and set the SNCP protection route. l Right-click the NEA that dual feeds services and choose Set Dual-Feed Point from the shortcut menu. In the upper left corner of the NEA icon,

is displayed.

l Right-click the NEC that dual feeds services and choose Set Selective-Receiving Point from the shortcut menu. In the upper left corner of the NEC icon,

is displayed.

12. Right-click on the Node list window and choose Set SNCP Parameter. In the displayed Set SNCP Parameter window, set SNCP Type of NEs A and C to SNC/N. Click OK. 13. Click the General Attributes set the basic trail attributes, including the name and ID. 14. Click Apply. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. NOTE

Select the Activate the trail check box. The trail is then delivered to the NE layer after it is created successfully. Otherwise, the trail configuration data is saved only on the U2000.

Step 3 Create client trails. 1.

Choose Service > WDM Trail > Create WDM Trail from the Main Menu.

2.

Make the following settings in the Create WDM Trail window: l Level: Client l Direction: Bidirectional l Rate: GE

3.

Double-click NE A in Physical Root. Then, select the TOM board in slot 21 in the displayed Select Board Port window and make the following settings: l Available Timeslots/Port: 3(RX1/TX1) l Channel: 1

4.

Click OK

5.

Double-click NE C in Physical Root. Then, select the TOM board in slot 21 in the displayed Select Board Port window and make the following settings: l Available Timeslots/Port: 3(RX1/TX1) l Channel: 1

6. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Click OK. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

229



7.

Click the General Attributes tab to set the basic trail attributes, including the name and ID.

8.

Click Apply. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. NOTE

Select the Activate the trail check box. The trail is then delivered to the NE layer after it is created successfully. If you do not select the Activate the trail check box, the trail configuration data is saved only on the U2000. NOTE

The preceding configuration procedure is described based on the scenario of ODU1 SNCP protection. In this scenario, cross-connect and pass-through services of the ODU1 level and optical ports 51-54 on the line board must be configured. If ODU0 SNCP protection is configured, cross-connect and pass-through services of the ODU0 level and optical ports 161-176 on the line board must be configured. If no SNCP protection is configured, you do not need to create ODUk server trails but directly create client trails.

----End

Result Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > WDM Trail Management from the Main Menu and select the proper filter criteria for the trails. TIP

You can filter other trails based on the source and sink of the new trail.

Step 2 In the WDM Trail Management window, verify that the trail is correctly created. ----End

8.4 Parameters: End to End Service Configuration In this user interface, you can configure WDM trails. Parameters

Value

Description

Level

OCh, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODUflex, Client

Specifies the level of a trail.

For example: GE

Selects the service type.

Rate

Click A.32 Rate (WDM Trail Creation) for more information.

Click A.30 Level (WDM Trail Creation) for more information. Direction

SPC First

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Bidirectional, Unidirectional

Selects the service direction.

Checked, Unchecked

When checked, you can create ASONWDM trail, if the trail passes through the ASON domain.

Click A.31 Direction (WDM Trail Creation) for more information.


230



Parameters

Value

Description

OVPN Customer

For example, Shared Resource

Indicates the OVPN customer of the WDM ASON trail. Click A.35 OVPN Customer (ASON Trail Management) for more information. NOTE This parameter is displayed only when you set Level to OCh and Direction to Bidirectional, and check SPC First.

Source

Sink

Trail Setting

Explicit Link

For example: NE6shelf0-21-52TOM-3 (RX1/TX1)-1

Selects the source of the route.


Selects the sink of the route.

-

Specifies the explicit server link for the trail to be created.

Click A.33 Source (WDM Trail Creation) for more information.

Click A.34 Sink (WDM Trail Creation) for more information.

Click A.25 Explicit Link for more information. Explicit Node

For example: NE7

Specifies the explicit NE for the trail to be created. Click A.26 Explicit Node for more information.

Protectio n Setting

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Excluded Node

For example: NE7

Indicates the excluded node of the trail.

Platinum Service Group

-

Indicates the reference trail selected when the platinum service of the trail is created.

Route Constraint

Source-Sink-Channel Occupied-Working/ Protection

Indicates the calculation result of available trails.

AutoCalculatio n

Checked, Unchecked

Calculates routes automatically when you select this parameter.

Node list

Dual-Fed Point

Click A.27 Excluded Node for more information.

Click A.28 Auto-Calculation for more information. To set or cancel the dual-fed point, rightclick the NE on the topology and select Set Dual-Feed Point or Cancel DualFeed Point from the shortcut menu.


231



Parameters

Value

Description

Selective-Receiving Point

To set or cancel the selective-receiving point, right-click the NE on the topology and select Set Selective-Receiving Point or Cancel Selective-Receiving Point from the shortcut menu.

SNCP Parameter of Dual Fed Point

Specifies the SNCP parameter of the dual fed point.

SNCP Parameter of Selective Receiving Point

Specifies the SNCP parameter of the selective receiving point.

SNCP Type

Specifies the SNCP type. For example, SNC/N.

OTN Level

Specifies the OTN level. For example, TCM1.

Route Informatio n

Source-Sink-Channel Occupied-Working/ Protection

Indicates the calculation result of available trail.

Customer

Customer name

Selects the customer that the trail belongs to.

Order No

Character string

Specifies the order number of the trail.

Remarks

Character string

Adds the remarks.

ID

For example: 1

Specifies the trail ID.

Source

For example: NE6

Indicates the source of the server layer trail.

Sink

For example: NE7

Indicates the sink of the server layer trail.

Server Layer Trail Name

Source-Sink-Trail Level-Trail NO

Indicates the name of the server layer trail.

Server Layer Trail

For example: 5

Indicates the channel that the trail occupies.

Route Descriptio n

Negative Working, Positive Working

Indicates the route description.

Source/ Sink


Indicates the source/sink of a server trail.

Level

For example: OCh

Indicates the level of the server trail.

Trail Name

Source NE-Sink NEIndicates the name of a server trail. Trail Level-Trail Suffix

Set SNCP Parameter

General Attribute s

Specify Route Channel

Select the included server trail

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


232



Parameters

Value

Description

NE List

For example: NE6;NE7

Indicates the NE that a server trail passes through.

Route Descriptio n

Positive, Negative

Indicates the route information.

Wavelengt h

For example: 1\1560.61 \192.100

Specifies the optical channel occupied by the trail.

Activate the trail

Checked, Unchecked

Applies trail configuration to the NE so that the service takes effect on the NE.

Copy after Creation

-

Creates multiple trails whose share the same routes but have different channels. Click A.29 Copy after Creation for more information.

Set Optical Power After Creation

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

-

Switches to the Query Relevant Optical Power window to view the relevant optical power.


233


9 Configuring SDH Services

9

Configuring SDH Services

About This Chapter The OptiX OSN 8800 supports SDH boards. Hence, the OptiX OSN 8800 can be interconnected to the SDH equipment. When you configure an SDH service for the OptiX OSN 8800, you can configure the SDH service on a per-NE basis. In this way, you can specify the timeslot and route for the service on each NE. 9.1 SDH Service Configuration Process This topic describes the process of configuring SDH services. The process consists of deploying a network, configuring the source NE, configuring the sink NE, configuring a pass-through NE, and verifying services. 9.2 SDH Service Overhead This topic describes the SDH overheads, including J0, J1, and C2, that the OptiX OSN 8800 supports. 9.3 Configuring Services on the Non-Protection Ring Configure the protection subnet and the services on the non-protection ring separately. It is recommended that you configure the protection subnet before configuring services on the nonprotection ring. 9.4 Configuring 1+1 Linear MSP Services In the case of 1+1 linear MSP, the source NE dual-feeds service signals to the working and protection lines. In normal conditions, the sink NE selectively receives the services from the working line. When the working line is faulty, the sink NE selectively receives the services from the protection line. 9.5 Configuring the Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring Services To configure the two-fiber bidirectional MSP services, you need to create the MSP subnet protection and MSP services. There is no requirement for the sequence of creating the MSP subnet protection and MSP services. 9.6 Configuring the SNCP Tangent Ring Services With respect to the physical topology, the SNCP tangent ring is similar to the MSP tangent ring. It can protect services on the two SNCP rings when one fiber between any adjacent stations on each ring is cut. For service configuration of the SNCP tangent ring, you should focus on the tangent node. Each bidirectional service that passes by the tangent node must be configured with four pairs of protection groups. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


234



9.7 Parameter

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


235



9.1 SDH Service Configuration Process This topic describes the process of configuring SDH services. The process consists of deploying a network, configuring the source NE, configuring the sink NE, configuring a pass-through NE, and verifying services. Figure 9-1 shows the process of configuring SDH services. Figure 9-1 SDH service configuration process Required Optional Deploy a network

Configure the source NE

Configure the sink NE

Configure passthrough NEs

Maintenance for SDH services

Verify services

Create and configure NEs

Querying the NE Software Version



Change SDH services

Test SDH services

Create fibers

Querying the Capacity of Lower Order CrossConnections

Querying the Capacity of Lower Order CrossConnections

Create SDH services

Delete SDH services

Set the NE time

Create SDH services

Create SDH services

Configure clocks

Create SNCP services

Create SNCP services

Configure the communication

Configure the orderwire Configure the protection

NOTE

l In the landscape orientation of the configuration flow chart, there are six main phases of SDH service configuration process. They are deploying a network, configuring the source NE, configuring the sink NE, configuring a pass-through NE, maintenance for SDH services, and verifying services. l The portrait orientation of the flow chart shows the relationships between operation tasks in each phase.

9.2 SDH Service Overhead This topic describes the SDH overheads, including J0, J1, and C2, that the OptiX OSN 8800 supports.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


236



9.2.1 Trace Byte Trace bytes are used to trace the connection status between the receive end and transmit end. The trace bytes can be used to detect and solve problems in advance to prevent transmitted services from being affected. This decreases the network restoration time to a great extent.

J0 Byte The J0 byte is located at line 1 and column (6N+1) in a STM-N frame. The J0 byte is the regenerator section trace byte. The J0 byte is continuously to carry an access point identifier of a regenerator section, according to which the receive end verifies the continuous connection to the intended transmit end.

J1 Byte The J1 byte is the first byte in a virtual container (VC) and its location is indicated by the relevant pointer. The J1 byte is the higher order path trace byte. The J1 byte is used to repetitively transmit the access point identifier of a higher order path (HO APId) so that the receive end of the path can verify its continuous connection to the intended transmit end. The J1 byte can be used to detect and solve problems in advance to prevent transmitted services from being affected. This decreases the network restoration time to a great extent.

9.2.2 Signal Label Byte This topic describes the locations and functions of the signal label bytes C2 in SDH overheads.

C2 Byte The C2 byte is the third byte in a VC. C2 is the signal label byte, which is used to indicate the multiplexing structure of VC frames and the payload property. The sent C2 byte must match the received C2 byte. If C2 mismatch occurs, an HP_SLM alarm is generated in the corresponding VC4 path at the local end.

9.3 Configuring Services on the Non-Protection Ring Configure the protection subnet and the services on the non-protection ring separately. It is recommended that you configure the protection subnet before configuring services on the nonprotection ring.

9.3.1 Networking Diagram You can configure a non-protection ring if the services on the ring do not need to be protected. In this case, all the timeslots on the ring can carry services. Figure 9-2 shows a non-protection ring that consists of four NEs. NE1, NE2, NE3 and NE4 are the OptiX OSN 8800. In this example, the source NE NE1 and the sink NE NE3 use the SLO16 boards to add or drop services, and use the SLQ64 boards to transmit SDH services. NE2 and NE4 use the SLQ64 boards to pass through the SDH services. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


237



Figure 9-2 Networking diagram of a non-protection

18-SLO16 17-SLQ64

West

NE1

East 01-SLQ64 17-SLQ64 West

East

NE2

Two-fiber bidirectional non-protection ring

01-SLQ64 NE4

17-SLQ64

NE3 East

West

18-SLO16 17-SLQ64

: OptiX OSN 8800

9.3.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation To configure services on the non-protection ring, you need to plan the traffic direction and timeslot allocation for the services on the non-protection ring. Figure 9-3 shows the signal flow and timeslot allocation. In this example, five STM-1 services are added to or dropped from the source NE NE1 and the sink NE NE3, and the STM-1 services pass through the intermediate NE NE2.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


238



Figure 9-3 Signal flow and timeslot allocation of the services on the non-protection ring NE1: 5xSTM-1

17-SLQ64 18-SLO16

VC4-1:1-5

NE2:

NE1

01-SLQ64 17-SLQ64 VC4-1:1-5 Pass-through service

NE2

Two-fiber bidirectional non-protection ring

NE4

线路板

NE3

NE3: VC4-1:1-5 5xSTM-1 : Traffic direction

17-SLQ64 18-SLO16

: Line board

9.3.3 Configuration Process Configuration of the services on the non-protection ring is not related to the configuration of the protection subnet. To configure the services on the non-protection ring, configure the SDH services on the source and sink NEs and the pass-through services on the intermediate NEs if the protection subnet is already created.

Prerequisite The physical topology of the network must be created. The NEs, boards, and fibers must be created on the U2000. The created protection subnet must be consistent with the actual network topology.



239



Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Configure an SDH service for the source NE NE1. 1.

In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree.

2.

Click Create in the lower-right pane and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed. Set the required parameters, and then click OK. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed. Parameter

Value in This Example

Description

Level

VC4

In this example, STM-1 services are configured. Hence, Level of the STM-1 services is set to VC4.

Direction

Bidirectiona l

In this example, the services are transmitted and received over the same path. That is, the services are Bidirectional services.

Source Slot

18N4SLO16-1 (SDH-1)

In this example, the SLO16 board in slot 18 of NE1 is configured as the source board.

Source VC4

-

In this example, five STM-1 services are configured between NE1-NE3. Hence, the source VC4 is not configured.

Source Timeslot Range (e.g. 1,3-6)

1-5

In this example, five STM-1 services are configured between NE1-NE3. Hence, the source timeslot range is configured as 1-5.

Sink Slot

17N4SLQ64-1 (SDH-1)

In this example, the SLQ64 board in slot 17 of NE1 is configured as the sink board.

Sink VC4

-

In this example, five STM-1 services are configured between NE1-NE3. Hence, the sink VC4 is not configured.

Sink Timeslot Range (e.g. 1,3-6)

1-5

In this example, five STM-1 services are configured between NE1-NE3. Hence, the sink timeslot range is configured as 1-5.


Yes

-

Step 2 Configure an SDH service for the sink NE3. See Step Step 1 to configure the SDH service on NE3. Set the following parameters.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


240



Parameter


Description

Level

VC4


Direction

Bidirectional


Source Slot

18N4SLO16-1 (SDH-1)

In this example, the SLO16 board in slot 18 of NE3 is configured as the source board.

Source VC4

-



1-5


Sink Slot

17N4SLQ64-1 (SDH-1)


Sink VC4

-



1-5



Yes

-

Step 3 Configure pass-through services on the intermediate NE NE2. 1.

Select NE2 from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree.

2.

Click Create on the lower-right pane to display the Create SDH Service dialog box. Set the parameters that are required, and then click OK. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Parameter


Description

Level

VC4



241



Parameter


Description

Direction

Bidirectiona l


Source Slot

01N4SLQ64-1 (SDH-1)

In this example, the SLQ64 board in slot 01 of NE2 is configured as the source board.

Source VC4

-



1-5


Sink Slot

17N4SLQ64-1 (SDH-1)


Sink VC4

-



1-5



Yes

-

Step 4 Check whether the services are configured correctly. For details, see Verifying the Correctness of the Service Configuration. Step 5 Enable the performance monitoring function of the NEs. For details, see Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE. Step 6 Back up the configuration data of the NEs. Select a proper one from the following second methods depending on the actual situation. Option

Description

When the system control and communication Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC board is not configured with the CF card Board. When the system control and communication Manually Backing Up the NE Database to a board is configured with the CF card CF Card. ----End Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


242



9.4 Configuring 1+1 Linear MSP Services In the case of 1+1 linear MSP, the source NE dual-feeds service signals to the working and protection lines. In normal conditions, the sink NE selectively receives the services from the working line. When the working line is faulty, the sink NE selectively receives the services from the protection line.

9.4.1 Networking Diagram This topic describes the configuration of 1+1 linear MSP. The OptiX OSN 8800 is used as only the intermediate NE that transmits an SDH service. The OptiX OSN 3500 adds or drops the SDH service. In Figure 9-4, NE1, NE2, NE5, and NE6 use the OptiX OSN 3500, and the intermediate NEs NE3 and NE4 use the OptiX OSN 8800. In this example, the OptiX OSN 3500 adds or drops the SDH service, and the OptiX OSN 8800 only transmits the SDH service instead of adding or dropping the SDH service. NE1, NE2, NE5, and NE6 use the PQ1 boards as the tributary boards that add or drop the SDH service, and use the SL16 boards as the line boards that transmit the SDH service. The intermediate NEs NE3 and NE4 use the SLO16 boards as the line boards that dual-feed or selectively receive the SDH service, and use the SLQ64 boards as the line boards that transmit the SDH service. Figure 9-4 Networking diagram of the 1+1 linear MSP Tributary board Line board

2-PQ1 7-SL16

Tributary board Line board

2-PQ1 7-SL16

NE6

NE1

NE2 Tributary board Line board

NE3 Line board 7-SLO16 Line board 8-SLQ64 Line board 12-SLQ64

NE4 Line board 7-SLO16 Line board 8-SLQ64 Line board 12-SLQ64

NE5 Tributary board Line board

2-PQ1 7-SL16

: OptiX OSN 8800

2-PQ1 7-SL16

: OptiX OSN 3500

9.4.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation You can configure the service added to the source NE and dropped to the sink NE if the 1+1 linear MSP is already created. Figure 9-5 shows the service signal flow and timeslot allocation between NE1 and NE6. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


243


l


The service flow from NE1 to NE6 is as follows: NE1→NE3→NE4→NE6. A service is added to the source NE NE1, cross-connected from the tributary board PQ1 to the line board SL16, and then transmitted to the intermediate NE3. The line board SLO16 dual-feeds the service to the line board SLQ64 through the working and protection lines. The two services are received by the line board SLQ64 on the intermediate NE4, and the line board SLO16 selects one of the two services and then transmits the service to the sink NE6. The service is dropped to NE6, and cross-connected from the line board SL16 to the tributary board PQ1.

l


l

The services between NE1 and NE6 use the first to fourth VC12 timeslots (VC4-1:1-4 (VC12)) in the first VC4 on the SDH link between NE1 and NE6. There are totally four E1 services.

Figure 9-5 shows the service signal flow and timeslot allocation between NE2 and NE5. l


l


l

The services between NE2 and NE3 occupy the first to fourth VC12 timeslots (VC4-1:1-4 (VC12)) in the first VC4 on the SDH link. There are totally four E1 services.

l

The services between NE3 and NE4 occupy the fifth to eighth VC12 timeslots (VC4-1:5-8 (VC12)) in the first VC4 on the SDH link. There are totally four E1 services.

l

The services between NE4 and NE5 occupy the first to fourth VC12 timeslots (VC4-1:1-4 (VC12)) in the first VC4 on the SDH link. There are totally four E1 services.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


244



Figure 9-5 Signal flow and timeslot allocation of the 1+1 linear MSP service Tributary board

2-PQ1

Tributary board

2-PQ1

Line board

7-SL16

Line board

7-SL16

VC4-1:1-4(VC12) 4xE1 services are added/ dropped

VC4-1:1-4(VC12)

NE6

NE1

NE5

NE2 NE3 VC4-1:5-8(VC12)

4xE1 services are added/ dropped VC4-1:1-4(VC12) Tributary board

2-PQ1

Line board

7-SL16

4xE1 services are added/ dropped

VC4-1:1-4(VC12)

VC4-1:1-4(VC12)

NE4 VC4-1:5-8(VC12)

Line board

7-SLO16

Line board

7-SLO16

Line board

8-SLQ64

Line board

8-SLQ64

Line board

12-SLQ64

Line board

VC4-1:1-4(VC12) Tributary board

2-PQ1

Line board

7-SL16

: Tributary board

: Line Board : Traffic direction of the working path

12-SLQ64

4xE1 services are added/ dropped

: Traffic direction of the protection path

9.4.3 Configuration Process This topic describes how to configure the 1+1 linear MSP services.

Prerequisite The physical topology of the network must be created. The NEs, boards, and fibers must be created on the U2000. The created protection subnet must be consistent with the actual network topology.




2.

Click Create in the lower-right pane and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed. Set the required parameters, and then click OK. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


245



Parameter


Description

Level

VC12

In this example, E1 services are configured. Hence, Level of the E1 services is set to VC12.

Direction

Bidirectiona l

In this example, the services are transmitted and received over the same path. That is, the services are bidirectional services. Hence, Direction of the services is set to Bidirectional.

Source Slot

2-PQ1

In this example, the PQ1 board in slot 2 is configured as the source tributary board for the bidirectional services.

Source VC4

-

-


1-4

The total capacity of the services is 4xE1 according to the plan. Hence, Source Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6) is set to 1-4

Sink Slot

7-N1SL16-1 (SDH-1)

In this example, the SL16 board in slot 7 is configured as the sink line board.

Sink VC4

VC4-1

In this example, the services require four VC12s. As a result, Sink VC4 is set to VC4-1, because a VC4 contains 63 VC12s.


1-4

The total capacity of the services is 4xE1 according to the plan. Hence, Sink Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6) is set to 1-4.


Yes

-

Step 2 Configure another SDH service for the source NE NE2. See Step Step 1 to configure the SDH service on NE2. Set the following parameters.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Parameter


Description

Level

VC12


Direction

Bidirectional


Source Slot

2-PQ1



246



Parameter


Description

Source VC4

-

-


1-4


Sink Slot

7-N1SL16-1 (SDH-1)


Sink VC4

VC4-1



1-4



Yes

-

Step 3 Configure an SDH service for the sink NE NE6. See Step Step 1 to configure the SDH service on NE6. Set the following parameters.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Parameter


Description

Level

VC12


Direction

Bidirectional


Source Slot

2-PQ1


Source VC4

-

-


1-4


Sink Slot

7-N1SL16-1 (SDH-1)



247



Parameter


Description

Sink VC4

VC4-1



1-4



Yes

-

Step 4 Configure another SDH service for the sink NE NE5. See Step Step 1 to configure the SDH service on NE5. Set the following parameters.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Parameter


Description

Level

VC12


Direction

Bidirectional


Source Slot

2-PQ1


Source VC4

-

-


1-4


Sink Slot

7-N1SL16-1 (SDH-1)


Sink VC4

VC4-1



1-4



Yes

-


248



Step 5 Configure an SDH service for the intermediate NE NE3. 1.


2.

Click Create in the lower-right pane and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed. Set the required parameters, and then click OK. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed. Parameter


Description

Level

VC12


Direction

Bidirectiona l


Source Slot

7-N4SLO16 (SDH-1)

In this example, the SLO16 board in slot 7 is configured as the source line board.

Source VC4

VC4-1

In this example, the services require four VC12s. As a result, Source VC4 is set to VC4-1, because a VC4 contains 63 VC12s.


1-4


Sink Slot

8N4SLQ64-1 (SDH-1)

In this example, the SLQ64 board in slot 8 is configured as the sink line board.

Sink VC4

VC4-1



1-4



Yes

-

Step 6 Configure another SDH service for the intermediate NE NE3. See Step Step 5 to configure the SDH service on NE3. Set the following parameters.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


249



Parameter


Description

Level

VC12


Direction

Bidirectional


Source Slot

7-N4SLO16 (SDH-2)

In this example, the SLO16 board in slot 7 is configured as the source line board.

Source VC4

VC4-1



1-4


Sink Slot

12N4SLQ64-1 (SDH-1)

In this example, the SLQ64 board in slot 8 is configured as the sink line board.

Sink VC4

VC4-1



5-8



Yes

-

Step 7 Configure an SDH service for the intermediate NE NE4. See Step Step 5 to configure the SDH service on NE4. Set the following parameters.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Parameter


Description

Level

VC12


Direction

Bidirectional



250



Parameter


Description

Source Slot

8N4SLQ64-1 (SDH-1)

In this example, the SLQ64 board in slot 8 is configured as the source line board.

Source VC4

VC4-1



1-4


Sink Slot

7-N4SLO16 (SDH-1)

In this example, the SLO16 board in slot 7 is configured as the sink line board.

Sink VC4

VC4-1



1-4



Yes

-

Step 8 Configure another SDH service for the intermediate NE NE4. See Step Step 5 to configure the SDH service on NE4. Set the following parameters.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Parameter


Description

Level

VC12


Direction

Bidirectional


Source Slot

12N4SLQ64-1 (SDH-1)

In this example, the SLQ64 board in slot 8 is configured as the source line board.

Source VC4

VC4-1



251



Parameter


Description


1-4


Sink Slot

7-N4SLO16 (SDH-2)

In this example, the SLO16 board in slot 7 is configured as the sink line board.

Sink VC4

VC4-1



5-8



Yes

-


Description

When the system control and communication Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC board is not configured with the CF card Board. When the system control and communication Manually Backing Up the NE Database to a board is configured with the CF card CF Card. ----End

9.5 Configuring the Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring Services To configure the two-fiber bidirectional MSP services, you need to create the MSP subnet protection and MSP services. There is no requirement for the sequence of creating the MSP subnet protection and MSP services.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


252



9.5.1 Networking Diagram In the network construction, you should create and name NEs in sequence according to the certain direction, which helps you facilitate the planning of the service flow and service configuration. In the networking diagram shown in Figure 9-6, a two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring that consists of four OptiX OSN 8800 NEs. The OptiX OSN 3500 NEs at the source and sink ends are used to add or drop services. In this example, the source NE NE5 and the sink NE NE6 use the PQ1 boards as the tributary boards that add or drop services, and use the SL16 boards as the line boards that transmit SDH services. NE2 and NE4 on the ring use the SLO16 boards to receive the services sent from the OptiX OSN 3500 or to transmit the services to the OptiX OSN 3500, and use the SLQ64 boards to transmit the SDH services. NE1 and NE3 on the ring uses the SLQ64 board to transparently transmit the SDH services. Figure 9-6 Networking of two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring 12-SLQ64 8-SLQ64 12-SLQ64 8-SLQ64

12-SLQ64 8-SLQ64 NE1

7-SLO16 NE2 NE5 Tributary board: 2-PQ1

7-SLO16

Two-fiber bidirectional NE4 MSP ring NE6

NE3

Tributary board: 2-PQ1

Line board: 7-SL16

Line board: 7-SL16 12-SLQ64 8-SLQ64

: OptiX OSN 8800

: OptiX OSN 3500

9.5.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation If you have created an MSP protection subnet, you can configure a service on a two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring as follows: The source NE adds a service, an NE accesses the service to the ring network, the intermediate NE passes through the service, an NE transmits the service out of the ring network, and then the sink NE drops the service. The service on a ring network has more than one route from the source NE to the sink NE. You need not configure all routes in actual situations. Hence, it is important that you plan and configure the flow of service signals and timeslot allocation properly before you configure a service. Figure 9-7 shows the signal flow and timeslot allocation of a service. In this example, NE5 adds a service, NE2 accesses the service to the ring network, NE1 passes through the service, NE4 transmits the service out of the network, and NE6 drops the service. There are totally five E1 services. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


253



Figure 9-7 Signal flow and timeslot allocation 12-SLQ64 8-SLQ64 VC4-1:1-5(VC12)

7-SLO16

VC4-1:1-5(VC12)

Two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring

线路板

NE2 VC4-1:1-5(VC12)

Line board: 7-SL16 VC4-1:1-5(VC12)

VC4-1:1-5(VC12)

线路板

NE5 Tributary board: 2-PQ1

12-SLQ64 8-SLQ64 7-SLO16

线路板

5xE1 services are added/dropped

线路板

12-SLQ64 8-SLQ64

NE1

NE4 VC4-1:1-5(VC12)

5xE1 services are added/dropped

NE6 Tributary board: 2-PQ1 Line board: 7-SL16

NE3 12-SLQ64 8-SLQ64

: Traffic direction

: Line board

: Tributary board

9.5.3 Configuration Process The configuration of the two-fiber bidirectional MSP service is independent of creation of its MSP protection subnet. In the case that the protection subnet is created, you need to respectively configure SDH services from the tributary board to the line board on the source NE and the destination NE, and configure the pass-through service on the intermediate NE.

Prerequisite The physical network topology must be created. NEs, boards, and fibers must be successfully created on the U2000. The created protection subnet must be consistent with the actual topology.




2.


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


254



Parameter


Value Description

Level

VC12

In this example, E1 services are added and dropped. Hence, Level of the E1 services is set to VC12.

Direction

Bidirectiona l


Source Slot

2-PQ1

In the planning of this example, the PQ1 housed in slot 2 serves as the source tributary board. Different source boards can be selected according to actual situations.

Source VC4

-

-


1-5

In the planning of this example, the total service volume is 5xE1. The service level is VC12, and thus the 5xVC12 need be set.

Sink Slot

7-N1SL16-1 (SDH-1)

In the planning of this example, the SL16 housed in slot 7 serves as the sink line board. Different sink boards can be selected according to actual situations.

Sink VC4

VC4-1

In this example, the service requires 5xVC12. One VC4 timeslot contains 63xVC12. Hence, only the first VC4 timeslot need be set.


1-5



Yes

-

Step 2 Configure an SDH service for the sink NE NE6. See Step Step 1 to configure the SDH service on NE6. Set the following parameters.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Parameter


Value Description

Level

VC12

In this example, E1 services are added and dropped. Hence, Level of the E1 services is set to VC12.

Direction

Bidirectional



255



Parameter


Value Description

Source Slot

2-PQ1

In the planning of this example, the PQ1 housed in slot 2 serves as the source tributary board. Different sink boards can be selected according to actual situations.

Source VC4

-

-


1-5


Sink Slot

7-N1SL16-1 (SDH-1)

In the planning of this example, the SL16 housed in slot 7 serves as the sink line board. Different source boards can be selected according to actual situations.

Sink VC4

VC4-1



1-5



Yes

-

Step 3 Configure the SDH service for NE2 to access the SDH service to the ring network. 1.


2.


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Parameter


Value Description

Level

VC12

In this example, E1 services are added and dropped. The corresponding service level is set to VC12.

Direction

Bidirectiona l


Source Slot

7N4SLO16-1 (SDH-1)

In the planning of this example, the SLO16 housed in slot 7 serves as the source board. Different source boards can be selected according to actual situations.


256



Parameter


Value Description

Source VC4

VC4-1



1-5


Sink Slot

8N4SLQ64-1 (SDH-1)

In the planning of this example, the SLQ64 housed in slot 8 serves as the sink board. Different sink boards can be selected according to actual situations.

Sink VC4

VC4-1



1-5



Yes

-

Step 4 Configure the SDH service for NE4 to transmit the SDH service out of the ring network. See Step Step 3 to configure the SDH service on NE4. Set the following parameters.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Parameter


Value Description

Level

VC12


Direction

Bidirectional


Source Slot

8N4SLQ64-1 (SDH-1)

In the planning of this example, the SLQ64 housed in slot 8 serves as the source board. Different source boards can be selected according to actual situations.

Source VC4

VC4-1



257



Parameter


Value Description


1-5


Sink Slot

7N4SLO16-1 (SDH-1)

In the planning of this example, the SLO16 housed in slot 7 serves as the sink board. Different sink boards can be selected according to actual situations.

Sink VC4

VC4-1



1-5



Yes

-

Step 5 Configure the pass-through service for NE1. 1.


2.


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Parameter


Value Description

Level

VC12


Direction

Bidirectiona l


Source Slot

12N4SLQ64-1 (SDH-1)

In the planning of this example, the SLQ64 housed in slot 12 serves as the source board. Different source boards can be selected according to actual situations.

Source VC4

VC4-1



258



Parameter


Value Description


1-5


Sink Slot

8N4SLQ64-1 (SDH-1)

In the planning of this example, the SLQ64 housed in slot 8 serves as the sink board. Different sink boards can be selected according to actual situations.

Sink VC4

VC4-1



1-5



Yes

-


Description

When the system control and communication Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC board is not configured with the CF card Board. When the system control and communication Manually Backing Up the NE Database to a board is configured with the CF card CF Card. ----End

9.6 Configuring the SNCP Tangent Ring Services With respect to the physical topology, the SNCP tangent ring is similar to the MSP tangent ring. It can protect services on the two SNCP rings when one fiber between any adjacent stations on each ring is cut. For service configuration of the SNCP tangent ring, you should focus on the tangent node. Each bidirectional service that passes by the tangent node must be configured with four pairs of protection groups. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


259



9.6.1 Configuration Networking Diagram The SNCP tangent ring is similar to the MSP tangent ring in terms of physical networking topology. The difference is that you need to configure only one pair of bidirectional services in the tangent point for the MSP ring. For the SNCP ring, however, you need to configure four protection groups for each pair of bidirectional services. In the networking diagram shown in Figure 9-8, two SNCP tangent rings consist of six OptiX OSN 3500 NEs and an OptiX OSN 8800 NE. The OptiX OSN 8800 NE functions as the tangent NE, namely, NE3. The source NE NE1 and the sink NE NE6 use the PQ1 boards as the tributary boards that add or drop services. Figure 9-8 SNCP tangent ring networking Tributary board: 2-PQ1 Line board: 11-SL16 Line board: 8-SL16

Line board: 11-SL16

Line board: 8-SL16

NE1

Line board: 8-SL16

Line board: 11-SL16

NE2

SNCP Ring1

NE4

NE3

Line board: 7-SLO16 Line board: 8-SLO16 Line board: 12-SLO16 Line board: 13-SLO16

NE5 Line board: 11-SL16 Line board: 8-SL16

SNCP Ring2

NE7

NE6

Line board: 11-SL16 Line board: 8-SL16

Tributary board: 2-PQ1 Line board: 8-SL16 Line board: 11-SL16

: OptiX OSN 8800

: OptiX OSN 3500

NOTE

This example illustrates a network that consists of the OptiX OSN 3500 and OptiX OSN 8800. In the case of a network that consists of the OptiX OSN 8800 and other MSTP equipment, the configuration method is the same. The difference lies in the slots where boards are inserted. For the slot information, see the Hardware Description of the relevant product.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


260



9.6.2 Service Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation The service in the SNCP tangent ring is not transmitted in a fixed direction. The service flow direction depends on the configuration of the working path and the protection path on each NE where the SNCP protection group is configured. When configuring the SNCP protection group on the tangent NE, you need to configure four SNCP protection groups for each bidirectional service in the tangent point. The service timeslot allocation in the SNCP tangent ring is same as the service timeslot allocation on a single SNCP ring. Figure 9-9 shows the service signal flow and timeslot allocation. The service can be transmitted in the MSP tangent ring in different directions and routes. In this example, the service in the ring is transmitted to the ring network from NE1 and then is dropped on the sink NE (NE6). on tangent NE (NE3), four SNCP protection groups need to be configured. The service flow direction is NE1-NE2-NE3-NE5-NE6 or NE1-NE2-NE3-NE7-NE6. There are five E1 services on the ring. Figure 9-9 Signal flow and timeslot allocation NE1: 5xE1

SNCP protection group

service source

protection group1 11-SL16

protection source

service sink

8-SL16

2-PQ1

VC4-1:1-5 (VC12)

VC4-1:1-5 (VC12) 8

NE1

11 NE2 and NE4 : SDH service 8

11 VC4-1:1-5 (VC12) SNCP Ring1

NE2

Service pass-through

VC12

service sink 8-SL16

VC4-1:1-5 (VC12)

线路板

NE4

service source 11-SL16


11

8

NE3: NE3 SNCP

12


8

VC4-1:1-5 (VC12)

service sink

protection group1 13-SLO16

7-SLO16

12-SLO16

7-SLO16

8-SLO16


8-SLO16

7-SLO16


8-SLO16

13-SLO16

11

8

VC4-1:1-5 (VC12)

VC4-1:1-5 (VC12)

SNCP Ring2

NE5


protection source

VC4-1:1-5 (VC12) protection group2 13-SLO16

13

7

service source

NE7

Service pass-through 11

8

11

NE6

VC4-1:1-5 (VC12)

8

VC4-1:1-5 (VC12) NE6: 5 x E1

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

working service route

Line board

protection service route

Tributary board


service source

protection group1 11-SL16


protection source

service sink

8-SL16

2-PQ1

261



9.6.3 Configuration Process For non-tangent nodes in the SNCP tangent rings, the service configuration is the same as the service configuration in a single ring network. On tangent nodes, you need to configure four SNCP protection groups for a bidirectional service.

Prerequisite The physical network topology must be created. NEs, boards, and fibers must be successfully created on the U2000.


Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Configure an SNCP-protected SDH service for NE1. 1.


2.

Click Create SNCP Service in the lower-right pane and the Create SNCP Service dialog box is displayed. Set the required parameters, and then click OK. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Parameter


Value Description

Service Type

SNCP

In this example, this parameter is set to the default value, that is, SNCP.

Level

VC12

In this example, the service in the ring is the E1 service. The corresponding service level is set to VC12.

Direction

Bidirectiona l

In this example, the received and transmitted services pass through the same route, and thus the service is bidirectional. The service direction is set to Bidirectional.

Revertive Mode

Revertive

This parameter indicates the processing policies after the faulty line is recovered, that is, revertive or nonrevertive. During the service configuration, the revertive mode is set to Revertive.

Source Slot of the Working Service

11N1SL16-1 (SDH-1)

In the planning of this example, the SL16 housed in slot 11 serves as the source board of the working service. Different source boards of the working service can be selected according to actual situations.


262


3.


Parameter


Value Description

Source Timeslot Range of the Working Service

1-5

In the planning of this example, the total service volume is 5xE1. The service level is VC12, and thus 5xVC12 need be set.

Source Slot of the Protection Service

8-N1SL16-1 (SDH-1)

In the planning of this example, the SL16 housed in slot 8 serves as the source board of the protection service. Different source boards of the protection service can be selected according to actual situations.

Source Timeslot Range of the Protection Service

1-5


Sink Slot

2-PQ1

In the planning of this example, the PQ1 housed in slot 2 serves as the sink tributary board. Different sink boards can be selected according to actual situations.

Sink Timeslot Range of the Working Service

1-5



Yes

-

Click OK.

Step 2 The procedure of configuring a service for NE6 is similar to the procedure for NE1. Hence, configure an SDH service for NE6 by referring to the service configuration process of NE1 and the NE6 service planning described in Figure 9-9. Step 3 Configure the pass-through service on NE2. 1.


2.

In the NE Explorer, select NE2 and choose Configuration > Cross Connection Configuration from the Function Tree.

3.


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


263



Parameter


Value Description

Level

VC12


Direction

Bidirectiona l


Source Slot

11N1SL16-1 (SDH-1)

In the planning of this example, the SL16 housed in slot 11 serves as the source line board. Different source boards can be selected according to actual situations.

Source VC4

VC4-1



1-5


Sink Slot

8-N1SL16-1 (SDH-1)

In the planning of this example, the SL16 housed in slot 8 serves as the sink board. Different sink boards can be selected according to actual situations.

Sink VC4

VC4-1



1-5



Yes

-

Step 4 In this example, NE4, NE5, and NE7 are pass-through NEs. The configuration method and parameter setting are the same as those of NE2. Refer to the configuration of NE2 to configure pass-though SDH service of NE4, NE5 and NE7 Step 5 Configure the SDH service on NE3 (tangent NE). NOTE

According to the configuration principle of the SNCP tangent rings, you need to configure four SNCP protection groups for each bidirectional service. The configuration combination of protection groups is not fixed. You can configure the protection group according to actual requirements. The following configuration is considered as a reference.

1.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

In the NE Explorer, select NE3 and choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

264



2.

In the NE Explorer, select NE3 and choose Configuration > Cross Connection Configuration from the Function Tree.

3.

Click Create SNCP Service in the lower-right pane and the Create SNCP Service dialog box is displayed. Set the required parameters, and then click OK. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Parameter


Value Description

Service Type

SNCP

In this example, this parameter is set to the default value, that is, SNCP.

Level

VC12


Revertive Mode

Revertive

This parameter indicates the processing policies after the faulty line is recovered, that is, revertive or nonrevertive. During the service configuration, the revertive mode is set to Revertive.

Direction

Bidirectiona l


Hold-off Time (100ms)

0

In this example, only one protection switching mode is available, and thus the hold-off time does not need to be set. During the service configuration, the hold-off time is set to 0.

WTR Time (s)

600

In normal cases, this parameter is set to the default value, that is, 600.

Source Board of the Working Service

13N4SLO16

In the planning of this example, the SLO16 housed in slot 13 serves as the source board of the working service. Different source boards of the working service can be selected according to actual situations.

Source Port of the Working Service

1

In the planning of this example, the port 1 of SLO16 housed in slot 13 serves as the source port of the working service.

Source VC4 of the Working Service

VC4-1

The service source uses the timeslots of VC4-1.

Source Timeslot Range of the Working Service

1-5



265



Parameter


Value Description

Source Board of the Protection Service

7-N4SLO16

In the planning of this example, the SLO16 housed in slot 7 serves as the source board of the protection service. Different source boards of the protection service can be selected according to actual situations.

Source Port of the Protection Service

1

In the planning of this example, the port 1 of SLO16 housed in slot 7 serves as the source port of the protection service.

Source VC4 of the Protection Service

VC4-1


Source Timeslot Range of the Protection Service

1-5


Sink Board

12N4SLO16

In the planning of this example, the SLO16 housed in slot 12 serves as the sink board. Different sink boards can be selected according to actual situations.

Sink Port

1

In the planning of this example, the port 1 of SLO16 housed in slot 12 serves as the sink port.

Sink VC4

VC4-1



1-5



Yes

-

Step 6 Enable the performance monitoring of the NE. For the operation steps, see Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE. Step 7 To back up configuration data of the NE, you can take the following second methods as references: Option

Description

When the system control and communication Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC board is not configured with the CF card Board.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


266



Option

Description

When the system control and communication Manually Backing Up the NE Database to a board is configured with the CF card CF Card. ----End

9.7 Parameter 9.7.1 SDH Service Configuration In this user interface, you can configure services for stations, such as services at VC4, VC3 and VC12 levels. In addition, you can configure SNCP services and other services. You can query, delete, print, and bind/unbind services. You can also customize columns to display important parameters.

Parameters

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Field

Value

Description

Level

VC12, VC3, VC4, VC4-4C, VC4-16C, VC4-64C

Specifies the level of the newly created service.

Direction

Bidirectional, Unidirectional

The service received and transmitted through the same route is called bidirectional service, while the service received and transmitted through different routes is called unidirectional service.

Source (Sink) Slot

For example: Shelf ID (subrack)-Slot ID-Board Name-Optical Port No. (name)

Specifies the service source (sink) slot.

Source (Sink) VC4

For example: VC4-1

Selects the source (sink) VC4. This parameter is unavailable if a tributary board is selected for Source (Sink) Slot.


267



Field

Value

Description

Source (Sink) Timeslot Range (for example: 1,3-6)

For example: 1 to 63

Sets the specific timeslot or timeslot range of the service. The format of inputting multiple consecutive timeslots: start timeslot number - end timeslot number. The format of inputting multiple inconsecutive timeslots: ts1, ts2.... Two formats can be used together. The range can be different for different levels of services or different boards.


Checked, Unchecked

If this option is checked, activate the service immediately.

9.7.2 SNCP Service Control In this user interface, you can query and modify attributes and status of SNCP service.

Parameters

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Field

Value

Description

Service Type

SNCP

Displays the service protection type.

Source


Displays the service source timeslot of the service.

Sink


Displays the service sink timeslot of the service.

Level

VC12, VC3, VC4, VC4-4C, VC4-16C, VC4-64C

Displays the service level.


268



Field

Value

Description

Current Status

Normal, Lockout, Forced Switching, Forced Switching to Working, Forced Switching to Protection, SF Switching, SD Switching, Manual Switching, Manual Switching to Working, Manual Switching to Protection, Automatic Switching, WTR, DNR, Unknown

Displays the current switching status of the protection group.

Revertive Mode

Revertive, NonRevertive

Displays the revertive mode. Whether the working service is switched back from the protection service after it returns normal.

WTR Time (s)

300 to 720

Sets the wait-to-restore time. Refer to the period of time starting when it is detected that the working service returns to normal and ending when the working service is switched back after the protection switching. If the revertive mode is nonrevertive, skip this step.

Hold-off Time (100ms)

0 to 100, in the unit of 100 milliseconds

Sets a period of time which starts when the system detects signal degrade and ends when service switching occurs, so as to avoid duplicate switching when the service status is unstable. Sets 100 milliseconds as the unit time for switching. 5 indicates that the hold-off time is 500 milliseconds.

Initiation Condition

TIM, EXC, SD, UNEQ, SLM, BIPOVER, NULL

Sets the startup conditions that trigger service protection switching.

Switching Condition

Default: NULL

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Trail Status

Normal, SF, SD, Unknown

Displays the working status of the working or the protection service in a protection group.

Service Grouping

For example: Null

Displays and configures the group status of the service.

Group Type

For example: Null

Displays the group type.


269



Field

Value

Description

Active Channel

For example: Working Channel, Protection Channel, Unknown

Displays what the active protection group selectively receives: the working or the protection service.

Trail Name

For example: NE350NE351-VC12-0001

Displays the trail name.

9.7.3 VC4 Path Overhead You can query and set overhead bytes of the VC4 path in this user interface.

Parameters Field

Value

Description

Object

For example: NE351-3ADL4-2(SDH-2)-VC4:1

Displays the name of the operation object.

For example: NE56-4-SD1-1 (SDH-2)-1 J1 to be Sent ([Mode] Content)

For example: [16 Bytes] Huawei SBS

Sets the higher-order path overhead byte J1 to be sent. [Mode] indicates whether the overhead byte is of the single-byte mode, 16-byte mode or 64-byte mode. Object: VC4 path It is applicable to SDH line boards. The default value is usually used, but in the case of Huawei equipment interconnecting with thirdparty's equipment, you need to set the same value as J1 to be received at the opposite end.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


270



Field

Value

Description

J1 to be Received ([Mode] Content)


Sets the higher-order path overhead byte J1 to be received. [Mode] indicates whether the overhead byte is of the single-byte mode, 16byte mode or 64-byte mode. Object: VC4 path It is applicable to SDH line boards. The default value is usually used, but in the case of Huawei equipment interconnecting with thirdparty's equipment, you need to set the same value as J1 to be sent of the opposite end.

J1 Received ([Mode] Content)

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)



Queries the higher-order path overhead byte J1 received. The NE reports an alarm if the byte is different from the J1 to be received. [Mode] indicates whether the overhead byte is of the single-byte mode, 16-byte mode or 64-byte mode.

271



Field

Value

Description

C2 to be Sent

(0x00)Unequipped, (0x01) Reserved, (0x02)TUG Structure, (0x03)Locked TUn, (0x04)34M/45M into C-3, (0x05)Experimental Mapping, (0x12)140M into C-4, (0x13)ATM Mapping, (0x14)MAN DQDB Mapping, (0x15)FDDI Mapping, (0x16)HDLC/PPP Mapping, (0x17)Reserved for Special Purpose, (0x18) HDLC/LAPS Mapping, (0x19)Reserved for Special Purpose, (0x1A)10G Ethernet Frames, (0x1B)GFP Mapping, (0xCF)Reserved, (0xFE)O.181 Test Signal, (0xFF)VC-AIS

Sets the signal label byte C2 to be sent. Object: VC4 path It is applicable to SDH line boards. The default value is usually used, but when accessing signals of nonTUG structure (for example, ATM, FDDI), you need to set the C2 to be sent as required.

(0x00)Unequipped, (0x01) Reserved, (0x02)TUG Structure, (0x03)Locke TUn, (0x04)34M/45M into C-3, (0x05)Experimental, (0x12) 140M into C-4 asynchronously, (0x13)ATM Mapping, (0x14)MAN DQDB Mapping, (0x15) FDDI Mapping, (0x16) HDLC/PPP Mapping, (0x17) Reserved for Special Purpose, (0x18)HDLC/ LAPS Mapping, (0x19) Reserved for Special Purpose, (0x1A)10G Ethernet Frame, (0x1B)GFP Mapping, (0xCF)Reserved, (0xFE)O.181 Test Signal, (0xFF)VC-AIS

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


272



Field

Value

Description

C2 to be Received

(0x00)Unequipped, (0x01) Reserved, (0x02)TUG Structure, (0x03)Locked TUn, (0x04)34M/45M into C-3, (0x05)Experimental Mapping, (0x12)140M into C-4, (0x13)ATM Mapping, (0x14)MAN DQDB Mapping, (0x15)FDDI Mapping, (0x16)HDLC/PPP Mapping, (0x17)Reserved for Special Purpose, (0x18) HDLC/LAPS Mapping, (0x19)Reserved for Special Purpose, (0x1A)10G Ethernet Frames, (0x1B)GFP Mapping, (0xCF)Reserved, (0xFE)O.181 Test Signal, (0xFF)VC-AIS

Sets the signal label byte C2 to be received. Object: VC4 path It is applicable to the SDH line board. The default is usually used, but when accessing signals of nonTUG structure (for example, ATM, FDDI), you need to set the C2 to be received as required.

(0x00)Unequipped, (0x01) Reserved, (0x02)TUG Structure, (0x03)Locke TUn, (0x04)34M/45M into C-3, (0x05)Experimental, (0x12) 140M into C-4 asynchronously, (0x13)ATM Mapping, (0x14)MAN DQDB Mapping, (0x15) FDDI Mapping, (0x16) HDLC/PPP Mapping, (0x17) Reserved for Special Purpose, (0x18)HDLC/ LAPS Mapping, (0x19) Reserved for Special Purpose, (0x1A)10G Ethernet Frame, (0x1B)GFP Mapping, (0xCF)Reserved, (0xFE)O.181 Test Signal, (0xFF)VC-AIS

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

C2 Received

For example: (0x00) Unequipped

Queries the signal label byte C2 received. Reports an alarm if it is different from the C2 to be received.

VC4 Overhead Termination

Auto, Termination, PassThrough

Displays VC4 overhead termination.


273


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


Field

Value

Description

Byte Mode

Single Byte Mode, 16-Byte Mode(the first byte is created automatically), 64-Byte Mode(Synchronization Bit 0x0D,0x0A), 64-Byte Mode (Without Synchronization Bit), Disable Mode

Sets byte mode for the overhead byte.


274


10 Configuring Ethernet Services

10

Configuring Ethernet Services

About This Chapter This chapter describes how to configure Ethernet services. The flexible grooming of Ethernet services is implemented by configuring Ethernet services and electrical cross-connections. 10.1 Ethernet Service Types The WDM equipment supports the following Ethernet services: Ethernet private line (EPL), Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL), Ethernet private local area network (EPLAN) services, and Ethernet virtual private local area network (EVPLAN) services. 10.2 Basic Concepts Before you configure Ethernet boards with services, you need to learn the basic concepts of configuring the Ethernet service. 10.3 Configuration Process of Ethernet Services This section describes the configuration process of Ethernet services using figures. 10.4 Configuring Ethernet Services in an OTN System This section describes how to configure Ethernet services in an OTN system. 10.5 Configuring Ethernet Services in an OCS System This section describes how to configure Ethernet services in an OCS system. 10.6 Configuration Example: Configuring EPL Services The EPL service provides a solution for the point-to-point transparent transmission of Ethernet services over an exclusive bandwidth. EPL services are applied to the scenarios where the userside data communication equipment connected to the transmission network does not support VLANs or where the VLAN planning is kept secret from the network carrier. 10.7 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL (QinQ) Services on a WDM Network EVPL (QinQ) services realize the nesting of VLAN. With the increase of network users, the existing number of VLAN IDs fails to meet the requirement of users. After EVPL (QinQ) services are configured, however, users can be identified through multiple layers of VLAN IDs. In this case, VLAN extension is achieved. 10.8 Configuration Example: Configuring EPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1d Bridge) on a WDM Network The EPLAN service (IEEE 802.1d bridge) provides an LAN solution for multipoint-tomultipoint convergence. This service applies in cases where user-side data communication Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


275



equipment connected to the transmission network does not support VLANs or where the VLAN planning is kept secret from the network operator. 10.9 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge) on a WDM Network The EVPLAN service (IEEE 802.1q bridge) provides an LAN solution for multipoint-tomultipoint convergence. This service applies in cases where user-side data communication equipment connected to the transmission network does not support VLANs or where the VLAN planning is open to the network operator. 10.10 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1 ad Bridge) on a WDM Network The QinQ technology provides a cheap and easy solution for Layer 2 virtual private networks (VPNs). The IEEE 802.1ad bridge uses the QinQ technology to provide the VPN solution, thus facilitating the identifying, differentiating and grooming EVPLAN services. 10.11 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL and EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge) on a WDM Network Based on different VLANs, EVPL and EVPLAN services can be accessed through a same port, which is applicable to the scenario where the EVPL and EVPLAN users share the same port. 10.12 Configuration Example: Configuring EPL Services on a SDH Network EPL services provide the point-to-point Ethernet transparent transmission solution where the bandwidth is occupied exclusively. EPL services are applicable when the communication equipment that is used to access the client-side data in the transmission network does not support VLAN or when the VLAN planning cannot be disclosed to the network operator. 10.13 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL (QinQ) Services on a SDH Network The EVPL (QinQ) service provides an Ethernet private line solution. The services are applicable where the services of multiple users that have the same VLAN ID are accessed into a transmission network and need to be transmitted on the same VCTRUNK. In the case of EVPL (QinQ) services, a layer of S-VLAN tag is added on the network side to isolate the services of different users from each other. 10.14 Configuration Example: Configuring PORT-Shared EVPL (VLAN) Services on a SDH Network The PORT-shared EVPL (VLAN) service is applicable when the services of multiple users, which are received from the same external port on the Ethernet board at a station, need to be transmitted on different VCTRUNKs to another station or to another external port of the station. 10.15 Configuration Example: Configuring VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL Services on a SDH Network When the services of multiple users that do not carry VLAN tags are accessed into a transmission network and are transmitted on the same VCTRUNK, the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL (VLAN) service is used to isolate the services of different users by adding VLAN tags. In this manner, the bandwidth is shared on the SDH side. 10.16 Configuration Example: Configuring EPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1d Bridge) on a SDH Network The EPLAN service (IEEE 802.1d bridge) provides a LAN solution for multipoint-to-multipoint convergence. This service is applicable where the user-side data communication equipment connected to the transmission network does not support VLAN tags or where the VLAN planning cannot be disclosed to the network operator. 10.17 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge) on a SDH Network The EVPLAN service (IEEE 802.1q bridge) provides a LAN solution for multipoint-tomultipoint convergence. This service is applicable where the user-side data communication Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


276



equipment, which is connected to the transmission network, does not support VLAN tags or where the VLAN planning cannot be disclosed to the network operator. 10.18 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1ad Bridge) on a SDH Network The QinQ technology provides an economical and easy solution for Layer 2 virtual private networks (VPNs). The IEEE 802.1ad bridge uses the QinQ technology to provide the VPN solution, thus facilitating the identifying, differentiating, and grooming of EVPLAN services. 10.19 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL and EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge) on a SDH Network The EGSH board supports the EVPL and EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge) on a same port. Based on different VLANs, EVPL and EVPLAN services can be accessed through a same port, which is applicable to the scenario where the EVPL and EVPLAN users share the same port. 10.20 Parameters

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


277



10.1 Ethernet Service Types The WDM equipment supports the following Ethernet services: Ethernet private line (EPL), Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL), Ethernet private local area network (EPLAN) services, and Ethernet virtual private local area network (EVPLAN) services. NOTE

When configuring Ethernet services between the client-side ports of the boards, the ALS function of the client side interfaces should be set to Disable.

10.1.1 Ethernet Private Line Service Ethernet private line services include Ethernet private line (EPL) services and Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL) services.

EPL Services Two nodes are used to access EPL services and implement transparent transmission of the Ethernet services to the users. Service of one user occupies one VCTRUNK and does not need to share the bandwidth with the services of the other users, as shown in Figure 10-1. Hence, in the case of EPL services, a bandwidth is exclusively occupied by the service of a user and the services of different users are isolated. In addition, the extra QoS scheme and security scheme are not required. Figure 10-1 EPL services

EVPL Services For EVPL services, services of different users share the bandwidth. Therefore, the VLAN/QinQ scheme needs to be used for differentiating the services of different users. If the services of different users need to be configured with different quality levels, you need to adopt the corresponding QoS scheme. EVPL services are classified into two types, depending on whether the PORT or VCTRUNK is shared. There are two types of EVPL services: l

PORT-shared EVPL services

l

VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services – VLAN tag-based convergence and distribution of EVPL services

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


278



– QinQ technology-based convergence and distribution of EVPL services PORT-shared EVPL services As shown in Figure 10-2, the services of different users are accessed through an external port (that is, PORT) at a station, and are then isolated from each other by using the VLAN IDs. Services are transmitted to other PORTs at this station through different VCTRUNKs. Figure 10-2 PORT-shared EVPL services

VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services As shown in Figure 10-3, the services of different users are isolated by using the VLAN/QinQ scheme. Hence, the services of different users can be transmitted in the same VCTRUNK. l

VLAN tag-based convergence and distribution of EVPL services Figure 10-3 VLAN tag-based convergence and distribution of EVPL services

l

QinQ technology-based convergence and distribution of EVPL services The implementation principle of the QinQ technology-based EVPL services and the implementation principle of the VLAN tag-based EVPL services are similar. Users of VLAN tag-based EVPL services are identified by only one layer of VLAN IDs. Users of QinQ technology-based EVPL services are identified by multiple layers of VLAN IDs. In this manner, the number of VLANs is extended and more users can be identified.

10.1.2 Ethernet LAN Service Huawei OSN equipment supports Ethernet private local area network (EPLAN) and Ethernet virtual private local area network (EVPLAN) services.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


279



EPLAN Services Currently, Ethernet LAN services mainly refer to Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN) services. Based on the Layer 2 switch function, The EPLAN realizes transmission of the accessed data based on destination media access control (MAC) address of the data. The EPLAN services can be accessed from a minimum of two nodes. The services of different users need not share the bandwidth. That is, in the case of EPLAN services, a bandwidth is exclusively occupied by the service of a user and the services of different users are isolated. In addition, the extra QoS scheme and security scheme are not required. There is more than one node in the EPLAN services, Hence, the nodes need to learn the MAC addresses and forward data according to MAC addresses. Therefore, Layer 2 switching is involved. See Figure 10-4. Figure 10-4 EPLAN services NM

NE3

NE2 VB1

NE4

VB1

VCTRUNK1 PORT3

VCTRUNK1 PORT3

F2 NE1

F3

VB1 VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2

F1

PORT3

NE2 VCTRUNK

PORT

NE1 PORT3

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK

PORT

10M

VB1

VB1

VCTRUNK1

F1

F2

PORT3 10M

NE4

VCTRUNK2

VCTRUNK VCTRUNK1

PORT PORT3 10M

WDM

F3

VB1

VB Service Mount of VB Cross-conection

As shown in Figure 10-4, three branches of user F need to communicate with each other. On NE1, the IEEE 802.1d bridge is established to achieve EPLAN services. IEEE 802.1d bridge can create the MAC address-based forwarding table, which is periodically updated by using the Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


280



self-learning function of the system. Accessed data can be forwarded or broadcast within the domain of the IEEE 802.1d bridge according to the destination MAC addresses. To avoid broadcast storm, the EPLAN services cannot be set as a ring. If the EPLAN services are set as a ring, the rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP) or Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) must be started in the network.

EVPLAN Services EVPLAN services of different users need to share the bandwidth. Hence, the VLAN/QinQ scheme needs to be used for differentiating the data of different users. If the services of different users need to be configured with different quality levels, you need to adopt the corresponding QoS scheme. As shown in Figure 10-5, three branches of user G need to communicate with each other. Services of user G need to be isolated from the services of user H. In this case, the operator needs to separately groom the VoIP services and HSI services, be established on NE1 to achieve EVPLAN services. IEEE 802.1q bridge: IEEE 802.1q bridge supports isolation by using one layer of VLAN tags. This bridge checks the contents of the VLAN tags that are in the data frames and performs Layer 2 switching according to the destination MAC addresses and VLAN IDs. Figure 10-5 EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge)

NE3

NM

H2

PORT2

NE2

NE4 NE1

PORT1

H3 PORT1

G2 H1

PORT2

G3 PORT6

PORT5

G1

VCTRUNK IEEE 802.1q bridge VLAN 200 VCTRUNK VCTRUNK 1 2 PORT6

IEEE 802.1q bridge VLAN 100 VCTRUNK VCTRUNK 1 2 PORT5

As shown in Figure 10-6, the GE services from user M and the FE services from user N need to access network respectively. In this case, the operator needs to separately groom the GE services and FE services, and isolate the data on the transmission network side. On NE1, the IEEE 802.1ad bridge must be established to support the EVPLAN services. IEEE 802.1ad bridge: The IEEE 802.1ad bridge supports data frames with two layers of VLAN tags. This bridge adopts the outer S-VLAN tags to isolate different VLANs and supports only the mounted ports whose attributes are C-Aware or S-Aware. This bridge supports the following switching modes: Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


281



l

This bridge does not check the contents of the VLAN tags that are in the packets, and performs Layer 2 switching according to the destination MAC addresses of the packets.

l

This bridge checks the contents of the VLAN tags that are in the packets, and performs Layer 2 switching according to the destination MAC addresses and the S-VLAN IDs of the packets.

Figure 10-6 EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1ad bridge)

NE3

NM Service C-VLAN 10 GE 20 FE

Service C-VLAN GE 10 FE 20

PORT1

NE2

User M

11

NE1

8 GE

PORT1

NE4

11

8

User N FE VCTRUNK

IEEE 802.1ad bridge S-VLAN 100 VCTRUNK VCTRUNK 1 2 PORT7

IEEE 802.1ad bridge S-VLAN 200 VCTRUNK VCTRUNK 1 2 PORT8

10.2 Basic Concepts Before you configure Ethernet boards with services, you need to learn the basic concepts of configuring the Ethernet service.

10.2.1 Tag Attributes In a virtual LAN, the tag attribute of an Ethernet port indicates how the port processes Ethernet packets. Ethernet packets are classified into tagged and untagged packets in 802.1q. A four-byte field is added to the Ethernet frame header of a tagged packet. The 802.1q-compliant field is used to identify the VLAN ID. An untagged packet does not have such a four-byte field. That is, tagged packets contain VLAN IDs and untagged packets do not contain VLAN IDs. An Ethernet port has the following three types, which are Tag aware, Access and Hybrid. See Table 10-1 for details on how an Ethernet board processes tagged and untagged packets at the ingress.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


282



Table 10-1 Processing policy at ingress Port Type

Tagged Packet

Untagged Packet

Tag aware

Transparently transmitted

Discarded

Access

Discarded

Added with the default VLAN tag

Hybrid


Added with the default VLAN tag

See Table 10-2 for details on how an Ethernet board processes tagged and untagged packets at the egress. Table 10-2 Processing policy at egress Port Type

Tagged Packet

Untagged Packet

Tag aware


-

Access

The VLAN tag is removed

-

Hybrid

The VLAN tag is removed if it is the same as the default tag for the port

-

Transparently transmitted if the VLAN tag is different from the default tag for the port

As shown in Table 10-1 and Table 10-2, in an actual network, you need to set the port type for the Ethernet board of an NE according to the Tag attribute of the messages sent from the userside equipment. If the user-side equipment sends the Untag message, set the ingress port to Access and set the egress port to Tag aware. If the user-side equipment sends the Tag message, set the ingress port to Tag aware and set the egress port to Tag aware.

10.2.2 VLAN Group This section describes the application scenarios of the VLAN group.

VLAN Group The U2000 and its managed NG WDM equipment organize certain consecutively accessed VLAN services in a group (usually service demands of the same type) to form a VLAN group. U2000 creates services, manages the QoS flow, and performs Ethernet OAM operations according to the initial VLAN ID so that the other VLAN services in the VLAN group have the same configuration.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


283



Application Scenarios of the VLAN Group Currently, the digital subscriber line access multiplexer (DSLAM) does not support the QinQ function. The broadband remote access server (BRAS), however, requires that two layers of VLAN tags should be verified. Based on this, the VLAN grouping function provides the broadband bearer solution from the DSLAM to the BRAS. Currently, the NG WDM equipment supports the following three service scenarios: l

Convergence from multiple GE services to one 10GE service. The BRAS has the 10GE access port. The GE service of the DSLAM is converged to the 10GE port of the BRAS/ PE through the NG WDM VLAN group.

l

Convergence from multiple GE services to one GE service. The BRAS increases the number of access ports. The WDM equipment implements GE transparent transmission or GE convergence from the DSLAM to the BRAS.

l

Private line from GE services to GE services. In the metropolitan enterprise private lines, point-to-point service transparent transmission is required. In this case, a typical transmission channel is adopted. That is, services are transmitted over the 10GE optical line by using the WDM equipment. This is realized as follows: GE services are accessed on the client side of the WDM equipment, and then the GE services are multiplexed to the 10GE line for transmission through the VLAN group.

10.2.3 QinQ The QinQ technology is the basis for implementing EVPL services. QinQ technology achieves VLAN nesting. With the increase of network users, the current number of VLAN IDs fail to meet the network requirement. With the QinQ technology, users can be identified through multiple layers of VLAN IDs. In this case, the VLAN is extended. The VLAN is a LAN technology developed along with the Ethernet switch technology. As the Ethernet technology is deployed largely in the networks of carriers, which are the metropolitan area networks, implementing the 802.1Q VLAN to isolate and identifying users is limited to a great extent. The VLAN tag domain that is defined in the IEEE 802.1Q has 12 bits, which can represent 4K VLANs only. This cannot meet the requirements for identifying a large number of users in metropolitan area networks. In order to increase the number of VLANs, the QinQ technology is developed. The QinQ technology is realized by adding a layer of 802.1Q tags to 802.1Q packets. Thus, the number of VLANs is increased to 4096 x 4096. With the development of the metro Ethernet and the requirement of fine operation, QinQ double tags can be implemented in other scenarios. The inner and outer tags can represent different information. The inner tag (namely the C-VLAN) represents the client and the outer tag (namely the S-VLAN) represents the service. See Table 10-3. Table 10-3 EVPL services based on QinQ Operation

Illustration

Add S-VLAN Data

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

C-VLAN

Data

C-VLAN


S-VLAN

284


Operation


Illustration

Strip S-VLAN

Transparently Transmit CVLAN

Data

C-VLAN

Data

C-VLAN

Transparently Transmit SVLAN

Data

Transparently Transmit SVLAN and CVLAN

Data

Translate SVLAN

Data

Data

S-VLAN

S-VLAN

Data

S-VLAN1

C-VLAN

Data

C-VLAN S-VLAN

S-VLAN

Data

Data

C-VLAN

C-VLAN S-VLAN

S-VLAN2

NOTE

l The "Strip S-VLAN" is valid only for unidirectional services. l The LEM24 and LEX4 boards do not support "Add S-VLAN and C-VLAN" and "Strip S-VLAN and CVLAN".

10.2.4 MAC Address Filtering MAC address filtering is an OTN broadband transmission solution. MAC address filtering is enabled for Ethernet data boards to alleviate router load. Figure 10-7 describes the principle and function of MAC address filtering. 1.

Station 2: Sets the MAC address of the opposite BRAS1.

2.

Station 3: Dual feeds services. The dual-fed services carry the MAC address of the destination BRAS1 and respectively reach stations 1 and 2.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


285


3.


Station 2: Analyzes whether the MAC address of the destination router is included in the MAC addresses set in the opposite BRAS1 of station 2. l Included: Indicates that BRAS2 is not the destination BRAS of the service and the transmission of the service stops at station 2. l Excluded: Indicates that BRAS2 is the destination BRAS of the service and the service is transmitted to BRAS2.

Figure 10-7 Principle and function of MAC address filtering BRAS1 Station 1

TBE

BRAS2 Filter MAC address on the standby node

L4G

Station 2

TBE L4G

L2

L4G Station 3

Working Service Protection Service

BRAS

Broadband Remote Access Server

10.2.5 IGMP Snooping The Internet group management protocol (IGMP) Snooping technology is used to enhance the multicast management capability of Layer 2 switching equipment. This technology applies to data service boards that support Layer 2 switching. Based on the interception of Layer 3 IGMP packets, the Layer 2 multicast function is created and maintained, to prevent multicast packets from being broadcast in the Layer 2 equipment.

Overview l

Restriction on the User Access: Illegal users are prevented from using multicast services by configuring the attributes of the multicast strategy, static multicast group, static router port and unknown multicast service forwarding. As shown in Figure 10-9, the multicast group strategy is configured on the equipment. In this way, the range of the group addresses that can be accessed by users through the access control list (ACL) is set. Thus, the multicast packets that can be received by the user host can be controlled.

l

Quick Response to the Link Change: When the topology of the network where the equipment resides changes, the switching equipment should set up new forwarding table items in minutes after receiving the subsequent multicast query packet. As a result, the

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


286



multicast services are interrupted for a long time. The IGMP Snooping informs the router of the change in the response spanning tree topology and then quickly transmits the query packets. In this way, the switching equipment in the downstream can learn the multicast information quickly and decrease the service interruption time.

Basic Concepts 1.

Enabling the IGMP Snooping Protocol l If the IGMP Snooping protocol is enabled, the equipment begins to perform the learning and aging of the router port and multicast group. Then, the multicast services are multicast in corresponding multicast groups. l If the IGMP Snooping protocol is disabled, the equipment stops learning and aging of the router port and multicast group, and deletes all the learned dynamic multicast groups.

2.

Router Port The router port refers to the port that faces the multicast router. The Ethernet data board of the equipment regards the port that receives the IGMP query packets as the router port. Router ports are classified into two types: l Dynamic router ports: They receive the IGMP query packets. These ports are decided on the basis of the packets transmitted between routers and hosts. Moreover, they are dynamically maintained. Each of this port can enable a router port aging timer. When the timer times out, this router port is invalid and the multicast group that relies on the router port is deleted. l Static router ports: They are specified with configuration commands, and are not aged. NOTE

Both the L4G and TBE boards do not support the static router ports.

3.

Member Port The multicast member port refers to the port that faces the host of the member. The Layer 2 equipment forwards the multicast service packets to these ports. The multicast group member ports, referred to as member ports for short, are classified into the following two types: l Dynamic member ports, which can receive the IGMP report packets. These ports are decided on the basis of the packets transmitted between routers and hosts. Moreover, they are dynamically maintained. Each dynamic member port is aged after reaching the maximum non-response times. l Static member ports, which are specified by users by using configuration commands, cannot be aged.

Basic Principle As a multicast constraint mechanism of the Layer 2 Ethernet switch, the IGMP Snooping runs at the data link layer, to manage and control multicast groups. When the Layer 2 Ethernet switch receives an IGMP packet between the host and router, the IGMP Snooping analyzes the information carried by the packet. l

When monitoring an IGMP response packet sent by the host, the switch adds the host into the corresponding multicast table.

l

When monitoring an IGMP departure packet sent by the host, the switch deletes the multicast table item corresponding to the host.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


287



By monitoring IGMP packets continuously, the switch creates and maintains the MAC multicast address table at Layer 2, and forwards multicast packets sent by the router according to the MAC multicast address table. If the IGMP Snooping does not run, multicast packets are broadcast at Layer 2. When the IGMP Snooping runs, the packets are multicast instead of broadcast at Layer 2. See Figure 10-8. Figure 10-8 IGMP Snooping

Multicast management router

Multicast service source

IGMP Snooping-supported NGWDM equipment

Host (Non-multicast member)

Host Host Host (Multicast member) (Multicast member) (Non-multicast member)

Physical connection Flow direction of the ulticast service

Compliant Standard and Protocol: The IGMP complies with RFC 4541, Considerations for Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) and Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) Snooping Switches.

Application The IGMP Snooping enhances the resource utilization through multicast forwarding, and the network security by restricting the user access. The advantages of the application of the IGMP Snooping are as follows: l

The network bandwidth can be saved.

l

Signals are forwarded based on the VLAN. Hence, the information security is enhanced.

l

Quick response is made to the link fault. Hence, the reliability is enhanced.

Figure 10-9 shows how to configure the IGMP Snooping function. After reaching the equipment, the multicast packets are distributed from the port of the host where group members exist in the downstream. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


288



Figure 10-9 IGMP Snooping application

Internet /Intranet Source

OTN/OCS

Host 1

OTN/OCS

Host 2

Group member

Group member

Host3

Host 4

Host 5

Group member

Multicast packets

10.2.6 STP/RSTP/MSTP Generally, the topology for the Layer 2 switching network involves the loop. This may result in the broadcast storm and MAC bridge table flapping. The STP/RSTP protocol is used to trim a bridged LAN to a single spanning tree based on the logical topology. Thus, the broadcast storm can be avoided. MSTP is compatible with the STP and RSTP, and it also fixes the defects of the STP and RSTP. The MSTP fixes the defects of the STP and RSTP. The convergence rate of the MSTP is fast. In addition, traffic of different VLANs passes through corresponding trails, which provides a well load balancing mechanism.

Basic Principle STP applies to a redundant network. Based on a certain algorithm, the STP is used to block redundant trails so that a loop network can be trimmed as a tree network. In this way, the reproduction and endless cycling of packets in the loop network are avoided. Besides, a connected network without redundant trails can be formed in the case of the link failure. RSTP is an improvement of the STP. The RSTP not only supports all the functions of the STP, but also shortens the delay of generating the network topology structure and ensures the connectivity of the network. STP is based on this basic principle. That is, bridge protocol data units (BPDUs) are transmitted between bridges to decide the network topology structure. The STP blocks redundant links to prevent possible loops in the bridged network, and activates the redundant backup links to restore Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


289



the network connectivity when the working trail fails. BPDUs of STP are classified into two types: l

Configuration BPDU (CBPDU)

l

BPDU for topology change notice (TCN)

RSTP is based on STP. RSTP makes, however, detailed modifications and supplements to STP. Different from STP, RSTP shortens the time delay at the ports from congestion to forwarding, rapidly restores the network connectivity, and provides better services if no temporary loops are caused. The protocol packets transmitted between the bridges using RSTP are rapid spanning tree protocol data units (namely, RST PDUs). NOTE

l OptiX NG WDM the Ethernet data boards support both STP and RSTP. By default, they support RSTP. l Only the LEX4/LEM24 boards support MSTP.

Status Migration for Ports The STP ports are of either the Enabled or Disabled status. The Enabled status is further classified into the following statuses: Blocking, Listening, Learning and Forwarding. According to the forwarding and learning situation of the port, RSTP sorts Disabled, Blocking and Listening to Discarding. For this reason, there are altogether three statuses: Learning, Forwarding and Discarding. Figure 10-10 shows the status migration of an STP port. Figure 10-10 Status migration of STP ports

Disabled Listening

Disabled

Blocking

Enabled

Learning

Disabled

Forwarding Disabled

l

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Disabled: The port in the Disabled status is not involved in the topology and does not forward any packets. Any sub-status of the Enabled status can migrate to this status. The Disabled status must migrate to the Blocking status to enter the Enabled status. The STP cannot control this status because the port in the Disabled status is not involved in the topology. This status can only be controlled by the management. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

290



l

Blocking: The port in the Blocking status is involved in the topology, and does not forward any packets. Moreover, it does not learn the MAC addresses.

l

Listening: The port in the Listening status is involved in the topology. It can forward BPDUs and discard service packets. It does not, however, learn the MAC addresses. The Listening status is a temporary status when a topology is being created or transformed.

l

Learning: The port in the Learning status is involved in the topology. It can forward BPDUs and discard service packets. Moreover, it learns the MAC addresses of the service packets to make ready for forwarding these packets. The Learning status is a temporary status when a topology is being created or transformed.

l

Forwarding: The port in forwarding status is involved in the topology. It can forward the service packets and BPDUs.

Migrate some ports into the Forwarding or Blocking status by controlling the port status. If a loop exists, at least one port is blocked to release the loop. This is the ultimate goal of the STP algorithm. For the STP, the convergence time is relatively long and the ports play unclear roles. In this case, the RSTP is widely used and is compatible with the STP. In comparison with the STP, the RSTP shows the following improvements. l

By configuration, The definition of the role of a port is clearer and there are following four types of port: Root port, Designated port, Replacing port, Backup port. NOTE

RSTP can configure an edge port to help the topology-independent port to rapidly forward service packets.

l

A more active handshake mechanism is applied to decrease the port status to the following types: Forwarding, Learning, and Discarding.

l

The Discarding status in the RSTP maps with the Listening, Blocking, and Disabled status in the STP.

l

Fast convergence.

Improvement of the MSTP The MSTP fixes the defects of the STP and RSTP. The convergence rate of the MSTP is fast. In addition, traffic of different VLANs passes through corresponding trails, which provides a well load balancing mechanism. The MSTP divides a switching network into different regions, each of which is called an MST region. Within each region, there are multiple spanning trees, which are independent from each other. Each spanning tree is a multiple spanning tree instance (MSTI). The MSTP sets the VLAN mapping table, which specifies the mapping relation between VLAN and MSTI. The network shown in Figure 1 can be considered as an MST region when MSTP is used. Thus, Figure 10-11 shows the result. It is computed that two spanning trees are generated for VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 respectively. l

MSTI 1 takes Switch B as the root switch to forward packets of VLAN 2.

l

MSTI 2 takes Switch F as the root switch to forward packets of VLAN 3.

In this way, all VLAN packets can be properly forwarded. In addition, different VLAN packets are forwarded through different paths. Thus, the load is balanced. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


291



Figure 10-11 MSTI in an MST region Host A

Switch A

Switch B

VLAN 3

Host B

VLAN 2 VLAN 2

Switch C

Switch D

VLAN 2 VLAN 3 VLAN 3

Host C

Switch E

Switch B (Root)

Switch A

Switch A

VLAN 2 VLAN 2

Switch C

Host D

Switch F

Switch D

VLAN 2 VLAN 3

Switch B

VLAN 3

VLAN 2

Switch C

Switch D

VLAN 2 VLAN 3 VLAN 3

Switch E

Switch F

Switch E

MSTI 1 -> VLAN 2

Switch F (Root)

MSTI 2 -> VLAN 3

10.3 Configuration Process of Ethernet Services This section describes the configuration process of Ethernet services using figures.

10.3.1 EPL Service Configuration Process This section describes the EPL service configuration process that mainly consists of deploying a network, configuring source NEs, configuring sink NEs, configuring pass-through NEs, and verifying services. Figure 10-12 shows the process for configuring EPL services.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


292



Figure 10-12 EPL service configuration process Required Optional

Configure source NE

Deploy a Network

Creating and Configuring NEs

Setting External Ports Attributes of Ethernet Boards

Configure sink NE


Configure pass-through NE

Creating CrossConnection Between Line and Line Boards

Creating Fibers Setting Internal Ports Attributes of Ethernet Boards

Configuring Communication

Setting the NE Time

Configuring Clocks

Setting Internal Ports Attributes of Ethernet Boards

Creating CrossConnection Between Ethernet and Line Boards


Creating EPL Services

Creating EPL Services

Verify service

Test the Ethernet Services

Checking the Connectivity of Ethernet Service Checking the Connectivity of Ethernet Port

Configuring Orderwire

Configuring Protection

NOTE

l In the landscape orientation of the configuration flow chart by using U2000, there are five main phases of EPL service configuration process. They are deploying a network, configuring source NEs, configuring sink NEs, configuring pass-through NEs, and verifying services. l The portrait orientation of the flow chart shows the relationships between operation tasks in each phase.

10.3.2 EVPL (QinQ) Service Configuration Process This section describes the EVPL (QinQ) service configuration process that mainly consists of deploying a network, configuring the source NEs, configuring the sink NEs, configuring passthrough NEs, and verifying services. Figure 10-13 shows the process for configuring EVPL (QinQ) services.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


293



Figure 10-13 EVPL (QinQ) service configuration process Required Optional

Deploying a Network

Configure source NE

Configure sink NE

Creating and Configuring NEs



Creating Fibers

Configuring Communication

Setting the NE Time Configuring Clocks Configuring Orderwire Configuring Protection

Setting Internal Ports Attributes of Ethernet Boards Creating CrossConnection Between Ethernet and Line Boards Creating EVPL(QinQ) Services


Creating CrossConnection Between Line and Line Boards


Verify service


Configuring Ethernet Service OAM Configuring the Ethernet Port OAM

Enable NE Performance Monitoring

Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE

Back up NE Configuration Data

Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board

Automatically Backing Up the NE Database to a CF Card Manually Backing Up the NE Database to a CF Card

Creating CrossConnection Between Ethernet and Line Boards Creating EVPL(QinQ) Services

NOTE

l In the landscape orientation of the configuration flow chart by using U2000, there are five main phases of EVPL (QinQ) service configuration process. They are deploying a network, configure source NE, configure sink NE, configure pass-through NE and verify service. l The portrait orientation of the flow chart shows the relationships between operation tasks in each phase.

10.3.3 EPLAN Service Configuration Process This section describes the EPLAN service configuration process that mainly consists of deploying a network, configuring source NEs, configuring sink NEs, configuring pass-through NEs, and verifying services. Figure 10-14 shows the process for configuring EPLAN services.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


294



Figure 10-14 EPLAN service configuration process Required Optional

Deploying a Network

Creating and Configuring NEs Creating Fibers Configuring Communicati on Setting the NE Time

Configuring Clocks Configuring Orderwire Configuring Protection

Configure source NE

Configure sink NE







Creating EPLAN Services

Creating EPLAN Services

Creating VLAN

Creating VLAN

Configuring QOS

Configuring QOS


Configuring CrossConnection Between Line and Line Boards

Verify service

Enable NE Performance Monitoring


Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE

Checking the Connectivity of Ethernet Service Checking the Connectivity of Ethernet Port

Back up NE Configuration Data

Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board

Automatically Backing Up the NE Database to a CF Card Manually Backing Up the NE Database to a CF Card

NOTE

l In the landscape orientation of the configuration flow chart by using U2000, there are five main phases of EPLAN service configuration process. They are deploying a network, configure source NE, configure sink NE, configure pass-through NE and verify service. l The portrait orientation of the flow chart shows the relationships between operation tasks in each phase.

10.4 Configuring Ethernet Services in an OTN System This section describes how to configure Ethernet services in an OTN system.

10.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections on an Ethernet Board Before the client Ethernet services are transmitted to the WDM side, appropriate crossconnections must be created on the U2000.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. Applicable to the LEM24, LEX4, TBE, L4G board. When you configure cross-connections, make sure that the source optical channel is the same as the sink optical channel. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


295




Procedure on the U2000 Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click an NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab. Step 3 Click New and then the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Configure the parameters for the cross-connection and click OK. For details of the parameters, see 2.8.1 WDM Cross-Connection Configuration.

Step 5 Click Query. Confirm that the query results are the same as the values that are set. ----End

Procedure on the Web LCT Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click an NE and choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-Connection Service Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration tab. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


296



Step 3 Click New and then the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Configure the parameters for the cross-connection and click OK.

Step 5 Click Query. Confirm that the query results are the same as the values that are set. ----End

10.4.2 Creating EPL Services You can configure EPL services for a single NE.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The port attribute must be configured for the Ethernet board. The cross-connections must be configured for the Ethernet boards. Applicable to the TBE and L4G board of the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800. Applicable to the LEX4 and LEM24 board of the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800.


Background Information The configuration of service parameters on both ends of an Ethernet service must be the same. The following are the three types of EPL services that can be configured on the NMS. l

EPL services between PORT and VCTRUNK ports.

l

EPL services between VCTRUNK and VCTRUNK ports.

l

EPL services between PORT and PORT ports.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


297



NOTE

l For the above three types of services, if the source VLAN ID and sink VLAN ID are different, this VLAN is a switched VLAN. To configure VLAN SNCP at the receive end of services, the source VLAN ID and sink VLAN ID must be the same. l For the port description and configuration rules of each board, refer to the Hardware Description of the corresponding equipment.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the EPL Service tab. Click New and the Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Select EPL from the Service Type drop-down list. Step 4 Configure the information related to the EPL service, such as Direction, Source Port, Sink Port, etc.

NOTE

l You can set Direction to unidirectional or bidirectional. l In Port Attributes, you can set Port Enabled and TAG for a port in the Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box, or in Ethernet Interface. l In Port Attributes, certain parameters can be modified. If port attributes are already set, however, retain the default values.

Step 5 Click Apply or OK. The created EPL service is displayed in the window. Step 6 Optional: If the VLAN SNCP is required at the receive end of services, after creating Ethernet services at the transmit end, double-click the OAM Enabled field corresponding to the Ethernet services and set it to Enabled. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


298



NOTE

When creating the VLAN SNCP protection on the TBE board, you can choose not to enable the OAM function because a large volume of service data may be transmitted in consideration of bandwidth usage

----End

10.4.3 Creating EPLAN Services Based on the Ethernet data layer 2 switch function, EPLAN services allow the accessed data to be transported to its destination media access control (MAC) address. This section describes the method to set the EPLAN service.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The port attributes must be set for the Ethernet board. The electrical cross-connect services between the TBE board and the line board must be created. Applicable to the TBE, L4G board of the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800. Applicable to the LEX4, LEM24 board of the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800. Each TBE, L4G LEM24 and LEX4 board support one virtual bridge (VB).


Background Information One VB can be created in each Ethernet board in the system. Inside VBs, the MAC address learning function is used to complete the forwarding of Ethernet data. The MAC address table is updated periodically based on the address learning result.

Precaution NOTE

Setting the parameters of a port affect the service of the board. Before setting the parameters of a port, configure State of the port as OOS at the Ethernet Interface. After setting the parameters, restore State of the port to IS.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Click the Service Mount tab. Step 2 Click New and the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Complete the information of the EPLAN service. Enter a VB Name, and select VB Type and Bridge Switch Mode. Step 4 Click Configure Mount... in the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box. The Service Mount Configuration dialog box is displayed. Select a port in the Available Mounted Ports pane and click Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

299



CAUTION Modifying the ports that are mounted to the bridge may interrupt the service.

Step 5 Click OK to return to Create Ethernet LAN Service.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


300



Step 6 Click OK. Step 7 Select the Service Mount tab, and then click Query. The created EPLAN service is displayed. NOTE

After you create an EPLAN service, if you want to set the Hub/Spoke attribute of a VB port, 1. Click Query in the Service Mount panel to query the parameters value. 2. Double-click Hub/Spoke and select an option from the drop-down list. Services are interoperable between Hub ports or between a Hub port and a Spoke port, but are isolated between Spoke ports.

----End

10.4.4 Creating VLANs Filtering You can create VLANs to divide services in a virtual bridge (VB). The PORT port and the VCTRUNK port that have different VLANs are isolated and do not transmit services to each other.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The port must be mounted to a VB. Make sure that you set Bridge Switch Mode to IVL/Ingress Filter Enable. Only in this way, you can create VLANs. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


301




Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Select a service and click the VLAN Filtering tab. Step 2 Select the service and click New, the Create VLAN dialog box is displayed. Enter a VLAN ID, select an Available forwarding port, and then click

.

Step 3 Click OK. Step 4 Click Query. Confirm that the query results are the same as the values that are set. Step 5 Create other VLAN Filtering according to the requirements. ----End

10.4.5 Creating VLAN Unicast You can configure VLAN unicast, to allow a packet whose destination address is the specified MAC address, to be forwarded through the specified port in the specified VLAN. If the VB swapping mode is SVL/Ingress Filter Disable, the packets are forwarded through the specified port in the entire VB.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The VLAN must be created.


Precaution NOTE


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


302



Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Click the VLAN Unicast tab. Step 2 Click New and the Create VLAN Unicast dialog box is displayed. Set VLAN ID, MAC Address, and Physical Port.

NOTE

The first byte of the MAC Address of VLAN unicast must be even. For the configuration of related parameters, see 10.20.10 Parameters: Ethernet LAN Service.

Step 3 Click OK. Step 4 Click Query. Confirm that the query results are the same as the values that are set. ----End

10.4.6 Configuring the Aging Time for MAC Addresses You can configure the aging time for MAC addresses, to realize the dynamic address aging function. If the MAC addresses that do not appear again in the transport network during the aging time, the system considers that no information needs to be sent to these MAC addresses. The MAC addresses are deleted from the MAC address table, so that the MAC address table can contain more MAC addresses.

Prerequisite You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. Applicable to the TBE board of the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800. Applicable to the LEX4 and LEM24 boards of the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800. Applicable to the EGSH board of the OptiX OSN 8800.


Background Information If the aging time is too long, the MAC address table may save many outdated MAC address items. This may use up the resources of the MAC address table. As a result, the MAC address table may not be updated according to the change in the network. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


303



If the aging time is too short, the effective MAC address items may be deleted. As a result, packets that are broadcasted cannot find the destination MAC address and the performance of the network is affected.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > Aging Time from the Function Tree. Step 2 Double-click MAC Address Aging Time and the MAC Address Aging Time dialog box is displayed. Enter the value of the aging time. NOTE

MAC Address Aging Time supports three time units, including minute, hour, and day. The value ranges from 1 to 120. When the unit of the MAC Address Aging Time is set to day, the valid range is 1-12.

Step 3 Click OK and then click Apply. ----End

10.4.7 Creating EVPL (QinQ) Services When the services of multiple users that have the same C-VLAN ID are accessed on the same station and need to be transmitted on the same VCTRUNK, a layer of S-VLAN tag is added to isolate the services of different users from each other.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The port attribute must be configured for the Ethernet board. The cross-connections must be configured for the Ethernet boards. Applicable to the TBE, L4G and ECOM board of the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800. Applicable to the LEX4 and LEM24 board of the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800.


Background Information EVPL (QinQ) services is the Ethernet service packets that are added with an S-VLAN tag or CVLAN tag. In this way, the extension of VLAN ID is realized.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Click the EPL Service tab. Step 2 Select the Display QinQ Shared Service check box in the lower right corner. Step 3 Click New and the Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box is displayed. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


304



Step 4 Select EVPL(QinQ) from the Service Type drop-down list. Step 5 Configure the information related to the EVPL (QinQ) service, such as Direction, Source Port, Sink Port, etc. NOTE

l You can only set Direction to unidirectional. l In Port Attributes, certain parameters can be modified. If port attributes are already set, however, use the default values. l In Port Attributes, you can set TAG for a port in Ethernet Interface.

Step 6 Click Apply or OK. The created EVPL service is displayed in the window. Step 7 Optional: To create VLAN SNCP at the receive end of services, after creating Ethernet services at the transmit end, double-click the field of OAM Enabled and set the value to Enabled. Step 8 Select the Ethernet Line Service tab, and then click Query. The created EVPL (QinQ) service is displayed. NOTE

To transmit a large volume of service data, you do not need to set OAM Enabled during the creation of VLAN SNCP on the TBE board in consideration of bandwidth usage.

----End Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


305



10.5 Configuring Ethernet Services in an OCS System This section describes how to configure Ethernet services in an OCS system.

10.5.1 Creating Cross-Connections Between an Ethernet Board and a Line Board The cross-connections between an Ethernet board and a line board carry Ethernet services. Hence, you need to create cross-connections between the Ethernet board and the line board prior to creating Ethernet services.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The EGSH and OCS line board must be installed.


Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. NOTE

If the Web LCT is used, the navigation path is as follows: In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Cross-Connection Configuration from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click Create and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Create a cross connection between Ethernet and line boards by entering the values of the attribute in the dialog box. For details of the parameters, see 9.7.1 SDH Service Configuration. NOTE

l In the case of the EGSH board, Level can be set to only VC3 or VC4. l The service level and timeslot of the cross-connection created must be consistent with the level and timeslot of the bound path of the Ethernet interface.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


306



Step 4 Click OK. NOTE

When the operation is performed on the U2000, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Then, click Close.

----End

10.5.2 Creating EPL Services You can create an EPL service on a per-NE basis.

Prerequisite You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. Applies to the EGSH board.


Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the EGSH board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New. Step 3 In the Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box displayed, configure the relevant information about the EPL service. NOTE

l If an appropriate path is not available in the Bound Path field, click Configuration to bind new paths. l To configure the VLAN ID, you can set the same or different VLAN IDs for both the source and the sink ports.

Step 4 Click OK. ----End Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


307



10.5.3 Creating EPLAN Services You can create an EPLAN service on a per-NE basis.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The port attributes and bound paths must be set for the Ethernet board. Applies to the EGSH board.


Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service. Step 2 Click New. The Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Set the parameters of the bridge. Step 4 Configure service mounting relationships. Option

Description

Configure the services that are mounted to the IEEE 802.1d or IEEE 802.1q bridge.

Go to Step 5.

Configure the services that are mounted to the IEEE 802.1ad bridge.

Go to Step 6.

Step 5 Optional: Configure the services that are mounted to the IEEE 802.1d or IEEE 802.1q bridge.

CAUTION Modifying the ports that are mounted to the bridge may interrupt the service. 1.

Click Configure Mount.

2.

Select Available Mounted Ports and click

3.

Optional: Repeat Step 5.2 and select other ports to be mounted.

4.

Click OK.

.

Step 6 Optional: Configure the services that are mounted to the IEEE 802.1ad bridge. 1.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Click Configure Mount.


308



2.

Set the parameters for configuring mounted services.

3.

Click Add Mount Port.

4.

Repeat Step 6.2 to Step 6.3 to add the other mount ports.

5.

Click OK.

Step 7 Click Configuration to configure the VC paths that are bound with the internal ports. Step 8 Click OK and then click Close in the Operation Result dialog box. NOTE

After you create an EPLAN service, if you want to set the Hub/Spoke attribute of a VB port, double-click Hub/Spoke and select an option from the drop-down list. Services are interoperable between Hub ports or between a Hub port and a Spoke port, but are isolated between Spoke ports.

----End

10.5.4 Creating VLANs Filtering You can create VLANs to divide services in a virtual bridge (VB). The PORT port and the VCTRUNK port that have different VLANs are isolated and do not transmit services to each other.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The port must be mounted to a VB. Make sure that you set Bridge Switch Mode to IVL/Ingress Filter Enable. Only in this way, you can create VLANs.

Tools, Equipment and Materials U2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended) Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


309



Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Select a service and click the VLAN Filtering tab. Step 2 Select the service and click New, the Create VLAN dialog box is displayed. Enter a VLAN ID, select an Available forwarding port, and then click

.

Step 3 Click OK. Step 4 Click Query. Confirm that the query results are the same as the values that are set. Step 5 Create other VLAN Filtering according to the requirements. ----End

10.5.5 Creating VLAN Unicast You can configure VLAN unicast, to allow a packet whose destination address is the specified MAC address, to be forwarded through the specified port in the specified VLAN. If the VB swapping mode is SVL/Ingress Filter Disable, the packets are forwarded through the specified port in the entire VB.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The VLAN must be created.


Precaution NOTE


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


310



Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Click the VLAN Unicast tab. Step 2 Click New and the Create VLAN Unicast dialog box is displayed. Set VLAN ID, MAC Address, and Physical Port.

NOTE

The first byte of the MAC Address of VLAN unicast must be even. For the configuration of related parameters, see 10.20.10 Parameters: Ethernet LAN Service.

Step 3 Click OK. Step 4 Click Query. Confirm that the query results are the same as the values that are set. ----End

10.5.6 Configuring the Aging Time for MAC Addresses You can configure the aging time for MAC addresses, to realize the dynamic address aging function. If the MAC addresses that do not appear again in the transport network during the aging time, the system considers that no information needs to be sent to these MAC addresses. The MAC addresses are deleted from the MAC address table, so that the MAC address table can contain more MAC addresses.

Prerequisite You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. Applicable to the TBE board of the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800. Applicable to the LEX4 and LEM24 boards of the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800. Applicable to the EGSH board of the OptiX OSN 8800.


Background Information If the aging time is too long, the MAC address table may save many outdated MAC address items. This may use up the resources of the MAC address table. As a result, the MAC address table may not be updated according to the change in the network. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


311



If the aging time is too short, the effective MAC address items may be deleted. As a result, packets that are broadcasted cannot find the destination MAC address and the performance of the network is affected.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > Aging Time from the Function Tree. Step 2 Double-click MAC Address Aging Time and the MAC Address Aging Time dialog box is displayed. Enter the value of the aging time. NOTE

MAC Address Aging Time supports three time units, including minute, hour, and day. The value ranges from 1 to 120. When the unit of the MAC Address Aging Time is set to day, the valid range is 1-12.



Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The port attribute must be configured for the Ethernet board. The cross-connections must be configured for the Ethernet boards. Applicable to the TBE, L4G and ECOM board of the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800. Applicable to the LEX4 and LEM24 board of the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800.


Background Information EVPL (QinQ) services is the Ethernet service packets that are added with an S-VLAN tag or CVLAN tag. In this way, the extension of VLAN ID is realized.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Click the EPL Service tab. Step 2 Select the Display QinQ Shared Service check box in the lower right corner. Step 3 Click New and the Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box is displayed. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


312



Step 4 Select EVPL(QinQ) from the Service Type drop-down list. Step 5 Configure the information related to the EVPL (QinQ) service, such as Direction, Source Port, Sink Port, etc. NOTE

l You can only set Direction to unidirectional. l In Port Attributes, certain parameters can be modified. If port attributes are already set, however, use the default values. l In Port Attributes, you can set TAG for a port in Ethernet Interface.

Step 6 Click Apply or OK. The created EVPL service is displayed in the window. Step 7 Optional: To create VLAN SNCP at the receive end of services, after creating Ethernet services at the transmit end, double-click the field of OAM Enabled and set the value to Enabled. Step 8 Select the Ethernet Line Service tab, and then click Query. The created EVPL (QinQ) service is displayed. NOTE

To transmit a large volume of service data, you do not need to set OAM Enabled during the creation of VLAN SNCP on the TBE board in consideration of bandwidth usage.

----End Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


313




Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. Applicable to the EGSH board of the OptiX OSN 8800.


Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Click New. Step 2 Select the Display QinQ Shared Service check box in the lower right corner. Step 3 Click New and the Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Complete the information of the EVPL (QinQ) service. NOTE

If an appropriate path is not available in the Bound Path field, click Configuration to bind new paths.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


314



Step 5 Click OK. ----End

10.6 Configuration Example: Configuring EPL Services The EPL service provides a solution for the point-to-point transparent transmission of Ethernet services over an exclusive bandwidth. EPL services are applied to the scenarios where the userside data communication equipment connected to the transmission network does not support VLANs or where the VLAN planning is kept secret from the network carrier.

10.6.1 Networking Diagram This section describes the Ethernet service configuration in a ring network.

Service Requirement See Figure 10-15. The optical NEs (ONEs) A, B, C and D form a ring network. All the ONEs function as OADM stations. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


315



There is Ethernet communication between User1 and User2. In addition, a bidirectional EPL service exists between stations A and C and passes through station B. The working mode of the bidirectional EPL service is set to auto-negotiation and the bidirectional EPL service does not support the VLAN function. Figure 10-15 Networking diagram for configuring EPL services

User1 NM

IU 3 LEM24

A

IU 3 LEM24

B

D C

IU 3 LEM24

IU 3 LEM24

NG WDM Equipment

User2

Board Configuration Information In this example, each station is configured with one LEM24 board.

10.6.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation Ethernet services are received from an external port, encapsulated through an internal port, and transparently transmitted on the WDM network. In this way, the node communicates with the remote node. Figure 10-16 shows the signal flow of the bidirectional EPL services between stations A and C.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


316



Figure 10-16 Service signal flow of the bidirectional EPL service ONE C PORT5 PORT6 PORT7 PORT28

AP1

ONE B

LEM24 1(IN1/OUT1)-1 (VCTrunck 1)

AP2

1(IN1/OUT1)-1 (VCTrunck 1)


ONE A


LEM24

AP3 AP4

LEM24



:Client-side signals

:WDM-side working service

AP1

PORT5

AP2

PORT6

AP3

PORT7

AP4

PORT28

:Working service direction

Figure 10-17 shows the wavelength allocation. Figure 10-17 Wavelength allocation diagram Wavelength(nm)/ Frequency(THz)

A

B

C

D

1560.61/ 192.10

Working channel

Table 10-4 Parameters of external ports on the Ethernet boards Parameter

A

C

Board

3-LEM24

3-LEM24

Port

PORT7

PORT7

Port Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Working Mode

Auto-Negotiation

Auto-Negotiation

Maximum Frame Length

1522

1522

Table 10-5 Parameters of internal ports on the Ethernet boards

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Parameter

A

C

Board

3-LEM24

3-LEM24

Port

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK1


317



Table 10-6 Parameters of the EPL services Parameter

EPL Service of A

EPL Service of B

EPL Service of C

Board

3-LEM24

3-LEM24

3-LEM24

Service Type

EPL

EPL

EPL

Direction

Bidirectional

Bidirectional

Bidirectional

Source Port

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK1

PORT7

Source C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6)

-

-

-

Sink Port

PORT7

VCTRUNK2

VCTRUNK1

Sink C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6)

-

-

-

10.6.3 Configuration Process This section describes how to configure an EPL service through an example in which station C transmits the EPL service to station A. The case that station A transmits the EPL service to station C is similar, and thus is not described in this section.

Prerequisite You must read and understand the contents of Configuration Process of the EPL Service.


Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Configure the EPL service that User2 occupies at station C. 1.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Configure the attributes of the external port that User2 occupies. a.

In the NE Explorer, select the LEM24 board in slot 3 and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Then, select External Port.

b.

Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click Apply. For details on parameter settings, see 10.20.1 Parameters: Basic Attributes (External Port). Parameter

Value

Description

Port Enabled

PORT7: Enabled

The EPL service of User2 occupies the external port PORT7, and the enabling status of PORT7 is set to Enabled.


318


Parameter

Value

Description

Working Mode

PORT7: AutoNegotiation

The access equipment of the EPL service of User2 supports autonegotiation, and the working mode of PORT7 is set to Auto-Negotiation.


PORT7: 1522

In general, the default value 1522 is used.

MAC Loopback

PORT7: NonLoopback

The MAC loopback setting is used for fault diagnosis. When configuring a service, set this parameter to NonLoopback.

PHY Loopback

PORT7: NonLoopback

The PHY loopback setting is used for fault diagnosis. When configuring a service, set this parameter to NonLoopback.

c.

Click the Flow Control tab. The default value of the parameter is recommended.

d.

Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click Apply. For details on parameter settings, see 10.20.6 Parameters: TAG Attributes.

e.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


Parameter

Value

Description

TAG

PORT7: Access

The access equipment of the service of User2 does not support the VLAN function. The transmitted data does not contain the VLAN ID. In this case, the TAG identifier of PORT7 is set to Access.

Default VLAN ID

PORT7: 1

The EPL service of User2 occupies the PORT and VCTRUNK interfaces exclusively, and the service does not need to be separated by using a VLAN ID. In this case, you do not need to configure the VLAN ID but retain the default value.

VLAN Priority

PORT7: 0

The VLAN ID is not required, and thus VLAN priority is also not required. In this case, retain the default value, namely 0.

Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click Apply. For details on parameter settings, see 10.20.7 Parameters: Network Attributes.


319


2.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Parameter

Value

Description

Port

PORT7: UNI

If the port is a UNI port, the port processes the 802.1Q tag header. The port attributes include Tag Aware, Access, and Hybrid.

Configure the attribute of the internal port that User2 occupies. a.

In the NE Explorer, select the LEM24 board in slot 3 and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Then, select Internal Port.

b.

Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click Apply. For details on parameter settings, see 10.20.7 Parameters: Network Attributes.

c.

3.


Parameter

Value

Description

Port

VCTRUNK1: UNI


Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click Apply. For details on parameter settings, see 10.20.6 Parameters: TAG Attributes. Parameter

Value

Description

TAG

VCTRUNK1: Tag Aware

For the internal port, you do not need to configure the tag header but retain the default value, namely Tag Aware.

Configure the EPL service of User2 at station C. a.

In the NE Explorer, select the LEM24 board in slot 3 and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Click the EPL Service tab.

b.

Click New at the bottom of the window. The Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box is displayed.

c.

Enter the attributes of the Ethernet private line service in the dialog box. For details on parameter settings, see 10.20.8 Parameters: Ethernet Line Service.


320


d.


Parameter

Value

Description

Service Type

EPL

The service type of User2 is EPL.

Direction

Bidirectional

The service of User2 is a bidirectional service.

Source Port

PORT7

Indicates the name of the source port.

Source C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6)

-

Keep this item empty.

Sink Port

VCTRUNK1

Indicates the name of the sink port.

Sink C-VLAN (e.g.1, 3-6)

-


Click OK, and the created Ethernet private line service is displayed on the interface.

Step 2 Configure pass-through EPL services at station B. 1.

Configure the attributes of the external port at station B. a.

In the NE Explorer, select the LEM24 board in slot 3 and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Then, select Internal Port.

b.

Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click Apply. For details on parameter settings, see 10.20.7 Parameters: Network Attributes. Parameter

Value

Description

Port

VCTRUNK1: UNI


VCTRUNK2: UNI

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


321


c.


Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click Apply. For details on parameter settings, see 10.20.6 Parameters: TAG Attributes. Parameter

Value

Description

TAG

VCTRUNK1: Tag Aware


VCTRUNK2: Tag Aware

2.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Configure the EPL service at station B. a.

In the NE Explorer, select the LEM24 board in slot 3 and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Click the EPL Service tab.

b.

Click New on the lower right of the window. The Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box is displayed.

c.

Enter the attributes of the Ethernet private line service in the dialog box. For details on parameter settings, see 10.20.8 Parameters: Ethernet Line Service.

Parameter

Value

Description

Service Type

EPL

The service type is EPL.

Direction

Bidirectional

The service is a bidirectional service.

Source Port

VCTRUNK1


Source S-VLAN (e.g.1, 3-6)

-


Sink Port

VCTRUNK2



322


d.


Parameter

Value

Description

Sink S-VLAN (e.g.1, 3-6)

-


Click OK, and the created EPL service is displayed on the interface.

Step 3 Configure the EPL service that User1 occupies at station A. Configure the EPL service at station A by referring to step 1. Step 4 Verify the service configurations of User2 and User1. For the verification procedure, see Testing Ethernet Service Channels in the Commissioning Guide. NOTE

The external ports on the Ethernet boards at the source and sink ends of the accessed Ethernet service must be set to Access, and the default VLAN ID must be set to the same value.

Step 5 Enable the performance monitoring function for the NEs. For the operation procedures, see Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE in the Commissioning Guide. Step 6 Back up the configuration data on the NEs. Two methods are available for the backup. NOTE

Only the U2000 supports backing up the configuration data of NEs.

Option

Description

The SCC board is not configured with any CF card

See Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board in the Commissioning Guide

The SCC board is configured with a CF card

See Manually Backing Up the NE Database to a CF Card in the Commissioning Guide

----End

10.7 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL (QinQ) Services on a WDM Network EVPL (QinQ) services realize the nesting of VLAN. With the increase of network users, the existing number of VLAN IDs fails to meet the requirement of users. After EVPL (QinQ) services are configured, however, users can be identified through multiple layers of VLAN IDs. In this case, VLAN extension is achieved.

10.7.1 Networking Diagram This section describes the Ethernet service configuration in a ring network.

Service Requirement See Figure 10-18. The optical NEs (ONEs) A, B, and C form a ring network, and all the ONEs are OADM stations. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


323



There is Ethernet communication between User1 and User2. In addition, a bidirectional EVPL (QinQ) service exists between stations A and B. The working mode of the bidirectional EVPL (QinQ) service is set to auto-negotiation. Figure 10-18 Networking diagram for configuring EVPL(QinQ) service

IU 3

LEM24

NM

C IU 3

IU 3

LEM24

LEM24

B

A

User 2

User 1

NG WDM Equipment

Board Configuration Information In this example, each station is configured with one LEM24 board.

10.7.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation Ethernet services are received from an external port, encapsulated through an internal port, and transparently transmitted on the WDM network. In this way, the node communicates with the remote node. Figure 10-19 shows the signal flow of the bidirectional EVPL (QinQ) services between stations A and B. Figure 10-19 Service signal flow of EVPL (QinQ) service ONE A PORT5 PORT6 PORT7 PORT28

AP1

ONE B 1(IN1/OUT1)-1

1(IN1/OUT1)-1

AP1

PORT5

AP2

AP2

PORT6

AP3

AP3

PORT7

AP4

PORT28

AP4

2(IN2/OUT2)-1

LEM24

2(IN2/OUT2)-1

LEM24

:Client-side signals :WDM-side working service :Working service direction

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


324




A

B

C

1560.61/ 192.10

Working channel

Table 10-7 Parameters of external ports on the Ethernet boards Parameters

A

B

Board

3-LEM24

3-LEM24

Port

PORT7

PORT7

Port Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Working Mode

Auto-Negotiation

Auto-Negotiation


1522

1522

Table 10-8 Parameters of internal ports on the Ethernet boards Parameter

A

B

Board

3-LEM24

3-LEM24

Port

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK1

Table 10-9 Parameters of the EVPL (QinQ) service

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Parameter

EVPL (QinQ) Service of A

EVPL (QinQ) Service of B

Service Type

EVPL (QinQ)

EVPL (QinQ)

Direction

Bidirectional

Bidirectional

Operation Type

Add S-VLAN

Strip S-VLAN

Source Port

PORT7

VCTRUNK1


325



Parameter

EVPL (QinQ) Service of A

EVPL (QinQ) Service of B

Sink Port

VCTRUNK1

PORT7

Sink S-VLAN

1

1

10.7.3 Configuration Process This section describes how to configure an EVPL (QinQ) service through an example in which station A transmits the EVPL (QinQ) service to station B. The case that station B transmits the EVPL (QinQ) service to station A is similar, and thus is not described in this section.

Prerequisite You must read and understand the contents of Configuration Process of the EVPL (QinQ) Service.


Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Configure the EVPL (QinQ) service that User1 occupies at station A. 1.

Configure the attributes of the external port that User1 occupies. l In the NE Explorer, select the LEM24 board in slot 3 and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Then, select External Port. l Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click Apply. For details on parameter settings, see Description of the Basic Attributes Parameter (External Port). Parameter

Value

Description

Port Enabled

PORT7: Enabled

The EVPL (QinQ) service of User1 occupies the external port PORT7, and the enabling status of PORT7 is set to Enabled.

Working Mode


The access equipment of the EVPL (QinQ) service of User1 supports autonegotiation, and the working mode of PORT7 is set to Auto-Negotiation.


PORT7: 1522

In general, the default value 1522 is used.

l Click the Flow Control tab. The default value of the parameter is recommended. For the default value of the parameter, see Description of the Flow Control Parameter (External Port). Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


326



l Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click Apply. For the default value of the parameter, see Description of the TAG Attributes Parameter.

2.

Parameter

Value

Description

Port

PORT7: C-Aware

In the case of C-Aware, the port does not process the TAG attribute of 802.1Q. It determines that the data packet carries C-VLAN tag and processes the data packet based on the C-VLAN tag.

Configure the attribute of the internal port that User1 occupies. l In the NE Explorer, select the LEM24 board in slot 3 and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Then, select Internal Port. l Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click Apply. For details on parameter settings, see Description of the Network Attributes Parameter. Parameter

Value

Description

Port

VCTRUNK1: SAware

In the case of S-Aware, the port does not process the TAG attribute of 802.1Q. It determines that the data packet carries S-VLAN tag and processes the data packet based on the S-VLAN tag.

l Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click Apply. For details on parameter settings, see Description of the TAG Attributes Parameter.

3.

Parameter

Value

Description

TAG

VCTRUNK1: Tag Aware


Configure the EVPL (QinQ) service of User1 at station A. l In the NE Explorer, select the LEM24 board in slot 3 and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Click the EPL Service tab. l Select Display QinQ Shared Service check box in the lower right corner. l Click New on the lower right of the window. The Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box is displayed. l Enter the attributes of the Ethernet private line service in the dialog box.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


327



Parameter

Value

Description

Service Type

EVPL (QinQ)

The service type of User1 is EVPL (QinQ).

Direction

Bidirectional

The service of User1 is a bidirectional service.

Operation Type

Add S-VLAN

Add the label of S-VLAN.

Source Port

PORT7


Sink Port

VCTRUNK1

Indicates the name of the sink port.

Sink S-VLAN (e.g.1, 3-6)

1

Select the S-VLAN.

l Click OK, and the created EVPL (QinQ) service is displayed on the interface. Step 2 Configure the EVPL (QinQ) service that User2 occupies at station B. Configure the EVPL (QinQ) service at station B by referring to step 1. Step 3 Verify the service configurations of User2 and User1. For the verification procedure, see Testing Ethernet Service Channels in the Commissioning Guide. Step 4 Enable the performance monitoring function for the NEs. For the operation procedures, see Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE in the Commissioning Guide. Step 5 Back up the configuration data on the NEs. Two methods are available for the backup.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


328



Option

Description





----End

10.8 Configuration Example: Configuring EPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1d Bridge) on a WDM Network The EPLAN service (IEEE 802.1d bridge) provides an LAN solution for multipoint-tomultipoint convergence. This service applies in cases where user-side data communication equipment connected to the transmission network does not support VLANs or where the VLAN planning is kept secret from the network operator.

10.8.1 Networking Diagram The convergence node needs to exchange Ethernet services with two access nodes at Layer 2. The two access nodes need not communicate with each other.

Service Requirement On the network as shown in Figure 10-21, the service requirements are as follows: l

Three branches (F1, F2, and F3) of user F are located at NE1, NE2, and NE4. F1 needs to communicate with F2 and F3.

l

The Ethernet equipment of user F provides Ethernet optical ports that work in autonegotiation mode and support VLANs. VLAN IDs and the number of VLANs, however, are unknown and may be changed. NOTE

The application scenarios whether one branch needs to communicate with other branches are as follows: l Branches F2 and F3 need to communicate with each other. l Branches F2 and F3 do not need to communicate with each other. If branches F2 and F3 need to communicate with each other, skip Step 2.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


329



Figure 10-21 Networking diagram for configuring EPLAN services (IEEE 802.1d bridge)

IU 3

NM

IU 3

LEM24

NE 3

LEM24

NE 2

IU 3

NE 4 NE 1

F2

IU 3

LEM24

F3

LEM24 VB VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2 PORT7

NG WDM equipment F1 VCTRUNCK

Board Configuration Information In this example, the convergence node NE1 is configured with one LEM24 boards that supports the IEEE 802.1d bridge, thus implementing EPLAN services wherein user VLANs are not limited. The access nodes NE2 and NE4 are configured with one LEM24 board each. The EPL services are configured to be transparently transmitted from NE2 and NE4 to NE1.

10.8.2 Service Signals Flow and Wavelength Allocation The Ethernet services of the convergence node are received from an external port, forwarded to an internal port through Layer 2 switching, encapsulated, and transparently transmitted on the WDM network. In this manner, the node communicates with a remote node. Figure 10-22 shows the signal flow of the EPLAN services (IEEE 802.1d bridge) and the timeslot allocation to the EPLAN services (IEEE 802.1d bridge).

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


330



Figure 10-22 Service signal flow of the EPLAN service ONE 2

LEM24

AP1

1(IN1/OUT1)-1

ONE 1

LEM24

PORT5 VB

PORT6

PORT7

2(IN2/OUT2)-1

(VCTRUNCK 2)

1(IN1/OUT1)-1

PORT5 PORT6

(VCTRUNCK 1)

PORT28

(VCTRUNCK 1)

PORT7 PORT8

2(IN2/OUT2)-1

LEM24

(VCTRUNCK 2)

PORT28

ONE 4

1(IN1/OUT1)-1 (VCTRUNCK 1)


AP1

2(IN2/OUT2)-1

(VCTRUNCK 2)


PORT5 PORT6 PORT7 PORT28



NE1

NE2

NE3

NE4

1560.61/192.10 1559.79/192.20

Working channel

Table 10-10 Parameters of external ports on the Ethernet boards

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Parameter

NE2

NE1

NE4

Board

1-LEM24

3-LEM24

1-LEM24

Port

PORT7

PORT7

PORT7

Port Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Working Mode

Auto-Negotiation

Auto-Negotiation

Auto-Negotiation


1522

1522

1522

Entry Detection

-

Enabled

-

TAG

-

Tag Aware

-

Port Type

-

UNI

-


331




NE2

NE1

NE4

Board

1-LEM24

3-LEM24

1-LEM24

Port

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK1

Table 10-12 Parameters of the EPLAN services (IEEE 802.1d bridge) Parameter

EPLAN Service of NE1

VB Name

VB

VB Type

802.1d

Bridge Switch Mode

SVL/Ingress Filter Disable

Bridge Learning Mode

SVL

Ingress Filter

Disabled

VB Mount Port

PORT7, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2

Hub/Spoke

PORT7

Hub

VCTRUNK1

Spoke

VCTRUNK2

Spoke

10.8.3 Configuration Process At the convergence node NE1, you need to create an EPLAN service (IEEE 802.1d bridge). At the access nodes NE2 and NE4, you need to configure only transparently transmitted EPL services.

Prerequisite You must read and understand the contents of Configuration Process of the EPLAN Service.


Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Configure EPLAN services for users F1, F2, and F3 on NE1. 1. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Set the attributes of the external port used by the service of user F1. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

332



l In the NE Explorer, select the LEM24 board in slot 3 and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. l Select External Port. l Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click Apply. For details on parameter settings, see Description of the Basic Attributes Parameter (External Port). Parameter

Value

Description

Port Enabled

PORT7: Enabled

Set PORT7 to Enabled.

Working Mode


If the Ethernet service access equipment of user F1 supports the autonegotiation function, set the working mode of PORT7 to Auto-Negotiation.


PORT7: 1522

Generally, this parameter is set to 1522 by default.

MAC Loopback

PORT7: NonLoopback

The loopback setting is used for fault diagnosis. When configuring a service, set this parameter to Non-Loopback.

PHY Loopback

PORT7: NonLoopback


l Click the Flow Control tab. The default value of the parameter is recommended. For the default value of the parameter, see Description of the Flow Control Parameter (External Port). l Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click Apply. For details on parameter settings, see Description of the TAG Attributes Parameter.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Parameter

Value

Description

Entry Detection

PORT7: Enabled

If the packets of user F1 carry VLAN tags, you need to enable the entry detection function to detect the VLAN tags of packets. In this case, set this parameter to Enabled.

TAG

PORT7: Tag Aware

If the service access equipment of user F1 supports VLAN and if the transmitted data frames carry VLAN tags, set these parameters to Tag Aware for PORT7 and PORT8.

Default VLAN ID

-

If TAG is set to Tag Aware, it is unnecessary to set Default VLAN ID.

VLAN Priority

-

If TAG is set to Tag Aware, it is unnecessary to set VLAN Priority.


333



l Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click Apply. For details on parameter settings, see Description of the Network Attributes Parameter.

2.

Parameter

Value

Description

Port Type

PORT7: UNI

A UNI port is connected to the equipment on the user side because it is provided by the service provider. This port processes the packets with TAG attributes specified in IEEE 802.1q. In addition, this port identifies and processes the VLAN information of the received packets according to the supported Tag Aware, Access, or Hybrid attribute.

Configure the attribute of the internal port that F1 occupies. l In the NE Explorer, select the LEM24 board in slot 3 and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. l Select Internal Port. l Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click Apply. For details on parameter settings, see Description of the Network Attributes Parameter. Parameter

Value

Description

Port

VCTRUNK1: UNI


l Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click Apply. For details on parameter settings, see Description of the TAG Attributes Parameter.

3.

Parameter

Value

Description

Entry Detection

VCTRUNK1: Enabled

If the data frames of users F2 and F3 carry VLAN tags, you need to enable the entry detection function to detect the VLAN tags of packets. In this case, set this parameter to Enabled.

TAG

VCTRUNK1: Tag Aware


Create a bridge for the LEM24 board on NE1. l In the NE Explorer, select the LEM24 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


334



l Click New. l Set the parameters in the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box that is displayed. For details on parameter settings, see 10.20.10 Parameters: Ethernet LAN Service. Parameter


Description

VB Name

VB

This parameter is a character string used to describe the bridge. It is recommended that you set this parameter to a character string that contains the information about the detailed application of the bridge.

VB Type

802.1d

The IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge learns and forwards the packets according to the MAC addresses of the user packets. The information in the VLAN tags of the user packets, however, is not considered in the learning and forwarding process. The IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge is used when the entire information of the VLANs used by the client cannot be learned or when the data between the VLANs of the client does not need to be isolated.

Bridge Switch Mode


When the bridge adopts the SVL learning mode, all the VLANs share the same MAC address table. That is, the bridge learns and forwards the packets according to the MAC address of the user packets only. The information in the VLAN tags of the user packets, however, is not considered in the learning and forwarding process.


SVL

-

Ingress Filter

Disabled

The IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge does not detect the VLAN tags of the received packets.

MAC Address Selflearning

Enabled

-

l Click Configure Mountnt.... l In Available Mounted Ports, select PORT7, VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2. Then, click

.

l Click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. l In the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box that is displayed, click OK. 4.

Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the ports mounted to the bridge. NOTE

If normal communication is required between user F2 and user F3, go to Step 2.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


335



l Select the created bridge and click the Service Mount tab. l Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the port mounted to the bridge. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter

Value

Description

Hub/Spoke

PORT7: Hub

If user F1 needs to communicate with users F2 and F3 respectively, set PORT7 that accesses the services of user F1 to Hub. A port of the Hub attribute can communicate with a port of the Spoke or Hub attribute.

VCTRUNK2: Spoke VCTRUNK1: Spoke

If user F2 does not need to communicate with user F3, set the VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 that receive the services of users F2 and F3 to Spoke. Ports of the Spoke attribute cannot communicate with each other.

Step 2 Configure EPL services on NE2 and NE4. NOTE

The Ethernet services on NE2 and NE4 are EPL services transparently transmitted from point to point. Complete the configuration based on the planned parameters by referring to the operations described in 10.6 Configuration Example: Configuring EPL Services

Step 3 Verify the correctness of the service configuration. For the verification procedure, see Testing Ethernet Service Channels in the Commissioning Guide. NOTE

The external ports on the Ethernet boards at the source and sink ends of the accessed Ethernet service must be set to Access, and the default VLAN ID must be set to the same value. NOTE

After the test, change the modified parameter values to the values specified in the service configuration.

Step 4 Enable the performance monitoring function for the NEs. For the operation procedures, see Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE in the Commissioning Guide. Step 5 Back up the configuration data on the NEs. Two methods are available for the backup. Option

Description





----End

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


336



10.9 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge) on a WDM Network The EVPLAN service (IEEE 802.1q bridge) provides an LAN solution for multipoint-tomultipoint convergence. This service applies in cases where user-side data communication equipment connected to the transmission network does not support VLANs or where the VLAN planning is open to the network operator.

10.9.1 Networking Diagram The convergence node needs to exchange Ethernet services with two access nodes at Layer 2. LAN services of the two users (H and G) need to be isolated.


Three branches (G1, G2, and G3) of user G are located at NE1, NE2, and NE4 respectively. G2 and G3 do not need to communicate with each other.

l

Three branches (H1, H2, and H3) of user H are located at NE1, NE2, and NE4 respectively.

l

The service of user G needs to be isolated from the service of user H.

l

The Ethernet equipment of user G and user H provides Ethernet electrical ports that work mode in auto-negotiation mode and do not support VLANs.

Figure 10-24 Networking diagram for configuring EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge)

IU 3

LEM24

NM

NE 3 IU 3

IU 3

LEM24

NE 2

NE 4 NE 1

H2

H3

G2

G3 G1

H1 VB2 VLAN 200 VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2

IU 3

LEM24

VB1 VLAN 100 VCTRUNK1

NG WDM equipment

VCTRUNK2 POR7

PORT8

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

LEM24

VCTRUNCK


337



Board Configuration Information In this example, the convergence node NE 1 is configured with one LEM24 board that supports the IEEE 802.1q bridge to implement EVPLAN services in which user data is isolated. The access nodes NE2 and NE4 are configured with an LEM24 board respectively. EVPL services are configured to implement transparent transmission from NE2 and NE4 to NE1.

10.9.2 Service Signals Flow The Ethernet services of the convergence node are received from an external port and tagged with the corresponding VLAN IDs. After the services are forwarded to an internal port through Layer 2 switching, the VLAN IDs are stripped and then the services are transparently transmitted in the WDM network. In this way, the node communicates with a remote node. Figure 10-25 shows the signal flow of the EPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge) and the timeslot allocation to the EPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge). Figure 10-25 Service signal flow of the EPLAN service ONE 4

LEM24

ONE 1 PORT7

PORT8

VB1

VB2

1(IN1/OUT1)-1

LEM24

AP1

(VCTRUNCK1)

PORT7 PORT8

1(IN1/OUT1)-1 (VCTRUNCK1)

2(IN2/OUT2)-1

ONE 2

LEM24

(VCTRUNCK2)



:Working service of H


:Working service of G

AP2

PORT7 PORT8

Table 10-13 Parameters of external ports on the Ethernet boards Paramete r

NE1

NE2

NE4

Board

3-LEM24

3-LEM24

3-LEM24

Port

PORT7

PORT8

PORT7

PORT8

PORT7

PORT8

PORT8

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Port Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Working Mode

AutoNegotiatio n

AutoNegotiatio n

Auto-Negotiation

Auto-Negotiation


338



Paramete r

NE1

NE2

NE4


1522

1522

1522

1522

1522

1522

TAG

Access

Access

Access

Access

Access

Access

Entry Detection

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Default VLAN ID

100

200

100

200

100

200

VLAN Priority

0

0

0

0

0

0

Port Type

UNI

UNI

UNI

UNI

UNI

UNI


NE1

NE2

NE4

Board

3-LEM24

3-LEM24

3-LEM24

Port

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK1

TAG

Access

Access

-

-

Entry Detection

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Default VLAN ID

100

200

-

-

VLAN Priority

0

0

-

-

Port Type

UNI

UNI

UNI

UNI

Table 10-15 Parameters of the EPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge)

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Parameter


VB Name

VB

VB Type

802.1q

Bridge Switch Mode

IVL/Ingress Filter Enable


IVL

Ingress Filter

Enabled


339



Parameter


VB Mount Port

PORT7, PORT8, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2

VLAN Filtering

VLAN Filtering

VLAN filter table 1

VLAN filter table 2

VLAN ID

100

200

Forwarding Physical Port



PORT7

Hub

PORT8

Hub

VCTRUNK1

Spoke

VCTRUNK2

Spoke

Hub/Spoke

10.9.3 Configuration Process At the convergence node NE1, you need to create an EPLAN service (IEEE 802.1q bridge) and a VLAN filtering table. The access nodes NE2 and NE4 need to be configured with EVPL services only.



Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Configure the EVPLAN services for user G1, user G2, user G3, user H1, user H2, and user H3 on NE1. 1.

Configure the attributes of the external ports used by the services of user G1 and user H1. l In the NE Explorer, select the LEM24 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. l Select External Port. l Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


340



Parame ter


Description

Enabled / Disable d

PORT7: Enabled

In this example, PORT7 and PORT8 carry the services and Enabled/Disabled is set to Enabled for PORT7 and PORT8.

Workin g Mode


PORT8: Enabled

PORT8: AutoNegotiation Maximu m Frame Length

PORT7: 1522

MAC Loopba ck

PORT7: Non-Loopback

PHY Loopba ck

PORT7: Non-Loopback

PORT8: 1522

PORT8: Non-Loopback

PORT8: Non-Loopback

In this example, the Ethernet service access equipment of user G1 and user H1 supports the auto-negotiation mode. Hence, Working Mode is set to Auto-Negotiation for PORT7 and PORT8. Generally, this parameter adopts the default value 1522.

The MAC loopback setting is used for fault diagnosis. In this example, MAC Loopback is set to Non-Loopback. The PHY loopback setting is used for fault diagnosis. In this example, PHY Loopback is set to Non-Loopback.

l Click the Flow Control tab. The parameters in the Flow Control tab page adopt the default values. For details on parameter settings, see 10.20.7 Parameters: Network Attributes l Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed. Parame ter


Description

TAG

PORT7: Access

The access equipment of user G1 and user H1 does not support VLAN tags. Hence, the Ethernet access equipment transmits only the packets without the VLAN tags. In this example, TAG is set to Access for PORT7 and PORT8.

PORT8: Access

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Default VLAN ID

PORT7: 100

VLAN Priority

-

PORT8: 200

According to the plan, the VLAN ID is set to 100 on the transmission network side for the Ethernet services between user G1, user G2, and user G3. The VLAN ID is set to 200 on the transmission network side for the EVPLAN services between user H1, user H2, and user H3. In this manner, the services of different users are isolated. This parameter adopts the default value.


341



Parame ter


Description

Entry Detectio n

PORT7: Enabled

The services of user G1 and user H1 are EVPLAN services. Hence, the entry detection function must be enabled to check whether the packets carry VLAN tags. In this example, Entry Detection is set to Enabled.

PORT8: Enabled

l Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed. Parame ter


Description

Port Type

PORT7: UNI

UNI indicates the user-network interface, namely, the interface of the service provider located near the user side. The UNI interface processes the tag attribute of IEEE 802.1qcompliant packets. That is, the UNI interface processes and identifies the VLAN information of the accessed user packets, according to the supported tag flags, namely Tag Aware, Access, and Hybrid.

PORT8: UNI

l Click the Advanced Attributes tab. The parameters in the Advanced Attributes tab page adopt the default values. For details on parameter settings, see 10.20.4 Parameters: Advanced Attributes (External Port). 2.

Set the attributes of the internal ports used by the services of user G2, user G3, user H2, and user H3 on NE1. l Select Internal Port. l Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed. For details on parameter settings, see Description of the TAG Attributes Parameter. Parame ter


Description

TAG

VCTRUNK1: Access

The service access equipment of user G2, user G3, user H2, and user H3 supports VLAN tags and the transmitted data frames do not carry VLAN tags. In this example, TAG is set to Access for VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK4.

VCTRUNK2: Access

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


342



Parame ter


Description

Entry Detectio n

VCTRUNK1: Enabled

The services of user G2, user G3, user H2, and user H3 are EVPLAN services. Hence, the entry detection function must be enabled to check whether the packets carry VLAN tags. In this example, Entry Detection is set to Enabled.

VCTRUNK2: Enabled

l Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed. For details on parameter settings, see Description of the Network Attributes Parameter. Parame ter


Description

Port Type

VCTRUNK1: UNI


VCTRUNK2: UNI

l Click the Advanced Attributes tab. The parameters in the Advanced Attributes tab page adopt the default values. For details on parameter settings, see Description of the Advanced Attributes Parameter (External Port). 3.

Create a bridge for the LEM24 board on NE1. l In the NE Explorer, select the LEM24 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. l Click New. l Set the parameters in the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box that is displayed.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Parameter


Description

VB Name

VB1


VB Type

802.1q

The IEEE 802.1q bridge supports isolation by using one layer of VLAN tags. This bridge checks the contents of the VLAN tags that are in the data frames and performs Layer 2 switching according to the destination MAC addresses and VLAN IDs.


343



Parameter


Description

Bridge Switch Mode


When Bridge Learning Mode is set to IVL, the bridge checks the contents of the VLAN tags that are in the packets and performs Layer 2 switching according to the destination MAC addresses and the VLAN IDs of the packets.


IVL

-

Ingress Filter

Enabled

-


Enabled

-

l Click Configure Mount. l In Available Mounted Ports, select PORT7, PORT8, VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2. Then, click

.

l Click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. l In the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box that is displayed, click OK. 4.

Create a VLAN filtering table. l Select the created bridge and click the VLAN Filtering tab. l Click New. l Create the VLAN filtering table for user G1, user G2, and user G3 in the Create VLAN dialog box that is displayed. Parameter


Description

VLAN ID

100

According to the plan, the VLAN ID is set to 100 on the transmission network side for the EVPLAN services between user G1, user G2, and user G3.

l In Available Forwarding Ports, select PORT7, VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2. Click . Then, click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. l Create the VLAN filtering table for user H1, user H2, and user H3.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


344



Parameter


Description

VLAN ID

200

According to the plan, the VLAN ID is set to 200 on the transmission network side for the EVPLAN services between user H1, user H2, and user H3.

l In Available Forwarding Ports, select PORT8, VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2. Click . Then, click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. 5.

Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the port that is mounted to the bridge. NOTE

If normal communication is required between user G2 and user G3, go to Step 2.

l Select the created bridge and click the Service Mount tab. l Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the port that is mounted to the bridge. After setting the parameters, click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. Parameter


Description

Hub/Spoke

PORT7: Hub

If user G2 need not communicate with user G3, set VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 that access the services of user G2 and user G3 to Spoke. Ports of the Spoke attribute cannot communicate with each other. A port of the Hub attribute can communicate with a port of the Spoke or Hub attribute.

VCTRUNK1: Spoke VCTRUNK2: Spoke PORT8: Hub

Step 2 Configure EVPL services on NE2 and NE4. NOTE

The Ethernet services on NE2 and NE4 are EVPL services. Complete the configuration based on the planned parameters by referring to the operations described in 10.7 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL (QinQ) Services on a WDM Network



Step 4 Enable the performance monitoring function for the NEs. For the operation procedures, see Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE in the Commissioning Guide. Step 5 Back up the configuration data on the NEs. Two methods are available for the backup.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


345



Option

Description





----End

10.10 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1 ad Bridge) on a WDM Network The QinQ technology provides a cheap and easy solution for Layer 2 virtual private networks (VPNs). The IEEE 802.1ad bridge uses the QinQ technology to provide the VPN solution, thus facilitating the identifying, differentiating and grooming EVPLAN services.

10.10.1 Networking Diagram A network operator requires that the GE and FE services sent to the transmission network be uniformly labeled and groomed at the convergence node.


The GE services of user M and user N are sent to the transmission network at NE2 and NE4 respectively and to the GE server at the convergence node NE1.

l

The FE services of user M and user N are sent to the transmission network at NE2 and NE4 respectively and to the FE server at the convergence node NE1.

l

The GE services need to be isolated from the FE services. User M does not need to communicate with user N.

l

The data communication equipment of user M and user N provides Ethernet electrical ports that work in auto-negotiation mode and support VLANs. – C-VLAN ID of the GE services: 10 – C-VLAN ID of the FE services: 20 NOTE

The application senarios whether user M needs to communicate with user N are as follows: l User M needs to communicate with user N. l User M does not need to communicate with user N.

Requirement of the operator requires that all services received from the user side should be uniformly labeled and groomed through planned S-VLANs. l

S-VLAN ID of the GE services: 100

l

S-VLAN ID of the FE services: 200

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


346



Figure 10-26 Networking diagram for configuring EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1ad bridge)

IU 3

LEM24

NM Service

C-VLAN

Service

C-VLAN

GE

10

GE

10

FE

20

FE

20

IU 3

NE3

IU 3

LEM24

NE2

NE4 NE1

User M

User N

GE

FE


LEM24

VCTRUNK2

IU 3

LEM24

VB2 VLAN 200 VCTRUNK1 PORT8

PORT7 NG WDM equipment

VCTRUNK2

VCTRUNCK

Board Configuration Information In this example, the convergence node NE1 is configured with one LEM24 board that supports the IEEE 802.1ad bridge, thus implementing the EVPLAN services in which GE data is isolated from FE data. l

The GE services tagged with C-VLAN ID 10 from NE2 and NE4 respectively are further tagged with S-VLAN ID 100 when they arrive at the IEEE 802.1ad bridge of NE1 the services are forwarded to the NE1 through Layer 2 switching.

l

The FE services tagged with C-VLAN ID 20 from NE2 and NE4 respectively are further tagged with S-VLAN ID 200 when they arrive at the IEEE 802.1ad bridge of NE1 the services are forwarded to the NE1 through Layer 2 switching.

The access nodes NE2 and NE4 are configured with one LEM24 board each. The EPL services are configured to be transparently transmitted from NE2 and NE4 to NE1.

10.10.2 Service Signals Flow and Wavelength Allocation The services of user M and user N are transmitted from the access nodes NE2 and NE4 respectively to the convergence node NE1 through the Ethernet transparent transmission boards. GE and FE services carrying different C-VLANs are tagged with different S-VLANs. Service data is isolated and exchanged at Layer 2 through S-VLAN filtering. Figure 10-27 shows the signal flow of the EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1ad bridge) and the timeslot allocation to the EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1 ad bridge). Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


347



Figure 10-27 Service signal flow of the EPLAN service ONE 4

LEM24

ONE 1 PORT7

PORT8

1(IN1/OUT1)-1

LEM24

SVLAN 100

1(IN1/OUT1)-1

SVLAN 200

2(IN2/OUT2)-1

AP1

(VCTRUNCK1)

PORT7

User M

PORT8

(VCTRUNCK1)

LEM24

(VCTRUNCK2)

ONE 2

VB1


AP2

PORT7

User N

PORT8


:Working service of GE


:Working service of FE


NE1

NE2

NE4

Board

3-LEM24

3-LEM24

3-LEM24

Port

PORT7

PORT8

PORT7

PORT7

Port Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Working Mode

AutoNegotiation

AutoNegotiation

AutoNegotiation

AutoNegotiation


1522

1522

1522

1522

Port Type

C-Aware

C-Aware

-

-


NE1

NE2

NE4

Board

3-LEM24

3-LEM24

3-LEM24

Port

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK1

Port Type

C-Aware

C-Aware

-

-

Table 10-18 Parameters of the EPLAN services (IEEE 802.1ad bridge)

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Parameter


VB Name

VB1

VB Type

802.1ad Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

348



Parameter


Bridge Switch Mode



IVL

Ingress Filter

Enabled

Operation Type

Add S-VLAN base for Port and C-VLAN

VB Port

1

2

3

4

Mount Port

PORT7

PORT8

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2

C-VLAN

10

20

10

20

10

20

S-VLAN

100

200

100

200

100

200

VLAN Filterin g

Hub/ Spoke

VLAN Filtering

VLAN filter table 1

VLAN filter table 2

VLAN ID

100

200




PORT7

Hub

PORT8

Hub

VCTRUNK1

Spoke

VCTRUNK2

Spoke

10.10.3 Configuration Process An EVPLAN service (IEEE 802.1ad bridge) and the corresponding S-VLAN filtering table need to be created for the convergence node NE1. The access nodes NE2 and NE4 need to be configured with EPL transparent transmission services only.



Background Information The IEEE 802.1ad bridge supports ports with the C-Aware and S-Aware attributes only. The C-Aware ports are used to add and strip the S-VLAN tags. The S-Aware ports are used to transparently transmit the S-VLAN tag. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


349



The IEEE 802.1ad bridge supports the following operation types: l

Adding the S-VLAN tag based on the port

l

Adding the S-VLAN tag based on the port and C-VLAN

l

Performing port mounting based on the port

l

Performing port mounting based on the port and the S-VLAN

This topic describes the four operation types when Bridge Switch Mode of the IEEE 802.1ad bridge is set to IVL/Ingree Filter Enabled. l

Adding the S-VLAN based on the port: The packets that enter the C-Aware port are added with the preset S-VLAN tag, and are forwarded in the bridge according to the S-VLAN filtering table. Before the packets leave the C-Aware port, the S-VLAN tag is stripped.

l

Adding the S-VLAN tag based on the port and C-VLAN: Then entry detection is performed for the packets that enter the C-Aware port. Then, the corresponding S-VLAN tags are added to the packets according to the mapping relationship between the C-VLAN tags and the S-VLAN tags of the packets. If the mapping relationship does not exist, the packets are discarded. After the S-VLAN tags are added, the packets enter the bridge, where the packets are forwarded according to the S-VLAN filtering table. Before the packets leave the CAware port, the S-VLAN tag is stripped. NOTE

l The same C-Aware port supports different C-VLAN tags being mapped to different S-VLAN tags, but does not support the same C-VLAN tag being mapping to multiple S-VLAN tags.

l

Performing port mounting based on the port: The packets that enter the S-Aware port are not filtered. Instead, the S-VLAN switch is performed directly. The packets must have the S-VLAN tags. Otherwise, the packets are discarded. When the packets leave the S-Aware port, the packets are transparently transmitted.

l

Performing port mounting based on the port and the S-VLAN: The entry filtering is performed according to the preset S-VLAN tag. The packets that do not belong to the SVLAN are discarded. Then, the packets are forwarded according to the S-VLAN filtering table. When the packets leave the S-Aware port, the packets are transparently transmitted.

In the case of the four operation types, the following conditions must be met before the packets leave a port: l

The port is contained in the S-VLAN filtering table that is created by the user.

l

The S-VLAN ID corresponding to the port must be specified when the user manually mounts the port to the bridge. – In the case of a C-VLAN port, the S-VLAN ID corresponding to the port is the S-VLAN ID that is added when the packets enter the port. – In the case of an S-VLAN port, the S-VLAN ID corresponding to the port is the SVLAN ID that is set when the user mounts the port to the bridge. If the S-Aware port is mounted based on the port, the S-VLAN ID is considered to contain all the legal SVLAN IDs.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Configure EVPLAN services on NE1. 1. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Configure the attributes of the external ports. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

350



l In the NE Explorer, select the LEM24 board in slot 3 and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Then, select External Port. l Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click Apply. For details on parameter settings, see Description of the Basic Attributes Parameter (External Port). Parameter

Value

Description

Port Enabled

PORT7: Enabled

Set PORT7 and PORT8 that carry the service to Enabled.

PORT8: Enabled Working Mode

PORT7: AutoNegotiation PORT8: AutoNegotiation


PORT7: 1522

MAC Loopback

PORT7: NonLoopback

PORT8: 1522

PORT8: NonLoopback PHY Loopback

PORT7: NonLoopback PORT8: NonLoopback

The GE server and FE server support the auto-negotiation function. This parameter is set to Auto-Negotiation for PORT7 and PORT8. In general, the default value 1522 is used. The loopback setting is used for fault diagnosis. When configuring a service, set this parameter to Non-Loopback


l Click the Flow Control tab. The default value of the parameter is recommended. For the default value of the parameter, see Description of the Flow Control Parameter (External Port). l Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click Apply. For details on parameter settings, see Description of the Network Attributes Parameter.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


351



Parameter

Value

Description

Port Type

PORT7: C-Aware

The C-Aware or S-Aware attribute must be selected for the port when you configure the IEEE 802.1ad bridge. The C-Aware port connects to the port in the client network, identifies and processes the packets that contain CVLAN tags (namely, client tags). The S-Aware port connects to the port on the network side, identifies and processes the packets that contain SVLAN tags (namely, service tags of the network operator). It is unnecessary to set the parameters on the TAG Attributes tab. If the port type

PORT8: C-Aware

l It is unnecessary to set the parameters on the TAG Attributes tab. If the port type is set to C-Aware or S-Aware, the parameters on the TAG Attributes are meaningless. 2.

Set the attributes of the internal ports used by the service between user M and user N. l In the NE Explorer, select the LEM24 board in slot 3 and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Then, select Internal Port. l Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click Apply. For details on parameter settings, see Description of the Network Attributes Parameter. Parameter

Value

Description

Port Type

VCTRUNK1: SAware

When you configure the IEEE 802.1ad bridge, set the port to C-Aware or SAware. The C-Aware port is connected to the UNI port, identifies, and processes the packets with the CVLAN tags. The S-Aware port is connected to the network-side port, identifies, and processes the packets with the S-VLAN tags.

VCTRUNK2: SAware

l It is unnecessary to set the parameters on the TAG Attributes tab. If the port type is set to C-Aware or S-Aware, the parameters on the TAG Attributes are meaningless. 3.

Create a bridge for the LEM24 board on NE1. l In the NE Explorer, select the LEM24 board in slot 3 and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Click the Service Mount tab. l Click New on the lower right of the window. The Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box is displayed. l Enter the attributes of the Ethernet LAN service in the dialog box. For details on parameter settings, see Description of the EPLAN Service Parameter.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


352



Parameter

Value

Description

VB Name

VB1


VB Type

802.1ad

The IEEE 802.1ad bridge supports packets with two layers of VLAN tags and adopts the outer S-VLAN tags to isolate services of different VLANs. It can be mounted to the ports whose attributes are C-Aware and S-Aware only.

Bridge Switch Mode


An IEEE 802.1ad bridge checks the content of VLAN tags of the received packets. The bridge performs Layer 2 switching based on the destination MAC addresses and the S-VLAN IDs of the packets.


IVL

-

Ingress Filter

Enabled

-

l Click Configure Mount, the Service Mount Configuration dialog box is displayed. l Select the mount ports in the dialog box.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Attr ibu te

Attribute Value

Ope ratio n Typ e

Adding S-VLAN tags based on Port and C-VLAN

VB Port

1

2

3

4

Mo unt Port

POR T7

PORT8

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2

CVL AN

10

20

10

20


10

20

353



Attr ibu te

Attribute Value

SVL AN

100

200

100

200

100

200

l Click OK, and the service mount is displayed on the interface. l Click OK, and the created EPLAN service is displayed on the interface. 4.

Create a VLAN filtering table. l Select the created bridge and click the VLAN Filtering Table tab. l Click New. l Create the VLAN filtering table of the GE service. Parameter

Value

Description

VLAN ID

100

According to the plan, the S-VLAN ID is 100 for the GE service.

l In Available Forwarding Ports, select PORT7, VCTRUNK1, and VCTRUNK2. Click . Then click Apply. l Create the VLAN filtering table of the FE service. Parameter

Value

Description

VLAN ID

200

According to the plan, the S-VLAN ID is 200 for the FE service.

l In Available Forwarding Ports, select PORT8, VCTRUNK1, and VCTRUNK2. Click . Then click Apply. 5.

Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the ports mounted to the bridge. NOTE

If normal communication is required between user M and user N, go to Step 2.

l Select the created bridge and click the Service Mount tab. l Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the port mounted to the bridge.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


354



Parameter

Value

Description

Hub/Spoke

PORT7: Hub

Users M and N do not need to communicate with each other. In this case, set VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 that access the services of users M and N to the Spoke attribute. Ports of the Spoke attribute cannot communicate with each other. A port of the Hub attribute can communicate with a port of the Spoke or Hub attribute.

PORT8: Hub VCTRUNK1: Spoke VCTRUNK2: Spoke

Step 2 Configure EPL services on NE2 and NE4. NOTE

The Ethernet services on NE2 and NE4 are EPL services transparently transmitted from point to point. Complete the configuration based on the planned parameters by referring to the operations described in 10.6 Configuration Example: Configuring EPL Services



Step 4 Enable the performance monitoring function for the NEs. For the operation procedures, see Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE in the Commissioning Guide. Step 5 Back up the configuration data on the NEs. Two methods are available for the backup. Option

Description





----End

10.11 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL and EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge) on a WDM Network Based on different VLANs, EVPL and EVPLAN services can be accessed through a same port, which is applicable to the scenario where the EVPL and EVPLAN users share the same port.

10.11.1 Networking Diagram Based on different VLANs, EVPL and EVPLAN services can be accessed through a same port. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


355




The same Ethernet port receives services from A1 and B1.

l

Two branches of user A are located at NE1 and NE2.

l

Three branches (B1, B2, and B3) of user B are located at NE1, NE2, and NE3 respectively. B2 and B3 do not need to communicate with each other.

l

The service of user A needs to be isolated from the service of user B.

l

The Ethernet equipment of user A and user B provides Ethernet optical ports that work mode in auto-negotiation mode.

l

VLAN ID of the A1 and A2 services: 100

l

VLAN ID of the B1, B2 and B3 services: 200

Figure 10-28 Networking diagram for configuring EVPL and EPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge)

B2

A2 IU3

IU3

PORT8

PORT7

NE3

NE2 LEM24

LEM24

PORT7 B3

NE1 IU3

LEM24

NG WDM equipment VCTRUNCK

B1

A1

VB1 VLAN 200 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2 PORT7

Board Configuration Information In this example, the convergence node NE1 is configured with one LEM24 board that supports the IEEE 802.1q bridge. The access nodes NE2 and NE4 are configured with one LEM24 board each. The EPL and EVPL services are configured to be transmitted from NE2 and NE4 to NE1.

10.11.2 Service Signals Flow The Ethernet services of the convergence node are received from an external port and tagged with the corresponding VLAN IDs. After the services are forwarded to an internal port through Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


356



Layer 2 switching, the VLAN IDs are stripped and then the services are transparently transmitted in the SDH network. In this way, the node communicates with a remote node. Figure 10-29 shows the signal flow of the EVPL and EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge). Figure 10-29 Service signal flow of the EVPL and EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge)

VLAN 100 EVPL

User A1

ONE 2

LEM24

ONE 1

User A2 PORT7

1(IN1/OUT1)-1

LEM24

PORT8

(VCTRUNCK 1)

User B2


PORT7 User B1 VLAN 200

ONE 3

LEM24


EPL

1(IN1/OUT1)-1

(VCTRUNCK 1)

:Client-side working service :WDM-side working service

User B3 PORT7



NE1

NE2

NE3

Board

LEM24

LEM24

LEM24

Port

PORT7

PORT7

PORT8

PORT8

Port Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Working Mode

AutoNegotiation

AutoNegotiation

AutoNegotiation

AutoNegotiation


1522

1522

1522

1522

TAG

Tag Aware

-

-

-

Entry Detection

Enabled

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Default VLAN ID

0

-

-

-

Port Type

UNI

UNI

UNI

UNI

Table 10-20 Parameters of internal ports on the Ethernet boards

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Parameter

NE1

NE2

NE3

Board

LEM24

LEM24

LEM24

Port

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK1

TAG

Access

Access

-

-


357



Parameter

NE1

NE2

NE3

Entry Detection

Enabled

Enabled

Disabled

Disabled

Default VLAN ID

100

200

-

-

Port Type

UNI

UNI

UNI

UNI

Table 10-21 Parameters of the EVPL services Parameter

EVPL Service of NE1

Board

EGSH

Service Type

EVPL

Service Direction

Bidirectional

Source Port

PORT7

Source C-VLAN(e.g.1, 3-6)

100

Sink Port

VCTRUNK1

Sink C-VLAN(e.g.1, 3-6)

100

Table 10-22 Parameters of the EVPLAN (IEEE 802.1q bridge) services Parameter


VB Name

VB1

VB Type

802.1q

Bridge Switch Mode



IVL

Ingress Filter

Enabled

VB Mount Port


VLAN Filtering

Hub/Spoke

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

VLAN Filtering

VLAN filtering table 1

VLAN ID

200



PORT7

HUB

VCTRUNK1

Spoke


358



Parameter

EPLAN Service of NE1 VCTRUNK2

Spoke

10.11.3 Configuration Process This section describes how to configure an EPLAN service through an example in which station B transmits the EPLAN service to station D. The case that station D transmits the EPLAN service to station B is similar, and thus is not described in this section.

Prerequisite You must read and understand the contents of Configuration Process of the EVPL Service and Configuration Process of the EVPLAN Service.


Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Configure the EVPL services form user A1 to user A2 on NE1. For the operation procedures, see 10.7 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL (QinQ) Services on a WDM Network. Step 2 Configure the EVPLAN services of user B1 and user B3. For the operation procedures, see 10.9 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge) on a WDM Network. Step 3 Configure the EVPL services on NE2. For the operation procedures, see 10.7 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL (QinQ) Services on a WDM Network. Step 4 Configure the EPL services on NE3. For the operation procedures, see 10.6 Configuration Example: Configuring EPL Services. Step 5 Verify the service configurations. For the verification procedure, see Testing Ethernet Service Channels in the Commissioning Guide. Step 6 Enable the performance monitoring function for the NEs. For the operation procedures, see Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE in the Commissioning Guide. Step 7 Back up the configuration data on the NEs. Two methods are available for the backup. Option

Description





----End Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


359



10.12 Configuration Example: Configuring EPL Services on a SDH Network EPL services provide the point-to-point Ethernet transparent transmission solution where the bandwidth is occupied exclusively. EPL services are applicable when the communication equipment that is used to access the client-side data in the transmission network does not support VLAN or when the VLAN planning cannot be disclosed to the network operator.

10.12.1 Networking Diagram The completely isolated data services of two users at a station must be transported to another station.

Service Requirement On the network shown in Figure 10-30, the service requirements are as follows: l

The two branches of user A that are located at NE1 and NE3 need to communicate with each other over Ethernet. A 100 Mbit/s bandwidth is required.

l

The two branches of user B that are located at NE1 and NE3 need to communicate with each other over Ethernet. A 200 Mbit/s bandwidth is required.

l

The services of user A must be isolated from the services of user B.

l

The Ethernet equipment of user A and user B provides 1000 Mbit/s Ethernet electrical interfaces that work in 1000M full-duplex mode and do not support VLAN tags.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


360



Figure 10-30 Networking diagram of the EPL services User A2

User B2

PORT1

PORT2

Line Board Ethernet Board 1

1-SLQ64 4-EGSH

NE3

17

Line Board Line Board

1-SLQ64 17-SLQ64

NE2

NE4

1 17

NE1

Line Board Ethernet Board PORT1

User A1

17-SLQ64 4-EGSH

PORT2

User B1

VCTRUNK

OptiX OSN 8800

10.12.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation Ethernet services are received from an external port, encapsulated through an internal port, and mapped into the SDH network for transparent transmission. In this manner, the node communicates with a remote node. The signal flow of the EPL services and the timeslot allocation to the EPL services are shown in Figure 10-31. Figure 10-31 Signal flow and timeslot allocation (Ethernet switching board) NE1 EGSH PORT1 User A1 PORT2 User B1

NE2

VCTRUNK1 VC4--xv:VC4-1

VCTRUNK1 VC4:VC4-1

VC4--xv:VC4-1

VC4:VC4-2 VC4:VC4-3

VC4--xv:VC4-2 VC4--xv:VC4-3

VCTRUNK2 VC4--xv:VC4-2 VC4--xv:VC4-3

NE3 EGSH

VCTRUNK2

PORT1 User A2 PORT2 User B2

SDH

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


361


l


The EPL services of user A: – Occupy the first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE3 and pass through NE2. – Are added and dropped by using the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGSH board of NE1 and the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGSH board of NE3.

l

The EPL services of user B: – Occupy the second and third VC-4s (VC4:VC4-2 and VC4:VC4-3) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE3 and pass through NE2. – Are added and dropped by using the second and third VC-4s (VC4-xv:VC4-2 and VC4xv:VC4-3) on the EGSH board of NE1 and the second and third VC-4s (VC4-xv:VC4-2 and VC4-xv:VC4-3) on the EGSH board of NE3.

Table 10-23 Parameters of the external ports of the Ethernet boards Parameter

NE1

NE3

Board

EGSH

EGSH

Port

PORT1

PORT2

PORT1

PORT2

Enabled/ Disabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Working Mode

1000M Full Duplex

1000M Full Duplex

1000M Full Duplex

1000M Full Duplex


1522

1522

1522

1522

Entry Detection

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Port Type

UNI

UNI

UNI

UNI

Table 10-24 Parameters of the internal ports of the Ethernet boards

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Parameter

NE1

NE3

Board

EGSH

EGSH

Internal Port

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2

Mapping Protocol

GFP

GFP

GFP

GFP

Bound Path

VC4xv:VC4-1

VC4-xv:VC4-2 and VC4xv:VC4-3

VC4xv:VC4-1

VC4-xv:VC4-2, VC4-xv:VC4-3

Entry Detection

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Port Type

UNI

UNI

UNI

UNI


362



Table 10-25 Parameters of the EPL services Parameter

EPL Services of User A

EPL Services of User B

Board

EGSH

Service Type

EPL

Service Direction

Bidirectional

Source Port

PORT1

PORT2


Null

Null

Sink Port

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2


Null

Null

10.12.3 Configuration Process During the configuration of EPL services on Ethernet switching boards, you need to configure Ethernet private line services. This topic describes the process of configuring Ethernet private line services for Ethernet switching boards.

Prerequisite The Creating a Network task must be complete. You must be familiar with 10.3.1 EPL Service Configuration Process.


Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Configure the EPL services for user A1 and user B1 on NE1. 1.

Configure the attributes of the external ports (PORT1 and PORT2 of the EGSH board) used by the services of user A1 and user B1. l In the NE Explorer, select the EGSH and then choose Communication > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. l Select External Port. l Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Parame ter


Description

Enabled / Disable d

PORT1: Enabled

PORT1 is used by the service of user A1. PORT2 is used by the service of user B1. In this example, Enabled/Disabled is set to Enabled for PORT1 and PORT2.

PORT2: Enabled


363



Parame ter


Description

Workin g Mode

PORT1: 1000M FullDuplex

In this example, the Ethernet service access equipment of user A1 and user B1 supports the 1000M full-duplex mode. Hence, Working Mode is set to 1000M FullDuplex for PORT1 and PORT2.

PORT2: 1000M FullDuplex Maximu m Frame Length

PORT1: 1522

MAC Loopba ck

PORT1: Non-Loopback

PHY Loopba ck

PORT1: Non-Loopback

PORT2: 1522

PORT2: Non-Loopback

PORT2: Non-Loopback

Generally, this parameter adopts the default value 1522.


l Click the Flow Control tab. The parameters in the Flow Control tab page adopt the default values. l Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. Parame ter


Description

Entry Detectio n

PORT1: Disabled

The services of user A1 and user B1 are EPL transparent transmission services. Hence, you need not enable the entry detection function to check the VLAN tags of the packets. In this example, Entry Detection needs to be set to Disabled. When Entry Detection is set to Disabled, the parameters of TAG, Default VLAN ID, and VLAN Priority are invalid.

PORT2: Disabled

l Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Parame ter


Description

Port Type

PORT1: UNI

The UNI interface processes the tag attribute of IEEE 802.1q-compliant packets. That is, the UNI interface processes and identifies the VLAN information of the accessed user packets, according to the supported tag flag, namely, Tag Aware, Access, and Hybrid.

PORT2: UNI


364



l Click the Advanced Attributes tab. The parameters in the Advanced Attributes tab page adopt the default values. 2.

Configure the attributes of the internal ports (VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 of the EGSH board) used by the services of user A1 and user B1. l Select Internal Port. l Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. Parame ter


Description

Entry Detectio n

VCTRUNK1: Disabled

The services of user A1 and user B1 are EPL transparent transmission services. Hence, you need not enable the entry detection function to check the VLAN tags of the packets. In this example, Entry Detection needs to be set to Disabled. When Entry Detection is set to Disabled, the parameters of TAG, Default VLAN ID, and VLAN Priority are invalid. Hence, it is recommended that this parameter adopts the default value.

VCTRUNK2: Disabled

l Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. Parame ter


Description

Port Type

PORT1: UNI

The UNI interface processes the tag attribute of IEEE 802.1q-compliant packets. That is, the UNI interface processes and identifies the VLAN information of the accessed user packets, according to the supported tag flag, namely, Tag Aware, Access, and Hybrid.

PORT2: UNI

l Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Parame ter


Description

Mappin g Protocol

VCTRUNK1: GFP

In this example, the EGSH board is used. This parameter adopts the default value GFP. Mapping Protocol of the VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of the interconnected equipment at both ends must be set to the same value.

VCTRUNK2: GFP


365



Parame ter


Description

Scrambl e

VCTRUNK1: Scrambling mode[X43 +1]

In this example, this parameter adopts the default value Scrambling mode[X43+1]. Scramble of the VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of the interconnected equipment at both ends must be set to the same value.

VCTRUNK2: Scrambling mode[X43 +1] Check Field Length

VCTRUNK1: FCS32

FCS Calculat ed Bit Sequenc e

VCTRUNK1: Big endian

Extensi on Header Option

VCTRUNK1: No

VCTRUNK2: FCS32


VCTRUNK2: No

In this example, this parameter adopts the default value FCS32. Check Field Length of the VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of the interconnected equipment at both ends must be set to the same value. When Mapping Protocol is set to GFP, FCS Calculated Bit Sequence is set to Big endian. FCS Calculated Bit Sequence of the VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of the interconnected equipment at both ends must be set to the same value. When Mapping Protocol is set to GFP, this parameter is valid and adopts the default value No. Extension Header Option of the VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of the interconnected equipment at both ends must be set to the same value.

l This operation is optional. Click the LCAS tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. Parame ter


Description

Enablin g LCAS

VCTRUNK1: Enabled

In this example, the LCAS function is enabled.

LCAS Mode

VCTRUNK1: Huawei Mode

VCTRUNK2: Enabled


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

HO Time (ms)

VCTRUNK1: 2000

WTR Time (s)

VCTRUNK1: 300

VCTRUNK2: 2000

VCTRUNK2: 300

In this example, this parameter adopts the default value Huawei Mode. When Huawei equipment is used at both ends, LCAS Mode of the equipment at both ends is set to Huawei Mode. In this example, this parameter adopts the default value 2000. This parameter can also be set according to the requirement of the user. In this example, this parameter adopts the default value 300. This parameter can also be set according to the requirement of the user.


366



Parame ter


Description

TSD

VCTRUNK1: Disabled

In this example, the TSD function is disabled. The LCAS does not check the B3 bit error or BIP status of the VCTRUNK members.

VCTRUNK2: Disabled

l Click the Bound Path tab. Click the Configuration button. Set the following parameters in the Bound Path Configuration dialog box that is displayed. Click and click Apply. Click Yes in the Hint dialog box that is displayed. Click Close in the Operation dialog box that is displayed. User

Parameter


Description

User A1← →user A2

Configurabl e Ports

VCTRUN K

VCTRUNK1 is used by the service between user A1 and user A2.

Avail able Boun d Paths

Lev el

VC4-xv

The service between user A1 and user A2 uses a 100 Mbit/s bandwidth. Hence, one VC-4 needs to be bound.

Ser vice Dir ecti on

Bidirectio nal

The service between user A1 and user A2 is a bidirectional service.

Ava ilab le Res our ces

VC4-1

-

Configurabl e Ports

VCTRUN K

VCTRUNK2 is used by the service between user B1 and user B2.


Lev el

VC4-xv

The service between user B1 and user B2 uses a 200 Mbit/s bandwidth. Hence, two VC-4s need to be bound.


Bidirectio nal

The service between user B1 and user B2 is a bidirectional service.

User B1← →user B2

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


367



User

Parameter



Description

VC4-2, VC4-3

The service between user B1 and user B2 uses a 200 Mbit/s bandwidth. Hence, two VC-4s needs to be bound.


Configure the Ethernet private line services for user A1 and user B1. l In the NE Explorer, select the EGSH and then choose Communication > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Click

.

l Click New on the lower-right pane to display the Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box. Set the following parameters, and then click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. User

Parameter


Description

User A1

Service Type

EPL

The service of user A1 is an EPL service.

Service Direction

Bidirection al

The service of user A1 is a bidirectional service.

Source Port

PORT1

When creating the bidirectional Ethernet service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it is recommended that you use a specific PORT as the source port. In this example, the service of user A1 occupies PORT1.

Source CVLAN (e.g. 1, 3-6)

Null

In this example, the EPL service does not carry the VLAN tag.

Sink Port

VCTRUN K1

When creating the bidirectional Ethernet service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it is recommended that you use a specific VCTRUNK as the sink port. In this example, the service of user A1 occupies VCTRUNK1.

Sink CVLAN (e.g. 1, 3-6)

Null


Service Type

EPL

The service of user B1 is an EPL service.

User B1

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


368



User

4.

Parameter


Description

Service Direction

Bidirection al

The service of user B1 is a bidirectional service.

Source Port

PORT2

When creating the bidirectional Ethernet service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it is recommended that you use a specific PORT as the source port. In this example, the service of user B1 occupies PORT2.


Null


Sink Port

VCTRUN K2

When creating the bidirectional Ethernet service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it is recommended that you use a specific VCTRUNK as the sink port. In this example, the service of user B1 occupies VCTRUNK2.


Null


Configure the cross-connections from the Ethernet services to the SDH links for user A1 and user B1. l In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Click

.

l Click Create on the lower-right pane to display the Create SDH Service dialog box. Set the parameters that are required, and then click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. User

Paramete r


Description

User A1

Level

VC4

The timeslot bound with the service of user A1 is at the VC-4 level. The service level must be consistent with the level of the path bound with the VCTRUNK.

Direction

Bidirectiona l

The service of user A1 is a bidirectional service.

Source Slot 4-EGSH-1 (SDH-1)

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

When you create a bidirectional SDH service from an Ethernet board to a line board, it is recommended that you set the slot of the Ethernet board as the source slot.


369



User

User B1

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Paramete r


Description


1

The value range of the source VC-4 timeslots is consistent with the value of Available Resources, which is set for the paths bound with VCTRUNK1. In this example, the value of Available Resources is VC4-1.

Sink Slot

17SLQ64-1 (SDH-1)

When you create a bidirectional SDH service from an Ethernet board to a line board, it is recommended that you set the slot of the line board as the sink slot.


1

The value range of the sink timeslots can be the same as or different from the value range of the source timeslots. The number of sink timeslots, however, must be consistent with the number of source timeslots.

Activate Immediatel y

Yes

-

Level

VC4

The timeslot bound with the service of user B1 is at the VC-4 level. The service level must be consistent with the level of the path bound with the VCTRUNK.

Direction

Bidirectiona l

The service of user B1 is a bidirectional service.




2-3

The value range of the source VC-4 timeslots is consistent with the value of Available Resources, which is set for the paths bound with VCTRUNK1. In this example, the values of Available Resources are VC4-2 and VC4-3.

Sink Slot

17SLQ64-1 (SDH-1)



370



User

Paramete r


Description


2-3

The value range of the sink timeslot can be the same as or different from the value range of the source timeslot. The number of source timeslots must be, however, the same as the number of sink timeslots.


Yes

-

Step 2 Configure the pass-through services for user A1 and user B1 on NE2. 1.

Click

. Select NE2 in the dialog box that is displayed. Then, click OK.

2.

In the NE Explorer, select NE2 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Click

3.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

.

Click Create on the lower-right pane to display the Create SDH Service dialog box. Set the parameters that are required, and then click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. Parameter


Description

Level

VC4

The SDH service of NE1, which passes through NE2, is at the VC-4 level.

Direction

Bidirectional

The SDH service from NE1 to NE2 is a bidirectional service.

Source Slot

1-SLQ64-1 (SDH-1)

The service signals are transmitted from 1-SLQ64-1 (SDH-1) to 17-SLQ64-1(SDH-1). In this example, Source Slot is set to 1-SLQ64-1(SDH-1).


1-3

The service between user A1 and user B1 occupies three VC-4s.

Sink Slot

17-SLQ64-1 (SDH-1)

The service signals are transmitted from 1-SLQ64-1 (SDH-1) to 17-SLQ64-1(SDH-1). In this example, Sink Slot is set to 17-SLQ64-1(SDH-1).


1-3

The service between user A1 and user B1 occupies three VC-4s.


371



Parameter


Description


Yes

-

Step 3 Configure the EPL services for user A2 and user B2 on NE3. Refer to Step 1 and configure the EPL services for user A2 and user B2. Step 4 Check whether the service between user A1 and user A2 and the service between user B1 and user B2 are correct. For the operation procedure, see Testing Ethernet Service Paths. Step 5 Enable the performance monitoring function of the NEs. For details, see Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE. Step 6 Back up the configuration data of the NEs. Second methods are available for the backup. Option

Description

The SCC board is not configured with any Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board CF card. The SCC board is configured with a CF card.

Manually Backing Up the NE Database to a CF Card

----End

10.13 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL (QinQ) Services on a SDH Network The EVPL (QinQ) service provides an Ethernet private line solution. The services are applicable where the services of multiple users that have the same VLAN ID are accessed into a transmission network and need to be transmitted on the same VCTRUNK. In the case of EVPL (QinQ) services, a layer of S-VLAN tag is added on the network side to isolate the services of different users from each other.

10.13.1 Networking Diagram When the services of multiple users that have the same VLAN ID are accessed on the same station and need to be transmitted on the same VCTRUNK, a layer of S-VLAN tag is added to isolate the services of different users from each other.


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Two branches of user J are located at NE1 and NE2, and need to communicate with each other. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

372



l

Two branches of user K are located at NE1 and NE2, and need to communicate with each other.

l

The services of user J need to be isolated from the services of user K. The traffic of user J and the traffic of user K, however, occupy a 200 Mbit/s bandwidth during different time periods.

l

The Ethernet equipment of user J and user K provides 1000 Mbit/s Ethernet optical ports that work in 1000M full-duplex mode. The services of all the users have the same VLAN ID of 100 and are accessed into the transmission network.

Figure 10-32 Networking diagram of the EVPL (QinQ) services

Line Board Ethernet Board

NE3

1-SLQ64 4-EGSH

PORT1

NE2

NE4

VLAN 100 User J2

PORT2 VLAN 100

1 NE1 PORT2 VLAN 100

17 User K2 Line Board Ethernet Board

17-SLQ64 4-EGSH

User K1 PORT1 VLAN 100

User J1 VCTRUNK OptiX OSN 8800

Board Configuration Information In this example, NE1 and NE2 are each configured with one EGSH board, which is an Ethernet switching board supporting the QinQ function. Two layers of VLAN tags are added to isolate the services of different users from each other. l

When the data of user J is accessed into the transmission network, the S-VLAN tags are added to the data. When the data is transmitted out of the transmission network, the SVLAN tags are stripped.

l

When the data of user K is accessed into the transmission network, the S-VLAN tags are added to the data. When the data is transmitted out of the transmission network, the SVLAN tags are stripped.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


373



10.13.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation The services of multiple users that have the same VLAN ID are accessed through different external ports of the Ethernet board on the source node. After different S-VLAN tags are added to the services, the services are transmitted on the same VCTRUNK. In this manner, the services of different users are isolated from each other. After the services arrive at the sink node, the SVLAN tags are stripped. Figure 10-33 shows the signal flow of the EVPL (QinQ) services and the timeslot allocation to the EVPL (QinQ) services. Figure 10-33 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation NE2:EGSH

NE1:EGSH PORT1

User J1 VLAN 100 User K1 VLAN 100

EVPL1

EVPL1 VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK1

PORT2

VC4-xv:VC4-1 VC4-xv:VC4-2

EVPL2

VC4:VC4-1 VC4:VC4-2

VC4-xv:VC4-1 VC4-xv:VC4-2

PORT1 User J2 VLAN 100 PORT2

EVPL2

User K2 VLAN 100

SDH PORT

VCTRUNK Strip S-VLAN Label

Add S-VLAN Label

Strip S-VLAN Label C-VLAN(100)

User J1

S-VLAN(10)

C-VLAN(100)

User J1

C-VLAN(100)

User J1

C-VLAN(100)

User K1

S-VLAN(20)

C-VLAN(100)

User K1

C-VLAN(100)

User K1

l

The EVPL services of user J and user K that share VCTRUNK1 occupy the first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) and second VC-4 (VC4:VC4-2) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE2.

l

The EVPL services of user J and user K are added and dropped by using the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) and second VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-2) on the EGSH board of NE1 and the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) and second VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-2) on the EGSH board of NE2.

Table 10-26 Parameters of the external ports of the Ethernet boards

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Parameter

NE1

NE2

Board

EGSH

EGSH

Port

PORT1

PORT2

PORT1

PORT2

Enabled/ Disabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Working Mode

1000M FullDuplex

1000M FullDuplex

1000M FullDuplex

1000M FullDuplex


1522

1522

1522

1522

Port Type

C-Aware

C-Aware

C-Aware

C-Aware


374



Table 10-27 Parameters of the internal ports of the Ethernet boards Parameter

NE1

NE2

Board

EGSH

EGSH

Port

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK1

Mapping Protocol

GFP

GFP

Port Type

S-Aware

S-Aware

Bound Path

VC4-xv:VC4-1, VC4xv:VC4-2

VC4-xv:VC4-1, VC4xv:VC4-2

Table 10-28 Parameters of the EVPL (QinQ) services Parameter

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

NE1

NE2

EVPL1

EVPL2

EVPL1

EVPL2

PORT1←→ VCTRUNK1




Board

EGSH

EGSH

Service Type

EVPL(QinQ)

EVPL(QinQ)

Service Direction

Bidirectional

Bidirectional

Operation Type

Add S-VLAN

Add S-VLAN

Source Port

PORT1

PORT2

PORT1

PORT2

Source CVLAN(e.g.1, 3-6)

100

100

100

100

Source SVLAN

-

-

-

-

Sink Port

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK1


100

100

100

100

Sink S-VLAN

10

20

10

20

C-VLAN Priority

AUTO

AUTO

AUTO

AUTO

S-VLAN Priority

AUTO

AUTO

AUTO

AUTO


375



10.13.3 Configuration Process The Ethernet switching boards supporting the QinQ function need to be installed at the source and sink nodes and need to be configured with the EVPL services of different users. Different S-VLAN tags are added to the services of different users that have the same C-VLAN ID and are accessed through different ports on the Ethernet switching boards. In this manner, the services of different users are isolated from each other and are transmitted on the same VCTRUNK.

Prerequisite The Creating a Network task must be complete. You must be familiar with EVPL (QinQ) Service Configuration Process.

Procedure Step 1 Configure the EVPL services for user J1 and user K1 on NE1. 1.

Configure the attributes of the external ports (PORT1 and PORT2 of the EGSH board) used by the services of user J1 and user K1. l In the NE Explorer, select the EGSH board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. l Select External Port. l Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. Parame ter


Description

Enabled / Disable d

PORT1: Enabled

PORT1 is used by the service of user J1. PORT2 is used by the service of user K1. In this example, Enabled/Disabled is set to Enabled for PORT1 and PORT2.

Workin g Mode


PORT2: Enabled


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Maximu m Frame Length

PORT1: 1522

MAC Loopba ck

PORT1: Non-Loopback

PHY Loopba ck

PORT1: Non-Loopback

PORT2: 1522

PORT2: Non-Loopback

PORT2: Non-Loopback

In this example, the Ethernet service access equipment of user J1 and user K1 supports the 1000M full-duplex mode. Hence, Working Mode is set to 1000M FullDuplex for PORT1 and PORT2. Generally, this parameter adopts the default value 1522.



376



l Click the Flow Control tab. The parameters in the Flow Control tab page adopt the default values. l Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. Parameter


Description

Port Type

PORT1: C-Aware

The C-Aware port is used for connecting to the client network, and identifies and processes the packets that carry C-VLAN tags.

PORT2: C-Aware

l When Port Type is set to C-Aware or S-Aware, the parameters in the TAG Attributes tab page are invalid. Hence, The parameters in the TAG Attributes tab page need not be set. l Click the Advanced Attributes tab. The parameters in the Advanced Attributes tab page adopt the default values. 2.

Set the attributes of the internal port (VCTRUNK1 on the EGSH board) used by the service between user J1 and user J2 and the service between K1 and user K2. l Select Internal Port. l Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. Parame ter


Description

Port Type

VCTRUNK1: S-Aware

The S-Aware port is used for connecting to the supplier network, and identifies and processes the packets that carry S-VLAN tags.

l Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Parame ter


Description

Mappin g Protocol

VCTRUNK1: GFP

Mapping Protocol of the VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of the interconnected equipment at both ends must be set to the same value.

Scrambl e




377



Parame ter


Description

Check Field Length

VCTRUNK1: FCS32

In this example, this parameter adopts the default value FCS32. Check Field Length of the VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of the interconnected equipment at both ends must be set to the same value.



When Mapping Protocol is set to GFP, FCS Calculated Bit Sequence is set to Big endian. FCS Calculated Bit Sequence of the VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of the interconnected equipment at both ends must be set to the same value.


VCTRUNK1: No

When Mapping Protocol is set to GFP, this parameter is valid and adopts the default value No. Extension Header Option of the VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of the interconnected equipment at both ends must be set to the same value.

l This operation is optional. Click the LCAS tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Parame ter


Description

Enablin g LCAS

VCTRUNK1: Enabled


LCAS Mode


In this example, this parameter adopts the default value Huawei Mode. When Huawei equipment is used at both ends, LCAS Mode of the equipment at both ends is set to Huawei Mode.

HO Time (ms)

VCTRUNK1: 2000

In this example, this parameter adopts the default value 2000. This parameter can also be set according to the requirement of the user.

WTR Time(s)

VCTRUNK1: 300


TSD

VCTRUNK1: Disabled



378



l Click the Bound Path tab. Click the Configuration button. Set the parameters in the Bound Path Configuration dialog box that is displayed. Click and then click Apply. Click Yes in the Hint dialog box that is displayed. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed. User

Paramete r


Description

User J1←→ user J2 User K1← →user K2

Configurab le Ports

VCTRUN K1

VCTRUNK1 is used by the service between user J1 and user J2 and the service between user K1 and user K2.

Ava ilabl e Bou nd Path s

Lev el

VC4-xv

The service between user J1 and user J2 and the service between user K1 and user K2 share a 200 Mbit/s bandwidth. Hence, two VC-4s need to be bound.


Bidirection al

The service between user J1 and user J2 and the service between user K1 and user K2 are bidirectional services.


VC4-1, VC4-2

In this example, the first and second VC-4s of the EGSH board are bound.


Configure the Ethernet private line services between user J1 and user J2 and between user K1 and user K2. l In the NE Explorer, select the EGSH board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. l Select Display QinQ Shared Service on the lower-right pane. Then, click New. l Set the parameters in the Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box that is displayed. Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

User

Parameter


Description

User J1 ←→ user J2

Service Type

EVPL (QinQ)

The service between user J1 and user J2 is an EVPL (QinQ) service.


379



User

User K1 ←→ user K2

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Parameter


Description

Service Direction

Bidirectio nal

The service between user J1 and user J2 is a bidirectional service.

Operation Type

Add SVLAN

The service between user J1 and user J2 and the service between user K1 and user K2 carry the same C-VLAN tag. Hence, a layer of S-VLAN tag needs to be added to isolate the services of different users.

Source Port

PORT1

When creating the bidirectional Ethernet service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it is recommended that you use a specific PORT as the source port. In this example, PORT1 is the external port used by the service between user J1 and user J2.

Source CVLAN(e.g. 1, 3-6)

100

The Ethernet service of user J1 carries the CVLAN ID of 100.

Source SVLAN

-

The data packets that are accessed into the external port carry the C-VLAN tags but do not carry the S-VLAN tags.

Sink Port

VCTRUN K1

When creating the bidirectional Ethernet service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it is recommended that you use a specific VCTRUNK as the sink port. In this example, VCTRUNK1 is the internal port used by the service between user J1 and user J2.

Sink CVLAN(e.g. 1, 3-6)

100


Sink SVLAN

10

According to the plan, the S-VLAN ID of 10 needs to be added to the service between user J1 and user J2.

C-VLAN Priority

AUTO

In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.

S-VLAN Priority

AUTO


Service Direction

Bidirectio nal

The service between user K1 and user K2 is a bidirectional service.


380



User

4.

Parameter


Description

Operation Type

Add SVLAN


Source Port

PORT2

When creating the bidirectional Ethernet service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it is recommended that you use a specific PORT as the source port. In this example, PORT2 is the external port used by the service between user K1 and user K2.

Source CVLAN(e.g. 1, 3-6)

100

The Ethernet service of user K1 carries the C-VLAN ID of 100.

Source SVLAN

-


Sink Port

VCTRUN K1

When creating the bidirectional Ethernet service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it is recommended that you use a specific VCTRUNK as the sink port. In this example, VCTRUNK1 is the internal port used by the service between user K1 and user K2.

Sink CVLAN(e.g. 1, 3-6)

100


Sink SVLAN

20

According to the plan, the S-VLAN ID of 20 needs to be added to the service between user K1 and user K2.

C-VLAN Priority

AUTO


S-VLAN Priority

AUTO


Configure the cross-connections from the Ethernet services to the SDH links for user J1 and user K1. l In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Click

.

l Click Create on the lower-right pane to display the Create SDH Service dialog box. Set the parameters that are required. Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


381



User

Paramete r


Description

User J1 ←→ user J2 User K1 ←→ user K2

Level

VC4

The timeslots bound with the service between user J1 and user J2 and the service between user K1 and user K2 are at the VC-4 level. The service level must be consistent with the level of the paths bound with the VCTRUNK.

Direction

Bidirectiona l




Source Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6)

1-2

The value range of the source timeslots is consistent with the value of Available Resources, which is set for the paths bound with VCTRUNK1. In this example, the values of Available Resources are VC4-1 and VC4-2.

Sink Slot

17SLQ64-1 (SDH-1)


Sink Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6)

1-2



Yes

-

Step 2 Configure the EVPL service of NE2. Refer to Step 1 and configure the EVPL service of NE2. The procedures and parameters for configuring the EVPL service of NE2 are the same as the procedures and parameters for configuring the EVPL service of NE1. Step 3 Check whether the services between NE1 and NE2 are configured correctly. For the operation procedures, see Testing Ethernet Service Paths. l Before testing the service connectivity between user J1 and user J2, set TAG to Access and Default VLAN ID to 100 for PORT1 on the EGSH board. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


382



l Before testing the service connectivity between user K1 and user K2, set TAG to Access and Default VLAN ID to 100 for PORT2 on the EGSH board. NOTE

After the test, change the parameter values back to the values specified in the service configuration.

Step 4 Enable the performance monitoring function of the NEs. For details, see Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE. Step 5 Back up the configuration data of the NEs. Three methods are available for the backup. Option

Description



----End

10.14 Configuration Example: Configuring PORT-Shared EVPL (VLAN) Services on a SDH Network The PORT-shared EVPL (VLAN) service is applicable when the services of multiple users, which are received from the same external port on the Ethernet board at a station, need to be transmitted on different VCTRUNKs to another station or to another external port of the station.

10.14.1 Networking Diagram The services of multiple users, which are received from the same external port on an Ethernet board of a station, need to be transmitted to different stations on different VCTRUNKs.

Service Requirement On the network shown in Figure 10-34, the service requirements are as follows: l

The headquarters C1 of user C is located at NE1. Two branches (C2 and C3) of user C are located at NE2 and NE4. The services between C1 and C2 are transmitted in the VLAN of which the VLAN ID is 100. The services between C1 and C3 are transmitted in the VLAN of which the VLAN ID is 200.

l

The services of C2 are isolated from the services of C3. The services of C2 and C3 require a 100 Mbit/s bandwidth respectively.

l

The Ethernet equipment of C1, C2, and C3 provides 1000 Mbit/s Ethernet optical ports that work in 1000M full-duplex mode. The Ethernet equipment of C1 supports VLAN tags, but the Ethernet equipment of C2 and C3 does not support VLAN tags. – The VLAN ID used by the Ethernet services between C1 and C2 is 100. – The VLAN ID used by the Ethernet services between C1 and C3 is 200.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


383



Figure 10-34 Networking diagram for configuring PORT-shared EVPL (VLAN) services

T2000 NE3

Line Board 1-JL64 Ethernet Board 15-EGT6


NE2

NE4

PORT1 User C2

PORT1 17

1

17-JL64 15-EGT6

User C3

NE1 17

1

PORT1

Line Board 17-SLQ64 Line Board 1-SLQ64 Ethernet Board 4-EGSH

User C1 VLAN 100 VLAN 200

VCTRUNK

OptiX OSN 8800

OptiX OSN 3500

Board Configuration Information In this example, NE1 is configured with an EGSH board. VLAN IDs are used to isolate the data of different users that are received from the same port. NE2 and NE4 are configured with an EGT6 board each. The EPL services are configured to implement service transparent transmission from NE2 and NE4 to NE1. NOTE

The Ethernet boards are classified into the Ethernet transparent transmission boards and Ethernet switching boards, based on the type of the accessed services. The Ethernet transparent transmission boards support only EPL services whereas the Ethernet switching boards support EPL services, EVPL services, and Layer 2 switching. Hence, Ethernet switching boards are used more widely than Ethernet transparent transmission boards.

10.14.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation The Ethernet services wherein different VLAN IDs are used to isolate the data of different users, are received from the same external port of NE1, encapsulated through an internal port, and then transparently transmitted on the SDH network. In this manner, the node communicates with a remote node. Figure 10-35 shows the signal flow of the PORT-shared EVPL (VLAN) services and the timeslot allocation to the PORT-shared EVPL (VLAN) services. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


384



Figure 10-35 Signal flow and timeslot allocation NE2:EGT6 NE1:EGSH

PORT1 User C1

4:VC VC4

1

PORT1 User C2

EPL

VCTRUNK1 VC4-xv:VC4-1

VCTRUNK1

EVPL1

VC4-xv:VC4-1 VCTRUNK2

EVPL2

VC4-xv:VC4-2

VC 4

NE4:EGT6

:VC 4-1

VCTRUNK1

PORT1 User C3

EPL

VC4-xv:VC4-1

SDH

l

The EVPL service from C1 to C2: – Occupies the first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE2. – Is added and dropped by using the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGSH board of NE1 and the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGT6 board of NE2.

l

The EVPL service from C1 to C3: – Occupies the first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE4. – Is added and dropped by using the second VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-2) on the EGSH board of NE1 and the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGT6 board of NE4.


NE1

NE2

NE4

Board

EGSH

EGT6

EGT6

Port

PORT1

PORT1

PORT1

Enabled/Disabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Working Mode

1000M Full-Duplex

1000M Full-Duplex

1000M Full-Duplex


1522

1522

1522

TAG

Tag Aware

-

-

Entry Detection

Enabled

-

-

Port Type

UNI

-

-


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Parameter

NE1

NE2

NE4

Board

EGSH

EGT6

EGT6


385



Parameter

NE1

NE2

NE4

Port

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK1

Mapping Protocol

GFP

GFP

GFP

GFP

TAG

Access

Access

-

-

Entry Detection

Enabled

Enabled

-

-

Default VLAN ID

100

200

-

-

VLAN Priority

0

0

-

-

Bound Path

VC4-xv:VC4-1

VC4-xv:VC4-2

VC4-xv:VC4-1

VC4-xv:VC4-1

Port Type

UNI

UNI

-

-

Table 10-31 Parameters of the PORT-shared EVPL (VLAN) services Parameter

NE1 EVPL1

EVPL2

(PORT1←→ VCTRUNK1)

(PORT1←→ VCTRUNK2)

Board

EGSH

Service Type

EVPL

Service Direction

Bidirectional

Source Port

PORT1

PORT1


100

200

Sink Port

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2


100

200

10.14.3 Configuration Process Ethernet switching boards are required for creating EVPL services of different VLAN IDs on NE1. In this manner, the data of different users, which are received from the same external port, can be differentiated. Ethernet transparent transmission boards are required for creating EPL transparent transmission services on NE2 and NE4.

Prerequisite The Creating a Network task must be complete. You must be familiar with 10.3.2 EVPL (QinQ) Service Configuration Process. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


386




Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Configure the EVPL services for user C1 on NE1. 1.

Configure the attributes of the external port (PORT1 of the EGSH board) used by the service of user C1. l In the NE Explorer, select the EGSH and then choose Communication > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. l Select External Port. l Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. Parame ter


Description

Enabled / Disable d

PORT1: Enabled

The service of user C1 occupies PORT1. In this example, Enabled/Disabled is set to Enabled.

Workin g Mode


The Ethernet service access equipment of user C1 supports the 1000M full-duplex mode. In this example, Working Mode is set to Auto-Negotiation.


PORT1: 1522


MAC Loopba ck

PORT1: Non-Loopback

The MAC loopback setting is used for fault diagnosis. In this example, MAC Loopback is set to Non-Loopback.

PHY Loopba ck

PORT1: Non-Loopback

The PHY loopback setting is used for fault diagnosis. In this example, PHY Loopback is set to Non-Loopback.

l Click the Flow Control tab. The parameters in the Flow Control tab page adopt the default values. l Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


387



Parame ter


Description

TAG

PORT1: Tag Aware

When the port is set to Tag Aware, all data frames transmitted and received at the port must carry VLAN tags. In this example, TAG is set to Tag Aware.

Default VLAN ID

-

When TAG is set to Tag Aware, you need not set Default VLAN ID.

VLAN Priority

-

When TAG is set to Tag Aware, you need not set VLAN Priority.

Entry Detectio n

PORT1: Enabled

The services of user C1 is EVPL services. Hence, the entry detection function must be enabled to check whether the data frames carry VLAN tags. In this manner, the user data frames with different VLAN tags can be distinguished at one port. In this example, Entry Detection of PORT1 is set to Enabled.



Description

Port Type

PORT1: UNI



Set the attributes of the internal ports (VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 of the EGSH board) used by the services between user C1 and user C2 and between user C1 and user C3. l Select Internal Port. l Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


388



Parame ter


Description

TAG

VCTRUNK1: Access

This parameter is set to Access if the Ethernet equipment of user C2 and user C3 does not support VLAN tags and if the transmitted packets do not carry VLAN tags.

VCTRUNK2: Access

Default VLAN ID

VCTRUNK1: 100 VCTRUNK2: 200

According to the plan, the VLAN ID is set to 100 on the transmission network side for the Ethernet services between user C1 and user C2. The VLAN ID is set to 200 on the transmission network side for the Ethernet services between user C1 and user C3.

VLAN Priority

VCTRUNK1: 0

Entry Detectio n

VCTRUNK1: Enabled

VCTRUNK2: 0

VCTRUNK2: Enabled

In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. The services of user C1, user C2 and user C3 are EVPL services. Hence, the entry detection function must be enabled to check whether the received packets carry VLAN tags.



Description

Port Type

VCTRUNK1: UNI


VCTRUNK2: UNI

l Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Parame ter


Description

Mappin g Protocol

VCTRUNK1: GFP


VCTRUNK2: GFP


389



Parame ter


Description

Scrambl e




VCTRUNK1: FCS32




VCTRUNK1: No

VCTRUNK2: FCS32


VCTRUNK2: No

In this example, this parameter adopts the default value FCS32. Check Field Length of the VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of the interconnected equipment at both ends must be set to the same value. When Mapping Protocol is set to GFP, FCS Calculated Bit Sequence is set to Big endian. FCS Calculated Bit Sequence of the VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of the interconnected equipment at both ends must be set to the same value. When Mapping Protocol is set to GFP, this parameter is valid and adopts the default value No. Extension Header Option of the VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of the interconnected equipment at both ends must be set to the same value.



Description

Enablin g LCAS

VCTRUNK1: Enabled


LCAS Mode


VCTRUNK2: Enabled


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

HO Time (ms)

VCTRUNK1: 2000

WTR Time (s)

VCTRUNK1: 300

VCTRUNK2: 2000

VCTRUNK2: 300

In this example, this parameter adopts the default value Huawei Mode. When Huawei equipment is used at both ends, LCAS Mode of the equipment at both ends is set to Huawei Mode. In this example, this parameter adopts the default value 2000. This parameter can also be set according to the requirement of the user. In this example, this parameter adopts the default value 300. This parameter can also be set according to the requirement of the user.


390



Parame ter


Description

TSD

VCTRUNK1: Disabled


VCTRUNK2: Disabled

l Click the Bound Path tab. Click the Configuration button. Set the following parameters in the Bound Path Configuration dialog box that is displayed. Click and click Apply. Click Yes in the Hint dialog box that is displayed. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed. User

Parameter


Description

User C1← →user C2

Configurabl e Ports

VCTRUN K1

As shown in Figure 10-35, VCTRUNK1 is used by the service between user C1 and user C2.

Availa ble Bound Paths

Le vel

VC4-xv

The service between user C1 and user C2 uses a 100 Mbit/s bandwidth. Hence, one VC-4 needs to be bound.

Se rvi ce Di rec tio n

Bidirection al

The service between user C1 and user C2 is a bidirectional service.

Av ail abl e Re so ur ce s

VC4-1

In this example, Available Resources is set to VC4-1.

Configurabl e Ports

VCTRUN K2

As shown in Figure 10-35, VCTRUNK2 is used by the service between user C1 and user C3.

Availa ble Bound Paths

VC4-xv

The service between user C1 and user C3 uses a 100 Mbit/s bandwidth. Hence, one VC-4 needs to be bound.

User C1← →user C3

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Le vel


391



User

Parameter


Description

Se rvi ce Di rec tio n

Bidirection al


Av ail abl e Re so ur ce s

VC4-2



Configure the Ethernet private line services between user C1 and user C2 and between user C1 and user C3. l In the NE Explorer, select the EGSH board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Click

.

l Click New on the lower-right pane to display the Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box. Set the following parameters, and then click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

User

Parameter


Description

User C1 ←→user C2

Service Type

EPL

The service between user C1 and C2 is a pointto-point Ethernet private line service.

Service Direction

Bidirection al


Source Port

PORT1

When creating the bidirectional Ethernet service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it is recommended that you use a specific PORT as the source port. PORT1 is the external port used by the service between user C1 and user C2.


100

According to the plan, the VLAN ID is set to 100 for the Ethernet service between user C1 and user C2.


392



User

User C1 ←→user C3

4.

Parameter


Description

Sink Port

VCTRUN K1

When creating the bidirectional Ethernet service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it is recommended that you use a specific VCTRUNK as the sink port. VCTRUNK1 is the internal port used by the service between user C1 and user C2.


100


Service Type

EPL

The service between user C1 and user C3 is a point-to-point Ethernet private line service.

Service Direction

Bidirection al


Source Port

PORT1

When creating the bidirectional Ethernet service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it is recommended that you use a specific PORT as the source port. PORT1 is the external port used by the service between user C1 and user C3.


200


Sink Port

VCTRUN K2

When creating the bidirectional Ethernet service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it is recommended that you use a specific VCTRUNK as the sink port. VCTRUNK2 is the internal port used by the service between user C1 and user C2.


200


Configure the cross-connections from Ethernet services (between user C1 and user C2 and between user C1 and user C3) to the SDH links. l In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Click

.

l Click Create on the lower-right pane to display the Create SDH Service dialog box. Set the parameters that are required. Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


393



User

Paramete r


Description

User C1 ←→ user C2

Level

VC4

The timeslots bound with the service between user C1 and user C2 is at the VC-4 level. The service level must be consistent with the level of the paths bound with the VCTRUNK.

Direction

Bidirectiona l


User C1 ←→ user C3




1

The value range of the source timeslots is consistent with the value of Available Resources, which is set for the paths bound with VCTRUNK1. In this example, the value of Available Resources is VC4-1.

Sink Slot

17SLQ64-1 (SDH-1)



1



Yes

-

Level

VC4

The timeslot bound with the service between user C1 and user C3 is at the VC-4 level. The service level must be consistent with the level of the paths bound with the VCTRUNK.

Direction

Bidirectiona l



Issue 02 (2011-10-31)



394



User

Paramete r


Description


2


Sink Slot

1-SLQ64-1 (SDH-1)



1



Yes

-

Step 2 Configure the EPL services of NE2 and NE4. NOTE

The Ethernet services of NE2 and NE4 are point-to-point transparent transmission EPL services. See Configuration Guide (on a SDH Network) to set the parameters.

Step 3 Check whether the services are configured correctly. For the operation procedures, see Testing Ethernet Service Paths. l Before testing the service connectivity between headquarters C1 and branch C2, set TAG to Access and Default VLAN ID to 100 for PORT1 on the EGSH board. l Before testing the service connectivity between headquarters C1 and branch C3, set TAG to Access and Default VLAN ID to 200 for PORT1 on the EGSH board. NOTE


Step 4 Enable the performance monitoring function of the NEs. For details, see Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE. Step 5 Back up the configuration data of the NEs. Second methods are available for the backup. Option

Description



----End Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


395



10.15 Configuration Example: Configuring VCTRUNKShared EVPL Services on a SDH Network When the services of multiple users that do not carry VLAN tags are accessed into a transmission network and are transmitted on the same VCTRUNK, the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL (VLAN) service is used to isolate the services of different users by adding VLAN tags. In this manner, the bandwidth is shared on the SDH side.

10.15.1 Networking Diagram The services of multiple Ethernet users are accessed on the same station, transmitted on the same VCTRUNK, and isolated by using different VLAN IDs. In this manner, the bandwidth is shared on the SDH side.


Two branches of user D are located at NE1 and NE2, and need to communicate with each other.

l

Two branches of user E are located at NE1 and NE2, and need to communicate with each other.

l

The services of user D need to be isolated from the services of user E. The traffic of user D and the traffic of user E, however, occupy a 100 Mbit/s bandwidth during different time period.

l

The Ethernet equipment of user D and user E provides 1000 Mbit/s Ethernet optical ports that work in 1000M full-duplex mode and do not support VLAN tags.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


396



Figure 10-36 Networking diagram for configuring VCTRUNK-shared EVPL (VLAN) services


1-SLQ64 4-EGSH

PORT1 User D2

NE3 NE4

NE2

PORT2 1

User E2

NE1

PORT1

User D1

17

PORT2

User E1

Line Board 17-SLQ64 Ethernet Board 4-EGSH

VCTRUNK

OptiX OSN 8800

Board Configuration Information In this example, NE1 and NE2 are each configured with an EGSH board. Different VLAN IDs are used to isolate the data of different users transmitted on the same VCTRUNK. l

When the data of user D is accessed into the transmission network, the VLAN ID of 100 is added to the data. When the data is transmitted out of the transmission network, the VLAN tag is stripped.

l

When the data of user E is accessed into the transmission network, the VLAN ID of 200 is added to the data. When the data is transmitted out of the transmission network, the VLAN tag is stripped.

10.15.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation The services of multiple users are received from different external ports on an Ethernet board, tagged with different VLAN IDs, and then transmitted on the same VCTRUNK. In this manner, the services of different users are isolated from each other. After the data arrives at the sink node, the VLAN tags are stripped. Figure 10-37 shows the signal flow of the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL (VLAN) services and the timeslot allocation to the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL (VLAN) services.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


397



Figure 10-37 Signal flow and timeslot allocation NE2:EGSH

NE1:EGSH PORT1 User D1

EVPL1

PORT2 User E1

EVPL2

EVPL1

PORT1 User D2

EVPL2

PORT2 User E2

VCTRUNK1


VC4:VC4-1

VC4-xv:VC4-1

SDH

l

The EVPL services of user D and user E that share VCTRUNK1 occupy the first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE2.

l

The EVPL services are added and dropped by using the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGSH board of NE1 and the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGSH board of NE2.


NE1

NE2

Board

EGSH

EGSH

Port

PORT1

PORT2

PORT1

PORT2

Enabled/ Disabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Working Mode

1000M FullDuplex

1000M FullDuplex

1000M FullDuplex

1000M FullDuplex


1522

1522

1522

1522

TAG

Access

Access

Access

Access

Entry Detection

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Default VLAN ID

100

200

100

200

VLAN Priority

0

0

0

0

Port Type

UNI

UNI

UNI

UNI


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Parameter

NE1

NE2

Board

EGSH

EGSH

Port

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK1

Mapping Protocol

GFP

GFP


398



Parameter

NE1

NE2

TAG

Tag Aware

Tag Aware

Entry Detection

Enabled

Enabled

Bound Path

VC4-xv:VC4-1

VC4-xv:VC4-1

Port Type

UNI

UNI

Table 10-34 Parameters of the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL (VLAN) services Parameter

NE1

NE2

EVPL1

EVPL2

EVPL1

EVPL2





Board

EGSH

EGSH

Service Type

EVPL

EVPL

Service Direction

Bidirectional

Bidirectional

Source Port

PORT1

PORT2

PORT1

PORT2

Source CVLAN(e.g.1, 3-6)

100

200

100

200

Sink Port

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK1


100

200

100

200

10.15.3 Configuration Process The Ethernet switching boards supporting the QinQ function need to be installed at the source and sink nodes and need to be configured with the EVPL services of different users. Different S-VLAN tags are added to the services of different users that have the same C-VLAN ID and are accessed through different ports on the Ethernet switching boards. In this manner, the services of different users are isolated from each other and are transmitted on the same VCTRUNK.

Prerequisite The Creating a Network task must be complete. You must be familiar with 10.3.2 EVPL (QinQ) Service Configuration Process.



399



Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Configure the EVPL services for user J1 and user K1 on NE1. 1.

Configure the attributes of the external ports (PORT1 and PORT2 of the EGSH board) used by the services of user J1 and user K1. l In the NE Explorer, select the EGSH board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. l Select External Port. l Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. Parame ter


Description

Enabled / Disable d

PORT1: Enabled

PORT1 is used by the service of user J1. PORT2 is used by the service of user K1. In this example, Enabled/Disabled is set to Enabled for PORT1 and PORT2.

Workin g Mode


PORT2: Enabled

PORT2: 1000M FullDuplex Maximu m Frame Length

PORT1: 1522

MAC Loopba ck

PORT1: Non-Loopback

PHY Loopba ck

PORT1: Non-Loopback

PORT2: 1522

PORT2: Non-Loopback

PORT2: Non-Loopback

In this example, the Ethernet service access equipment of user J1 and user K1 supports the 1000M full-duplex mode. Hence, Working Mode is set to 1000M FullDuplex for PORT1 and PORT2. Generally, this parameter adopts the default value 1522.


l Click the Flow Control tab. The parameters in the Flow Control tab page adopt the default values. l Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. Parameter


Description

Port Type

PORT1: C-Aware

The C-Aware port is used for connecting to the client network, and identifies and processes the packets that carry C-VLAN tags.

PORT2: C-Aware

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


400



l When Port Type is set to C-Aware or S-Aware, the parameters in the TAG Attributes tab page are invalid. Hence, the parameters in the TAG Attributes tab page do not need to be set. l Click the Advanced Attributes tab. The parameters in the Advanced Attributes tab page adopt the default values. 2.

Set the attributes of the internal port (VCTRUNK1 on the EGSH board) used by the service between user J1 and user J2 and the service between K1 and user K2. l Select Internal Port. l Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. Parame ter


Description

Port Type

VCTRUNK1: S-Aware

The S-Aware port is used for connecting to the supplier network, and identifies and processes the packets that carry S-VLAN tags.

l Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Parame ter


Description

Mappin g Protocol

VCTRUNK1: GFP


Scrambl e



Check Field Length

VCTRUNK1: FCS32






401



Parame ter


Description


VCTRUNK1: No


l This operation is optional. Click the LCAS tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. Parame ter


Description

Enablin g LCAS

VCTRUNK1: Enabled


LCAS Mode



HO Time (ms)

VCTRUNK1: 2000


WTR Time(s)

VCTRUNK1: 300


TSD

VCTRUNK1: Disabled


l Click the Bound Path tab. Click the Configuration button. Set the parameters in the Bound Path Configuration dialog box that is displayed. Click and then click Apply. Click Yes in the Hint dialog box that is displayed. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

User

Paramete r


Description

User J1←→ user J2

Configurab le Ports

VCTRUN K1

VCTRUNK1 is used by the service between user J1 and user J2 and the service between user K1 and user K2.


402



User

Paramete r


Description

User K1← →user K2

Ava ilabl e Bou nd Path s

Lev el

VC4-xv

The service between user J1 and user J2 and the service between user K1 and user K2 share a 200 Mbit/s bandwidth. Hence, two VC-4s need to be bound.


Bidirection al



VC4-1, VC4-2

In this example, the first and second VC-4s of the EGSH board are bound.

l When Port Type is set to C-Aware or S-Aware, the parameters in the TAG Attributes tab page are invalid. Hence, the parameters in the TAG Attributes tab page do not need to be set. l Click the Advanced Attributes tab. The parameters in the Advanced Attributes tab page adopt the default values. 3.

Configure the Ethernet private line services between user J1 and user J2 and between user K1 and user K2. l In the NE Explorer, select the EGSH board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. l Select Display QinQ Shared Service on the lower-right pane. Then, click New. l Set the parameters in the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box that is displayed. Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

User

Parameter


Description

User J1 ←→ user J2

Service Type

EVPL (QinQ)

The service between user J1 and user J2 is an EVPL (QinQ) service.

Service Direction

Bidirectio nal

The service between user J1 and user J2 is a bidirectional service.

Operation Type

Add SVLAN



403



User

User K1 ←→ user K2

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Parameter


Description

Source Port

PORT1

When creating the bidirectional Ethernet service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it is recommended that you use a specific PORT as the source port. In this example, PORT1 is the external port used by the service between user J1 and user J2.


100


Source SVLAN

-


Sink Port

VCTRUN K1

When creating the bidirectional Ethernet service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it is recommended that you use a specific VCTRUNK as the sink port. In this example, VCTRUNK1 is the internal port used by the service between user J1 and user J2.


100


Sink SVLAN

10

According to the plan, the S-VLAN ID of 10 needs to be added to the service between user J1 and user J2.

C-VLAN Priority

AUTO


S-VLAN Priority

AUTO


Service Direction

Bidirectio nal

The service between user K1 and user K2 is a bidirectional service.

Operation Type

Add SVLAN


Source Port

PORT2

When creating the bidirectional Ethernet service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it is recommended that you use a specific PORT as the source port. In this example, PORT2 is the external port used by the service between user K1 and user K2.


404



User

4.

Parameter


Description


100


Source SVLAN

-


Sink Port

VCTRUN K1

When creating the bidirectional Ethernet service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it is recommended that you use a specific VCTRUNK as the sink port. In this example, VCTRUNK1 is the internal port used by the service between user K1 and user K2.


100


Sink SVLAN

20

According to the plan, the S-VLAN ID of 20 needs to be added to the service between user K1 and user K2.

C-VLAN Priority

AUTO


S-VLAN Priority

AUTO


Configure the cross-connections from the Ethernet services to the SDH links for user J1 and user K1. l In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Click

.

l Click Create on the lower-right pane to display the Create SDH Service dialog box. Set the parameters that are required. Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

User

Paramete r


Description

User J1 ←→ user J2 User K1 ←→ user K2

Level

VC4

The timeslots bound with the service between user J1 and user J2 and the service between user K1 and user K2 are at the VC-4 level. The service level must be consistent with the level of the paths bound with the VCTRUNK.


405



User

Paramete r


Description

Direction

Bidirectiona l





1-2


Sink Slot

17SLQ64-1 (SDH-1)



1-2



Yes

-

Step 2 Configure the EVPL service of NE2. Refer to Step 1 and configure the EVPL service of NE2. The procedures and parameters for configuring the EVPL service of NE2 are the same as the procedures and parameters for configuring the EVPL service of NE1. Step 3 Check whether the services between NE1 and NE2 are configured correctly. For the operation procedures, see Testing Ethernet Service Paths. l Before testing the service connectivity between user J1 and user J2, set TAG to Access and Default VLAN ID to 100 for PORT1 on the EGSH board. l Before testing the service connectivity between user K1 and user K2, set TAG to Access and Default VLAN ID to 100 for PORT2 on the EGSH board. NOTE


Step 4 Enable the performance monitoring function of the NEs. For details, see Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


406



Step 5 Back up the configuration data of the NEs. Second methods are available for the backup. Option

Description



----End

10.16 Configuration Example: Configuring EPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1d Bridge) on a SDH Network The EPLAN service (IEEE 802.1d bridge) provides a LAN solution for multipoint-to-multipoint convergence. This service is applicable where the user-side data communication equipment connected to the transmission network does not support VLAN tags or where the VLAN planning cannot be disclosed to the network operator.

10.16.1 Networking Diagram The convergence node needs to exchange Ethernet services with two access nodes at Layer 2. The two access nodes need not communicate with each other.


Three branches (F1, F2, and F3) of user F are located at NE1, NE2, and NE4. F1 needs to communicate with F2 and F3, and requires a 100 Mbit/s bandwidth for communication with each branch.

l

The Ethernet equipment of user F provides 1000 Mbit/s Ethernet optical ports that work in 1000M full-duplex mode and support VLAN tags. The VLAN IDs and the number of VLANs, however, are unknown and may be changed. NOTE

The application scenarios where one branch needs to communicate with other branches are as follows: l Branches F2 and F3 need to communicate with each other. l Branches F2 and F3 need not communicate with each other. If branches F2 and F3 need to communicate with each other, skip Step 1.4.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


407



Figure 10-38 Networking diagram for configuring EPLAN services (IEEE 802.1d bridge) NE3


Line Board 17-SL64 Ethernet Board 15-EGT2

1-SL64 15-EGT2 NE2

NE4

1

PORT1

17

VCTRUNK 1

PORT1

F3 Line Board 1-SLQ64 Line Board 17-SLQ64 Ethernet Board 4-EGSH

PORT1 VCTRUNK 2

PORT1

1

F2 VB

17

NE1

F1 VCTRUNK

OptiX OSN 8800

OptiX OSN 3500

Board Configuration Information In this example, the convergence node NE1 is configured with an EGSH board that supports the IEEE 802.1d bridge, thus implementing EPLAN services wherein user VLANs are not limited. The access nodes NE2 and NE4 are configured with a EGT2 board each. The EPL services are configured to be transparently transmitted from NE2 and NE4 to NE1.

10.16.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation The Ethernet services of the convergence node are received from an external port, forwarded to an internal port through Layer 2 switching, encapsulated, and transparently transmitted on the SDH network. In this manner, the node communicates with a remote node. Figure 10-39 shows the signal flow of the EPLAN services (IEEE 802.1d bridge) and the timeslot allocation to the EPLAN services (IEEE 802.1d bridge).

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


408



Figure 10-39 Signal flow of and timeslot allocation NE2:EGT2

VC4-xv:VC4-1 VCTRUNK1

PORT1 User F1

PORT1

VCTRUNK1

NE1:EGSH

VC4-xv:VC4-1 VCTRUNK2 VC4-xv:VC4-2

VB1

VC

C 4:V

User F2

4-1

V C4 :VC 4-

NE4:EGT2 1

PORT1


User F3

SDH

l

The Ethernet LAN services of user F occupy the first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE2 and the first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE4.

l

The Ethernet LAN services between NE1 and NE2 are added and dropped by using the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGSH board of NE1 and the first VC-4 (VC4xv:VC4-1) on the EGT2 board of NE2.

l

The Ethernet LAN services between NE1 and NE4 are added and dropped by using the second VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-2) on the EGSH board of NE1 and the first VC-4 (VC4xv:VC4-1) on the EGT2 board of NE4.


NE1

NE2

NE4

Board

EGSH

EGT2

EGT2

Port

PORT1

PORT1

PORT1

Enabled/Disabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Working Mode

1000M Full-Duplex

1000M Full-Duplex

1000M Full-Duplex


1522

1522

1522

Entry Detection

Enabled

-

-

TAG

Tag Aware

-

-

Port Type

UNI

-

-


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Parameter

NE1

NE2

NE4

Board

EGSH

EGT2

EGT2


409



Parameter

NE1

NE2

NE4

Port

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK1

Mapping Protocol

GFP

GFP

GFP

GFP

Entry Detection

Enabled

Enabled

-

-

TAG

Tag Aware

Tag Aware

-

-

Bound Path

VC4-xv:VC4-1

VC4-xv:VC4-2

VC4-xv:VC4-1

VC4-xv:VC4-1

Port Type

UNI

UNI

-

-

Table 10-37 Parameters of Ethernet LAN services (IEEE 802.1d bridge) Parameter

Ethernet LAN Service of NE1

Board

EGSH

VB Name

VB1

Bridge Type

IEEE 802.1d

Bridge Switch Mode



SVL

Ingress Filter

Disabled

VB Mount Port


Hub/Spoke

PORT1

Hub

VCTRUNK1

Spoke

VCTRUNK2

Spoke

10.16.3 Configuration Process At the convergence node NE1, you need to create an EPLAN service (IEEE 802.1d bridge). At the access nodes NE2 and NE4, you need to configure only transparent transmission EPL services.

Prerequisite The Creating a Network task must be complete. You must be familiar with EPLAN Service Configuration Process.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


410



Procedure Step 1 Configure the EPLAN services for user F1, user F2, and user F3 on NE1. 1.

Configure the attributes of the external port (PORT1 of the EGSH board) used by the service of user F1. l In the NE Explorer, select the EGSH board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. l Select External Port. l Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed. Parame ter


Description

Enabled / Disable d

PORT1: Enabled

In this example, PORT1 carries the services and Enabled/Disabled is set to Enabled for PORT1.

Workin g Mode


The Ethernet service access equipment of user F1 supports the 1000M full-duplex mode. In this example, Working Mode is set to Auto-Negotiation.


PORT1: 1522


MAC Loopba ck

PORT1: Non-Loopback

The MAC loopback setting is used for fault diagnosis. In this example, MAC Loopback is set to Non-Loopback.

PHY Loopba ck

PORT1: Non-Loopback

The PHY loopback setting is used for fault diagnosis. In this example, PHY Loopback is set to Non-Loopback.

l Click the Flow Control tab. The parameters in the Flow Control tab page adopt the default values. l Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Parame ter


Description

TAG

PORT1: Tag Aware

The service access equipment of user F1 supports VLAN tags and the transmitted data frames carry VLAN tags. In this example, TAG is set to Tag Aware for PORT1.

Default VLAN ID

-



411



Parame ter


Description

VLAN Priority

-


Entry Detectio n

PORT1: Enabled

The services of user F1 is EPLAN services. Hence, the entry detection function must be enabled to check whether the packets carry VLAN tags. In this example, Entry Detection is set to Enabled.



Description

Port Type

PORT1: UNI



Set the attributes of the internal ports (VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 of the EGSH board) used by the services of user F2 and user F3 on NE1. l Select Internal Port. l Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed. Parame ter


Description

TAG

VCTRUNK1: Tag Aware

The service access equipment of user F2 and user F3 supports VLAN tags and the transmitted data frames carry VLAN tags. In this example, TAG is set to Tag Aware for VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2.

VCTRUNK2: Tag Aware

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Default VLAN ID

-


VLAN Priority

-



412



Parame ter


Description

Entry Detectio n

VCTRUNK1: Enabled

The services of user F2 and user F3 are EPLAN services. Hence, the entry detection function must be enabled to check whether the packets carry VLAN tags. In this example, Entry Detection is set to Enabled.

VCTRUNK2: Enabled



Description

Port Type

VCTRUNK1: UNI


VCTRUNK2: UNI

l Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed. Parame ter


Description

Mappin g Protocol

VCTRUNK1: GFP


Scrambl e


VCTRUNK2: GFP


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

VCTRUNK1: FCS32 VCTRUNK2: FCS32

In this example, this parameter adopts the default value Scrambling mode[X43+1]. Scramble of the VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of the interconnected equipment at both ends must be set to the same value. In this example, this parameter adopts the default value FCS32. Check Field Length of the VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of the interconnected equipment at both ends must be set to the same value.


413



Parame ter


Description





VCTRUNK1: No


VCTRUNK2: No


l This operation is optional. Click the LCAS tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed. Parame ter


Description

Enablin g LCAS

VCTRUNK1: Enabled


LCAS Mode


VCTRUNK2: Enabled

VCTRUNK2: Huawei Mode HO Time (ms)

VCTRUNK1: 2000

WTR Time(s)

VCTRUNK1: 300

TSD

VCTRUNK1: Disabled

VCTRUNK2: 2000

VCTRUNK2: 300

VCTRUNK2: Disabled

In this example, this parameter adopts the default value Huawei Mode. When Huawei equipment is used at both ends, LCAS Mode of the equipment at both ends is set to Huawei Mode. In this example, this parameter adopts the default value 2000. This parameter can also be set according to the requirement of the user. In this example, this parameter adopts the default value 300. This parameter can also be set according to the requirement of the user. In this example, the TSD function is disabled. The LCAS does not check the B3 bit error or BIP status of the VCTRUNK members.

l Click the Bound Path tab. Click the Configuration button. Set the following parameters in the Bound Path Configuration dialog box that is displayed. Click and then click Apply. Click Yes in the Hint dialog box that is displayed. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


414



User

Parameter


Description

User F2

Configurabl e Ports

VCTRUN K1

VCTRUNK1 of the EGSH board is used by the service of user F2.


Lev el

VC4-xv

The service of user F2 uses a 100 Mbit/s bandwidth. Hence, one VC-4 needs to be bound.

Ser vic e Dir ecti on

Bidirectio nal

The service of user F2 is a bidirectional service.

Av aila ble Res our ces

VC4-1

-

Configurabl e Ports

VCTRUN K2

VCTRUNK2 of the EGSH board is used by the service of user F3.


Lev el

VC4-xv

The service of user F3 uses a 100 Mbit/s bandwidth. Hence, one VC-4 needs to be bound.

Ser vic e Dir ecti on

Bidirectio nal


Av aila ble Res our ces

VC4-2

-

User F3


Create a bridge for the EGSH board on NE1. l In the NE Explorer, select the EGSH board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. l Click New.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


415



l Set the parameters in the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box that is displayed. Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. Parameter


Description

VB Name

VB1


VB Type

802.1d

The IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge learns and forwards the packets according to the MAC addresses of the user packets. The information in the VLAN tags of the user packets, however, is not considered in the learning and forwarding process. The IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge is used when the entire information of the VLANs used by the client cannot be learned or when the data between the VLANs of the client need not be isolated.

Bridge Switch Mode


When the bridge adopts the SVL learning mode, all the VLANs share the same MAC address table. That is, the bridge learns and forwards the packets according to the MAC addresses of the user packets only. The information in the VLAN tags of the user packets, however, is not considered in the learning and forwarding process.


SVL

-

Ingress Filter

Disabled

The IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge does not detect the VLAN tags of the received packets.

MAC Address Self-learning

Enabled

When MAC Address Self-learning is set to Enabled, the bridge can learn the MAC address.

l Click Configure Mount. l Select PORT1, VCTRUNK1, and VCTRUNK2 in the Service Mount Configuration dialog box that is displayed. Then, click

.

l Click OK. l In the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box that is displayed, click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. 4.


If normal communication is required between user F2 and user F3, proceed to Step 1.5.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


416



l Select the created bridge and click the Service Mount tab. l Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the port that is mounted to the bridge. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. Parameter


Description

Hub/Spoke

PORT1: Hub

If user F1 needs to communicate with user F2 and user F3, Hub/Spoke of PORT1 that accesses the services of user F1 is set to Hub. A port of the Hub attribute can communicate with a port of the Spoke or Hub attribute.

VCTRUNK 1: Spoke VCTRUNK 2: Spoke

5.

If user F2 need not communicate with user F3, set the two VCTRUNKs that access the services of users F2 and F3 to Spoke. Ports of the Spoke attribute cannot communicate with each other.

Configure the cross-connections from the Ethernet services to the SDH links for user F2 and user F3. l In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Click

.


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

User

Paramete r


Description

User F2

Level

VC4

The timeslot bound with the service of user F2 is at the VC-4 level. The service level must be consistent with the level of the paths bound with the VCTRUNK.

Direction

Bidirectiona l


Source Slot

4-EGSH-1 (SDH-1)



1



417



User

User F3

Paramete r


Description

Sink Slot

17SLQ64-1 (SDH-1)



1


Activate Immediate ly

Yes

-

Level

VC4

The timeslot bound with the service of user F3 is at the VC-4 level. The service level must be consistent with the level of the paths bound with the VCTRUNK.

Direction

Bidirectiona l


Source Slot

4-EGSH-1 (SDH-1)



2


Sink Slot

1-SLQ64-1 (SDH-1)



1

The value range of the sink timeslot can be the same as or different from the value range of the source timeslot. The number of source timeslots, however, must be the same as the number of source timeslots.

Activate Immediate ly

Yes

-

Step 2 Configure the EPL services of NE2 and NE4.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


418



NOTE

The Ethernet services of NE2 and NE4 are point-to-point transparent transmission EPL services. See Configuration Guide(on a SDH Network) to set the parameters.

Step 3 Check whether the services are configured correctly. For the operation procedures, see Testing Ethernet Service Paths. l Before testing the service connectivity between headquarters F1 and branch F2, set TAG to Access and Default VLAN ID to 1 for PORT1 and VCTRUNK1 of the EGSH board. l Before testing the service connectivity between headquarters F1 and branch F3, set TAG to Access and Default VLAN ID to 1 for PORT1 and VCTRUNK2 of the EGSH board. NOTE



Description



----End

10.17 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge) on a SDH Network The EVPLAN service (IEEE 802.1q bridge) provides a LAN solution for multipoint-tomultipoint convergence. This service is applicable where the user-side data communication equipment, which is connected to the transmission network, does not support VLAN tags or where the VLAN planning cannot be disclosed to the network operator.

10.17.1 Networking Diagram The convergence node needs to exchange Ethernet services with two access nodes at Layer 2. LAN services of two users need to be isolated.


Three branches (G1, G2, and G3) of user G are located at NE1, NE2, and NE4 respectively. A 100 Mbit/s bandwidth is required. G2 and G3 need not communicate with each other.

l

Three branches (H1, H2, and H3) of user H are located at NE1, NE2, and NE4 respectively. A 100 Mbit/s bandwidth is required.

l

The services of user G must be isolated from the services of user H.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


419


l


The Ethernet equipment of user G and user H provides 1000 Mbit/s Ethernet optical ports that work in 1000M full-duplex mode and do not support VLAN tags.

Figure 10-40 Networking diagram for configuring EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge)

NE3

T2000 Line Board 1-JL64 Ethernet Board 15-EGT6


PORT2

H2

NE2 NE1

1

PORT1

PORT2

NE4

H3 17

G2

PORT1 G3

17 PORT2

H1

1 PORT1

G1


VB1 VLAN 200


VCTRUNK4 VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK3 PORT2

PORT1 VCTRUNK

OptiX OSN 8800

OptiX OSN 3500

Board Configuration Information In this example, the convergence node NE1 is configured with an EGSH board that supports the IEEE 802.1q bridge, thus implementing EVPLAN services wherein services of different users are isolated from each other. The access nodes NE2 and NE4 are configured with a EGT6 board each. The EPL services are configured to be transparently transmitted from NE2 and NE4 to NE1. NOTE

The Ethernet boards are classified into the Ethernet transparent transmission boards and Ethernet switching boards, based on the type of the accessed services. The Ethernet transparent transmission boards support only EPL services whereas the Ethernet switching boards support EPL services, EVPL services, and Layer 2 switching. Hence, Ethernet switching boards are used more widely than Ethernet transparent transmission boards.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


420



10.17.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation The Ethernet services of the convergence node are received from an external port and tagged with the corresponding VLAN IDs. After the services are forwarded to an internal port through Layer 2 switching, the VLAN tags are stripped and then the services are transparently transmitted on the SDH network. In this manner, the node communicates with a remote node. Figure 10-41 shows the signal flow of the EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge) and the timeslot allocation to the EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge). Figure 10-41 Signal flow of and timeslot allocation NE2:EGT6 PORT1 User G2

VCTRUNK1

NE1:EGSH VLAN 100 PORT1 User G1

VC


4:V

VC 4: VC


VLAN 200 PORT2 User H1

VC

VCTRUNK3 VC4-xv:VC4-3 VC


VC4-xv:VC4-1

-1 C4

2 4-

4: VC

4:V C

PORT2 User H2


NE4:EGT6

41

VCTRUNK1 4-2

VB1

VC4-xv:VC4-1 VCTRUNK2 VC4-xv:VC4-2

PORT1 User G3 PORT2 User H3

SDH PORT Strip VLAN Label

l

VCTRUNK Add VLAN Label

Strip VLAN Label

Data(User G)

VLAN(100)

Data(User G)

Data(User G)

Data(User H)

VLAN(200)

Data(User H)

Data(User H)

The Ethernet LAN services of user G: – Occupy the first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE2 and the first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE4. – Are added and dropped by using the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGSH board of NE1 and the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGT6 board of NE2. – Are added and dropped by using the second VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-2) on the EGSH board of NE1 and the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGT6 board of NE4.

l

The Ethernet LAN services of user H: – Occupy the second VC-4 (VC4:VC4-2) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE2 and the second VC-4 (VC4:VC4-3) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE4. – Are added and dropped by using the third VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-3) on the EGSH board of NE1 and the second VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-2) on the EGT6 board of NE2. – Are added and dropped by using the fourth VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-4) on the EGSH board of NE1 and the second VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-2) on the EGT6 board of NE4.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


421



Table 10-38 Parameters of the external ports of the Ethernet boards Paramete r

NE1

NE2

NE4

Board

EGSH

EGT6

EGT6

Port

PORT1

PORT2

PORT1

PORT2

PORT1

PORT2

Enabled/ Disabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Working Mode

1000M FullDuplex

1000M FullDuplex

1000M FullDuplex

1000M FullDuplex

1000M FullDuplex

1000M FullDuplex


1522

1522

1522

1522

1522

1522

TAG

Access

Access

-

-

-

-

Entry Detection

Enabled

Enabled

-

-

-

-

Default VLAN ID

100

200

-

-

-

-

VLAN Priority

0

0

-

-

-

-

Port Type

UNI

UNI

-

-

-

-


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Param eter

NE1

NE2

NE3

Board

EGSH

EGT6

EGT6

Port

VCTR UNK1

VCTR UNK2

VCTR UNK3

VCTR UNK4

VCTR UNK1

VCTR UNK2

VCTR UNK1

VCTR UNK2

Mappin g Protoco l

GFP

GFP

GFP

GFP

GFP

GFP

GFP

GFP

TAG

Access

Access

Access

Access

-

-

-

-

Entry Detecti on

Enable d

Enable d

Enable d

Enable d

-

-

-

-


422



Param eter

NE1

NE2

NE3

Default VLAN ID

100

100

200

200

-

-

-

-

VLAN Priority

0

0

0

0

-

-

-

-

Bound Path

VC4xv:VC4 -1

VC4xv:VC4 -2

VC4xv:VC4 -3

VC4xv:VC4 -4

VC4xv:VC4 -1

VC4xv:VC4 -2

VC4xv:VC4 -1

VC4xv:VC4 -2

Port Type

UNI

UNI

UNI

UNI

-

-

-

-

Table 10-40 Parameters of Ethernet LAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge) Parameter


Board

EGSH

VB Name

VB1

Bridge Type

IEEE 802.1q

Bridge Switch Mode



IVL

Ingress Filter

Enabled

VB Mount Port

PORT1, PORT2, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2, VCTRUNK3, VCTRUNK4

VLAN Filtering

VLAN Filtering



VLAN ID

100

200

Forwarding PORT1, VCTRUNK1, Physical Port VCTRUNK2 Hub/Spoke

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

PORT1

Hub

PORT2

Hub

VCTRUNK 1

Spoke

VCTRUNK 2

Spoke

VCTRUNK 3

Hub



423



Parameter

Ethernet LAN Service of NE1 VCTRUNK 4

Hub

10.17.3 Configuration Process At the convergence node NE1, you need to create an EVPLAN service (IEEE 802.1q bridge) and a VLAN filtering table. At the access nodes NE2 and NE4, you need to configure transparent transmission EPL services only.

Prerequisite The Creating a Network task must be complete. You must be familiar with 10.3.3 EPLAN Service Configuration Process.


Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Configure the EVPLAN services for user G1, user G2, user G3, user H1, user H2, and user H3 on NE1. 1.

Configure the attributes of the external ports (PORT1 and PORT2 of the EGSH board) used by the services of user G1 and user H1. l In the NE Explorer, select the EGSH board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. l Select External Port. l Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed. Parame ter


Description

Enabled / Disable d

PORT1: Enabled

In this example, PORT1 carries the services and Enabled/Disabled is set to Enabled for PORT1 and PORT2.

Workin g Mode


PORT2: Enabled


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

In this example, the Ethernet service access equipment of user G1 and user H1 supports the 1000M full-duplex mode. Hence, Working Mode is set to 1000M FullDuplex for PORT1 and PORT2.


424



Parame ter


Description


PORT1: 1522


MAC Loopba ck

PORT1: Non-Loopback

PHY Loopba ck

PORT1: Non-Loopback

PORT2: 1522

PORT2: Non-Loopback

PORT2: Non-Loopback


l Click the Flow Control tab. The parameters in the Flow Control tab page adopt the default values. l Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed. Parame ter


Description

TAG

PORT1: Access

The access equipment of user G1 and user H1 does not support VLAN tags. Hence, the Ethernet access equipment transmits only the packets without the VLAN tags. In this example, TAG is set to Access for PORT1 and PORT2.

PORT2: Access

Default VLAN ID

PORT1: 100

VLAN Priority

-

This parameter adopts the default value.

Entry Detectio n

PORT1: Enabled

The services of user G1 and user H1 are EVPLAN services. Hence, the entry detection function must be enabled to check whether the packets carry VLAN tags. In this example, Entry Detection is set to Enabled.

PORT2: 200

PORT2: Enabled

According to the plan, the VLAN ID is set to 100 on the transmission network side for the Ethernet services between user G1, user G2, and user G3. The VLAN ID is set to 200 on the transmission network side for the EVPLAN services between user H1, user H2, and user H3. In this manner, the services of different users are isolated.

l Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


425



Parame ter


Description

Port Type

PORT1: UNI


PORT2: UNI


Set the attributes of the internal ports (VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2, VCTRUNK3, and VCTRUNK4 of the EGSH board) used by the services of user G2, user G3, user H2, and user H3 on NE1. l Select Internal Port. l Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed. Parame ter


Description

TAG

VCTRUNK1: Access

The service access equipment of user G2, user G3, user H2, and user H3 supports VLAN tags and the transmitted data frames do not carry VLAN tags. In this example, TAG is set to Access for VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK4.

VCTRUNK2: Access VCTRUNK3: Access VCTRUNK4: Access Default VLAN ID

VCTRUNK1: 100 VCTRUNK2: 100 VCTRUNK3: 200 VCTRUNK4: 200

VLAN Priority

VCTRUNK1: 0

According to the plan, the VLAN ID is set to 100 on the transmission network side for the EVPLAN services between user G1, user G2, and user G3. The VLAN ID is set to 200 on the transmission network side for the EVPLAN services between user H1, user H2, and user H3. In this manner, the services of different users are isolated. This parameter adopts the default value.

VCTRUNK2: 0 VCTRUNK3: 0 VCTRUNK4: 0

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


426



Parame ter


Description

Entry Detectio n

VCTRUNK1: Enabled

The services of user G2, user G3, user H2, and user H3 are EVPLAN services. Hence, the entry detection function must be enabled to check whether the packets carry VLAN tags. In this example, Entry Detection is set to Enabled.

VCTRUNK2: Enabled VCTRUNK3: Enabled VCTRUNK4: Enabled



Description

Port Type

VCTRUNK1: UNI


VCTRUNK2: UNI VCTRUNK3: UNI VCTRUNK4: UNI

l Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed. Parame ter


Description

Mappin g Protocol

VCTRUNK1: GFP


VCTRUNK2: GFP VCTRUNK3: GFP VCTRUNK4: GFP

Scrambl e

VCTRUNK1: Scrambling mode[X43 +1] VCTRUNK2: Scrambling mode[X43 +1]


VCTRUNK3: Scrambling mode[X43 +1] VCTRUNK4: Scrambling mode[X43 +1] Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


427



Parame ter


Description

Check Field Length

VCTRUNK1: FCS32


VCTRUNK2: FCS32 VCTRUNK3: FCS32 VCTRUNK4: FCS32




VCTRUNK1: No

VCTRUNK2: Big endian VCTRUNK3: Big endian VCTRUNK4: Big endian

VCTRUNK2: No VCTRUNK3: No VCTRUNK4: No

When Mapping Protocol is set to GFP, FCS Calculated Bit Sequence is set to Big endian. FCS Calculated Bit Sequence of the VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of the interconnected equipment at both ends must be set to the same value. When Mapping Protocol is set to GFP, this parameter is valid and adopts the default value No. Extension Header Option of the VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of the interconnected equipment at both ends must be set to the same value.

l This operation is optional. Click the LCAS tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed. Parame ter


Description

Enablin g LCAS

VCTRUNK1: Enabled


VCTRUNK2: Enabled VCTRUNK3: Enabled VCTRUNK4: Enabled

LCAS Mode

VCTRUNK1: Huawei Mode VCTRUNK2: Huawei Mode VCTRUNK3: Huawei Mode





VCTRUNK4: 2000

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


428



Parame ter


Description

WTR Time(s)

VCTRUNK1: 300



TSD

VCTRUNK1: Disabled VCTRUNK2: Disabled VCTRUNK3: Disabled


VCTRUNK4: Disabled l Click the Bound Path tab. Click the Configuration button. Set the following parameters in the Bound Path Configuration dialog box that is displayed. Click and then click Apply. Click Yes in the Hint dialog box that is displayed. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed. User

Parameter


Description

User G2

Configurabl e Ports

VCTRUN K1

As shown in Figure 10-41, VCTRUNK1 of the EGSH board is used by the service of user G2.

Avai lable Bou nd Path s

Lev el

VC4-xv

The service of user G2 uses a 100 Mbit/s bandwidth. Hence, one VC-4 needs to be bound.

Ser vice Dire ctio n

Bidirection al

The service of user G2 is a bidirectional service.

Ava ilabl e Res ourc es

VC4-1


Configurabl e Ports

VCTRUN K2

As shown in Figure 10-41, VCTRUNK2 of the EGSH board is used by the service of user G3.

Avai lable Bou nd

VC4-xv

The service of user G3 uses a 100 Mbit/s bandwidth. Hence, one VC-4 needs to be bound.

User G3

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Lev el


429



User

User H2

User H3

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Parameter


Description

Path s


Bidirection al



VC4-2


Configurabl e Ports

VCTRUN K3

As shown in Figure 10-41, VCTRUNK3 of the EGSH board is used by the service of user H2.


Lev el

VC4-xv

The service of user H2 uses a 100 Mbit/s bandwidth. Hence, one VC-4 needs to be bound.


Bidirection al

The service of user H2 is a bidirectional service.


VC4-3


Configurabl e Ports

VCTRUN K4

As shown in Figure 10-41, VCTRUNK4 of the EGSH board is used by the service of user H3.


Lev el

VC4-xv

The service of user H3 uses a 100 Mbit/s bandwidth. Hence, one VC-4 needs to be bound.


Bidirection al



430



User

Parameter



Description

VC4-4



Create a bridge for the EGSH board on NE1. l In the NE Explorer, select the EGSH board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. l Click New. l Set the parameters in the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box that is displayed. Parameter


Description

VB Name

VB1


VB Type

802.1q

The IEEE 802.1q bridge supports isolation by using one layer of VLAN tags. This bridge checks the contents of the VLAN tags that are in the data frames and performs Layer 2 switching according to the destination MAC addresses and VLAN IDs.

Bridge Switch Mode


When Bridge Learning Mode is set to IVL, the bridge checks the contents of the VLAN tags that are in the packets and performs Layer 2 switching according to the destination MAC addresses and the VLAN IDs of the packets.


IVL

-

Ingress Filter

Enabled

-


Enabled

-

l Click Configure Mount. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


431



l In Available Mounted Ports, select PORT1, PORT2, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2, VCTRUNK3, and VCTRUNK4. Then, click

.

l Click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. ClickClose. l In the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box that is displayed, click OK. 4.

Create a VLAN filtering table. l Select the created bridge and click the VLAN Filtering tab. l Click New. l Create the VLAN filtering table for user G1, user G2, and user G3 in the Create VLAN dialog box that is displayed. Parameter


Description

VLAN ID

100

According to the plan, the VLAN ID is set to 100 on the transmission network side for the EVPLAN services between user G1, user G2, and user G3.

l In Available Forwarding Ports, select PORT1, VCTRUNK1, and VCTRUNK2. Click . Then, click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. ClickClose. l Create the VLAN filtering table for user H1, user H2, and user H3. Parameter


Description

VLAN ID

200

According to the plan, the VLAN ID is set to 200 on the transmission network side for the EVPLAN services between user H1, user H2, and user H3.

l In Available Forwarding Ports, select PORT2, VCTRUNK3, and VCTRUNK4. Click . Then, click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. 5.

Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the port that is mounted to the bridge. l Select the created bridge and click the Service Mount tab. l Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the port that is mounted to the bridge. After setting the parameters, click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. ClickClose.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


432



Parameter


Description

Hub/Spoke

PORT1: Hub

If user G2 need not communicate with user G3, set VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 that access the services of user G2 and user G3 to Spoke. Ports of the Spoke attribute cannot communicate with each other. A port of the Hub attribute can communicate with a port of the Spoke or Hub attribute.

VCTRUNK1: Spoke VCTRUNK2: Spoke PORT2: Hub VCTRUNK3: Hub VCTRUNK4: Hub 6.

Configure the cross-connections from the Ethernet services to the SDH links for user G2, user G3, user H2, and user H3. l In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Click

.


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

User

Paramete r


Description

User G2

Level

VC4

The timeslot bound with the service of user G2 is at the VC-4 level. The service level must be consistent with the level of the paths bound with the VCTRUNK.

Direction

Bidirectiona l





1


Sink Slot

17SLQ64-1 (SDH-1)



433



User

User G3

User H2

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Paramete r


Description


1



Yes

-

Level

VC4

The timeslot bound with the service of user G3 is at the VC-4 level. The service level must be consistent with the level of the paths bound with the VCTRUNK.

Direction

Bidirectiona l





2


Sink Slot

1-SLQ64-1 (SDH-1)



1

The value range of the sink timeslot can be the same as or different from the value range of the source timeslot. The number of source timeslots, however, must be the same as the number of sink timeslots.


Yes

-

Level

VC4

The timeslot bound with the service of user H2 is at the VC-12 level. The service level must be consistent with the level of the paths bound with the VCTRUNK.


434



User

User H3

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Paramete r


Description

Direction

Bidirectiona l





3


Sink Slot

171SLQ64-1 (SDH-1)



2



Yes

-

Level

VC4

The timeslot bound with the service of user H3 is at the VC-12 level. The service level must be consistent with the level of the paths bound with the VCTRUNK.

Direction

Bidirectiona l






4


435



User

Paramete r


Description

Sink Slot

1-SLQ64-1 (SDH-1)



2



Yes

-



Step 3 Check whether the services are configured correctly. For the operation procedures, see Testing Ethernet Service Paths. Step 4 Enable the performance monitoring function of the NEs. For details, see Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE. Step 5 Back up the configuration data of the NEs. Second methods are available for the backup. Option

Description



----End

10.18 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1ad Bridge) on a SDH Network The QinQ technology provides an economical and easy solution for Layer 2 virtual private networks (VPNs). The IEEE 802.1ad bridge uses the QinQ technology to provide the VPN solution, thus facilitating the identifying, differentiating, and grooming of EVPLAN services.

10.18.1 Networking Diagram A network operator requires that the voice over IP (VoIP) and high speed Internet (HSI) services sent to the transmission network be uniformly labeled and groomed at the convergence node. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


436



Service Requirement As shown in Figure 10-42, the transmission network is required to transmit the VoIP and HSI services. The service requirements are as follows: l

The VoIP services of user M and user N are accessed into the transmission network at NE2 and NE4 respectively and into the VoIP server at the convergence node NE1. A 100 Mbit/ s bandwidth is required.

l

The HSI services of user M and user N are accessed into the transmission network at NE2 and NE4 respectively and into the HSI server at the convergence node NE1. A 150 Mbit/ s bandwidth is required.

l

The VoIP services need to be isolated from the HSI services.

l

The data communication equipment of user M and user N provides 1000 Mbit/s Ethernet optical ports that work in 1000M full-duplex mode and support VLAN tags. – C-VLAN ID of the VoIP services: 10 – C-VLAN ID of the HSI services: 20 NOTE

The application scenarios where one branch needs to communicate with other branches are as follows: l User M needs to communicate with user N. l User M need not communicate with user N. If user M and user N need to communicate with each other, skip 10.18.3 Configuration Process.

The operator requires that all services received from the user side should be uniformly labeled and groomed through planned S-VLANs. l

S-VLAN ID of the VoIP services: 100

l

S-VLAN ID of the HSI services: 200

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


437



Figure 10-42 Networking diagram for configuring EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1ad bridge)

NE3

Line Board 1-SL64 Ethernet Board 15-EGT2 User M

Line Board 17-SL64 Ethernet Board 15-EGT2

PORT1

Service C-VLAN 10 VoIP 20 HSI

NE2

17

NE1

1 17

VoIP

PORT1

NE4

1

HSI

User N

Service C-VLAN VoIP 10 HSI 20

PORT1 PORT2 Line Board 1-SLQ64 Line Board u 17-SLQ64 Ethernet Board 4-EGSH

S-VLAN 100

VB1 VCTRUNK1

VB1

VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK1 PORT1

S-VLAN 200 VCTRUNK2 PORT2 VCTRUNK OptiX OSN 8800

OptiX OSN 3500

Board Configuration Information In this example, the convergence node NE1 is configured with an EGSH board that supports the IEEE 802.1ad bridge, thus implementing the EVPLAN services in which VoIP data is isolated from HSI data. l

The VoIP services tagged with the C-VLAN ID of 10 from NE2 and NE4 are further tagged with the S-VLAN ID of 100 when they arrive at the IEEE 802.1ad bridge of NE1. Then, the services are forwarded to the VoIP server through Layer 2 switching.

l

The HSI services tagged with the C-VLAN ID of 20 from NE2 and NE4 are further tagged with the S-VLAN ID of 200 when they arrive at the IEEE 802.1ad bridge of NE1. Then, the services are forwarded to the HSI server through Layer 2 switching.

The access nodes NE2 and NE4 are configured with a EGT2 board each. The EPL services are configured to be transparently transmitted from NE2 and NE4 to NE1.

10.18.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation The services of user M and user N are transmitted from the access nodes NE2 and NE4 respectively to the convergence node NE1 through the Ethernet transparent transmission boards. The VoIP and HSI services carrying different C-VLAN IDs are tagged with different S-VLAN IDs. The service data is isolated and exchanged at Layer 2 through S-VLAN filtering. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


438



Figure 10-43 shows the signal flow of the EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1ad bridge) and the timeslot allocation to the EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1ad bridge). Figure 10-43 Signal flow of and timeslot allocation NE2:EGT2

NE1:EGSH

VoIP Server

PORT1

VCTRUNK1 VC4-xv:VC4-1 VC4-xv:VC4-2

SVLAN 200 HSI Server

VC4:V VC4:V C4-1 C4-2


PORT2

PORT


PORT1 User N

VCTRUNK Add S-VLAN Label

Strip S-VLAN Label

C-VLAN(10)

Data(VoIP)

S-VLAN(100) C-VLAN(10)

Data(VoIP)

C-VLAN(10)

Data(VoIP)

C-VLAN(20)

Data(HSI)

S-VLAN(200) C-VLAN(20)

Data(HSI)

C-VLAN(20)

Data(HSI)

l

PORT1 User M

NE4:EGT2

SDH

VB1

Strip S-VLAN Label


-1 :VC4 VC4 C4-2 :V VC4

SVLAN 100

The EVPLAN services of user M: – Occupy the first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) and second VC-4 (VC4:VC4-2) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE2. – Are added and dropped by using the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) and second VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-2) on the EGSH board of NE1 and the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) and second VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-2) on the EGT2 board of NE2.

l

The EVPLAN services of user N: – Occupy the third VC-4 (VC4:VC4-3) and fourth VC-4 (VC4:VC4-4) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE4. – Are added and dropped by using the third VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-3) and fourth VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-4) on the EGSH board of NE1 and the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) and second VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-2) on the EGT2 board of NE4.


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Parameter

NE1

NE2

NE4

Board

EGSH

EGT2

EGT2

Port

PORT1

PORT2

PORT1

PORT1

Enabled/ Disabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Working Mode

1000M FullDuplex

1000M FullDuplex

1000M FullDuplex

1000M FullDuplex


1522

1522

1522

1522


439



Parameter

NE1

Port Type

C-Aware

C-Aware

NE2

NE4

-

-

Table 10-42 Parameters of the internal ports of the Ethernet boards Parameter

NE1

NE2

NE3

Board

EGSH

EGT2

EGT2

Port

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK1

Mapping Protocol

GFP

GFP

GFP

GFP

Port Type

C-Aware

C-Aware

-

-

Bound Path





Table 10-43 Parameters of Ethernet LAN services (IEEE 802.1ad bridge) Parameter


Board

EGSH

VB Name

VB1

Bridge Type

802.1ad

Bridge Switch Mode



IVL

Ingress Filter

Enabled

Operation Type

Add S-VLAN base for Port and C-VLAN

VB Port

1

2

3

4

Mount Port

PORT1

PORT2

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2

C-VLAN

10

20

10

20

10

20

S-VLAN

100

200

100

200

100

200

VLAN Filterin g

VLAN Filtering



VLAN ID

100

200

Forwarding PORT1, VCTRUNK1, Physical Port VCTRUNK2

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)



440



Parameter


Hub/ Spoke

PORT1

Hub

PORT2

Hub

VCTRUNK 1

Spoke

VCTRUNK 2

Spoke

10.18.3 Configuration Process At the convergence node NE1, you need to create an EVPLAN service (IEEE 802.1ad bridge) and an S-VLAN filtering table. At the access nodes NE2 and NE4, you need to configure transparent transmission EPL services only.

Prerequisite The Creating a Network task must be complete.

Background Information The IEEE 802.1ad provider bridge supports ports with the C-Aware and S-Aware attributes only. The C-Aware ports are used to add and strip the S-VLAN tags. The S-Aware ports are used to transparently transmit the S-VLAN tags. The IEEE 802.1ad provider bridge supports the following operation types: l

Adding the S-VLAN tag based on the port

l


l

Performing port mounting based on the port

l

Performing port mounting based on the port and the S-VLAN

This topic describes the four operation types when Bridge Switch Mode of the IEEE 802.1ad provider bridge is set to IVL/Ingress Filter Enabled. l

Adding the S-VLAN based on the port: The packets that enter the C-Aware port are added with the preset S-VLAN tags, and are forwarded in the bridge according to the S-VLAN filtering table. Before the packets leave the C-Aware port, the S-VLAN tags are stripped.

l

Adding the S-VLAN tag based on the port and C-VLAN: The entry detection is performed for the packets that enter the C-Aware port. Then, the corresponding S-VLAN tags are added to the packets according to the mapping relation between the C-VLAN tags and the S-VLAN tags of the packets. If the mapping relation does not exist, the packets are discarded. After the S-VLAN tags are added, the packets enter the bridge, where the packets are forwarded according to the S-VLAN filtering table. Before the packets leave the CAware port, the S-VLAN tags are stripped.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


441


10 Configuring Ethernet Services NOTE

l A C-Aware port supports different C-VLAN tags being mapped into different S-VLAN tags, but does not support the same C-VLAN tag being mapping into multiple S-VLAN tags.

l

Performing port mounting based on the port: The packets that enter the S-Aware port are not filtered. Instead, the S-VLAN switch is performed directly. The packets must have the S-VLAN tags. Otherwise, the packets are discarded. When the packets leave the S-Aware port, the packets are transparently transmitted.

l

Performing port mounting based on the port and the S-VLAN: The entry filtering is performed according to the preset S-VLAN tag. The packets that do not belong to the SVLAN are discarded. Then, the packets are forwarded according to the S-VLAN filtering table. When the packets leave the S-Aware port, the packets are transparently transmitted.

In the case of the four operation types, the following conditions must be met before the packets leave a port: l

The port must be contained in the S-VLAN filtering table that is created by the user.

l

The S-VLAN ID corresponding to the port must be specified when the user manually mounts the port to the bridge. – In the case of a C-Aware port, the S-VLAN ID corresponding to the port is the S-VLAN ID that is added when the packets enter the port. – In the case of an S-Aware port, the S-VLAN ID corresponding to the port is the S-VLAN ID that is set when the user mounts the port to the bridge. If the S-Aware port is mounted based on the port, the S-VLAN ID is considered to contain all the legal S-VLAN IDs.

Procedure Step 1 Configure the EVPLAN service of NE1. 1.

Set the attributes of the external ports (PORT1 and PORT2 of the EGSH board) used by the VoIP server and HSI server. l In the NE Explorer, select the EGSH board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. l Select External Port. l Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. Parame ter


Description

Enabled / Disable d

PORT1: Enabled

In this example, PORT1 and PORT2 transmit the services and Enabled/Disabled is set to Enabled for PORT1 and PORT2.

Workin g Mode


PORT2: Enabled


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

In this example, the VoIP server and HSI server support the 1000M full-duplex mode. Hence, Working Mode is set to 1000M FullDuplex for PORT1 and PORT2.


442



Parame ter


Description


PORT1: 1522


MAC Loopba ck

PORT1: Non-Loopback

PHY Loopba ck

PORT1: Non-Loopback

PORT2: 1522

PORT2: Non-Loopback

PORT2: Non-Loopback


l Click the Flow Control tab. The parameters in the Flow Control tab page adopt the default values. l Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. Parameter


Description

Port Type

PORT1: C-Aware

The C-Aware or S-Aware attribute must be selected for the port when you configure the IEEE 802.1ad bridge. The C-Aware port connects to the port on the client network, identifies and processes the packets that contain C-VLAN tags (namely, client tags). The S-Aware port connects to the port on the network side, identifies and processes the packets that contain S-VLAN tags (namely, service tags of the network operator).

PORT2: C-Aware


Set the attributes of the internal ports (VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 of the EGSH board) used by the services of user M and user N on NE1. l Select Internal Port. l Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


443



Parame ter


Description

Port Type

VCTRUNK1: C-Aware

The C-Aware or S-Aware attribute must be selected for the port when you configure the IEEE 802.1ad bridge. The C-Aware port is connected to the network port of the user equipment, and identifies and processes the packets that carry the C-VLAN tags. The Saware port is used for connecting to the supplier network, and identifies and processes the packets that carry the S-VLAN tags.

VCTRUNK2: C-Aware

l When Port Type is set to C-Aware or S-Aware, the parameters in the TAG Attributes tab page are invalid. Hence, The parameters in the TAG Attributes tab page need not be set. l Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. Parame ter


Description

Mappin g Protocol

VCTRUNK1: GFP


Scrambl e


VCTRUNK2: GFP


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Check Field Length

VCTRUNK1: FCS32



VCTRUNK2: FCS32


In this example, this parameter adopts the default value Scrambling mode[X43+1]. Scramble of the VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of the interconnected equipment at both ends must be set to the same value. In this example, this parameter adopts the default value FCS32. Check Field Length of the VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of the interconnected equipment at both ends must be set to the same value. When Mapping Protocol is set to GFP, FCS Calculated Bit Sequence is set to Big endian. FCS Calculated Bit Sequence of the VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of the interconnected equipment at both ends must be set to the same value.


444



Parame ter


Description


VCTRUNK1: No


VCTRUNK2: No



Description

Enablin g LCAS

VCTRUNK1: Enabled


LCAS Mode


VCTRUNK2: Enabled


VCTRUNK1: 2000

WTR Time(s)

VCTRUNK1: 300

TSD

VCTRUNK1: Disabled

VCTRUNK2: 2000

VCTRUNK2: 300

VCTRUNK2: Disabled

In this example, this parameter adopts the default value Huawei Mode. When Huawei equipment is used at both ends, LCAS Mode of the equipment at both ends is set to Huawei Mode. In this example, this parameter adopts the default value 2000. This parameter can also be set according to the requirement of the user. In this example, this parameter adopts the default value 300. This parameter can also be set according to the requirement of the user. In this example, the TSD function is disabled. The LCAS does not check the B3 bit error or BIP status of the VCTRUNK members.

l Click the Bound Path tab. Click the Configuration button. Set the parameters in the and then click Bound Path Configuration dialog box that is displayed. Click Apply. Click Yes in the Hint dialog box that is displayed. Click Close in the Operation Result that is displayed.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

User

Parameter


Description

User M

Configurabl e Ports

VCTRUN K1

VCTRUNK1 of the EGSH board is used by the service of user M.


445



User

User N

Parameter


Description


Lev el

VC4-xv

The service of user M uses a 200 Mbit/s bandwidth. Hence, two VC-4s need to be bound.

Serv ice Dire ctio n

Bidirectio nal

The service of user M is a bidirectional service.


VC4-1, VC4-2

-

Configurabl e Ports

VCTRUN K2

VCTRUNK2 of the EGSH board is used by the service of user N.


Lev el

VC4-xv

The service of user N uses a 200 Mbit/s bandwidth. Hence, two VC-4s need to be bound.

Serv ice Dire ctio n

Bidirectio nal

The service of user N is a bidirectional service.


VC4-3, VC4-4

-


Create a bridge for the EGSH board on NE1. l In the NE Explorer, select the EGSH board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. l Click New. l Set the parameters in the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box that is displayed.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


446



Parameter


Description

VB Name

VB1


VB Type

802.1ad

The IEEE 802.1ad bridge supports data frames with two layers of VLAN tags. This bridge adopts the outer S-VLAN tags to isolate different VLANs and supports only the mounted ports whose attributes are C-Aware or S-Aware.

Bridge Switch Mode


This bridge checks the contents of the VLAN tags that are in the packets and performs Layer 2 switching according to the destination MAC addresses and the S-VLAN IDs of the packets.


IVL

-

Ingress Filter

Enabled

-


Enabled

-

l Click Configure Mount. l Set the parameters in the Service Mount Configuration dialog box that is displayed. Click Add Mount Port and then click OK. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box. Parameter


Operation Type


VB Port

1

2

3

4

Mount Port

PORT1

PORT2

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2

C-VLAN

10

20

10

20

10

20

S-VLAN

100

200

100

200

100

200

The other parameters take the default values. l Click OK.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


447



l In the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box that is displayed, click OK. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed. 4.

Create a VLAN filtering table. l Select the created bridge and click the VLAN Filtering tab. l Click New. l Create the VLAN filtering table of the VoIP service. Parameter


Description

VLAN ID

100

According to the plan, the VoIP service uses the SVLAN ID of 100.

l In Available Forwarding Ports, select PORT1, VCTRUNK1, and VCTRUNK2. Click . Then, click Apply. Click Close in the Operation Result that is displayed. l Create the VLAN filtering table of the HSI service. Parameter


Description

VLAN ID

200

According to the plan, the HSI service uses the SVLAN ID of 200.

l In Available Forwarding Ports, select PORT2, VCTRUNK1, and VCTRUNK2. Click . Then, click OK. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed. 5.


If normal communication is required between user M and user N, proceed to Step 1.6.

l Select the created bridge and click the Service Mount tab. l Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the port that is mounted to the bridge. Parameter


Description

Hub/Spoke

PORT1: Hub

User M and user N need not communicate with each other. In this case, set VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 that access the services of user M and user N to the Spoke attribute. Ports of the Spoke attribute cannot communicate with each other. A port of the Hub attribute can communicate with a port of the Spoke or Hub attribute.

PORT2: Hub VCTRUNK1: Spoke VCTRUNK2: Spoke

6.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Configure the cross-connections from the Ethernet services to the SDH links for user M and user N. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

448



l In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Click

.

l Click Create on the lower-right pane to display the Create SDH Service dialog box. Set the parameters that are required. Click Apply. Then, click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed. User

Paramete r


Description

User M

Level

VC4

The timeslot bound with the service of user M is at the VC-12 level. The service level must be consistent with the level of the paths bound with the VCTRUNK.

Direction

Bidirectiona l

The service of user M is a bidirectional service.

User N

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)




1-2


Sink Slot

17SLQ64-1 (SDH-1)



1-2



Yes

-

Level

VC4

The timeslot bound with the service of user N is at the VC-12 level. The service level must be consistent with the level of the paths bound with the VCTRUNK.

Direction

Bidirectiona l

The service of user N is a bidirectional service.


449



User

Paramete r


Description




3-4


Sink Slot

1-SLQ64-1 (SDH-1)



1-2



Yes

-


The Ethernet services of NE2 and NE4 are point-to-point transparent transmission EPL services. See Configuration Guide(on a SDH Network) to set the parameters.


Description



----End

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


450



10.19 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL and EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge) on a SDH Network The EGSH board supports the EVPL and EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge) on a same port. Based on different VLANs, EVPL and EVPLAN services can be accessed through a same port, which is applicable to the scenario where the EVPL and EVPLAN users share the same port.

10.19.1 Networking Diagram Based on different VLANs, EVPL and EVPLAN services can be accessed through a same port.

Service Requirement On the network as shown Figure 10-44, the service requirements are as follows: l

Three branches (G1, G2, and G3) of user G are located at NE1, NE2, and NE4 respectively. The branches need to form a LAN and share a 100 Mbit/s bandwidth. G2 and G3 need not communicate with each other.

l

Two branches of user H are located at NE1 and NE2, and need to communicate with each other.

l

The services of user G must be isolated from the services of user H.

l

The Ethernet equipment of user G and user H provides 1000 Mbit/s Ethernet optical ports that work in 1000M full-duplex mode and do not support VLAN tags.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


451



Figure 10-44 Networking diagram for configuring EVPL and EVPLAN services

NE3

T2000 Line Board 1-JL64 Ethernet Board 15-EGT6 H2


PORT2

NE2 1

PORT1

PORT1

NE4 NE1

17

G2

G3 17 PORT2

H1

1 PORT1

G1



VCTRUNK4 PORT2

VCTRUNK

OptiX OSN 8800

OptiX OSN 3500

Board Configuration Information In this example, the convergence node NE1 is configured with an EGSH board that supports the IEEE 802.1q, the access nodes NE2 and NE4 are configured with a EGT6 board each. When the data of user G is accessed into the transmission network, services of different users are isolated from each other by EGSH board on NE1. The EPL services are configured to be transparently transmitted from NE2 and NE4 to NE1 when the NE2 and NE4 are used as access nodes. When the data of user H is accessed into the transmission network, the VLAN ID of 200 is added to the data. When the data is transmitted out of the transmission network, the VLAN tag is stripped.

10.19.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation When the data of user E is accessed into the transmission network, the Ethernet services of the convergence node are received from an external port and tagged with the corresponding VLAN IDs. After the services are forwarded to an internal port through Layer 2 switching, the VLAN tags are stripped and then the services are transparently transmitted on the SDH network. In this manner, the node communicates with a remote node. The Ethernet services of user H are received Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


452



from the external port on an Ethernet board, tagged with different VLAN IDs, and then transmitted on the same VCTRUNK. In this manner, the services of different users are isolated from each other. After the data arrives at the sink node, the VLAN tags are stripped. Figure 10-45 shows the signal flow of the EVPL and EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1ad Bridge) and the timeslot allocation to the EVPL and EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1ad Bridge). Figure 10-45 Signal flow of and timeslot allocation NE2:EGT6 PORT1 User G2

VCTRUNK1

NE1:EGSH C

VLAN 100

VC

VCTRUNK1

PORT1 User G1

4:V

VC4-xv :VC4-1 VCTRUNK2

VC

VC4-xv :VC4-1

4-1

PORT2

VCTRUNK2

VC 4:

2

VC4-xv :VC4-2

User H2

4-

VC4-xv :VC4-2 VC

PORT2 User H1

VCTRUNK3 VC4-xv :VC4-3

NE4:EGT6

4:V C4 -1

PORT1 User G3

VCTRUNK1

VB1

VC4-xv :VC4-1

SDH PORT Strip VLAN Label

l

VCTRUNK

Add VLAN Label

Strip VLAN Label

Data(User G)

VLAN(100)

Data(User G)

Data(User G)

Data(User H)

VLAN(200)

Data(User H)

Data(User H)

The Ethernet LAN services of user G: – Occupy the first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE2 and the first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE4. – Are added and dropped by using the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGSH board of NE1 and the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGT6 board of NE2. – Are added and dropped by using the second VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-2) on the EGSH board of NE1 and the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGT6 board of NE4.

l

The Ethernet services of user H – Occupy the second VC-4 (VC4:VC4-2) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE2. – Are added and dropped by using the third VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-3) on the EGSH board of NE1 and the second VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-2) on the EGT6 board of NE2.


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Parameter

NE1

NE2

NE4

Board

EGSH

EGT6

EGT6

Port

PORT1

PORT2

PORT1

PORT2

PORT1

Enabled/ Disabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled


453



Parameter

NE1

NE2

NE4

Working Mode

1000M FullDuplex

1000M FullDuplex

1000M FullDuplex

1000M FullDuplex

1000M FullDuplex


1522

1522

1522

1522

1522

TAG

Access

Access

-

-

-

Entry Detection

Enabled

Enabled

-

-

-

Default VLAN ID

100

200

-

-

-

VLAN Priority

0

0

-

-

-

Port Type

UNI

UNI

-

-

-


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Paramete r

NE1

NE2

NE3

Board

EGSH

EGT6

EGT6

Port

VCTRUN K1

VCTRUN K2

VCTRUN K3

VCTRUN K1

VCTRUN K2

VCTRUN K1

Mapping Protocol

GFP

GFP

GFP

GFP

GFP

GFP

TAG

Access

Access

Tag aware

-

-

-

Entry Detection

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

-

-

-

Default VLAN ID

100

100

200

-

-

-

VLAN Priority

0

0

0

-

-

-

Bound Path

VC4xv:VC4-1

VC4xv:VC4-2

VC4xv:VC4-3

VC4xv:VC4-1

VC4xv:VC4-2

VC4xv:VC4-1

Port Type

UNI

UNI

UNI

-

-

-


454



Table 10-46 Parameters of Ethernet LAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge) Parameter


Board

EGSH

VB Name

VB1

Bridge Type

IEEE 802.1q

Bridge Switch Mode



IVL

Ingress Filter

Enabled

VB Mount Port


VLAN Filtering

Hub/Spoke

VLAN Filtering


VLAN ID

100



PORT1

Hub

PORT2

Hub

VCTRUNK1

Spoke

VCTRUNK2

Spoke

VCTRUNK3

Hub

VCTRUNK4

Hub

Table 10-47 Parameters of the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL (VLAN) services Parameter

NE1 EVPL PORT1←→VCTRUNK1

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Board

EGSH

Service Type

EVPL

Service Direction

Bidirectional

Source Port

PORT1


200

Sink Port

VCRTUNK1


200


455



10.19.3 Configuration Process For the Ethernet service of user G, at convergence node NE1, the EVPLAN service (IEEE 802.1q bridge) and VLAN filtering table should be created. Access nodes NE2 and NE4 should be configured with the EPL transparent services. After user H transmits services to the Ethernet, the service data is added with different VLAN tags and thus different user data is isolated but transmitted over the same VCTRUNK.

Prerequisite The Creating a Network task must be complete. You must be familiar with 10.3.2 EVPL (QinQ) Service Configuration Process and 10.3.3 EPLAN Service Configuration Process.


Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Configure the EVPLAN services for user G1, user G2 and user G3 on NE1. For the operation procedures, see 10.17.3 Configuration Process. Step 2 Configure the EPL services of NE2 and NE4. NOTE


Step 3 Configure the EVPL services for user H1 and user H2 on NE1. For the operation procedures, see 10.15.3 Configuration Process. Step 4 Check whether the services are configured correctly. For the operation procedures, see Testing Ethernet Service Paths. Step 5 Enable the performance monitoring function of the NEs. For details, see Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE. Step 6 Back up the configuration data of the NEs. Second methods are available for the backup. Option

Description



----End

10.20 Parameters Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


456



10.20.1 Parameters: Basic Attributes (External Port) In this user interface, you can query and set basic attributes of a MAC port.

Parameters Field

Value

Description

Port

PORTn

Displays all PORT ports an Ethernet board can use. A PORT port numbered n.

Port Enabled

Disabled, Enabled Default: Disabled

Working Mode

For example: AutoNegotiation

Enabled: the port is used and its services will be processed. Disabled: services at the port will not be processed. So, you need to enable the ports that will be used during configuring services. Working modes of the Ethernet port. The AutoNegotiation mode is recommended, because it can automatically find out the best working mode to combine a port and its interconnected port and thus is convenient for maintenance. Be careful to configure the same working mode for the port and its interconnected port. Otherwise, service will fail.

Max. Frame Length


Max. Frame Length (Ethernet Port Attribute) parameter specifies the maximum transmission unit (MTU). For the NG WDM equipment, the range is from 1518 to 9600. Click A.2 Max. Frame Length for more information.

Port physical parameters

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Displays the value that is queried.


Displays the actual working status of the PORT port.

457



Field

Value

Description

MAC Loopback

Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop

The MAC Loopback parameter specifies the MAC loopback state at an Ethernet port. With this parameter, users can test whether equipment runs normally by creating a looped path at the MAC layer and then sending and receiving signals over the path.

Default: Non-Loopback

PHY Loopback

Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop Default: Non-Loopback

The PHY Loopback parameter specifies the PHY loopback state at an Ethernet port. With this parameter, users can test whether equipment runs normally by creating a looped path at the PHY layer and then sending and receiving signals over the path.

QinQ Type Area

0x0600 - 0xFFFF

Displays in hexadecimals.

Physical Type

Reported value by query

Displays the physical type of port.

Logic Type

SDH-OPPORT, SDHEPORT

Displays the logic type of port.

10.20.2 Parameters: Basic Attributes (Internal Port) In this user interface, you can query or set basic attributes of an internal port, including port, port enabling and port physical parameters.

Parameters

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Field

Value

Description

Port

VCTRUNKn, RPRn

Displays the VCTRUNK or RPR port number.

Enabled/Disabled

Enabled, Disabled

Sets this parameter for the RPR port of the ER4 board.

Port Physical Parameters

Displays the value that is queried.

This value can be queried only.

QinQ Type Area

For example: 33024

Sets the QinQ type of the port.


458



10.20.3 Parameters: Flow Control (External Port) In this user interface, you can enable and disable the auto-negotiation or non-auto-negotiation flow control mode for an external port.

Parameters Field

Value

Description

Port

PORTn

Displays all PORT ports an Ethernet board can use. A port numbered n.

Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode

Disabled, Enable Symmetric Flow Control, Send Only, Receive Only Default: Disable

Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode is selected when a port works in nonautonegotiation mode.

Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode


Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode is selected when a port works in autonegotiation mode.

10.20.4 Parameters: Advanced Attributes (External Port) In this user interface, you can set and query advanced attributes for an external port.

Parameters

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Field

Value

Description

Port

PORTn

Displays the PORT port. The letter n indicates the port number.

Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression

Disabled, Enabled

Enables or disables broadcast packet suppression.

Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold

10% to 100%

Default: Disabled


When the broadcast packet suppression function is enabled, if the broadcast packet occupies a bandwidth that exceeds the overall bandwidth of the port x the suppression threshold, the broadcast packet is suppressed.

459



Field

Value

Description

Loop Detection

Disabled, Enabled

Sets whether to enable loop detection, which is used to check whether a loop exists at the port.

Default: Disabled

Loop Port Shutdown

Enabled, Disabled

Sets whether to enable shutdown of a loop port, which is used to set blocking for a loop port.

10.20.5 Parameters: Advanced Attributes (Internal Port) In this user interface, you can set and query advanced attributes for an internal port.

Parameters Field

Value

Description

Port

VCTRUNKn

Displays the VCTRUNK port. The letter n indicates the port number.

Loop Detection

Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled

The Loop Detection parameter specifies the function of reporting the selfloop alarms after one of the following loopback cases is detected.

Loop Port Shutdown

Enabled, Disabled Default: Enabled

The Loop Port Shutdown parameter is set to disable the self-loop port after a selfloop port is detected if the loop port shutdown function is enabled. After the self-loop port is shut down, the selfloop port only transmits or receives the self-loop detection packets rather than any other packets. If the port is not a self-loop port, it starts to work again.

10.20.6 Parameters: TAG Attributes In this user interface, you can query and set the TAG attribute for a PORT port or a VCTRUNK port. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


460



Parameters Field

Value

Description

Port

PORTn or VCTRUNKn

PORT port or VCTRUNK port. "n" is the port number.

TAG

Tag Aware, Access, Hybrid

The tag is used for setting which type of data packets can be processed.

Default: Tag Aware

Set this parameter to Tag Aware to enable the port to transparently transmit packets that have the VLAN ID (tag). If packets do not have the VLAN ID (untag), the packets are discarded. Default VLAN ID and VLAN priority cannot be edited. Set this parameter to Access to enable the port to add the default VLAN ID to packets that do not have the VLAN ID (untag). If the packets have the VLAN ID (tag), the packets are discarded. Set this parameter to Hybrid to enable the port to add the default VLAN ID to the packets that do not have the VLAN ID (untag). If the packets have the VLAN ID (tag), the packets are transparently transmitted. The tag attribute is effective only when the network attribute of the port is PE or UNI. NOTE The tag attribute does not apply to C-Aware and S-Aware ports.

Default VLAN ID

1-4095 Default: 1

The Default VLAN ID parameter specifies a default VLAN ID for a port that transmits untagged packets. NOTE When the tag attribute is Tag Aware, the default VLAN cannot be set. When the tag attribute is Access or Hybrid, the default VLAN can be set.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


461



Field

Value

Description

VLAN Priority

0-7 Default: 0

The VLAN Priority parameter specifies the priority of the default VLAN ID of a port. NOTE When the tag attribute is Tag Aware, the VLAN priority cannot be set. When the tag attribute is Access or Hybrid, the VLAN priority can be set.

Entry Detection


The Entry Detection parameter determines whether a port detects packets by tag identifier.

10.20.7 Parameters: Network Attributes In this user interface, you can set port attributes.

Parameters Field

Value

Description

Port

PORTn or VCTRUNKn

A PORT or VCTRUNK port numbered n.

Port Attribute


The Port Attribute (Ethernet Port) parameter specifies the position of a port in the network. Different port attributes support different packets.

10.20.8 Parameters: Ethernet Line Service In this user interface, you can create or query the source and sink routes of an Ethernet leased line, and set port attributes and path binding.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


462



Parameters Table 10-48 Ethernet Service Parameters Field

Value

Description

Service Type


Displays the service type.

Direction

Unidirectional, Bidirectional

Displays the transmit direction of the service.

Default: Bidirectional

The bidirectional service refers to two services, one of which is transmitted from the source port to the sink port and the other one of which is transmitted from the sink port to the source port. The unidirectional service refers to a service transmitted from the source port to the sink port. Operation Type

Values of parameters vary with different boards and products. Add S-VLAN, Add S-VLAN and C-VLAN, Strip SVLAN, Strip S-VLAN and C-VLAN, Transparently transmit S-VLAN, Translate S-VLAN, Transparently transmit C-VLAN,

Sets the operation type for the EVPL(QinQ) services.

Add S-VLAN, Transparently transmit S-VLAN, Translate S-VLAN, Transparently transmit C-VLAN, Translate C-VLAN

l Transparently transmit SVLAN: Transmits the User TAG transparently.

l Add S-VLAN: Adds STAG based on the PORT route. l Add S-VLAN and CVLAN: Adds S-TAG and C-TAG based on the PORT route.

l Transparently transmit CVLAN: Transmits the CTAG transparently. l Translate S-VLAN: Exchanges S-TAG based on the PORT route. l Strip S-VLAN: Strip STAG. l Strip S-VLAN and CVLAN: Strip S-TAG and C-TAG.

Source Port

PORTn, VCTRUNKn Default: PORT3

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


Displays the name of the source port.

463



Field

Value

Description

Source VLAN

1-4095

Sets VLAN ID of the source port. Applies to EPL services.

Source C-VLAN

1-4095

Sets C-VLAN of the source port. C-VLAN is the client VLAN ID. Applies to EVPL(QinQ) services.

Source S-VLAN

1-4095, NULL Default: NULL

Sets S-VLAN of the source port. S-VLAN is the service VLAN ID. Applies to EVPL(QinQ) services.

Sink Port

PORTn, VCTRUNKn For example: PORT3

Displays the name of the sink port.

Sink VLAN

1-4095

Sets VLAN ID of the sink port. Applies to EPL services.

Sink C-VLAN

1-4095

Sets C-VLAN of the sink port. C-VLAN is the client VLAN ID. Applies to EVPL(QinQ) services.

Sink S-VLAN

1-4095, NULL Default: NULL

Sets S-VLAN of the sink port. S-VLAN is the service VLAN ID. Applies to EVPL(QinQ) services.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

C-VLAN Priority

AUTO, Priority0, Priority1, Priority2, Priority3, Priority4, Priority5, Priority6, Priority7

Sets the priority of C-VLAN.

S-VLAN Priority

AUTO, Priority0, Priority1, Priority2, Priority3, Priority4, Priority5, Priority6, Priority7

Sets the priority of S-VLAN.


464



Field

Value

Description

OAM Enable

Enabled, Disabled

Enable OAM Protocol parameter specified whether the end-to-end OAM protocol (namely, the IEEE 802.3ah protocol) is enabled at a port.

Default: Disabled

l Enabled indicates that the IEEE 802.3ah protocol is enabled and the end-toend Ethernet OAM function is available. l Disabled indicates that the IEEE 802.3ah protocol is disabled and the end-to-end Ethernet OAM function is unavailable. Port

For example: PORT3

Displays the name of a port.

Port Type

UNI, C-Aware, S-Aware (for boards that support QinQ)

Sets the network attributes for a port.

Default: UNI

If the port is of the UNI type, the port processes the tag attributes in 802.1Q and the port has the Tag, Access, and Hybrid attributes. If the port is of the C-Aware type, the port does not process the tag attributes in 802.1Q. It determines that the data packet carries the CVLAN tag and processes only the data packet that has the C-VLAN tag. If the port is of the S-Aware type, the port does not process the tag attributes in 802.1Q. It determines that the data packet carries the SVLAN tag and processes only the data packet that has the S-VLAN tag.

Port Enabled

Enabled, Disabled

Enables or disables a port.

Default: Enabled

Enabled: This port can access services. Disabled: This port cannot access services.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


465



Field

Value

Description

TAG

Tag Aware, Access, Hybrid

TAG is used to set the type of the processed messages. The tag aware port only processes the messages with a tag, and those messages without a tag are discarded. However, the Access port is quite the contrary. The hybrid port processes the two types of messages. It adds a tag to the messages without a tag according to the VLAN ID of this port.

Default: Tag Aware

10.20.9 Parameters: VLAN Group In this user interface, you can configure a VLAN group. You can assign services that have consecutive CVLANs into a VLAN group. In this way, you configure the VLAN group as a whole in the same way as you configure a single VLAN.

Parameters

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Field

Value

Description

Board

For example: 4-TBE

Displays the name of a board.

Port

For example: PORT3

Choose the port of the VLAN group.

Initial VLAN

For example: 1

Sets and displays the initial VLAN. The value of Initial VLAN ranges from 1 to 4095. The calculation formula is as follows: Initial VLAN = p x (2^n), where n = 0, 1,..., 12, and p is an integer ranging from 1 to 2^m. m + n< = 12.

Last VLAN

For example: 1

Displays the VLAN ID of last the VLAN.


466



Field

Value

Description

VLAN Group Member Count

For example: 1

Sets and displays the number of members in a VLAN group. l The calculation formula of VLAN Group Member CountVLAN depends on the value of Initial VLAN. When Initial VLAN = 1, VLAN Group Member Count = 2^n - 1. When Initial VLAN has another value, VLAN Group Member Count = 2^n, where n is equal to the n in the formula of Initial VLAN. l The maximum number of VLAN groups is equal to the number of links on a board.

10.20.10 Parameters: Ethernet LAN Service In this user interface, you can create and query Ethernet LAN services, and configure the forwarding filter table.

Parameters Field

Value

Description

Board

For example: NE501-4-TBE

Displays the name of the board.

VB ID

For example: 1

Allocated automatically when an Ethernet LAN service is created.

VB Name

A maximum of 16 English letters or numerals

Indicates the name of the VB.

Bridge Type

For example: 802.1q

Sets the type of a bridge.

Bridge Switch Mode

IVL/Ingress Filter Enable, SVL/Ingress Filter Disable

Selects the bridge switch mode.

Default: IVL/Ingress Filter Enable

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


467



Field

Value

Description


Values of default with different bridge mode. For details, click the links in the Description column.

Bridge Learning Mode (Ethernet LAN Service) indicates how the bridge learns the MAC address. Bridge Learning Mode is classified into the shared VLAN learning and independent VLAN learning modes. The shared VLAN learning mode indicates learning and forwarding based on the MAC address. The independent VLAN learning mode indicates learning and forwarding based on the VLAN and MAC address.

Ingress Filter

Enabled, Disabled

Displays the status of an ingress filter. Enabled: Checks the validity of a VLAN ID on the basis of bridge. If the ingress receives a packet that does not belong to the VLAN associated to the port on the bridge, the ingress discards the packet. Disabled: Does not check the validity of a VLAN ID. All packets that need to enter the bridge are valid.

MAC Address Self-learning


Enables or disables MAC address learning. Enabled: MAC addresses are learned. Disabled: MAC addresses are statically configured.

Active, Inactive

Displays the activation status of a VB.

Field

Value

Description

VB Port

For example: 1

Sets the VB logical ports.

Active

Table 10-49 Service Mount

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


468



Field

Value

Description

Mount Port

For example: PORT1

The mount port may be the PORT port or VC trunk port.

Operation Type

Add S-VLAN base for Port, Add S-VLAN base for Port and C-VLAN, Mount Port, Mount Port and base for Port and S-VLAN

You can perform operations as follows: l Mounting that is based on port and for which the SVLAN tag is added l Mounting that is based on port and C-VLAN and for which the S-VLAN tag is added l Mounting that is based on port l Mounting that is based on port and S-VLAN

Port Type

UNI, C-Aware, S-Aware (for boards that support QinQ)

Sets the network attributes for a port.

Default: UNI

If the port is of the UNI type, the port processes the TAG attributes in 802.1Q and the port has the Tag Aware, Access and Hybrid attributes. If the port is of the C-Aware type, the port does not process the tag attributes in 802.1Q. It determines that the data packet carries no SVLAN tag and processes only the data packet that has the C-VLAN tag. If the port is of the S-Aware type, it can identify and process the VLAN information about the provider. If the QinQ Type field is valid, this port treats the outmost label carried by the packets as S-VLAN.

Service Direction

Bidirectional Default: Bidirectional

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


Displays the direction of an Ethernet service.

469



Field

Value

Description

Port Enabled

Enabled, Disabled

Enables or disables a port. Enabled: This port can access services. Disabled: This port cannot access services.

TAG

Access, Tag aware, Hybrid

Sets the tag attribute of the VB.

Hub/Spoke

Hub, Spoke

Hub/Spoke (Ethernet LAN Service) is used to separate packets between the logical ports in the network bridge.

Default: Hub

Default VLAN ID

1 to 4095

Sets the VLAN ID. To set the VLAN ID, right-click a port, and choose VLAN Allocation from the shortcut menu. Then, in the dialog box displayed, set the VLAN ID of the VB link that the port belongs to. You can also set the VLAN ID in the VLAN Filtering tab.

Working Mode

For example: 10M HalfDuplex

Displays the working modes of the Ethernet port. AutoNegotiation can automatically determine the optimized working modes of the connected ports. This mode is easy to maintain and is recommended. During configuration, make sure that working modes of the connected ports are consistent. If the working modes are different, the services are down.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Service Direction

Bidirectional

Sets the direction of service.

C-VLAN

0 to 4095

Sets the C-VLAN value.

S-VLAN

0 to 4095

Sets the S-VLAN value.


470



Field

Value

Description

VLAN ID

1 to 4095

Sets the VLAN ID. To set the VLAN ID, right-click a port, and choose VLAN Allocation from the shortcut menu. Then, in the dialog box displayed, set the VLAN ID of the VB link that the port belongs to. You can also set the VLAN ID in the VLAN Filtering tab.

MAC Address

00-00-00-00-00-01 to FEFF-FF-FF-FF-FF

Sets the MAC address of VLAN unicast. To set the MAC address of VLAN unicast, right-click a port that is already allocated with a VLAN ID, and choose VLAN Unicast from the shortcut menu. Then, in the dialog box displayed, set the MAC address of VLAN unicast for the port. You can also set the MAC address of VLAN unicast in the VLAN Unicast tab.

The first byte is an even number.

Table 10-50 VLAN Filtering

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Field

Value

Description

VLAN ID

1 to 4095

Specifies the VLAN ID and configures the forwarding filter table.

VB Port

For example: (1-2)



For example: PORT1, VCTRUNK1

Displays the physical port that is actually attached to the VB link.

Available forwarding ports

For example: PORT4

Displays the queried physical ports that can be used for forwarding.

Selected forwarding ports

For example: PORT4

Displays the selected ports that can be used for forwarding.


471



Table 10-51 VLAN Unicast Field

Value

Description

VLAN ID

1 to 4095

Only the VLAN ID specified in the forwarding filter table can be selected. VLAN unicast is different from common unicast. A VLAN unicast uses VB, VLAN ID, port, and MAC address as its unique identifier.

MAC Address

00-00-00-00-00-01 to FEFF-FF-FF-FF-FF

Displays the MAC address of VLAN unicast.

The first byte is an even number. VB Port

For example: 1


Physical Port

For example: PORT1

Displays the name of the port.

Aging Status

Static

Displays the aging status of unicast items, including static and dynamic.

VB

VB ID-VB Name

VB is automatically displayed by the U2000.

Table 10-52 Disable MAC Address Field

Value

Description

VLAN ID

1 to 4095

Inhibits a MAC address in the VLAN of a certain VB.

MAC Address

00-00-00-00-00-01 to FEFF-FF-FF-FF-FF

Enters a MAC address that is to be inhibited. Hence, enters a MAC address that is not associated to the VLAN unicast of this VLAN.

The first byte is an even number.

Table 10-53 Bound Path

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Field

Value

Description

VCTRUNK Port

For example: VCTRUNK1

Displays the name of the configured VC trunk port.

Level

For example: VC12

Displays the level of a VC trunk-bound path.


472



Field

Value

Description

Service Direction

Bidirectional, Uplink, Downlink

Displays the direction of an Ethernet service.

Default: Bidirectional Bound Path

For example: VC4-1-VC3(1)

Specifies the number of the path that you want to bind, including VC4 path No. and VC12/VC3 path No. VC4-1VC12(1-3).

Number of Bound Paths

For example: 1

Displays the number of the bound paths.

Table 10-54 Self-learning MAC address Field

Value

Description

MAC Address

00-00-00-00-00-01 to FEFF-FF-FF-FF-FF

Enters a MAC address.

The first byte is an even number. VB Port

For example: 1


VLAN ID

1 to 4095

Displays the VLAN ID.

10.20.11 Parameters: Aging Time In this user interface, you can set the life cycle for filtering dynamic records in the database and the aging time for the MAC address.

Parameters Field

Value

Description

Board

For example: NE1-3N1EFS4

Displays the board name.

For example: NE1-8-TBE MAC Address Aging Time / Aging Time Unit

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

1-120 Default: 5


The MAC Address Aging Time parameter specifies the valid duration of a dynamically learnt MAC address in the MAC address table.

473



10.20.12 Parameters: VLAN Unicast In this user interface, you can create, query or delete a VLAN unicast item.

Parameters Field

Value

Description

Board

For example: NE70-4-ER4

Displays the Board.

VLAN ID

1 to 4095

Only the VLAN ID that has been created in earlier VLAN Filtering can be selected.

MAC Address

The first digit is an even number

MAC Address

Port

For example: LP1

Logical port (LP) +port No.

Aging Status

Static, Dynamic

Aging status of unicast items, including static, dynamic and so on.

Default: Static

10.20.13 Parameters: Port Mirroring In this user interface, you can configure the port mirroring of the Ethernet interface board. Then, you can use the port mirroring to perform packet monitoring, daily maintenance and in-service commissioning.

Parameters Field

Value

Description

Board

For example: 8-N1EAS2

Selects a board for port mirroring.

For example: 5-L4G Mirror Listener Port

For example: PORT4

Displays the mirror listener port. It is used to perform packet detection and daily maintenance.

Uplink Listened Port

For example: PORT3

Sets the uplink listened port.

Downlink Listened Port

For example: PORT5

Sets the downlink listened port.

10.20.14 Parameters: Ethernet Test This user interface is for commissioning of installed Ethernet boards and fault location. You can set the send mode, send direction and the number of test frames to be sent. At the same time, you can query the number of received test frames and response frames, and carry out a service connection test to check whether the service connection is normal. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


474



Parameters Table 10-55 Ethernet test Field

Value

Description

Port

For example: 3-L4GVCTRUNK1

Displays the internal port name.

Send Mode

Disabled, Burst Mode, Continue Mode Default: Disabled

Send Mode(Ethernet Test) is used to set the test frame and the transmit mode of the test frame. The test frame is used for simulating packet transmission to check whether the link is normal.

Send Direction

WDM Direction

Send Direction (Ethernet Test) indicates the transmit direction of the test packet.

Frames to Send

0-255 Default: 0

Frames to Send indicates the number of test packets to be transmitted. With this parameter enabled, the system transmits a test packet every one second until the number of transmitted test packets reaches the specified value. NOTE The number of Frames to Send could be slightly different for some equipment.

Status

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Sending, Finished Sending Default: -


Status indicates the transmit status of the current test frames at the port. This parameter is displayed as the current test status after you configure Send Mode and Frames to Send and then click Apply.

475



Field

Value

Description

Counter of Frames Sent

For example: 1

Counter of Frames Sent indicates the number of test frames that are transmitted by the VC trunk port in the Ethernet test. This parameter value is accumulative. The value indicates the total number of test frames that are transmitted from last time when the parameter value is cleared to this time when the value is queried.

Counter of Received Response Test Frame

For example: 1

Counter of Received Response Test Frame indicates the number of response test frames that are received by the VC trunk port in the Ethernet test. This parameter value is accumulative. The value indicates the total number of response test frames that are received from last time when the parameter value is cleared to this time when the value is queried.

Counter of Test Frames to Receive

For example: 1

Counter of Test Frames to Receive indicates the number of test frames that are received by the VC trunk port in the Ethernet test. This parameter value is accumulative. The value indicates the total number of test frames that are transmitted from last time when the parameter value is cleared to this time when the value is queried.

Table 10-56 Setting the bearer mode

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Field

Value

Description

Port


Selects the port at which you want to set the bearer mode.


476



Field

Value

Description

Bearer Mode


Bearer Mode (Ethernet Test) indicates the transmit path of the test frame. Different bearer modes correspond to different types of test frames. If the bearer mode of the received test frame is inconsistent with the bearer mode of this port, the test frame is discarded directly.

Remote Bearer Mode

GFP, Ethernet

Displays the bearer mode at the opposite end.

Table 10-57 Service Connection Test Field

Value

Description

Port


Selects the port to query the opposite port information.

Opposite Port Information

NE-board-VCTRUNK number

Displays the opposite port information that is queried.

10.20.15 Parameters: Protocol Fault Management In this user interface, you can diagnose the Ethernet protocol and restart the protocol state machine by restoring the protocol, to remove the protocol faults.

Parameters Field

Description

Diagnose Port

Selects the diagnose port.

Protocol Type

Selects the Ethernet protocol type.

Diagnose Information

Select the diagnose information.

Fault

Displays the fault diagnosis result.

10.20.16 Parameters: Port MAC Address Filtering In this user interface, you can set the port MAC address filtering.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


477



Parameters

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Field

Value

Description

Port

For example: Port1

Displays the port name.

MAC Address

00-00-00-00-00-01 to FEFF-FF-FF-FF-FF

Displays the opposite router MAC address.


478


11


Modifying the Configuration Data

About This Chapter 11.1 Modifying Port The client-side and line-side ports of the OTU board in the NG WDM equipment can be configured as color ports or grey ports. The port type needs to be set according to type of the small form-factor pluggable (SFP) optical module used in the equipment. 11.2 Modifying the Services Configuration After a service is configured, you can modify or delete the configuration data of the service based on the following task sets. 11.3 Conversion Between EPL Ethernet Services and VLAN SNCP Services The conversion between the created EPL Ethernet services and VLAN SNCP services can be realized on the U2000.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


479



11.1 Modifying Port The client-side and line-side ports of the OTU board in the NG WDM equipment can be configured as color ports or grey ports. The port type needs to be set according to type of the small form-factor pluggable (SFP) optical module used in the equipment.



Background Informations l

Only the TOM board supports interchange of line-side ports and client-side ports. When a TOM board is created, the ports on the TOM board are created automatically and are defined as client-side ports by default.

l

When a board is created, the ports on the board are created automatically and the clientside ports are defined as Client Side Grey Optical Port by default.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Right-click the board in the NE panel, and choose Path View from the shortcut menu. Step 2 Right-click the port for which you want to modify the port type and choose Modify Port from the shortcut menu. The Modify Port dialog box is displayed. Set Type and click OK to apply the configuration.

NOTE

If you need to modify Type to Client Side Color Optical Port, Line Side Color Optical Port or Electrical Port, you must first delete the port, and then add the port. Otherwise the port cannot be modified successfully.

Step 3 Optional: In Path View, right-click the desired port, and click Delete Port. Step 4 Optional: In Path View, right-click a blank space and select Add Port. In the Add Port dialog box displayed, set the Type of the port. Click OK to apply the configuration. ----End

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


480



11.2 Modifying the Services Configuration After a service is configured, you can modify or delete the configuration data of the service based on the following task sets.

11.2.1 Deactivating Cross-Connection Service To release the occupied channel resources, you need to deactivate cross-connections and then delete the cross-connections.



Precautions

CAUTION The deactivation operation may interrupt services.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree. NOTE

If the Web LCT is used, the navigation path is as follows: in the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-Connection Service Management from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab. NOTE

If the Web LCT is used, the navigation path is as follows: click the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration tab

Step 3 Optional: Click Query to query the services on the NE. The Working cross-connection list displays all the created cross-connections. Step 4 Select one or more cross-connections in Active state (you can press Ctrl or Shift to select multiple cross-connections at the same time), click Deactivate. Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed. Step 5 Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed telling you that the operation was successful. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


481



Step 6 Click Close. In WDM Cross-Connection Configuration, Activation Status of the selected cross-connection(s) changes from Active to Inactive. ----End

11.2.2 Deleting Cross-Connections When you need to modify or re-configure cross-connections, you need to first delete them.

Prerequisite You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. The cross-connections must be created and inactive.


Precautions

CAUTION Deleting cross-connections may interrupt services.

Procedure on the U2000 Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab. Click Query to query the information about the existing cross-connections. Step 3 Select the cross-connections to be deleted and click Delete. Step 4 In the Confirm dialog box that is displayed, click OK and then click Close. In the Operation Result dialog box. ----End

Procedure on the Web LCT Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-Connection Service Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration tab. Click Query to query the information about the existing cross-connections. Step 3 Select the cross-connections to be deleted and click Delete. ----End Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


482



11.2.3 Modifying SDH Services When a network changes or services are adjusted, you can modify an SDH service by using the modification function of the U2000 and Web LCT. Alternatively, you can modify the SDH service by deleting it and then creating a cross-connection again.



Precautions

CAUTION Performing this operation interrupts the service that you modify.


If the Web LCT is used, the navigation path is as follows: in the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Cross Connection Configuration from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Select a cross-connection and choose Display > Expand to Unidirectional. Step 3 You can modify the SDH service by using the method described in Step Step 4 or Step 5. NOTE

l By using the method described in Step Step 4, you can modify the source or sink of a service, but the source and sink must be on the same board before and after the modification. l If the modification requirement cannot be met in the method described in Step Step 4 (for example, a pass-through service needs to be configured to the local through modification), you can delete the original service and create the cross-connection again in the method described in Step Step 5, to achieve the modification.

Step 4 Optional: To modify the SDH service, choose Modify from the shortcut menu. 1.

Select the service that you want to modify, right click the service and choose Modify from the shortcut menu. The Modify SDH Service dialog box is displayed.

2.

Modify Source VC4 or Sink VC4, Source Timeslot Range (e.g.1,3-6), and Sink Timeslot Range (e.g.1,3-6). For details of the parameters, see 9.7.1 SDH Service Configuration.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


483



NOTE

In this method, you can modify only Source VC4 or Sink VC4 at a time. The source VC4 and sink VC4 cannot be modified at the same time.

3.

Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed telling you that the operation was successful.

4.

Click Close.

5.

Select the service that is modified, and click Activate.

6.

Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.

7.

Click Close.

Step 5 Optional: To modify the SDH service, delete the service and then create the service again. 1.

Select the service that you want to modify, and click Delete.

2.

Click OK and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed telling you that the operation was successful.

3.

Click Close. The service is deleted.

4.

Create the service again as required. For details, see 12.6.2 Creating SDH CrossConnections.

----End

11.2.4 Deleting SDH Services You can delete an existing SDH when it is no longer applicable or is adjusted.




484




If the Web LCT is used, the navigation path is as follows: in the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Cross Connection Configuration from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click Query to query existing services. Click OK in the Confirm dialog box. Step 3 Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box. Step 4 Optional: If the service to be deleted is active, you should deactivate the service. Select the service that you want to delete and click Deactivate.

CAUTION Deactivation will interrupt services. Step 5 Select the desired service and click Delete. Step 6 In the Confirm dialog box displayed, click OK. Step 7 In the Operation Result dialog box displayed, click Close. ----End

11.2.5 Converting a Non-Protection Service to an SNCP Service The SNCP service features the dual fed and selective receiving function and is used to protect cross-subnet services. When configuring SDH services on a per-NE basis, you can perform this operation to convert a configured non-protection service to an SNCP service.

Prerequisite You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. The normal service is created.

Precaution

CAUTION Converting a normal cross-connection service to an SNCP service may interrupt services.

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


485



Step 2 Click Query to query the SDH services from the NE. Step 3 In the Confirm dialog box, click OK. In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close. Step 4 Select the desired normal service, click Display and choose Expand to Unidirectional from the drop-down list. Right-click a desired normal service and choose Convert to SNCP from the shortcut menu. NOTE

You can select multiple services to change them in batches.

Step 5 In the Prompt dialog box displayed, click OK. Step 6 In the Create SNCP Service dialog box displayed, configure the protection service and click OK. NOTE

You need to perform the operation on the NEs that are set as the dual fed nodes and selective receiving nodes on the source or sink, or in the cross protection subnets.

Step 7 Click Create. In the Create SDH Service dialog box displayed, configure a unidirectional service from the service source board to the line board of another direction. NOTE


Step 8 On the intermediate NE that protection services pass through, configure bidirectional passthrough services between line boards. NOTE

You need to perform this operation on all the intermediate NEs that protection services pass through.

----End

11.2.6 Converting an SNCP Service to a Non-Protection Service The SNCP service features the dual fed and selective receiving function and is used to protect cross-subnet services. When configuring SDH services on a per-NE basis, you can perform this operation to change a configured SNCP service to a non-protection service.

Prerequisite You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. The SNCP service must be created.

Precaution

CAUTION Converting an SNCP service to a normal cross-connection service may interrupt services.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


486



Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Query to query the SDH services from the NE. Step 3 In the Confirm dialog box, click OK. In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close. Step 4 Select the desired SNCP service, click Display and choose Expand to Unidirectional to display the service one by one. Right-click the SNCP service and choose Convert to Non-Protection Service from the shortcut menu. The protection service is then deleted. NOTE

To convert the service in the protection path into a normal service, select a cross-connection in the AutoCreated Cross-Connection pane, right-click the SNCP service and choose Convert to Non-Protection Service from the shortcut menu.

Step 5 In the Prompt dialog box displayed, click OK. Step 6 Select a unidirectional service from the service source board to the line board of another direction, and click Deactivate. In the Confirm dialog box displayed, click OK. In the Operation Result dialog box displayed, click Close. NOTE


Step 7 Select the unidirectional service that you deactivated, right-click, and choose Delete from the shortcut menu. In the Confirm dialog box that is displayed, click OK. In the Operation Result dialog box displayed, click Close. NOTE

You need to perform the operation on the source and sink NEs of the service or the NE that is set as a dual fed or selective receiving node that crosses protection subnets.

Step 8 On the intermediate NE that protection services pass through, delete bidirectional pass-through services between line boards. NOTE

You need to perform this operation on all the intermediate NEs that protection services pass through.

----End

11.3 Conversion Between EPL Ethernet Services and VLAN SNCP Services The conversion between the created EPL Ethernet services and VLAN SNCP services can be realized on the U2000.

11.3.1 Converting an EPL Ethernet Service to a VLAN SNCP Service You can convert an EPL service to a VLAN SNCP service by using the U2000 or the Web LCT.

Prerequisite You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


487



Applicable to the TBE, L4G, LEM24 and LEX4 board. An EPL Ethernet services must be created. An idle port must be available when you convert an EPL service to a VLAN SNCP service.


Procedure on the U2000 Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the EPL Service tab. Select a service that you want to convert, right-click, and choose Convert to VLAN SNCP from the shortcut menu. The Convert to VLAN SNCP Service dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Set protection service parameters such as Source Port according to the actual requirements.

NOTE

l Make sure that the port settings of the protection service and the service being protected are consistent. l If the port type of protection services is not UNI, the U2000 automatically sets the port type to UNI.

Step 4 Click OK. Step 5 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree. Click the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab. Then, create the cross-connections between the Ethernet board and the east line board and between the Ethernet board and the west line board.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


488



NOTE

l When the Ethernet board is the L4G board, create the cross-connection between this L4G board and the L4G board that is in another direction. l If the cross-connection already exists, skip this step.

Step 6 In the NE Explorer of the opposite NE, create the Ethernet dual fed service of the opposite NE and the corresponding cross-connections between the Ethernet board and the east line board and between the Ethernet board and the west line board. Step 7 Optional: If the service passes through an intermediate station, on the intermediate station, you should configure the pass-through for the service between the line boards. ----End

Procedure on the Web LCT Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the EPL Service tab. Select a service that you want to convert, right-click, and choose Convert to VLAN SNCP from the shortcut menu. The Convert to VLAN SNCP Service dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Set protection service parameters such as Source Port according to the actual requirements. NOTE

l Make sure that the port settings of the protection service and the service being protected are consistent. l If the port type of protection services is not UNI, the Web LCT automatically sets the port type to UNI.

Step 4 Click OK. Step 5 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration tab. Then, create the cross-connections between the Ethernet board and the east line board and between the Ethernet board and the west line board. NOTE

l When the Ethernet board is the L4G board, create the cross-connection between this L4G board and the L4G board that is in another direction. l If the cross-connection already exists, skip this step.

Step 6 In the NE Explorer of the opposite NE, create the Ethernet dual fed service of the opposite NE and the corresponding cross-connections between the Ethernet board and the east line board and between the Ethernet board and the west line board. Step 7 Optional: If the service passes through an intermediate station, on the intermediate station, you should configure the pass-through for the service between the line boards. ----End

11.3.2 Converting a VLAN SNCP Service to an EPL Ethernet Service You can convert a VLAN SNCP service to an EPL service by using the U2000.

Prerequisite You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


489



Applicable to the TBE, L4G, LEM24 and LEX4 boards. VLAN SNCP services must be created.


Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the VLAN SNCP Service Management tab. Step 3 Select a VLAN SNCP working service, right-click, and choose Convert to Normal Service from the shortcut menu, a confirm dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Click OK to convert the service to an EPL service. ----End

11.3.3 Deleting EPL Services To release network resources, you can delete the unwanted EPL services.

Prerequisite You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. EPL services must be created.


Precautions

CAUTION The deletion operation affects services. Exercise caution when you perform this operation.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the EPL Service tab and click Query to view the created EPL services. Step 3 Select the desired EPL service and click Delete. In the dialog box that is displayed, click OK to delete the service. ----End Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


490



11.3.4 Deleting EVPL (QinQ) Services To release network resources, you can delete the unwanted EVPL (QinQ) services.

Prerequisite You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. EVPL (QinQ) services must be created.


Precautions


Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Ethernet Line ServiceEPL Service tab and click Query to view the created EVPL (QinQ) services. Step 3 Select the desired EVPL (QinQ) service and click Delete. In the dialog box that is displayed, click OK to delete the service. ----End

11.3.5 Deleting EPLAN Services To release network resources, you can delete the unwanted EPLAN services.

Prerequisite You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. EPLAN services must be created.


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


491



Precautions


Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Service Mount tab and click Query to view the created EPLAN services. Step 3 Select the desired EPLAN service and click Delete. In the dialog box that is displayed, click OK to delete the service. NOTE

Before delete the EPLAN service, you must delete the VLAN filtering table.

Step 4 Optional: On the Service Mount tab page, select the port that does not need to be mounted, and then double-click Mount Port. In the drop-down list, select unconnected. Then, click Apply. The port is then disconnected. NOTE

Before disconnecting the EPLAN service mounting port, delete the port on the VLAN Filtering tab page.

----End

11.3.6 Modifying a VLAN Group You can modify the configuration of a VLAN group to meet service requirements. Modifying a VLAN group is to modify the number of VLAN members.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The VLAN group must be created.


Precautions

CAUTION Modifying a VLAN group may affect the services.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


492



Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the VLAN Group tab. Step 3 Select a VLAN group that you want to modify, and double-click the VLAN Group Member Count to modify the number of VLANs. Then, click Apply.

NOTE

The modified VLAN Group Member Count is restricted as follows: l The value of Initial VLAN is in the range of 1 to 4095. The formula is as follows: Initial VLAN = p x 2n. n is an integer from 0 to 12. p is an integer from 1 to 2m. m + n <= 12. l The formula of VLAN Group Member Count depends on the value of the Initial VLAN. If the value of Initial VLAN is 1, VLAN Group Member Count = 2n - 1. If the value of Initial VLAN is an integer other than 1, VLAN Group Member Count = 2n. The value of n is the same as that in the formula of the Initial VLAN. l For the configuration of related parameters, see 10.20.9 Parameters: VLAN Group.

Step 4 In the confirmation dialog box, click OK. The configuration is complete. Step 5 Click Query. Confirm that the query results are the same as the values that are set. ----End

11.3.7 Deleting a VLAN Group You can delete VLAN groups according to service requirements.

Prerequisite You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. The VLAN group must be created.


Precautions

CAUTION Deleting a VLAN group may interrupt the services in the VLAN group.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


493



Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the VLAN Group tab. Step 3 Select a VLAN group that you want to delete, and click Delete. Step 4 In the confirmation dialog box, click OK. The configuration is complete. ----End

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


494



12

Configuration Tasks

About This Chapter This chapter describes basic operations that may be used when you configure services. For example, configure the service type and WDM-side port attributes of the board. You can see this topic if required. 12.1 Configuring Working Modes Before using some boards, you need to configure the port working modes for the boards. Different port working modes enable a board to process services differently. 12.2 Configuring the Service Type The services can be transmitted normally only when the type of the services at the WDM interface of the board is the same as the actual service type. 12.3 Configuring the Service Mode If services such as OTU1 are input to a board, you need to configure the service mode of the board. 12.4 Configuring Common Cross-Connections This section describes how to configure common electrical cross-connections. 12.5 Configuring Service Timeslots For some boards the transmit and receive timeslots of the client-end services should be configured during service creation. 12.6 Configuring SDH Cross-Connections This topic describes how to configure SDH cross-connections. 12.7 Configuring Path Overhead for SDH Services The path overhead is configured for services, which helps network maintenance personnel to maintain the network. 12.8 Configuring the Board Mode The board supports different functions in different board modes. Set the board mode of the board properly according to the actual requirements. For example, when the ND2 board is used as a regeneration board, set the board mode of the ND2 board to the regeneration mode. 12.9 Creating a VLAN Group Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


495



The VLAN group can extend the number of supported VLAN flows. You can follow the procedure described in this section to create a VLAN group. 12.10 Configuring the Aging Time for MAC Addresses You can configure the aging time for MAC addresses, to implement the dynamic address aging. The MAC addresses that do not appear again on a transport network during the aging time are regarded as having no route requirements. Then these MAC addresses are deleted from the MAC address table to make space for more MAC addresses. 12.11 Configuring MAC Address Filtering MAC address filtering is a broadband transmission solution intended to alleviate the load of the standby router. 12.12 Configuring Port Mirroring You can configure port mirroring to analyze only packets for mirrored ports. In this way, you can monitor all mirrored ports. This helps you to manage the ports. 12.13 Diagnosing Ethernet Protocol Faults When the Ethernet protocol operates abnormally, the U2000 diagnoses the protocol fault, displays the diagnosis contents, and restores the normal operation of the Ethernet protocol. 12.14 Configuring Non-Intrusive Monitoring Non-intrusive monitoring indicates that the board monitors the overhead, however, does not handle it, thus the service is not affected. The non-intrusive monitoring is performed for the overheads that are transmitted through the intermediate nodes between the nodes where the overhead bytes are added or dropped.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


496



12.1 Configuring Working Modes Before using some boards, you need to configure the port working modes for the boards. Different port working modes enable a board to process services differently.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The required boards must be created. Before changing the working mode or port working mode of a board, delete the crossconnections on the board and logical fiber connections at the optical ports.

Context l

You need to configure working modes for the following boards: TN52TOM, THA, TOA, LOA, TN53TDX, and TN55TQX.

l

You need to configure only Port Working Mode for the following boards: THA, TOA, LOA, TN53TDX, and TN55TQX.

l

For the TN52TOM board, you need to configure not only Board Working Mode but also Port Working Mode (such as ODU0/ODU1 mapping and tributary-line integration) to achieve different service signal flows.

l

If you set Board Working Mode to Non-Cascading mode for the TN52TOM board, you need to set Port Working Mode only for optical ports ClicentLP1, ClicentLP3, ClicentLP5, and ClicentLP7.

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the board that you want to configure and choose Configuration > Working Mode from the Function Tree. Step 2 In the Board Working Mode pane, set Board Working Mode to Cascading mode or NonCascading mode. NOTE

This step is applicable only to the TN52TOM board.

Step 3 In the Port Working Mode pane, select the desired optical port. Click the Port Working Mode field and select the corresponding mode from the drop-down list. Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Click Query. Confirm that the query results are the same as the values that are set. ----End

12.2 Configuring the Service Type The services can be transmitted normally only when the type of the services at the WDM interface of the board is the same as the actual service type. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


497



Prerequisite You must be an NMS user with "NE operator" authority or higher.


Precautions

CAUTION l Modifying the service type will lead to service interruption. l When configuring a GE service, make sure that the service types specified for the transmitter and receiver in one direction are the same.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select By Board/Port(Channel) and choose Channel from the drop-down list. Step 3 In the Basic Attributes tab, select the desired optical port. Double-click the Service Type field and select the required service type.

NOTE

If you set Service Type to Any, you must set the service rate in Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s).

Step 4 Click Apply. Click OK in the dialog box displayed.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


498



Step 5 Click Query, and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. The value of Service Type is the same as the one set previously. ----End

12.3 Configuring the Service Mode If services such as OTU1 are input to a board, you need to configure the service mode of the board.

Prerequisite You must be an NMS user with "NE operator" authority or higher. This task is applicable to the following boards: TOM, TQM, ND2, NS2, NQ2, L4G, LQG, LQMD, LQMS, and LQM.


Precautions

CAUTION Modifying the service mode interrupts the existing services.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click By Board/Port(Channel), and then choose Channel from the drop-down list. Step 3 Select the Basic Attributes tab, and then select the desired optical port. Step 4 Double-click the Service Mode field, and then choose the desired service mode from the dropdown list. For details, see A.23 Service Mode (WDM Interface). NOTE

You do not need to set Service Mode for a line board that works in standard mode.

Step 5 Click Apply. Step 6 Click Query. Confirm that the query results are the same as the values that are set. ----End

12.4 Configuring Common Cross-Connections This section describes how to configure common electrical cross-connections. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


499



12.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections By creating a normal cross-connection, you can create the intra-board or inter-board route for a single service.




For the OptiX OSN 6800, the available cross-connection capacity of a board is related to the slot where the board is installed. For example, when the TQX or NQ2 board is installed in slots 1, 4, 11 or 14, the available cross-connection capacity of the board is 40 Gbit/s; when the TQX or NQ2 board is installed in any other slots, the available cross-connection capacity of the board is 20 Gbit/s. Different boards have different cross-connection capacities. Fore details, see the functions and features of each board as specified in the Hardware Description.

l

If the capacity of the configured services is greater than the available cross-connection capacity, the service configuration fails.

Procedure on the U2000 Step 1 When configuring the cross-connection services, first configure the service type of the WDM interface of the OTU. For detailed configuration method, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type. Step 2 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree. Step 3 Click the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab. Click New to display the Create CrossConnection Service dialog box. For parameter descriptions, see 2.8.1 WDM CrossConnection Configuration. Step 4 Select corresponding values for Level and Service Type and set other parameters for the service. 1.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

The following figure shows the parameters to be set when the board where you want to configure cross-connection services is in compatible mode.


500



2.

The following figure shows the parameters to be set when the board where you want to configure cross-connection services is in standard mode.

3.

If you set Level to ODUflex, you also need to set ODUFlex Timeslots.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


501



NOTE

For details about the standard mode and ODUflex, see 2.1.3 Board Model (Standard Mode and Compatible Mode) and 2.1.4 ODUflex.

Step 5 Click OK. A Operation Result dialog box appears telling you that the operation was successful. Step 6 Click Close. ----End

Procedure on the Web LCT Step 1 When configuring the cross-connection services, first configure the service type of the WDM interface of the OTU. For detailed configuration method, see 12.2 Configuring the Service Type. Step 2 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-Connection Service Management from the Function Tree. Step 3 Click the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration tab. Click New and the Create CrossConnection Service dialog box is displayed. For parameter descriptions, see 2.8.1 WDM CrossConnection Configuration. Step 4 Select corresponding values for Service Level and Service Type and set other parameters for the service. Step 5 Click OK and the created cross-connection is displayed in the user interface. ----End

12.4.2 Activating Cross-Connections Do as follows to apply cross-connections to a board.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


502



The cross-connections must be created and inactive.


Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab. Step 3 Optional: Click Query to query the services on the NE. The Working cross-connection list displays all the created cross-connections. Step 4 Select one or more cross-connections in Inactive state (you can press Ctrl or Shift to select multiple cross-connections at the same time), right click and choose Activate. Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed.

Step 5 Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed telling you that the operation was successful. Step 6 Click Close. In WDM Cross-Connection Configuration, Activation Status of the selected cross-connection(s) changes from Inactive to Active. ----End

12.5 Configuring Service Timeslots For some boards the transmit and receive timeslots of the client-end services should be configured during service creation.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. Applies to the TQM, TOM, LQM, LQMD, LOM, LQMS, LDMD, LDM, LDMS.


Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


503



Step 2 Click Query to query the status of configured services for each port on the board. Step 3 Choose the port, double-click Timeslot Configuration Mode and select Automatically Assign.

NOTE

When Timeslot Configuration Mode is set as Automatically Assign, Timeslot Configuration Mode of the receive end and transmit end in the same direction of the service must be set as Automatically Assign, and Send Timeslots and Receive Timeslots do not need to be set. When Timeslot Configuration Mode is set as Manual, you can set parameters, such as Send Timeslots and Receive Timeslots. l The format of timeslots can be one of the following two: l 1, 2, 3, 4: Indicates that four (1-4) timeslots are used. l 1-4: Indicates that four (1-4) timeslots are used. l Please obey the following rules during service configuration: l The transmit and receive timeslots should be specified for each board. l For each board, the same timeslot in the same direction cannot be shared by multiple services. l In one direction of one service, the timeslot of the receive end must be the same as that of the transmit end. l Timeslots must be set again after the service type is changed. For details, see A.22 Service Timeslot (WDM Services).

Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Click Query. The configured timeslots of the board are displayed in the interface. ----End

12.6 Configuring SDH Cross-Connections This topic describes how to configure SDH cross-connections.

12.6.1 Querying the Lower Order Cross-Connection Capacity The lower order cross-connection capacity of the OptiX OSN 8800 determines the lower order access capability of the equipment. Therefore, when configuring an SDH service, consider whether the lower order cross-connection capacity of the equipment is sufficient.

Prerequisite You are an NMS user with " Monitor Group" authority or higher.



504



Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Query Low Crossing Capacity from the Main Menu. Step 2 Click Query. ----End

12.6.2 Creating SDH Cross-Connections To groom SDH services, the SDH service cross-connections between line boards must be created.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The cross-connect board and the clock board must be configured.


Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Query to query SDH services from the NE. Step 3 In the Confirm dialog box, click OK. In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close. Step 4 Click Create and set the required parameters in the Create SDH Service dialog box that is displayed. For the meaning of parameters, see 9.7.1 SDH Service Configuration.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


505



NOTE

l If you activate the service immediately, the service configuration data is applied to NEs. l If you do not activate the service, the service configuration data is only saved on the U2000.

Step 5 Click OK. Step 6 In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close. ----End

12.7 Configuring Path Overhead for SDH Services The path overhead is configured for services, which helps network maintenance personnel to maintain the network.

12.7.1 Configuring Trace Byte The trace byte is used by the receive end to confirm if it has a continuous connection with the transmit end. The trace byte can be set to any identical character for equipment of the same vendor but if the equipment is from different vendors, the trace byte must be set to the characters previously specified to ensure successful interconnection.

Prerequisite You are an NMS user with "Maintenance Group" authority or higher. When the cross-connections of the VC12, VC3 or VC4 levels are created, you can query or set the trace byte of the VC12, VC3 or VC4.


Background Information Trace bytes are used to trace the connection status between the receive end and transmit end. For details, see 9.2.1 Trace Byte. NOTE

The settings of J0 and J1 bytes must be consistent on the transmit and receive sides; otherwise, J0_MM and HP_TIM are generated at the receive equipment.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Select the type of the trace byte. If you need to configure Perform the following operations J0 byte

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > Overhead Management > Regenerator Section Overhead from the Function Tree.


506



If you need to configure Perform the following operations J1 byte

In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > Overhead Management > VC4 Path Overhead from the Function Tree. Click the Trace Byte J1 tab.

Step 2 Right-click the trace byte and choose the input mode. If you choose

Perform the following operations

Copy All Form Received Click Copy All Form Received. Manual Input

Click Manual Input and the Please input the overhead byte dialog box is displayed. Choose Byte Mode and Input Mode and enter the value of the trace byte. Click OK.

NOTE

l Choose Copy All Form Received and the contents of the trace byte received are automatically copied to the table. l Choose Manual Input to customize the contents of the trace byte.

Step 3 Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Click OK. A prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful. Click Close. ----End

12.7.2 Configuring C2 Byte The C2 byte indicates the multiplexing structure of the VC frame and the service types contained in the VC frame.

Prerequisite You are an NMS user with "Maintenance Group" authority or higher. The cross-connection must be created on the NE.


Background Information NOTE

The C2 byte settings on the transmit and receive ends must be consistent. Otherwise, higher order path signal label mismatch (HP_SLM) alarm may occur on the receive-end equipment.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


507



Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 Select the service level of the C2 byte. If the service level of the C2 byte is Perform the following operations VC4

In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > Overhead Management > VC4 Path Overhead from the Function Tree. Click the Signal Flag C2 tab.

VC3

In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > Overhead Management > VC3 Path Overhead from the Function Tree. Click the Signal Flag C2 tab.

Step 2 Set the values of C2 to be Sent and C2 to be Received. Step 3 Click Apply and the Confirm dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Click OK and a prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful. Click Close. ----End

12.8 Configuring the Board Mode The board supports different functions in different board modes. Set the board mode of the board properly according to the actual requirements. For example, when the ND2 board is used as a regeneration board, set the board mode of the ND2 board to the regeneration mode.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The necessary OTU boards must be created.


Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click By Board/Port(Channel), Select Board from the drop-down list. Step 3 Double-click Board Mode to choose the desired mode from the drop-down list. For details on the values, see A.24 Board Mode (WDM Interface). NOTE

If a cross-connection is configured on the board, delete the cross-connection on the board before setting Board Mode.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


508



Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Click Query. Confirm that the query results are the same as the values that are set. ----End

12.9 Creating a VLAN Group The VLAN group can extend the number of supported VLAN flows. You can follow the procedure described in this section to create a VLAN group.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. Applicable to the TBE board of the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800. Applicable to the LEX4 and LEM24 boards of the OptiX OSN 8800 and OptiX OSN 6800. Applicable to the EGSH board of the OptiX OSN 8800.


Background Information The configuration principles are as follows: l

The VLAN group is of port attributes. It is valid only at the service input port. Both the PORT and VCTRUNK ports can be set as a VLAN group.

l

The configuration of a VLAN group is based on the C-VLAN.

l

When you create a VLAN group, if a service is configured for a member VLAN (a noninitial VLAN in the VLAN group), the VLAN group cannot be created. The service mentioned includes services that involve VLAN configuration, such as EPL service, flow configuration and ETH OAM configuration.

l

When you create a VLAN group, if a service is configured for the initial VLAN, the VLAN group can be created, but the service may be transiently interrupted.

l

The maximum number of VLAN groups is consistent with the number of board Links.

l

After you create the port VLAN group, if the VLAN ID of the services to be created is within the VLAN group, the services must be created based on the initial VLAN ID. If the VLAN ID is not within the port VLAN group, the services are unrestricted.

CAUTION Creating a VLAN group may affect the services.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


509



Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the VLAN Group tab. Step 3 Click New. In the dialog box displayed, configure the VLAN group parameters. NOTE

l The value of Initial VLAN is in the range of 1 to 4095. The formula is as follows: Initial VLAN = p x 2n. n is an integer from 0 to 12. p is an integer from 1 to 2m. m + n <= 12. l The formula of VLAN Group Member Count depends on the value of the Initial VLAN. If the value of Initial VLAN is 1, VLAN Group Member Count = 2n - 1. If the value of Initial VLAN is an integer other than 1, VLAN Group Member Count = 2n. The value of n is the same as that in the formula of the Initial VLAN. l For the configuration of related parameters, see 10.20.9 Parameters: VLAN Group.

Step 4 Click Apply. A confirmation dialog box is displayed. Click OK and the configuration is complete. The created port VLAN group is displayed in the user interface.

----End

12.10 Configuring the Aging Time for MAC Addresses You can configure the aging time for MAC addresses, to implement the dynamic address aging. The MAC addresses that do not appear again on a transport network during the aging time are regarded as having no route requirements. Then these MAC addresses are deleted from the MAC address table to make space for more MAC addresses.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


510



Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. This task is applicable to the TBE and L4G boards for the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800. This task is applicable to the LEM24 and LEX4 boards for the OptiX OSN 8800 and OptiX OSN 6800.



If the aging time is too long, the MAC address table may save many outdated MAC address entries. This may use up the resources of the MAC address table. As a result, the MAC address table may not be updated according to changes on the network.

l

If the aging time is too short, effective MAC address entries may be deleted. As a result, packets that are broadcasted cannot find their destination MAC addresses and performance of the network is affected.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > Aging Time from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Double-click MAC Address Aging Time. The MAC Address Aging Time dialog box is displayed. Enter the value of the aging time. NOTE

MAC Address Aging Time supports three time units, including minute, hour, and day. The value ranges from 1 to 120.


12.11 Configuring MAC Address Filtering MAC address filtering is a broadband transmission solution intended to alleviate the load of the standby router.

12.11.1 Adding the MAC Address of the Opposite Router On the Ethernet data board at the standby station, add the MAC address of the opposite router, to implement MAC address filtering at the standby station. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


511



Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. This task is applicable to the TBE and L4G boards for the OptiX OSN 6800 and the OptiX OSN 3800. This task is applicable to the LEM24 and LEX4 boards for the OptiX OSN 8800 and the OptiX OSN 6800.


Background Information NOTE

l For the Windows operating system: To complete the operation, set the General tab of the Internet option of the browser as follows: 1. In Internet Temporary Files, click Settings. The Settings dialog box is displayed. 2. In Check for newer version of stored pages, select Every visit to the page. l For the Solaris operating system: 1. Install the flash plug-in. 2. Navigate to Mozilla, and enter about:config in the address bar. In Filter, enter cache. Then, set the Value of browser.cache.disk.enable to true.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet data board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Port MAC Address Filtering from the function tree. Step 2 Click New. The Create MAC Address Filter dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Set the MAC Address and click OK. The added MAC address of the opposite router is displayed in the list.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


512



----End

12.11.2 Deleting the MAC Address of the Opposite Router You can delete the MAC address of the opposite router when port MAC address filtering is not required.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. This task is applicable to the TBE and L4G boards for the OptiX OSN 6800 and the OptiX OSN 3800. This task is applicable to the LEM24 and LEX4 boards for the OptiX OSN 6800 and the OptiX OSN 8800.


Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the Ethernet data board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Port MAC Address Filtering from the function tree. Step 2 Select the port from the Port List. Choose the MAC address from the Opposite Router MAC Address List. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


513



Step 3 Click Delete to delete the MAC address. ----End

12.12 Configuring Port Mirroring You can configure port mirroring to analyze only packets for mirrored ports. In this way, you can monitor all mirrored ports. This helps you to manage the ports.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. Applicable to the TBE and L4G boards of the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800. Applicable to the LEX4 and LEM24 boards of the OptiX OSN 8800 and OptiX OSN 6800. Applicable to the EGSH board of the OptiX OSN 8800. The mirror listener port should contain no Ethernet service, and has not been aggregated.


Background Information A mirror listener port cannot be configured with any service. The concatenation port mirroring function is not supported. For example, if VCTRUNK2 port is configured to listen to VCTRUNK1 port, you cannot configure any other ports to listen to VCTRUNK2 port.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Port Mirroring from the Function Tree. Step 2 Optional: Click Query to query the status of port mirroring that you configure. Step 3 Click New and the Port Mirror Management window is displayed. Step 4 Set Mirror Listener Port, Uplink Listened Port, and Downlink Listened Port.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


514



NOTE

l For the EGSH, LEX4, LEM24 and TBE board, you can set Uplink Listened Port or Downlink Listened Port, and the two ports cannot be set at the same time. l For the L4G boards, only Uplink Listened Port is supported. l Do not select a port where services exist from the Mirror Listener Port drop-down list. Otherwise, creating port mirroring fails.

Step 5 Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. ----End

12.13 Diagnosing Ethernet Protocol Faults When the Ethernet protocol operates abnormally, the U2000 diagnoses the protocol fault, displays the diagnosis contents, and restores the normal operation of the Ethernet protocol.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. Applies to the TBE, L4G board of the OptiX OSN 6800 and the OptiX OSN 3800. Applies to the LEX4, LEM24 board of the OptiX OSN 6800 and the OptiX OSN 8800.


Background Information The protocol types that can be diagnosed include 802.1agOAM, 802.3ahOAM, LAG, DLAG, RSTP, IGMP Snooping and LCAS. For the L4G board, the 802.1agOAM, 802.3ahOAM and DLAG protocols are not supported.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Protocol Fault Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Protocol Type tab and click Diagnosis. The user interface of the U2000 displays the diagnosis result. Step 3 Select a protocol in the Protocol Type and click Diagnosis. The user interface of the U2000 displays the diagnosis result. ----End

12.14 Configuring Non-Intrusive Monitoring Non-intrusive monitoring indicates that the board monitors the overhead, however, does not handle it, thus the service is not affected. The non-intrusive monitoring is performed for the overheads that are transmitted through the intermediate nodes between the nodes where the overhead bytes are added or dropped. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


515



Prerequisite You must be an NMS user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The board must be created.


Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the required board and choose Configuration > OTN Overhead Management > PM Overhead the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the required port on the board and double-click Non-Intrusive Monitoring. Then, choose the required value from the drop-down list. For details on the values, see A.36 Non-Intrusive Monitoring. Step 3 Click Apply. Step 4 Click Query. Ensure that the query result is consistent with the configuration. ----End

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


516


A Parameters Description

A

Parameters Description

This chapter describes the parameters of all the WDM products of Huawei. Each parameter is described in terms of description, impact on the system, values, configuration guidelines, and relationship with other parameters in detail. A.1 Enabled/Disabled A.2 Max. Frame Length A.3 Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode A.4 Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode A.5 MAC Loopback A.6 PHY Loopback A.7 QinQ Type Area A.8 Port (Ethernet Port Attribute) A.9 Port Physical Parameters (Ethernet Port Attribute) A.10 Working Mode A.11 Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold A.12 Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression A.13 Default VLAN ID A.14 VLAN Priority A.15 Entry Detection A.16 Tag Identifier A.17 Source Channel (WDM Cross-Connection) A.18 Sink Channel (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration) A.19 Activation Status (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration) A.20 Level (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration) A.21 Direction (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration) Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


517



A.22 Service Timeslot (WDM Services) A.23 Service Mode (WDM Interface) A.24 Board Mode (WDM Interface) A.25 Explicit Link A.26 Explicit Node A.27 Excluded Node A.28 Auto-Calculation A.29 Copy after Creation A.30 Level (WDM Trail Creation) A.31 Direction (WDM Trail Creation) A.32 Rate (WDM Trail Creation) A.33 Source (WDM Trail Creation) A.34 Sink (WDM Trail Creation) A.35 OVPN Customer (ASON Trail Management) A.36 Non-Intrusive Monitoring

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


518



A.1 Enabled/Disabled Description The Enabled/Disabled parameter determines whether to enable a port. A port can receive services if this parameter is set to Enabled but cannot receive services if this parameter is set to Disabled.

Impact on the System The attributes of a port take effect only after the port is enabled. If a port is disabled, the attributes of the port will be invalid and the service at this port will be interrupted.

Values Value Range

Default Value

Enabled, Disabled

Disabled

The following table lists the description of each value. Value

Description

Enabled

Enables a port. In this case, the attributes configured for the port take effect.

Disabled

Disables a port. In this case, the attributes configured for the port becomes invalid and the service at the port is interrupted.

Configuration Guidelines None.

Relationship with Other Parameters None.

A.2 Max. Frame Length Description Max. Frame Length (Ethernet Port Attribute) parameter specifies the maximum transmission unit (MTU). Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


519



Impact on the System This parameter specifies the maximum length of a frame traversing a port. When the length of a frame exceeds the specified maximum frame length, the frame will be discarded or the service will be interrupted.

Values Board Name

Value Range

Default Value

Unit

TN11LEM24

1518-9600

1522

Byte

TN11LEX4

Configuration Guidelines Set this parameter based on the actual service configurations. It is recommended to set this parameter to a value that is equal to or greater than the maximum length of a frame that users want to transmit.

Relationship with Other Parameters This parameter is available only when the Enable Port parameter is set to Enabled.

A.3 Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode Description Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode is selected when a port works in nonautonegotiation mode.

Impact on the System Non-autonegotiation flow control cannot take effect if this parameter is set incorrectly.

Values Board

Value Range

Default Value

TN11LEM24

Disabled, Enable Symmetric Flow Control, Send Only, Receive Only

Disable

TN11LEX4

The following table lists the description of each value. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


520



Value

Description

Disabled

Disables port flow control at both the transmit and receive ends.

Enable Symmetric Flow Control

Enables symmetric flow control frames (allows transmission and receiving) in non-autonegotiation mode.

Send Only

Enables only transmission of flow control frames in nonautonegotiation mode.

Receive Only

Enables only receiving of flow control frames in nonautonegotiation mode.

Configuration Guidelines Set this parameter properly according to actual service configurations.

Relationship with Other Parameters This parameter is available only when the working mode of an Ethernet port is Nonautonegotiation mode.

A.4 Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode Description Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode is selected when a port works in auto-negotiation mode.

Impact on the System Auto-negotiation flow control cannot take effect if this parameter is set incorrectly.

Values Board Name

Value Range

Default Value

TN11LEM24

l Disabled

Disabled

TN11LEX4

l Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control l Enable Symmetric Flow Control l Enable Symmetric/ Dissymmetric Flow



521



Value

Description

Disabled

Disables port flow control at both the transmit and receive ends. (None)

Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control

Enables dissymmetric flow control. (Asymmetric > Link Partner)


Enables symmetric flow control. (Symmetric)

Enable Symmetric/ Dissymmetric Flow

Enables either symmetric or dissymmetric flow control, which is determined in the autonegotiation process. (Asymmetric->Local Device)

Configuration Guidelines Set this parameter properly based on actual service configurations.

Relationship with Other Parameters This parameter is available only when the working mode of an Ethernet port is Autonegotiation mode.

A.5 MAC Loopback Description The MAC Loopback parameter specifies the MAC loopback state at an Ethernet port. With this parameter, users can test whether equipment runs normally by creating a looped path at the MAC layer and then sending and receiving signals over the path.

Impact on the System A MAC loopback is used for fault locating but can interrupt services. When this parameter is set to Inloop, the PHY Loopback parameter is automatically set to Non-Loopback. When the PHY Loopback parameter is set to Inloop, this parameter is automatically set to NonLoopback.

Values Board

Value Range

Default Value

TN11LEM24

Non-Loopback, Inloop

Non-Loopback

TN11LEX4



522



Value

Description

Non-Loopback

Indicates that no loopback is configured.

Inloop

Indicates that an internal loopback is configured for a port. In this case, the port receives packets sent by itself.

Configuration Guidelines l

For a GE optical port, GE electrical port, FE optical port, and FE electrical port, an MAC loopback can be set to only inloop.

l

For a 10GE optical port, an MAC loopback can be set to either inloop or outloop.

l

An inloop and an outloop cannot be configured at the same time at a port.

l

By default a loopback is released automatically after it is configured at a port for five minutes.


A.6 PHY Loopback Description The PHY Loopback parameter specifies the PHY loopback state at an Ethernet port. With this parameter, users can test whether equipment runs normally by creating a looped path at the PHY layer and then sending and receiving signals over the path.

Impact on the System A PHY loopback is used for fault locating but interrupts services. When this parameter is set to Inloop, the MAC Loopback parameter is automatically set to Non-Loopback. When the MAC Loopback parameter is set to Inloop, this parameter is automatically set to Non-Loopback.

Values Value Range

Default Value

Non-Loopback, Inloop

Non-Loopback

The following table lists the description of each value.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Value

Description

Non-Loopback



523



Value

Description

Inloop



For a GE optical port, a PHY loopback can be set to only inloop; for a GE electrical port, a PHY loopback can be set to either inloop or outloop.

l

For a 10GE optical port, a PHY loopback can be set to either inloop or outloop.

l

For an FE optical port, a PHY loopback can be set to only inloop; for an FE electrical port, a PHY loopback can be set to either inloop or outloop.

l

An inloop and an outloop cannot be configured at the same time at a port.

l

By default, a loopback is released automatically after it is configured at a port for five minutes.


A.7 QinQ Type Area Description The QinQ Type Area parameter specifies the QinQ type field.

Impact on the System None.

Values Board Name

Value Range

Default Value

TN11LEM24

0x0600-0xFFFF

0x8100

TN11LEX4

Configuration Guidelines Set this parameter based on actual service configurations.

Relationship with Other Parameters None. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


524



A.8 Port (Ethernet Port Attribute) Description The Port parameter specifies a port for which tag attributes needs to be set. Users need to set the tag attributes of boards separately.


Values Value Range

Default Value

ip1-ipN, vctrunk1-vctrunkM

None


Description

ip1-ipN

Represent Ethernet ports.

vctrunk1-vctrunkM

Represent VC-Trunk ports.



A.9 Port Physical Parameters (Ethernet Port Attribute) Description The Port Physical Parameters parameter displays the physical parameters of a port, including port enable status, working mode, flow control enable status, MAC loopback, and PHY loopback.

Impact on the System This parameter is read only and does not affect the normal running of a system. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


525



Values Enable status Value Range

Default Value

Enabled, Disabled

Disabled


Description

Enabled

Enables a port. The attributes configured for a port take effect only after the port is enabled.

Disabled

Disables a port. The attributes configured for a port becomes invalid and the service at the port is interrupted if the port is disabled.

Working mode Board Name

Value Range

Default Value

TN11LEM24

l Auto-Negotiation

Auto-Negotiation

TN11LEX4

l 10M Half_Duplex l 10M Full_Duplex l 100M Half_Duplex l 100M Full_Duplex l 1000M Half_Duplex l 1000M Full_Duplex l 10G Full_Duplex LAN l 10G Full_Duplex WAN


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Value

Description

Auto-Negotiation

Indicates autonegotiation.

10M Half_Duplex

Indicates 10M half-duplex.

10M Full_Duplex

Indicates 10M full-duplex.

100M Half_Duplex


100M Full_Duplex



526



Value

Description

1000M Half_Duplex


1000M Full_Duplex


10G Full_Duplex_LAN

Indicates 10G full-duplex for LAN services.

10G_Full_Duplex_WAN

Indicates 10G full-duplex for WAN services.

Flow control enable status Board Name

Value Range

Default Value

TN11LEM24

l Disabled

Disabled

TN11LEX4

l Receive Only l Send Only l Enable Symmetric Flow Control


Description

Disabled

Disables port flow control at both the transmit and receive ends.

Receive Only

Enables only receiving of flow control frames.

Send Only

Enables only transmission of flow control frames.


Enables symmetric flow control frames.

MAC loopback, PHY loopback Board Name

Value Range

Default Value

TN11LEM24

l Non-Loopback

Non-Loopback

TN11LEX4

l Inloop l Outloop


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


527



Value

Description

Non-Loopback


Inloop


Outloop

Indicates that an external loopback is configured for a port. In this case, the port transmits packets after receiving them.



A.10 Working Mode Description The Working Mode parameter specifies the working mode for an Ethernet port. With autonegotiation, equipment can automatically determine the optimal combination of working modes of two connected ports. The autonegotiation mode is recommended because it makes maintenance easy. During configuration, ensure that working modes of two connected ports are the same. Services will be interrupted if the working modes of two connected ports are different.

Impact on the System Services will be interrupted if working modes of ports are set incorrectly.

Values Board Name

Value Range

Default Value

TN11LEM24

l Auto-Negotiation

Auto-Negotiation

TN11LEX4

l 10M Half_Duplex l 10M Full_Duplex l 100M Half_Duplex l 100M Full_Duplex l 1000M Half_Duplex l 1000M Full_Duplex l 10G Full_Duplex LAN l 10G Full_Duplex WAN

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


528




Description

Auto-Negotiation

Indicates autonegotiation.

10M Half_Duplex


10M Full_Duplex


100M Half_Duplex


100M Full_Duplex


1000M Half_Duplex


1000M Full_Duplex


10G Full_Duplex LAN

Indicates 10G full-duplex for LAN services.

10G Full_Duplex WAN

Indicates 10G full-duplex for WAN services.

Configuration Guidelines Users need to set this parameter based on the actual physical port types and service configurations. For FE electrical ports, this parameter can be set to Auto-Negotiation, 10M Half_Duplex, 10M Full_Duplex, 100M Half_Duplex, or 100M Full_Duplex. For FE optical ports, this parameter must be set to 100M Full_Duplex. For GE optical ports, this parameter can be set to 1000M Half_Duplex or 1000M Full_Duplex. For 10GE optical ports, this parameter can be set to 10G Full_Duplex_LAN or 10G_Full_Duplex_WAN.


A.11 Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold Description The Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold parameter specifies the percentage of broadcast traffic in the bandwidth of a port. The broadcast packets beyond this percentage will be discarded.

Impact on the System After suppression of broadcast packets is enabled, the flow of broadcast packets will be limited according to the specified threshold. If the traffic of the broadcast packets exceeds the specified threshold, the excess broadcast packets will be discarded. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


529



Values Value Range

Default Value

10%-100%

30%

Configuration Guidelines

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Value

Description

10%

Indicates that the broadcast packets can account for a maximum of 10% of the bandwidth of a port.

20%


30%


40%


50%


60%


70%


80%


90%


100%



530



Relationship with Other Parameters This parameter is available only when Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression is set to Enabled.

A.12 Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression Description The Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression parameter determines whether to suppress the traffic of broadcast packets.

Impact on the System After suppression of broadcast packets is enabled, the traffic of broadcast packets will be limited according to the specified threshold. If the traffic of the broadcast packets exceeds the specified threshold, the excess broadcast packets will be discarded.

Values Value Range

Default Value

Disabled, Enabled

Disabled


Description

Enabled

Indicates that the traffic of broadcast packets is not limited.

Disabled

Indicates that excess broadcast packets will be discarded if the traffic of broadcast packets exceeds the specified threshold.

Configuration Guidelines Set this parameter only when you need to limit the traffic of broadcast services.

Relationship with Other Parameters Suppression of broadcast packets is implemented only when this parameter is set to Enabled.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


531



A.13 Default VLAN ID Description The Default VLAN ID parameter specifies a default VLAN ID for a port that transmits untagged packets.

Impact on the System The default VLAN ID of a packet will be stripped when it traverses a HYBRID port.

Values Value Range

Default Value

1-4095

1



A.14 VLAN Priority Description The VLAN Priority parameter specifies the priority of the default VLAN ID of a port.


Values Value Range

Default Value

0-7

0

Configuration Guidelines None. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


532




A.15 Entry Detection Description The Entry Detection parameter determines whether a port detects packets by tag identifier.


Values Value Range

Default Value

Enabled, Disabled

Enabled


Description

Enabled

Enables a port to detect packets by tag identifier.

Disabled

Disables a port to detect packets by tag identifier. In this case, all packets can traverse the port.


Relationship with Other Parameters The entry detection states at the ingress and egress ports of a service must be the same.

A.16 Tag Identifier Description The Tag Identifier parameter determines whether a port transmits packets with tags. Three types of tag identifier are available: ACCESS, TAG, and HYBRID.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


533



Impact on the System Tag Identifier

Impact on Ports

ACCESS

Allows a port to transmit only untagged packets.

TAG

Allows a port to transmit only tagged packets.

HYBRID

Allows a port to transmit both untagged and tagged packets.

Values Value Range

Default Value

ACCESS, TAG, HYBRID

TAG


Description

ACCESS

Allows a port to transmit only untagged packets.

TAG

Allows a port to transmit only tagged packets.

HYBRID

Allows a port to transmit both untagged and tagged packets.


Relationship with Other Parameters A tag identifier is valid only for a UNI port.

A.17 Source Channel (WDM Cross-Connection) Description The Source Channel parameter is used to query the transmit channel of a certain electrical crossconnect service (unidirectional service flow).

Impact on the System None. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


534



Values Value Range

Default Value

Slot ID-Board Name-Optical Interface ID-Optical Channel ID

Null


Description

Slot ID-Board Name-Optical Interface ID-Optical Channel ID

Slot ID: The ID of the slot on the local NE where the crossconnect board is located. Board Name: The name of the cross-connect board. Optical Interface ID: The ID of the optical interface where the cross-connect services are configured. Optical Channel ID: The ID of the optical channel where the cross-connect services are configured.



A.18 Sink Channel (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration) Description The Sink Channel parameter is used to query the receive channel of a certain electrical crossconnect service (unidirectional service flow).


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


535



Values Value Range

Default Value

Slot ID - Board Name Optical Interface ID - Optical Channel ID

Null


Description

Slot ID-Board Name Optical Interface ID - Optical Channel ID

Slot ID: The ID of the slot on the local NE where the crossconnect board is located. Board Name: The name of the cross-connect board. Optical Interface ID: The ID of the optical interface where the cross-connect services are configured. Optical Channel ID: The ID of the optical channel where the cross-connect services are configured.



A.19 Activation Status (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration) Description The Activation Status parameter is used to display whether the service cross-connection configuration is activated. Only when the configuration is activated, can the U2000 deliver the service cross-connection configuration to the NE software.

Impact on the System When Active is selected, the U2000 delivers the information of the service type, source/sink services and service direction that have been configured to the NE software; when Inactive is selected, the U2000 does not deliver the configuration to the NE software. The configuration does not take effect when Inactive is selected during the cross-connection configuration; the configuration takes effect only when Active is selected during the crossconnection configuration. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


536



Values Value Range

Default Value

Active, Inactive

Active


Description

Active

Indicates that the configuration is activated. The service crossconnection configuration will be delivered to the NE software.

Inactive

Indicates that the configuration is not activated. The service crossconnection configuration will not be delivered to the NE software.

Configuration Guidelines When creating service cross-connections, determine whether to deliver the configuration immediately to the NE software.

Relationship with Other Parameters When Active is displayed in the Activation Status column, the values of the Source Interface, Sink Interface, Service Type, and Direction parameters will be delivered to the NE software.

A.20 Level (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration) Description The Level parameter is used to differentiate the service types configured when electrical crossconnections are configured. The OptiX OSN 8800 supports Any, GE, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU3, ODUflex, and OTU1 services. The OptiX OSN 6800 supports Any, GE, ODU1, ODU2, and OTU1 services. The OptiX OSN 3800 supports Any, GE, ODU1, and OTU1 services.

Impact on the System When you configure an electrical cross-connection, if the level of the services to be crossconnected is set incorrectly, the configuration of the electrical cross-connection will fail and the cross-connect services cannot be configured successfully.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


537



Values Value Range

Default Value

ANY, GE, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU5G, ODU3, OTU1, ODUflex

-


Description

ANY

Includes the following services: 10GE, FE, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, STM-64, STM-254, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OC-192, OC-768, FC50, FC100, FC200, FC100(Slice), FC200(Slice), FICON(Slice), FICONEXPRESS(Slice), DVB-ASI, GE(Slice), FC400, FC1000, FICON, FICON Express, HD-SDI, SDI, ESCON, FDDI, ISC 1G, ISC 2G, FICON4G, ETR, CLO

GE

Indicates the data GE services.

ODU0

Indicates a 1.25 Gbit/s signal.

ODU1


ODU2

Indicates a 10 Gbit/s signal.

ODU3


ODU5G

Indicates that one ODU5G service encapsulates four GE services. The ODU5G services can be accessed by the L4G board or the LQG board.

ODUflex

1.25Gbit/s to 10Gbit/s (n x 1.25Gbit/s).

OTU1


NOTE

For the services listed in the table above, the ODU5G service is used only for intra-board fixed crossconnections. For new cross-connections, only GE, Any, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU3, ODUflex and OTU1 services can be used. The LSX, LSXR, TMX, LOM, LSXL, and LSXLR boards do not support electrical cross-connections but fixed cross-connections.

Configuration Guidelines The value of the parameter varies according to boards. For details, see the Hardware Description.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


538



Relationship with Other Parameters The cross-connect level must be configured before the Sink Port parameter and optical ports are configured. When you configure electrical cross-connections by using the cross-connect board, the services at the source and sink nodes configured with cross-connections must be consistent. The fixed cross-connection within a board does not need to be configured manually. It is configured automatically by the U2000.

A.21 Direction (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration) Description The Direction parameter indicates the service direction mode when the service cross-connection is configured. It can be set to either Unidirectional or Bidirectional.

Impact on the System If the service cross-connection is configured in only one direction, only the services in that direction can be configured successfully. The services in the other direction, however, cannot be configured successfully.

Values Value Range

Default Value

Unidirectional, Bidirectional.

Unidirectional

The following table provides a description of each value. Value

Description

Unidirectional

When the received and transmitted services travel through different route, the services are unidirectional.

Bidirectional

When the received and transmitted services travel through the same route, the services are bidirectional.

Configuration Guidelines The values of the parameter are different according to the boards. For details, see the Hardware Description.

Relationship with Other Parameters None. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


539



A.22 Service Timeslot (WDM Services) Description The Service Timeslot parameter is used to configure the number of timeslots of a service. The number must be within the timeslot range of the service type.


Values Value Range

Default Value

1-16

Select a value based on the service type.

(If the number is 0, it indicates that the timeslot is unavailable.)

Configuration Guidelines The following table lists the required timeslots of each board for the OptiX OSN 6800, the OptiX OSN 3800 and OptiX OSN 8800.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Supported Board

Service Type

Required Timeslots

LDM/LDMD/LDMS/ LQM/LQMD/LQMS/ TOM/TQM

FE

1

GE

7

OTU-1

16

STM-1

1

STM-4

4

STM-16

16

OC-3

1

OC-12

4

OC-48

16

FC100

6

FC200

12

FICON

6

FICON Express

12


540



Supported Board

LOM

Service Type

Required Timeslots

HD-SDI

11

DVB-ASI

2

SDI

3

ESCON

2

FDDI

1

GE

1

FC100

1

FC200

2

FC400

4

FICON

1

FICON4G

4

FICON Express

2

ISC 1G

1

ISC 2G

2

InfiniBand 2.5Ga

2

InfiniBand 5Ga

4

a: Only the TN12LOM board supports the InfiniBand 2.5G and InfiniBand 5G services.

l

The number of timeslots required by a service is the number of unoccupied timeslots required by the service type.

l

For multiple timeslots, the timeslots with larger numbers are used with precedence. It is recommended to use contiguous timeslots.

l

Several configuration methods are provided for configuring multiple timeslots. The following description considers configuring four timeslots as an example. – "1-4" indicates configuration of four contiguous timeslots numbered 1, 2, 3, and 4. – "1, 3, 6, 9" indicates configuration of four noncontiguous timeslots. – "1-3, 6" indicates configuration of four timeslots where three are contiguous.

Relationship with Other Parameters The timeslots in the above table are determined by the value range and the number of timeslots required.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


541



A.23 Service Mode (WDM Interface) Description The Service Mode parameter sets the service mode of a board.


Values For the L4G, LDGS, LDGD, and LQG Value Range

Default Value

OTN, SDH

OTN

For the ND2, NQ2, NS2 Value Range

Default Value

ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, Automatic

Automatic

For the NS3 Value Range

Default Value

ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, Mix, Automatic

Automatic

For the LQM, TN12LQMD, TN12LQMS, TOM, THA, TOA, LOA and TQM Value Range

Default Value

Client Mode, OTN Mode

Client Mode


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

In the case of the L4G, LDGS, LDGD, and LQG boards: The mode of line-side services of boards on an NE at the local end should be the same as that at the opposite end. When a local-end board need be connected to an SDH service board of another product, the mode of line-side services should be set to SDH. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

542


l


In the case of the LQM, LQMD, LQMS, TOM, THA, TOA, LOA and TQM boards: When the client side accesses OTN services, set this parameter to OTN Mode. When the client side accesses other services, set this parameter to Client Mode.


A.24 Board Mode (WDM Interface) Description The Board Mode parameter is used to set the board mode of a board depending on the service application scenario.

Impact on the System The signal flow, work mode, and functions of a board vary with the board mode. Therefore, switching between different board modes interrupts the active services.

Values The following table lists the work modes of the ECOM board. Value Range

Default Value

Service Mode, HUB Mode

HUB Mode

The following table lists the description of each value of the ECOM board. Parameter Value

Remarks

Service Mode

Supports converging 8 x FE services to 1 x GE service.

HUB Mode

Supports converging 8 x FE services to 1 x FE service.

The following table lists the work modes of the TN12LQMS board. Value Range

Default Value

NS1 Mode, LQM Mode

LQM Mode

The following table lists the description of each value of the TN12LQMS board.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


543



Parameter Value

Remarks

NS1 Mode

As a line board, this board adds and drops OTU1 signals in conjunction with another tributary board.

LQM Mode

As a tributary/line integrated board, this board converges four channels of Any signals into a channel of OTU1 signals.

NOTE

The NS1 Mode field is valid only when the TN12LQMS board is housed in an OptiX OSN 6800 subrack or OptiX OSN 3800 subrack.

The following table lists the work modes of the TN11TOM. Value Range

Default Value

Cascading Mode, Non-cascading Mode

Non-cascading Mode

The following table lists the description of each value of the TN11TOM. Parameter Value

Remarks

Cascading Mode

Only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as WDM side optical ports. The board supports multiplexing up to six channels of Any signals into one channel of OTU1 signals.

Non-cascading Mode

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 can be used as WDM-side optical ports. The board supports multiplexing up to four channels of Any signals into two channels of OTU1 signals.

The following table lists the work modes of the TN11LSXR/TN11LSXLR/TN12LSXLR. Value Range

Default Value

Electrical Relay Mode, Optical Relay Mode

Electrical Relay Mode

The following table lists the description of each value of the TN11LSXR/TN11LSXLR/ TN12LSXLR. Parameter Value

Remarks


In the case of an optical-layer system, however, the regeneration mode must be set to Optical Relay Mode.

Optical Relay Mode

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


544



The following table lists the work modes of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/ TN54NQ2/TN54NS3. Value Range

Default Value

Line Mode, Electrical Relay Mode, Optical Relay Mode

Line Mode

The following table lists the description of each value of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/ TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN54NS3. Parameter Value

Remarks

Line Mode

The board works as a line board.


The board works as a wavelength conversion relay unit. In the case of an optical-layer system, however, the regeneration mode must be set to Optical Relay Mode.

Optical Relay Mode

Configuration Guidelines Select the board mode according to the actual service application scenario.


A.25 Explicit Link Description The Explicit Link parameter specifies a link that a service must traverse when a trail is created, optimized, or precalculated.

Impact on the System A service cannot be created successfully if a specified explicit link is incorrect or the explicit links are not specified sequentially.

Values Value Range

Default Value

Links on a network

None



545



Value

Description

Links on a network

Lists all links available at a node.

Configuration Guidelines In general, only one explicit link is available on an NE. In addition, the explicit link can be set only at the egress port on the link that a service traverses.

Relationship with Other Parameters A link can be specified only after a node is specified.

A.26 Explicit Node Description The Explicit Node parameter specifies a node that a service must traverse when a trail is created, optimized, or precalculated.

Impact on the System A service cannot be created successfully if a specified explicit node is incorrect or the explicit nodes are not specified sequentially.

Values Value Range

Default Value

Nodes on a network

None


Parameter

Nodes on a network

Specifies a node that a service must traverse.

Configuration Guidelines Check whether the number of nodes that an ASON service traverses exceeds the maximum number of nodes. In the process of creating an ASON service, the ASON software by default considers that the maximum hops of the ASON service is 64. That is, the maximum number of nodes that an ASON service travels is 65. In general, only one explicit node is available on an NE. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


546




A.27 Excluded Node Description The Excluded Node parameter specifies a node that a service cannot traverse when a trail is created, optimized, or precalculated.


Values Value Range

Default Value

Nodes on a network

None


Parameter

Nodes on a network

Specifies a node that a service cannot traverse.

Configuration Guidelines Set this parameter according to customer requirements.


A.28 Auto-Calculation Description The Auto-Calculation parameter enables auto-calculation of the trails that comply with the specified level, direction, rate, source, sink, and route constraints.

Impact on the System If auto-calculation of trails fails, it indicates that a service that complies with the specified level, direction, rate, source, sink, and route constraints does not exist. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


547



Values Value Range

Default Value

None

None


Relationship with Other Parameters After this parameter is selected, the system automatically calculates the trails that comply with the level, direction, rate, source, sink, and route constraints specified for a service.

A.29 Copy after Creation Description The Copy after Creation parameter specifies the source and sink nodes for a service and the route constraints for creating a service. Users can create services in batches if the services have the same source node and the same sink node and comply with the same specified route constraints.


Values Value Range

Default Value

Source, Sink

Null


Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Value

Description

Source

Lists all nodes that can function as the source of a service complying with the specified constraints.

Sink

Lists all nodes that can function as the sink of a service complying with the specified constraints.


548



Relationship with Other Parameters The services created in batches by using this parameter have the same level, direction, and rate. In addition, the services comply with the same route constraints.

A.30 Level (WDM Trail Creation) Description The Level parameter determines the type of a service configured during configuration of an electrical cross-connection, OCh trail, or Client trail. ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU3, and OCh levels are supported.

Impact on the System An electrical cross-connection cannot be configured successfully if this parameter is set incorrectly and thus a service cannot be provisioned.

Values Value Range

Default Value

ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU3, OCh, Client

Client


Description

ODU0


ODU1


ODU2


ODU3


OCh

Indicates the optical-layer signal.

Client

Indicates the client-side signal.


Relationship with Other Parameters l Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

Level must be set prior to Sink Port. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

549



l

When configuring an electrical cross-connection implemented by a cross-connect board, ensure that the service levels at the source and sink ends are the same.

l

The fixed cross-connections on a board do not need to be configured manually; instead, they are configured automatically by the NMS.

A.31 Direction (WDM Trail Creation) Description The Direction parameter indicates the direction of a trail.


Values Value Range

Default Value

Unidirectional, Bidirectional

Bidirectional


Description

Unidirectional

Indicates that the source can transmit services, and the sink can receive services.

Bidirectional

Indicates that the source and sink can receive and transmit services.

Configuration Guidelines Ensure that a created ASON service is bidirectional.


A.32 Rate (WDM Trail Creation) Description The Rate parameter specifies the rate for a trail. The rate for an OCh-level ASON trail cannot be specified. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


550



Impact on the System If the service rates for the boards that the service traverse are different, the service will be interrupted.

Values Value Range

Default Value

GE, 10GE, 10GELAN, 10GEWAN, OTU1, OTU5G, OTU2, OTU3, ANY, FC25, FC50, FC100, FC200, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OC-192, OC-768, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, STM-64...

The default rate varies according to service levels.


Ensure that the service rates for upstream and downstream boards are the same.

l

Set this parameter according to the actual service mapping mode and signal rate. The parameter value varies according to boards. For details, see the Hardware Description.

Relationship with Other Parameters The value of this parameter depends on the service level.

A.33 Source (WDM Trail Creation) Description The Source parameter specifies the source of a trail. For an optical service, the parameter value is expressed as optical NE-NE-subrack-slot-boardport-wavelength number/wavelength/frequency. For an electrical service, the parameter value is s expressed as optical NE-NE-subrack-slotboard-port.

Impact on the System During configuration of a service, the source, including NE, subrack, slot, board, and port, must be specified for the service. A source slot must be specified if a board-level optical crossconnection needs to be configured. If no source slot is specified, a board-level optical crossconnection cannot be created. In addition, a configured board-level optical cross-connection will become invalid if a source port is configured incorrectly.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


551



Values Value Range

Default Value

Source NE, source subrack, source slot, source board, source port, null

Null


Description

Source NE

Specifies a node where a service is added.

Source subrack

Specifies a subrack at the node where a service is added.

Source board

Specifies the type of a board where the source edge port is located.

Source port

Specifies a source port for a board-level optical crossconnection.

Null

Indicates that no source is configured for an optical cross-connection.


Only one source port can be set for one board-level optical cross-connection.

l

A MON port cannot be used as the source port for a board-level optical cross-connection.

Relationship with Other Parameters This parameter is available only when a source slot is specified.

A.34 Sink (WDM Trail Creation) Description The Sink parameter specifies the sink of a trail. For an optical service, the parameter value is expressed as optical NE-NE-subrack-slot-boardport-wavelength number/wavelength/frequency. For an electrical service, the parameter value is s expressed as optical NE-NE-subrack-slotboard-port. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


552



Impact on the System During configuration of a service, the sink, including NE, subrack, slot, board, and port, must be specified for the service. A sink slot must be specified if a board-level optical cross-connection needs to be configured. If no sink slot is specified, a board-level optical cross-connection cannot be created. In addition, a configured board-level optical cross-connection will become invalid if a sink port is configured incorrectly.

Values Value Range

Default Value

Sink NE, sink subrack, sink slot, sink board, sink port, null

Null


Description

Sink NE

Indicates a node where a service is dropped.

Sink subrack

Specifies a subrack at a node where a service is dropped.

Sink board

Specifies the type of a board where the sink edge port is located.

Sink port

Specifies a sink port for a board-level optical crossconnection.

Null

Indicates that no sink is configured for an optical cross-connection.


Only one sink port can be set for one board-level optical cross-connection.

l

A MON port cannot be used as a sink port for a board-level optical cross-connection.

Relationship with Other Parameters This parameter is available only when a sink slot is specified.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


553



A.35 OVPN Customer (ASON Trail Management) Description The OVPN (Optical Virtual Private Network) parameter specifies a customer on an optical virtual private network (OVPN). The OVPN classifies different OVPN customers by resource type. The timeslot resources allocated to an OVPN customer can be used only by the services of this OVPN customer.


Values Value Range

Default Value

OVPN customer resources

None

The following table lists the description of the value. Value

Description

OVPN customer resources

The resources for TE links are classified into three types: shared resources, exclusive resources, and OVPN customer resources.

Configuration Guidelines This parameter is available on the NMS only when Level is set to OCh, Direction is set to Bidirectional, and SPC First is selected.

Relationship with Other Parameters l

The OVPN function is available only when OVPN is enabled for all ASON NEs in an ASON domain and the OVPN license can be enabled on the NMS.

l

OVPN NMS user: This user can use the OVPN customer resources and shared resources allocated by user admin.

l

User admin: This is the default super user of the NMS and is the only user that can manage OVPN customers and allocate OVPN resources. This user can use all TE link resources.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


554



A.36 Non-Intrusive Monitoring Description The Non-Intrusive Monitoring parameter provides an option for enabling or disabling the nonintrusive monitoring. When the client side of a board receives OTN signals, the board does not need to terminate and then regenerate PM or TCM overheads. In this case, the non-intrusive monitoring function can be enabled to monitor the received OTN signals. The function does not affect service signals.

Impact on the System When the non-intrusive monitoring function is enabled for an optical interface on a board, the board detects the QoS of the service and reports alarms if the QoS is poor. Other modules perform operations according to the detected QoS, such as protection switching. If the non-intrusive monitoring function is disabled, the services at the optical port are transmitted transparently.

Values Value Range

Default Value

Enabled, Disabled

Disabled

The following table lists the description of each value. Value Range

Description

Disabled

Indicates that the non-intrusive monitoring function is disabled.

Enabled

Indicates that the non-intrusive monitoring function is enabled.

Configuration Guidelines Set this parameter according to the actual service requirements and the user requirement.

Relationship with Other Parameters None

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


555


B Glossary

B

Glossary

A AC

See alternating current

access control list

A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to have access to a resource.

ACK

See acknowledgement

acknowledgement

A response sent by a receiver to indicate successful reception of information. Acknowledgements may be implemented at any level including the physical level (using voltage on one or more wires to coordinate transfer), at the link level (to indicate successful transmission across a single hardware link), or at higher levels.

ACL

See access control list

add/drop multiplexer

Network elements that provide access to all or some subset of the constituent signals contained within an STM-N signal. The constituent signals are added to (inserted), and/ or dropped from (extracted) the STM-N signal as it passed through the ADM.

Add/drop wavelength

Add/drop wavelength refers to the wavelength that carries the add/drop services in the OADM equipment.

Address Resolution Protocol

Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is an Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses to MAC addresses. It allows hosts and routers to determine the link layer addresses through ARP requests and ARP responses. The address resolution is a process in which the host converts the target IP address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame. The basic function of the ARP is to query the MAC address of the target equipment through its IP address.

ADM

See add/drop multiplexer

administrative unit

The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layer and the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher order VC) and an AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative to the multiplex section frame start.

Administrator

A user who has authority to access all the Management Domains of the EMLCore product. He has access to the whole network and to all the management functionalities.

ADSL

See asymmetric digital subscriber line

AGC

See automatic gain control

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


556


B Glossary

AID

access identifier

AIS

See alarm indication signal

alarm

A message reported when a fault is detected by a device or by the network management system during the process of polling devices. Each alarm corresponds to a recovery alarm. After a recovery alarm is received, the status of the corresponding alarm changes to cleared.

alarm cable

The cable for generation of visual or audio alarms.

alarm cascading

The shunt-wound output of the alarm signals of several subracks or cabinets.

alarm cause

A single disturbance or fault may lead to the detection of multiple defects. A fault cause is the result of a correlation process which is intended to identify the defect that is representative of the disturbance or fault that is causing the problem.

alarm indication

On the cabinet of an NE, there are four indicators in different colors indicating the current status of the NE. When the green indicator is on, it indicates that the NE is powered on. When the red indicator is on, it indicates that a critical alarm is generated. When the orange indicator is on, it indicates that a major alarm is generated. When the yellow indicator is on, it indicates that a minor alarm is generated. The ALM alarm indicator on the front panel of a board indicates the current status of the board.

alarm indication signal A code sent downstream in a digital network as an indication that an upstream failure has been detected and alarmed. It is associated with multiple transport layers. alarm mask

On the host, an alarm management method through which users can set conditions for the system to discard (not to save, display, or query for) the alarm information meeting the conditions.

alarm severity

The significance of a change in system performance or events. According to ITU-T recommendations, an alarm can have one of the following severities: Critical, Major, Minor, Warning.

alarm suppression

A function used not to monitor alarms for a specific object, which may be the networkwide equipment, a specific NE, a specific board and even a specific function module of a specific board.

alarm type

Classification of alarms with different attributes. There are six alarm types as following: Communication: alarm indication related with information transfer. Processing: alarm indication related with software or information processing Equipment: alarm indication related with equipment fault Service: alarm indication related with QoS of the equipment Environment: alarm related with the environment where the equipment resides, usually generated by a sensor Security: alarm indication related with security

ALC

See automatic level control

ALC link

A piece of end-to-end configuration information, which exists in the equipment (single station) as an ALC link node. Through the ALC function of each node, it fulfils optical power control on the line that contains the link.

ALC node

The ALC functional unit. It corresponds to the NE in a network. The power detect unit, variable optical attenuator unit, and supervisory channel unit at the ALC node work together to achieve the ALC function.

ALS

See automatic laser shutdown

alternating current

Electric current that reverses its direction of flow (polarity) periodically according to a frequency measured in hertz, or cycles per second.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


557


B Glossary

American National Standard Institute

An organization that defines U.S standards for the information processing industry. American National Standard Institute (ANSI) participates in defining network protocol standards.

American Standard Code for Information Interchange

American Standard Code for Information Interchange - the standard system for representing letters and symbols. Each letter or symbol is assigned a unique number between 0 and 127.

ANSI

See American National Standard Institute

antistatic floor

A floor that can quickly release the static electricity of the object contacting it to prevent accumulated static electricity

APD

See avalanche photodiode

APE

automatic power equilibrium

APID

access point identifier

application-specific integrated circuit

A special type of chip that starts out as a nonspecific collection of logic gates. Late in the manufacturing process, a layer is added to connect the gates for a specific function. By changing the pattern of connections, the manufacturer can make the chip suitable for many needs.

APS

See automatic protection switching

ARP

See Address Resolution Protocol

arrayed waveguide grating

A device, built with silicon planar lightwave circuits (PLC), that allows multiple wavelengths to be combined and separated in a dense wavelength-division multiplexing (DWDM) system.

ASCII

See American Standard Code for Information Interchange

ASE

amplified spontaneous emission

ASIC

See application-specific integrated circuit

ASON

See automatically switched optical network

asymmetric digital subscriber line

A technology for transmitting digital information at a high bandwidth on existing phone lines to homes and businesses. Unlike regular dialup phone service, ADSL provides continuously-available, "always on" connection. ADSL is asymmetric in that it uses most of the channel to transmit downstream to the user and only a small part to receive information from the user. ADSL simultaneously accommodates analog (voice) information on the same line. ADSL is generally offered at downstream data rates from 512 Kbps to about 6 Mbps.

Asynchronous Transfer Mode

A protocol for the transmission of a variety of digital signals using uniform 53 byte cells. A transfer mode in which the information is organized into cells; it is asynchronous in the sense that the recurrence of cells depends on the required or instantaneous bit rate. Statistical and deterministic values may also be used to qualify the transfer mode.

ATAG

autonomously generated correlation tag

ATM

See Asynchronous Transfer Mode

AU

See administrative unit

auto-negotiation

An optional function of the IEEE 802.3u Fast Ethernet standard that enables devices to automatically exchange information over a link about speed and duplex abilities.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


558


B Glossary

automatic gain control A process or means by which gain is automatically adjusted in a specified manner as a function of a specified parameter, such as received signal level. automatic laser shutdown

A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of laser transmitters and optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels.

automatic level control A well-known application in communication systems with a given input signal conditioned to produce an output signal as possible, while supporting a wide gain range and controlled gain-reduction and gain recovery characteristics. automatic protection switching

Capability of a transmission system to detect a failure on a working facility and to switch to a standby facility to recover the traffic.

automatically switched A network which is based on technology enabling the automatic delivery of transport optical network services. Specifically, an ASON can deliver not only leased-line connections but also other transport services such as soft-permanent and switched optical connections. avalanche photodiode

A semiconductor photodetector with integral detection and amplification stages. Electrons generated at a p/n junction are accelerated in a region where they free an avalanche of other electrons. APDs can detect faint signals but require higher voltages than other semiconductor electronics.

AWG

See arrayed waveguide grating

B background block error ratio

The ratio of background block errors (BBE) to total blocks in available time during a fixed measurement interval. The count of total blocks excludes all blocks during SESs.

backup

A periodic operation performed on the data stored in the database for the purposes of database recovery in case that the database is faulty. The backup also refers to data synchronization between active and standby boards.

bandwidth

A range of transmission frequencies that a transmission line or channel can carry in a network. In fact, it is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies the transmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer rate.

BAS

See broadband access server

basic input/output system

A firmware stored in the computer mainboard. It contains basic input/output control programs, power-on self test (POST) programs, bootstraps, and system setting information. The BIOS provides hardware setting and control functions for the computer.

bayonet-neillconcelman

A connector used for connecting two coaxial cables.

BBE

background block error

BBER

See background block error ratio

BC

See boundary clock

BDI

Backward Defect Indication

BEI

backward error indication

BER

See bit error rate

BIAE

backward incoming alignment error

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


559


B Glossary

bill of material

Listing of all the subassemblies, parts and raw materials that go into the parent assembly. It shows the quantity of each raw material required to make the assembly. There are a variety of display formats for BOMS, including single level, indented, modular/ planning, transient, matrix and costed BOMs [APICs, CMSG].

BIOS

See basic input/output system

BIP

See bit-interleaved parity

BIP-8

See bit interleaved parity order 8

bit error

An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the corresponding bit in the received digital signal.

bit error rate

Ratio of received bits that contain errors. BER is an important index used to measure the communications quality of a network.

bit interleaved parity order 8

A frame is divided into several blocks with 8 bits (one byte)in a parity unit. Then arrange the blocks in matrix. Compute the number of "1" over each column. Then fill a 1 in the corresponding bit for the result if the number is odd, otherwise fill a 0.

bit-interleaved parity

A method of error monitoring. With even parity an X-bit code is generated by the transmitting equipment over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that the first bit of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit of all X-bit sequences within the specified portion, etc. Even parity is generated by setting the BIP-X bits so that there is an even number of 1s in each monitored partition of the signal. A monitored partition comprises all bits which are in the same bit position within the X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion includes the BIP-X.

BITS

See building integrated timing supply

BMC

best master clock

BNC

See bayonet-neill-concelman

BOM

See bill of material

boundary clock

A clock with a clock port for each of two or more distinct PTP communication paths.

BPDU

See bridge protocol data unit

BPS

board-level protection switching

bridge protocol data unit

The data messages that are exchanged across the switches within an extended LAN that uses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information on ports, addresses, priorities and costs and ensure that the data ends up where it was intended to go. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a network topology. The loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridges interfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state.

bridging

The action of transmitting identical traffic on the working and protection channels simultaneously.

broadband access server

A server providing features as user access, connection management, address allocation and authentication, authorization and accounting. It also works as a router featuring effective route management, high forwarding performance and abundant services.

broadcast

A means of delivering information to all members in a network. The broadcast range is determined by the broadcast address.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


560


B Glossary

broadcast service

The unidirectional services from one service source to multiple service sinks.

building integrated timing supply

In the situation of multiple synchronous nodes or communication devices, one can use a device to set up a clock system on the hinge of telecom network to connect the synchronous network as a whole, and provide satisfactory synchronous base signals to the building integrated device. This device is called BITS.

BWS

Backbone WDM System

C cable tie

The tape used to bind the cables.

capex

See capital expenditure

capital expenditure

Capital expenditures (CAPEX or capex) are expenditures creating future benefits. A capital expenditure is incurred when a business spends money either to buy fixed assets or to add to the value of an existing fixed asset with a useful life that extends beyond the taxable year. Capex are used by a company to acquire or upgrade physical assets such as equipment, property, or industrial buildings.

CAR

See committed access rate

CBS

See committed burst size

CC

See connectivity check

CCI

connection control interface

CCM

See continuity check message

CD

chromatic dispersion

CDMA

See Code Division Multiple Access

CE

See customer edge

CENELEC

See European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization

central processing unit The computational and control unit of a computer. The CPU is the device that interprets and executes instructions. The CPU has the ability to fetch, decode, and execute instructions and to transfer information to and from other resources over the computer's main data-transfer path, the bus. centralized alarm system

The system that gathers all the information about alarms into a certain terminal console.

CF

See compact flash

CGMP

Cisco Group Management Protocol

channel

A telecommunication path of a specific capacity and/or at a specific speed between two or more locations in a network. The channel can be established through wire, radio (microwave), fiber or a combination of the three. The amount of information transmitted per second in a channel is the information transmission speed, expressed in bits per second. For example, b/s (100 bit/s), kb/s (103 bit/s), Mb/s (106 bit/s), Gb/s (109 bit/s), and Tb/s (1012 bit/s).

channel spacing

The center-to-center difference in frequency or wavelength between adjacent channels in a WDM device.

CIR

See committed information rate

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


561


B Glossary

CIST

Common and Internal Spanning Tree

CLEI

common language equipment identification

CLNP

connectionless network protocol

CLNS

connectionless network service

clock synchronization

Also called frequency synchronization, clock synchronization means that the signal frequency traces the reference frequency, but the start point need not be consistent.

clock synchronization A type of high-decision clock defined by the IEEE 1588 V2 standard. The IEEE 1588 compliant with V2 standard specifies the precision time protocol (PTP) in a measurement and control precision time protocol system. The PTP protocol ensures clock synchronization precise to sub-microseconds. clock tracing

The method to keep the time on each node being synchronized with a clock source in a network.

CM

See configuration management

CMEP

connection monitoring end point

CMI

coded mark inversion

coarse wavelength division multiplexing

A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels into the same fiber. CWDM widely spaces wavelengths at a spacing of several nm. CWDM does not support optical amplifiers and is applied in short-distance chain networking.

Code Division Multiple A communication scheme that forms different code sequences by using the frequency Access expansion technology. In this case, subscribers of different addresses can use different code sequences for multi-address connection. committed access rate

A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface. CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classified into QoS (Quality of Service) groups, and by which the input or output transmission rate can be defined.

committed burst size

committed burst size. A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.

committed information The rate at which a frame relay network agrees to transfer information in normal rate conditions. Namely, it is the rate, measured in bit/s, at which the token is transferred to the leaky bucket. Common Object Request Broker Architecture

A specification developed by the Object Management Group in 1992 in which pieces of programs (objects) communicate with other objects in other programs, even if the two programs are written in different programming languages and are running on different platforms. A program makes its request for objects through an object request broker, or ORB, and thus does not need to know the structure of the program from which the object comes. CORBA is designed to work in object-oriented environments. See also IIOP, object (definition 2), Object Management Group, object-oriented.

compact flash

Compact flash (CF) was originally developed as a type of data storage device used in portable electronic devices. For storage, CompactFlash typically uses flash memory in a standardized enclosure.

concatenation

A process that combines multiple virtual containers. The combined capacities can be used a single capacity. The concatenation also keeps the integrity of bit sequence.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


562


B Glossary

Configuration Data

A command file defining hardware configurations of an NE. With this file, an NE can collaborate with other Nes in an entire network. Thus, configuration data is the key factor for normal running of an entire network.

configuration management

1. A network management function defined by the International Standards Organization (ISO). It involves installing, reinitializing & modifying hardware & software. 2. Configuration Management (CM) is a system for collecting the configuration information of all nodes in the network.

configure

To set the basic parameters of an operation object.

congestion

An extra intra-network or inter-network traffic resulting in decreasing network service efficiency.

connecting plate

A metallic plate which is used to combine two cabinets.

connection point

A reference point where the output of a trail termination source or a connection is bound to the input of another connection, or where the output of a connection is bound to the input of a trail termination sink or another connection. The connection point is characterized by the information which passes across it. A bidirectional connection point is formed by the association of a contradirectional pair.

connectivity check

Ethernet CFM can detect the connectivity between MEPs. The detection is achieved by each MEP transmitting a Continuity Check Message (CCM) periodically.

continuity check message

CCM is used to detect the link status.

convergence

1. A process in which multiple channels of low-rate signals are multiplexed into one or several channels of required signals. 2. It refers to the speed and capability for a group of networking devices to run a specific routing protocol. It functions to keep the network topology consistent.

convergence service

A service that provides enhancements to an underlying service in order to provide for the specific requirements of the convergence service user.

CORBA

See Common Object Request Broker Architecture

corrugated pipe

Used to protect optical fibers.

CPLD

Complex Programmable Logical Device

CPU

See central processing unit

CRC

See cyclic redundancy check

CSA

Canadian Standards Association

CSES

consecutive severely errored second

CSMA

carrier sense multiple access

CST

Common Spanning Tree

current alarm

An alarm not handled or not acknowledged after being handled.

current performance data

Performance data stored currently in a register. An NE provides two types of registers, namely, 15-minute register and 24-hour register, to store performance parameters of a performance monitoring entity. The two types of registers stores performance data only in the specified monitoring period.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


563


B Glossary

customer edge

A part of BGP/MPLS IP VPN model. It provides interfaces for direct connection to the Service Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host.

CWDM

See coarse wavelength division multiplexing

cyclic redundancy check

A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses a complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending device performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that it sends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation after transmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmission was error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmission includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.

D DAPI

destination access point identifiers

Data backup

A method that is used to copy key data to the standby storage area, to prevent data loss in the case of the damage or failure in the original storage area.

data communication network

A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the Data Communication Function (DCF).

data communications channel

The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal to transmit information on operation, management, maintenance and provision (OAM&P) between NEs. The DCC channels that are composed of bytes D1-D3 is referred to as the 192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel that are composed of bytes D4-D12 is referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel.

DBPS

distribute board protect system

DCC

See data communications channel

DCF

See dispersion compensation fiber

DCM

See dispersion compensation module

DCM frame

A frame which is used to hold the DCM (Dispersion Compensation Module).

DCN

See data communication network

DDF

See digital distribution frame

DDN

See digital data network

demultiplexer

A device that separates signals that have been combined by a multiplexer for transmission over a communications channel as a single signal.

dense wavelength division multiplexing

Technology that utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation of single mode optical fiber, employs multiple wavelengths with specific frequency spacing as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously in the same fiber.

device set

A collection of multiple managed devices. By dividing managed devices into different device sets, users can manage the devices by using the U2000 in an easier way. If an operation authority over one device set is assigned to a user (user group), the authority over all the devices in the device set is assigned to the user (user group), thus making it unnecessary to set the operation authority over all the devices in a device set separately. It is recommended to configure device set by geographical region, network level, device type, or another criterion.

DHCP

See Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


564


B Glossary

diamond-shaped nut

A type of nut that is used to fasten the wiring frame to the cabinet.

digital data network

A high-quality data transport tunnel that combines the digital channel (such as fiber channel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel) and the cross multiplex technology.

digital distribution frame

A type of equipment used between the transmission equipment and the exchange with transmission rate of 2 to 155 Mbit/s to provide the functions such as cables connection, cable patching, and test of loops that transmitting digital signals.

digital subscriber line access multiplexer

A network device, usually situated in the main office of a telephone company that receives signals from multiple customer Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) connections and puts the signals on a high-speed backbone line using multiplexing techniques.

dispersion compensation fiber

A kind of fiber which uses negative dispersion to compensate for the positive dispersion of transmitting fiber to maintain the original shape of the signal pulse.

dispersion compensation module

A module, which contains dispersion compensation fibers to compensate for the dispersion of transmitting fiber.

Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol

An Internet gateway protocol mainly based on the RIP. The protocol implements a typical dense mode IP multicast solution. The DVMRP protocol uses IGMP to exchange routing datagrams with its neighbors.

distributed link aggregation group

The distributed link aggregation group (DLAG) is a board-level port protection technology used to detect unidirectional fiber cuts and to negotiate with the opposite end. In the case of a link down failure on a port or a hardware failure on a board, the services can automatically be switched to the slave board, thus realizing 1+1 protection for the inter-board ports.

DLAG

See distributed link aggregation group

DMUX; DEMUX

See demultiplexer

DNI

Dual Node Interconnection

domain

A logical subscriber group based on which the subscriber rights are controlled.

DQPSK

differential quadrature phase shift keying

DRDB

dynamic random database

DRZ

differential phase return to zero

DSCP

Differentiated Services Code Point

DSCR

dispersion slope compensation rate

DSLAM

See digital subscriber line access multiplexer

DSP

Digital Signal Processing

DTE

Data Terminal Equipment

DTMF

See dual tone multiple frequency

DTR

data terminal ready

dual tone multiple frequency

In telephone systems, multifrequency signaling in which standard set combinations of two specific voice band frequencies, one from a group of four low frequencies and the other from a group of four higher frequencies, are used.

dual-ended switching

A protection operation method which takes switching action at both ends of the protected entity (e.g. "connection", "path"), even in the case of a unidirectional failure.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


565


B Glossary

DVB

Digital Video Broadcasting

DVMRP

See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol

DWDM

See dense wavelength division multiplexing

Dynamic Host Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking protocol. Configuration Protocol A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information required by the host to participate on the Internet network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to hosts.

E E2E

End to End

EAPE

enhanced automatic power pre-equilibrium

EBS

See excess burst size

ECC

See embedded control channel

EDFA

See erbium doped fiber amplifier

eDQPSK

enhanced differential quadrature phase shift keying

EFM

See Ethernet in the first mile

ejector lever

A lever for removing circuit boards from an electronic chassis.

electric supervisory channel

A technology realizes the communication among all the nodes and transmits the monitoring data in the optical transmission network. The monitoring data of ESC is introduced into DCC service overhead and is transmitted with service signals.

electromagnetic compatibility

Electromagnetic compatibility is the condition which prevails when telecommunications equipment is performing its individually designed function in a common electromagnetic environment without causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentional electromagnetic interference to or from other equipment in the same environment.

electromagnetic interference

Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades or limits the effective performance of electronics/electrical equipment.

electrostatic discharge

The sudden and momentary electric current that flows between two objects at different electrical potentials caused by direct contact or induced by an electrostatic field.

element management system

An element management system (EMS) manages one or more of a specific type of network elements (NEs). An EMS allows the user to manage all the features of each NE individually, but not the communication between NEs - this is done by the network management system (NMS).

embedded control channel

A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer, to enable transmission of operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM) information between NEs.

EMC

See electromagnetic compatibility

EMI

See electromagnetic interference

EMS

See element management system

enterprise system connection

A path protocol which connects the host with various control units in a storage system. It is a serial bit stream transmission protocol. The transmission rate is 200 Mbit/s.

EPL

See Ethernet private line

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


566


B Glossary

EPLAN

See Ethernet private LAN service

erbium doped fiber amplifier

An optical device that amplifies the optical signals. The device uses a short length of optical fiber doped with the rare-earth element Erbium and the energy level jump of Erbium ions activated by pump sources. When the amplifier passes the external light source pump, it amplifies the optical signals in a specific wavelength range.

ESC

See electric supervisory channel

ESCON

See enterprise system connection

ESD

See electrostatic discharge

ESD jack

Electrostatic discharge jack. A hole in the cabinet or shelf, which connect the shelf or cabinet to the insertion of ESD wrist strap.

eSFP

enhanced small form-factor pluggable

Ethernet

A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/ s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining..

Ethernet in the first mile

Last mile access from the broadband device to the user community. The EFM takes the advantages of the SHDSL.b is technology and the Ethernet technology. The EFM provides both the traditional voice service and internet access service of high speed. In addition, it meets the users' requirements on high definition television system (HDTV) and Video On Demand (VOD).

Ethernet private LAN service

An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a dedicated bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks.

Ethernet private line

A type of Ethernet service that is provided with dedicated bandwidth and point-to-point connections on an SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer network.

Ethernet virtual private LAN service

An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a shared bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks.

Ethernet virtual private line

An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over shared bandwidth, point-to-point connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks.

ETS

European Telecommunication Standards

ETSI

European Telecommunications Standards Institute

ETSI 300mm cabinet

A cabinet which is 600mm in width and 300mm in depth, compliant with the standards of the ETSI.

European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization

The European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization was established in 1976 in Brussels. It is the result of the incorporation of two former organizations. It aims to reduce internal frontiers and trade barriers for electrotechnical products, systems and services.

EVOA

electrical variable optical attenuator

EVPL

See Ethernet virtual private line

EVPLAN

See Ethernet virtual private LAN service

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


567


B Glossary

excess burst size

A parameter related to traffic. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM) mode, the traffic control is achieved by the token buckets C and E. Excess burst size is a parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket E, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.

Extended ID

The number of the subnet that an NE belongs to, for identifying different network segments in a WAN. The extended ID and ID form the physical ID of the NE.

External cable

The cables and optical fibers which are used for connecting electrical interfaces and optical interfaces of one cabinet to interfaces of other cabinets or peripherals.

eye pattern

An oscilloscope display of synchronized pseudo-random digital data (signal amplitude versus time), showing the superposition of accumulated output waveforms.

F F1 byte

The user path byte, which is reserved for the user, but is typically special for network providers. The F1 byte is mainly used to provide the temporary data or voice path for special maintenance objectives. It belongs to the regenerator section overhead byte.

fast Ethernet

Any network that supports transmission rate of 100Mbits/s. The Fast Ethernet is 10 times faster than 10BaseT, and inherits frame format, MAC addressing scheme, MTU, and so on. Fast Ethernet is extended from the IEEE802.3 standard, and it uses the following three types of transmission media: 100BASE-T4 (4 pairs of phone twisted-pair cables), 100BASE-TX (2 pairs of data twisted-pair cables), and 100BASE-FX (2-core optical fibers).

fault

A failure to implement the function while the specified operations are performed. A fault does not involve the failure caused by preventive maintenance, insufficiency of external resources and intentional settings.

FBG

fiber Bragg grating

FC

See fiber channel

FDB

flash database

FDDI

See fiber distributed data interface

FE

See fast Ethernet

FEC

See forward error correction

fiber channel

A high-speed transport technology used to build storage area networks (SANs). Fiber channel can be on the networks carrying ATM and IP traffic. It is primarily used for transporting SCSI traffic from servers to disk arrays. Fiber channel supports single-mode and multi-mode fiber connections. Fiber channel signaling can run on both twisted pair copper wires and coaxial cables. Fiber channel provides both connection-oriented and connectionless services.

fiber distributed data interface

A standard developed by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) for highspeed fiber-optic local area networks (LANs). FDDI provides specifications for transmission rates of 100 megabits (100 million bits) per second on networks based on the token ring network.

fiber management tray A device used to coil up extra optical fibers.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


568


B Glossary

fiber patch cord

A kind of fiber used for connections between the subrack and the ODF, and for connections between subracks or inside a subrack.

fiber spool

A device used in coiling up an extra length of optical fibers.

Fiber trough

The trough that is used for routing fibers.

fiber/cable

Fiber & Cable is the general name of optical fiber and cable. It refers to the physical entities that connect the transmission equipment, carry transmission objects (user information and network management information) and perform transmission function in the transmission network. The optical fiber transmits optical signal, while the cable transmits electrical signal. The fiber/cable between NEs represents the optical fiber connection or cable connection between NEs. The fiber/cable between SDH NEs represents the connection relation between NEs. At this time, the fiber/cable is of optical fiber type.

field programmable gate array

A type of semi-customized circuit used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) field. It is developed on the basis of the programmable components, such as the PAL, GAL, and EPLD. It not only remedies the defects of customized circuits, but also overcomes the disadvantage of the original programmable components in terms of the limited number of gate arrays.

FIFO

See First in First out

File Transfer Protocol

A member of the TCP/IP suite of protocols, used to copy files between two computers on the Internet. Both computers must support their respective FTP roles: one must be an FTP client and the other an FTP server.

First in First out

A stack management mechanism. The first saved data is first read and invoked.

Flow

An aggregation of packets that have the same characteristics. On the network management system or NE software, flow is a group of classification rules. On boards, it is a group of packets that have the same quality of service (QoS) operation. At present, two flows are supported: port flow and port+VLAN flow. Port flow is based on port ID and port+VLAN flow is based on port ID and VLAN ID. The two flows cannot coexist in the same port.

FMT

See fiber management tray

FOADM

fixed optical add/drop multiplexer

FOAs

fixed optical attenuator

Forced switch

For normal traffic signals, switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect or SF condition exists on the protection section, by issuing a forced switch request for that traffic signal.

forward error correction

A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload at the transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during transmission are corrected at the receive end.

four-wave mixing

Four-Wave Mixing (FWM), also called four-photon mixing, occurs when the interaction of two or three optical waves at different wavelengths generates new optical waves, called mixing products or sidebands, at other wavelengths.

FPGA

See field programmable gate array

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


569


frame

B Glossary

A frame, starting with a header, is a string of bytes with a specified length. Frame length is represented by the sampling circle or the total number of bytes sampled during a circle. A header comprises one or a number of bytes with pre-specified values. In other words, a header is a code segment that reflects the distribution (diagram) of the elements prespecified by the sending and receiving parties.

frame alignment signal A distinctive signal inserted in every frame or once in every n frames, always occupying the same relative position within the frame, and used to establish and maintain frame alignment. FTP

See File Transfer Protocol

full-duplex

A full-duplex, or sometimes double-duplex system, allows communication in both directions, and, unlike half-duplex, allows this to happen simultaneously. Land-line telephone networks are full-duplex, since they allow both callers to speak and be heard at the same time. A good analogy for a full-duplex system would be a two-lane road with one lane for each direction.

G gain

The ratio between the optical power from the input optical interface of the optical amplifier and the optical power from the output optical interface of the jumper fiber, which expressed in dB.

gain flattening filter

Gain Flattening Filter (GFFs), also known as gain equalizing filters, are used to flatten or smooth out unequal signal intensities over a specified wavelength range. This unequal signal intensity usually occurs after an amplification stage (for example, EDFA and/or Raman). Typically, GFFs are used in conjunction with gain amplifiers to ensure that the amplified channels all have the same gain. A static spectral device that flattens the output spectrum of an erbium-doped fiber amplifier.

Gateway IP

When an NE accesses a remote network management system or NE, a router can be used to enable the TCP/IP communication. In this case, the IP address of the router is the gateway IP. Only the gateway NE requires the IP address. The IP address itself cannot identify the uniqueness of an NE. The same IP addresses may exist in different TCP/IP networks. An NE may have multiple IP addresses, for example, one IP address of the network and one IP address of the Ethernet port.

gateway network element

A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer and the NM application layer

Gb

See gigabit

GCC

general communication channel

GCP

See GMPLS control plan

GE

See gigabit Ethernet

GE ADM

The technology can optimize GE service transport over WDM for Metro network. It owns the capability of GE service convergence and grooming and benefits to use the network resource more effectively.

generic framing procedure

A framing and encapsulated method which can be applied to any data type. It has been standardized by ITU-T SG15.

GFF

See gain flattening filter

GFP

See generic framing procedure

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


570


B Glossary

gigabit

In data communications, a gigabit is one billion bits, or 1,000,000,000 (that is, 10^9) bits. It's commonly used for measuring the amount of data that is transferred in a second between two telecommunication points.

gigabit Ethernet

GE adopts the IEEE 802.3z. GE is compatible with 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s Ethernet. It runs at 1000 Mbit/s. Gigabit Ethernet uses a private medium, and it does not support coaxial cables or other cables. It also supports the channels in the bandwidth mode. If Gigabit Ethernet is, however, deployed to be the private bandwidth system with a bridge (switch) or a router as the center, it gives full play to the performance and the bandwidth. In the network structure, Gigabit Ethernet uses full duplex links that are private, causing the length of the links to be sufficient for backbone applications in a building and campus.

Global Positioning System

A global navigation satellite system. It provides reliable positioning, navigation, and timing services to worldwide users.

GMPLS

generalized multiprotocol label switching

GMPLS control plan

The OptiX GMPLS control plan (GCP) is the ASON software developed by Huawei. The OptiX GCP applies to the OptiX OSN product series. By using this software, the traditional network can evolve into the ASON network. The OptiX OSN product series support the ASON features.

GNE

See gateway network element

GPS

See Global Positioning System

graphical user interface A visual computer environment that represents programs, files, and options with graphical images, such as icons, menus, and dialog boxes, on the screen. grounding

The connection of sections of an electrical circuit to a common conductor, called the ground, which serves as the reference for the other voltages in the circuit.

GSSP

General Snooping and Selection Protocol

GUI

See graphical user interface

H Hardware loopback

A connection mode in which a fiber jumper is used to connect the input optical interface to the output optical interface of a board to achieve signal loopback.

HCS

See hierarchical cell structure

HDB

high density bipolar code

HDLC

See high level data link control

hierarchical cell structure

This is a term typically used to describe the priority of cells within a mixed environment. That is when Macro, Micro, and Pico cells may be viewed as candidates for cell reselection the priority described by the HCS will be used in the associated calculations.

high level data link control

The HDLC protocol is a general purpose protocol which operates at the data link layer of the OSI reference model. Each piece of data is encapsulated in an HDLC frame by adding a trailer and a header.

History alarm

The confirmed alarms that have been saved in the memory and other external memories.

History Performance Data

The performance data that is stored in the history register or that is automatically reported and stored in the NMS.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


571


B Glossary

I IAE

incoming alignment error

IC

See integrated circuit

ICC

ITU carrier code

ICMP

See Internet Control Message Protocol

ID

See identity

identity

The collective aspect of the set of characteristics by which a thing is definitively recognizable or known.

Idle resource optical NE

When the U2000 is started successfully, an NE icon called "Idle ONE" will be displayed on the topological view. In this NE, the subracks and boards that are not divided to other optical NEs (such as OTM, OADM and other NEs) are retained. In this NE, idle DWDM subracks and boards are reserved, which can be distributed to other ONEs. Double-click the NE icon to view all the currently idle DWDM subracks or boards in the network.

IE

See Internet Explorer

IEC

See International Electrotechnical Commission

IEEE

See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IETF

See Internet Engineering Task Force

IGMP

See Internet Group Management Protocol

Input jitter tolerance

The maximum amplitude of sinusoidal jitter at a given jitter frequency, which, when modulating the signal at an equipment input port, results in no more than two errored seconds cumulative, where these errored seconds are integrated over successive 30 second measurement intervals.

Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

A society of engineering and electronics professionals based in the United States but boasting membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on electrical, electronics, computer engineering, and science-related matters.

integrated circuit

A combination of inseparable associated circuit elements that are formed in place and interconnected on or within a single base material to perform a microcircuit function.

integrated services digital network

A network defined in CCITT, providing comprehensive transmission service for the voice, video, and data. The ISDN enables the voice, video, and data transmission on a small number of data channels simultaneously, thus implementing a comprehensive transmission service.

intelligent power adjustment

A technology that the system reduces the optical power of all the amplifiers in an adjacent regeneration section in the upstream to a safety level if the system detects the loss of optical signals on the link. The loss of optical signals may due to the fiber is broken, the performance of equipments trend to be inferior or the connector is not plugged well. Thus, the maintenance engineers are not hurt by the laser being sent out from the slice of broken fiber.

Internal cable

The cables and optical fibers which are used for interconnecting electrical interfaces and optical interfaces within the cabinet.

internal spanning tree

A segment of CIST in a certain MST region. An IST is a special MSTI whose ID is 0.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


572


B Glossary

International Electrotechnical Commission

The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is an international and nongovernmental standards organization dealing with electrical and electronical standards.

International Organization for Standardization

An international association that works to establish global standards for communications and information exchange. Primary among its accomplishments is the widely accepted ISO/OSI reference model, which defines standards for the interaction of computers connected by communications networks.

International Telecommunication Union

A United Nations agency, one of the most important and influential recommendation bodies, responsible for recommending standards for telecommunication (ITU-T) and radio networks (ITU-R).

International Telecommunication UnionTelecommunication Standardization Sector

An international body that develops worldwide standards for telecommunications technologies. These standards are grouped together in series which are prefixed with a letter indicating the general subject and a number specifying the particular standard. For example, X.25 comes from the "X" series which deals with data networks and open system communications and number "25" deals with packet switched networks.

Internet Control Message Protocol

A network-layer (ISO/OSI level 3) Internet protocol that provides error correction and other information relevant to IP packet processing. For example, it can let the IP software on one machine inform another machine about an unreachable destination. See also communications protocol, IP, ISO/OSI reference model, packet (definition 1).

Internet Engineering Task Force

A worldwide organization of individuals interested in networking and the Internet. Managed by the Internet Engineering Steering Group (IESG), the IETF is charged with studying technical problems facing the Internet and proposing solutions to the Internet Architecture Board (IAB). The work of the IETF is carried out by various working groups that concentrate on specific topics, such as routing and security. The IETF is the publisher of the specifications that led to the TCP/IP protocol standard.

Internet Explorer

Microsoft's Web browsing software. Introduced in October 1995, the latest versions of Internet Explorer include many features that allow you to customize your experience on the Web. Internet Explorer is also available for the Macintosh and UNIX platforms.

Internet Group Management Protocol

The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups among the TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish and maintain multicast group memberships.

Internet Protocol

The TCP/IP standard protocol that defines the IP packet as the unit of information sent across an internet and provides the basis for connectionless, best-effort packet delivery service. IP includes the ICMP control and error message protocol as an integral part. The entire protocol suite is often referred to as TCP/IP because TCP and IP are the two fundamental protocols. IP is standardized in RFC 791.

IP

See Internet Protocol

IP address

A 32-bit (4-byte) binary number that uniquely identifies a host (computer) connected to the Internet for communication with other hosts in the Internet by transferring packets. An IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation, consisting of the decimal values of its 4 bytes, separated with periods; for example, 127.0.0.1. The first three bytes of the IP address identify the network to which the host is connected, and the last byte identify the host itself.

IP over DCC

The IP Over DCC follows TCP/IP telecommunications standards and controls the remote NEs through the Internet. The IP Over DCC means that the IP over DCC uses overhead DCC byte (the default is D1-D3) for communication.

IPA

See intelligent power adjustment

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


573


B Glossary

IPG

inter-packet gap

ISDN

See integrated services digital network

ISO

See International Organization for Standardization

IST

See internal spanning tree

ITU

See International Telecommunication Union

ITU-T

See International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization Sector

J Jitter

Short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and control system instability.

Jitter transfer

The physical relationship between jitter applied at the input port and the jitter appearing at the output port.

L label switched path

A sequence of hops (R0...Rn) in which a packet travels from R0 to Rn through label switching mechanisms. A label-switched path can be chosen dynamically, based on normal routing mechanisms, or through configuration.

LACP

See Link Aggregation Control Protocol

LAG

See link aggregation group

LAN

See local area network

LAPD

link access procedure on the D channel

LAPS

link access protocol-SDH

Laser

A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laser light has better coherence than ordinary light. The fiber system takes the semi-conductor laser as the light source.

layer

A concept used to allow the transport network functionality to be described hierarchically as successive levels; each layer being solely concerned with the generation and transfer of its characteristic information.

LB

See loopback

LCAS

See link capacity adjustment scheme

LCD

See liquid crystal display

LCN

local communication network

LCT

local craft terminal

LED

See light emitting diode

LHP

long hop

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


574


B Glossary

light emitting diode

A display and lighting technology used in almost every electrical and electronic product on the market, to from a tiny on/off light to digital readouts, flashlights, traffic lights and perimeter lighting. LEDs are also used as the light source in multimode fibers, optical mice and laser-class printers.

Link Aggregation Control Protocol

A method of bundling a group of physical interfaces together as a logical interface to increase bandwidth and reliability. For related protocols and standards, refer to IEEE 802.3ad.

link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it were a single link. link capacity adjustment scheme

LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides a control mechanism to hitlessly increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet the bandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing member links that have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of capacity initiation, increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the end-to-end path is the responsibility of the Network and Element Management Systems.

Link Control Protocol

In the Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP), the Link Control Protocol (LCP) establishes, configures, and tests data-link Internet connections.

link state advertisement

The link in LSA is any type of connection between OSPF routers, while the state is the condition of the link.

linktrace message

The message sent by the initiator MEP of 802.1ag MAC Trace to the destination MEP is called Linktrace Message(LTM). LTM includes the Time to Live (TTL) and the MAC address of the destination MEP2.

linktrace reply

For 802.1ag MAC Trace, the destination MEP replies with a response message to the source MEP after the destination MEP receives the LTM, and the response message is called Linktrace Reply (LTR). LTR also includes the TTL that equals the result of the TTL of LTM minus 1.

liquid crystal display

A type of display that uses a liquid compound having a polar molecular structure, sandwiched between two transparent electrodes.

LLC

See logical link control

LMP

link management protocol

LOC

loss of clock

local area network

A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet, FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/ s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).

Locked switching

When the switching condition is satisfied, this function disables the service from being switched from the working channel to the protection channel. When the service has been switched, the function enables the service to be restored from the protection channel to the working channel.

logical link control

According to the IEEE 802 family of standards, Logical Link Control (LLC) is the upper sublayer of the OSI data link layer. The LLC is the same for the various physical media (such as Ethernet, token ring, WLAN).

logical port

A logical port is a logical number assigned to every application.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


575


B Glossary

loopback

A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the signal or message can be analyzed for errors.

LOP

See loss of pointer

LOS

See Loss Of Signal

loss of pointer

Loss of Pointer: A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the PHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost the pointer to the start of cell in the payload. This is used to monitor the performance of the PHY layer.

Loss Of Signal

Loss of signal (LOS) indicates that there are no transitions occurring in the received signal.

Lower subrack

The subrack close to the bottom of the cabinet when a cabinet contains several subracks.

LP

See logical port

LPT

link-state pass through

LSA

See link state advertisement

LSP

See label switched path

LT

linktrace

LTM

See linktrace message

LTR

See linktrace reply

M MA

Maintenance Associations

MAC

See media access control

MADM

multiple add/drop multiplexer

main distribution frame

A device at a central office, on which all local loops are terminated.

main path interface at the transmitter

A reference point on the optical fiber just after the OM/OA output optical connector.

main topology

A interface that displays the connection relation of NEs on the NMS (screen display). The default client interface of the NMS, a basic component of the human-machine interactive interface. The topology clearly shows the structure of the network, the alarms of different NEs, subnets in the network, the communication status as well as the basic network operation status. All topology management functions are accessed here.

maintenance domain

The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by CFM. The devices in an MD are managed by a single ISP.

maintenance point

Maintenance Point (MP) is one of either a MEP or a MIP.

MAN

See metropolitan area network

managed object

The management view of a resource within the telecommunication environment that may be managed via the agent. Examples of SDH managed objects are: equipment, receive port, transmit port, power supply, plug-in card, virtual container, multiplex section, and regenerator section.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


576


B Glossary

Management information

The information that is used for network management in a transport network.

management information base

A type of database used for managing the devices in a communications network. It comprises a collection of objects in a (virtual) database used to manage entities (such as routers and switches) in a network.

manual switch

Switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless a failure condition exists on other sections (including the protection section) or an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect, by issuing a manual switch request for that normal traffic signal.

Mapping

A procedure by which tributaries are adapted into virtual containers at the boundary of an SDH network.

marking-off template

A quadrate cardboard with four holes. It is used to mark the positions of the installation holes for the cabinet.

MD

See maintenance domain

MDB

Memory Database

MDF

See main distribution frame

MDP

message dispatch process

MDS

message distribution service software

ME

maintenance entities

mean launched power

The average power of a pseudo-random data sequence coupled into the fiber by the transmitter.

Mean Time Between Failures

The average time between consecutive failures of a piece of equipment. It is a measure of the reliability of the system.

media access control

A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of the data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocol checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain control information is added to the data, and then the data and the control information are transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MAC protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the control information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer.

MEP

maintenance end point

metropolitan area network

A metropolitan area network (MAN) is a network that interconnects users with computer resources in a geographic area or region larger than that covered by even a large local area network (LAN) but smaller than the area covered by a wide area network (WAN). The term is applied to the interconnection of networks in a city into a single larger network (which may then also offer efficient connection to a wide area network). It is also used to mean the interconnection of several local area networks by bridging them with backbone lines. The latter usage is also sometimes referred to as a campus network.

MFAS

See multiframe alignment signal

MIB

See management information base

MIP

maintenance intermediate point

MLD

See multicast listener discovery

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


577


B Glossary

MLM laser

See multi-longitudinal mode laser

MO

See managed object

mother board

A printed board assembly that is used for interconnecting arrays of plug-in electronic modules.

mounting ear

A piece of angle plate with holes in it on a rack. It is used to fix network elements or components.

MP

See maintenance point

MPI

main path interface

MPI-R

main path interface at the receiver

MPI-S

See main path interface at the transmitter

MPLS

See Multiprotocol Label Switching

MS

Multiplex Section

MSA

Multiplex Section Adaptation

MSI

multi-frame structure identifier

MSOH

See multiplex section overhead

MSP

See multiplex section protection

MSPP

multi-service provisioning platform

MST

See multiplex section termination

MSTI

See multiple spanning tree instance

MSTP

See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol

MTA

Mail Transfer Agent

MTBF

See Mean Time Between Failures

MTU

Maximum Transmission Unit

multi-longitudinal mode laser

An injection laser diode which has a number of longitudinal modes.

multicast listener discovery

The MLD is used by the IPv6 router to discover the multicast listeners on their directly connected network segments, and set up and maintain member relationships. On IPv6 networks, after MLD is configured on the receiver hosts and the multicast router to which the hosts are directly connected, the hosts can dynamically join related groups and the multicast router can manage members on the local network.

multiframe alignment signal

A distinctive signal inserted in every multiframe or once in every n multiframes, always occupying the same relative position within the multiframe, and used to establish and maintain multiframe alignment.

multiple spanning tree Multiple spanning tree instance. One of a number of Spanning Trees calculated by MSTP instance within an MST Region, to provide a simply and fully connected active topology for frames classified as belonging to a VLAN that is mapped to the MSTI by the MST Configuration. A VLAN cannot be assigned to multiple MSTIs.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


578


B Glossary

Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol

Multiple spanning tree protocol. The MSTP can be used in a loop network. Using an algorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed as a tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided in the loop network. The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and multiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded in a VLAN because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.

multiplex section overhead

The overhead that comprises rows 5 to 9 of the SOH of the STM-N signal. See SOH definition.

multiplex section protection

A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a "protection" channel.

multiplex section termination

The function performed to generate the MSOH in the process of forming an SDH frame signal and terminates the MSOH in the reverse direction.

multiplexer

Equipment which combines a number of tributary channels onto a fewer number of aggregate bearer channels, the relationship between the tributary and aggregate channels being fixed.

Multiplexing

A procedure by which multiple lower order path layer signals are adapted into a higher order path or the multiple higher order path layer signals are adapted into a multiplex section.

Multiprotocol Label Switching

A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different link layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis of IP routing and control protocols. It improves the cost performance and expandability of networks, and is beneficial to routing.

MUX

See multiplexer

MVOA

mechanical variable optical attenuator

N NA

No Acknowledgment

NCP

See Network Control Protocol

NE

See network element

NE database

There are three types of database on NE SCC board as following: (1) DRDB: a dynamic database in a dynamic RAM, powered by battery; (2) SDB: a static database in a power-down RAM; (3) FDB0, FDB0: permanently saved databases in a Flash ROM. In efficient operation, the NE configuration data is saved in DRDB and SDB at the same time. Backing up an NE database means backing up the NE configuration data from SDB to FDB0 and FDB1. When an NE is restarted after power-down, the NE database is restored in the following procedures: As the SDB data is lost due to power-down, the main control restores the data first from DRDB. If the data in DRDB is also lost due to the exhaustion of the battery, the data is restored from FDB0 or FDB1.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


579


B Glossary

NE Explorer

The main operation interface, of the NMS, which is used to manage the telecommunication equipment. In the NE Explorer, the user can query, manage and maintain the NE, boards, and ports on a per-NE basis.

NE ID

An ID that indicates a managed device in the network. In the network, each NE has a unique NE ID.

NE Panel

A graphical user interface, of the network management system, which displays subracks, boards, and ports on an NE. In the NE Panel, the user can complete most of the configuration, management and maintenance functions for an NE.

NE-side data

The NE configuration data that is stored on the SCC board of the equipment. The NEside data can be uploaded to the network management system(NMS) and thus is stored on the NMS side.

NEBS

Network Equipment Building System

NEF

See network element function

Network Control Protocol

This is the program that switches the virtual circuit connections into place, implements path control, and operates the Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC) link.

network element

A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software running on it. One NE is at least equipped with one system control and communication(SCC) board which manages and monitors the entire network element. The NE software runs on the SCC board.

network element function

A function block which represents the telecommunication functions and communicates with the TMN OSF function block for the purpose of being monitored and/or controlled.

network management

The process of controlling a network so as to maximize its efficiency and productivity. ISO's model divides network management into five categories: fault management, accounting management, configuration management, security management and performance management.

Network Management A system in charge of the operation, administration, and maintenance of a network. System network node interface The interface at a network node which is used to interconnect with another network node. network segment

A part of an Ethernet or other network, on which all message traffic is common to all nodes, that is, it is broadcast from one node on the segment and received by all others.

network service access A network address defined by ISO, through which entities on the network layer can point access OSI network services. Network Time Protocol The Network Time Protocol (NTP) defines the time synchronization mechanism. It synchronizes the time between the distributed time server and the client. NM

See network management

NMS

See Network Management System

NNI

See network node interface

NOC

network operation center

Noise figure

An index that represents the degrade extent of optical signals after the signals passing a system.

NSAP

See network service access point

NTP

See Network Time Protocol

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


580


B Glossary

O OA

See optical amplifier

OADM

See optical add/drop multiplexer

OADM frame

A frame which is used to hold the OADM boards.

OAM

See operation, administration and maintenance

OC

See optical coupler

OCI

open connection indication

OCP

See optical channel protection

OD

optical demultiplexing

ODB

optical duobinary

ODF

See optical distribution frame

ODUk

optical channel data unit-k

OEQ

optical equalizer

OFC

open fiber control

OLA

See optical line amplifier

OLP

See optical line protection

OM

optical multiplexing

OMS

optical multiplexing section

ONE

See optical network element

Online Help

The capability of many programs and operating systems to display advice or instructions for using their features when so requested by the user.

OOF

See out of frame

OPA

optical power adjust

open shortest path first A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing. Dijkstra's algorithm is used to calculate the shortest path tree. It uses cost as its routing metric. A link state database is constructed of the network topology which is identical on all routers in the area. Open Systems Interconnection

A framework of ISO standards for communication between different systems made by different vendors, in which the communications process is organized into seven different categories that are placed in a layered sequence based on their relationship to the user. Each layer uses the layer immediately below it and provides a service to the layer above. Layers 7 through 4 deal with end-to-end communication between the message source and destination, and layers 3 through 1 deal with network functions.

operation, administration and maintenance

A group of network support functions that monitor and sustain segment operation, activities that are concerned with, but not limited to, failure detection, notification, location, and repairs that are intended to eliminate faults and keep a segment in an operational state and support activities required to provide the services of a subscriber access network to users/subscribers.

OpEx; OPEX

operation expenditure

OPS

optical physical section

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


581


B Glossary

optic fiber connector

A device installed at the end of a fiber, optical source or receive unit. It is used to couple the optical wave to the fiber when connected to another device of the same type. A connector can either connect two fiber ends or connect a fiber end and a optical source (or a detector).+

optical add/drop multiplexer

A device that can be used to add the optical signals of various wavelengths to one channel and drop the optical signals of various wavelengths from one channel.

optical amplifier

Devices or subsystems in which optical signals can be amplified by means of the stimulated emission taking place in a suitable active medium.

optical attenuator

A passive device that increases the attenuation in a fiber link. It is used to ensure that the optical power of the signals received at the receive end is not extremely high. It is available in two types: fixed attenuator and variable attenuator.

optical channel

A signal transmitted at one wavelength in a fiber-optic system.

optical channel protection

In an optical transmission link that contains multiple wavelengths, when a certain wavelength goes faulty, the services at the wavelength can be protected if the optical channel protection is configured.

optical coupler

A coupler for coupling light in an optical system. Multiple discrete layers of alternating optical materials have respective first and second indexes of refraction. The thickness of each layer is a fraction of the light wavelength.

optical distribution frame

A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers.

optical line amplifier

A piece of equipment that functions as an OLA to directly amplify the input optical signals and to compensate for the line loss. Currently, the key component of the OLA is the EDFA amplifier.

optical line protection

A protection mechanism that adopts dual fed and selective receiving principle and singleended switching mode. In this protection, two pairs of fibers are used. One pair of fibers forms the working route. The working route transmits line signals when the line is normal. The other pair of fibers forms the protection route. The protection route carries line signals when the line is broken or the signal attenuation is extremely large.

optical network element

A transport entity that implements the NE functions (terminal multiplexing, add/drop multiplexing, cross-connection and regeneration) in a DWDM layer network. The types of ONEs include OTM, OADM, OLA, REG and OXC. The locating of an ONE is equivalent to that of a common NE. In a view, an ONE is displayed with an icon, like a common NE and its alarm status can be displayed with colors. Logically, an ONE consists of different subracks. Like a common NE, an ONE cannot be expanded or entered like a sub-network. Similar to a common NE, an ONE provides a list of the subracks that form the NE to display the board layout.

optical signal-to-noise ratio

The most important index of measuring the performance of a DWDM system. The ratio of signal power and noise power in a transmission link. That is, OSNR = signal power/ noise power.

optical spectrum analyzer

A device that allows the details of a region of an optical spectrum to be resolved. Commonly used to diagnose DWDM systems.

optical supervisory channel

A technology that realizes communication among nodes in optical transmission network and transmits the monitoring data in a certain channel (the wavelength of the working channel for it is 1510 nm and that of the corresponding protection one is 1625 nm).

Optical switch

A passive component possessing two or more ports which selectively transmits, redirects, or blocks optical power in an optical fiber transmission line.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


582


B Glossary

optical time domain reflectometer

A device that sends a very short pulse of light down a fiber optic communication system and measures the time history of the pulse reflection to measure the fiber length, the light loss and locate the fiber fault.

optical transmission section

Optical transmission section allows the network operator to perform monitoring and maintenance tasks between NEs.

optical transponder unit

A device or subsystem that converts the accessed client signals into the G.694.1/G.694.2compliant WDM wavelength.

optical transport network

A network that uses the optical signal to transmit data

optical wavelength shared protection

In the optical wavelength shared protection (OWSP), the service protection between different stations can be achieved by using the same wavelength, realizing wavelength sharing. This saves the wavelength resources and lowers the cost. The optical wavelength shared protection is mainly applied to the ring network which is configured with distributed services. It is achieved by using the OWSP board. In a ring network where services are distributed at adjacent stations, each station requires one OWSP board. Then, two wavelengths are enough for configuring the shared protection to protect one service among stations.

OPU

optical channel payload unit

OPUk

optical channel payload unit-k

orderwire

A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or maintenance engineers of different stations.

original equipment manufacturer

An original equipment manufacturer, or OEM is typically a company that uses a component made by a second company in its own product, or sells the product of the second company under its own brand.

OSA

See optical spectrum analyzer

OSC

See optical supervisory channel

OSI

See Open Systems Interconnection

OSN

optical switch node

OSNR

See optical signal-to-noise ratio

OSPF

See open shortest path first

OTDR

See optical time domain reflectometer

OTM

optical terminal multiplexer

OTN

See optical transport network

OTS

See optical transmission section

OTU

See optical transponder unit

OTUk

optical channel transport unit-k

out of frame

An NE transmits an OOF downstream when it receives framing errors in a specified number of consecutive frame bit positions.

Output optical power

The ranger of optical energy level of output signals.

overhead cabling

Cables or fibers connect the cabinet with other equipment from the top of the cabinet.

OWSP

See optical wavelength shared protection

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


583


B Glossary

P PA

pre-amplifier

packet over SDH/ SONET

A MAN and WAN technology that provides point-to-point data connections. The POS interface uses SDH/SONET as the physical layer protocol, and supports the transport of packet data (such as IP packets) in MAN and WAN.

packet switched network

A telecommunication network which works in packet switching mode.

Packing case

A case which is used for packing the board or subrack.

Paired slots

Two slots of which the overheads can be passed through by using the bus on the backplane.

pass-through

The action of transmitting the same information that is being received for any given direction of transmission.

PBS

See peak burst size

PCB

See printed circuit board

PCC

protection communication channel

PCC

See policy and charging control

PCS

See physical coding sublayer

PDH

See plesiochronous digital hierarchy

PDL

See polarization dependent loss

PDU

Protocol Data Unit

PE

Provider Edge

peak burst size

A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket P, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the peak information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.

peak information rate

Peak Information Rate. A traffic parameter, expressed in bit/s, whose value should be not less than the committed information rate.

Performance register

Performance register is the memory space for performance event counts, including 15min current performance register, 24-hour current performance register, 15-min history performance register, 24-hour history performance register, UAT register and CSES register. The object of performance event monitoring is the board functional module, so every board functional module has a performance register. A performance register is used to count the performance events taking place within a period of operation time, so as to evaluate the quality of operation from the angle of statistics.

PGND

protection ground

phase-locked loop

A circuit that consists essentially of a phase detector which compares the frequency of a voltage-controlled oscillator with that of an incoming carrier signal or referencefrequency generator; the output of the phase detector, after passing through a loop filter, is fed back to the voltage-controlled oscillator to keep it exactly in phase with the incoming or reference frequency.

PHY

See physical sublayer & physical layer

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


584


B Glossary

physical coding sublayer

The PCS further helps to define physical layer specifications for 10 gigabit Ethernet after having been broken down into their Physical Media Dependent Sublayer or PMD. Each sublayer places the 10GBASE standards into either LAN or WAN specifications.

physical sublayer & physical layer

1. physical sublayer: One of two sublayers of the FDDI physical layer. 2. physical layer: In ATM, the physical layer provides the transmission of cells over a physical medium that connects two ATM devices. The PHY is comprised of two sublayers: PMD and TC

PID

photonics integrated device

PIM-DM

protocol independent multicast-dense mode

PIM-SM

See protocol independent multicast sparse mode

PIN

See Positive Intrinsic Negative

PIR

See peak information rate

plesiochronous digital hierarchy

A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimum rate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s rates.

PLL

See phase-locked loop

PMD

polarization mode dispersion

PMI

payload missing indication

POH

path overhead

point to multipoint

A communications network that provides a path from one location to multiple locations (from one to many).

Point-to-Point Protocol A protocol on the data link layer, provides point-to-point transmission and encapsulates data packets on the network layer. It is located in layer 2 of the IP protocol stack. Point-to-Point Protocol PPPoE, point-to-point protocol over Ethernet, is a network protocol for encapsulating over Ethernet PPP frames in Ethernet frames. It is used mainly with DSL services. It offers standard PPP features such as authentication, encryption, and compression. Pointer

An indicator whose value defines the frame offset of a virtual container with respect to the frame reference of the transport entity on which it is supported.

polarization dependent The maximum, peak-to-peak insertion loss (or gain) variation caused by a component loss when stimulated by all possible polarization states. It is specified in dB units. policy and charging control

Short for Policy and Charging Control, the PCC is defined in 3GPP R7. The PCC provides the QoS control and service-based charging functions in the wireless bearer network.

POS

See packet over SDH/SONET

Positive Intrinsic Negative

Photodiode. A semiconductor detector with an intrinsic (i) region separating the p- and n-doped regions. It has fast linear response and is used in fiber-optic receivers.

Power box

A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which supplies power for the subracks in the cabinet.

power distribution box A power box through which the power enters the cabinet and is re-distributed to various components, at the mean time, the Power Distribution Box protects the electric devices from current overload. PPP

See Point-to-Point Protocol

PPPoE

See Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


585


B Glossary

PRBS

See pseudo random binary sequence

PRC

primary reference clock

PRI

See primary rate interface

primary rate interface

An interface consisting of 23 channel Bs and a 64 kbit/s channel D that uses the T1 line, or consisting of 30 channel Bs and a channel D that uses the E1 line.

printed circuit board

A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic components using conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated onto a non-conductive substrate.

protection ground cable

A cable which connects the equipment and the protection grounding bar. Usually, one half of the cable is yellow; while the other half is green.

Protection path

A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.

Protection policy

In case the service route provides multiple service protections, different protection policies can be selected as required. Protection policy refers to the protection mode given the priority in use for the trail: protection, no protection, and extra traffic. Of the above, the protection preference is divided into trail protection and subnet connection protection.

Protection service

A specific service that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.

protocol independent multicast sparse mode

It is applicable to large-scale multicast networks with scattered members.

pseudo random binary A sequence that is random in a sense that the value of an element is independent of the sequence values of any of the other elements, similar to real random sequences. PSI

payload structure identifier

PSN

See packet switched network

PSTN

See public switched telephone network

PT

payload type

PTMP

See point to multipoint

PTN

packet transport network

PTP

Point-To-Point

public switched telephone network

A telecommunications network established to perform telephone services for the public subscribers. Sometimes called POTS.

Q QA

Q adaptation

QoS

See quality of service

quality of service

A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or channel. Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter, delay, packet loss ratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to measure the quality of the transmission system and the effectiveness of the services, as well as the capability of a service provider to meet the demands of users.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


586


B Glossary

R radio network controller

An equipment in the RNS which is in charge of controlling the use and the integrity of the radio resources.

RAI

remote alarm indication

RAM

See random access memory

random access memory Semiconductor-based memory that can be read and written by the central processing unit (CPU) or other hardware devices. The storage locations can be accessed in any order. Note that the various types of ROM memory are capable of random access but cannot be written to. The term RAM, however, is generally understood to refer to volatile memory that can be written to as well as read. Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with the STP protocol.

Receiver Sensitivity

Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of average received power at point R to achieve a 10-12 (The FEC is open).

reconfiguration optical The WDM equipment supports the ROADM. It flexibly and dynamically adjusts add/ add/drop multiplexer drop wavelengths of sites on the network by adjusting the pass-through or block status of any wavelength without affecting the service transmission in the main optical channel. This implements wavelength allocation among sites on the network. After the ROADM is used, the existing services are not affected during upgrade. The wavelength can be modified quickly and efficiently during network maintenance, which reduces maintenance cost. In addition, the ROADM supports the equalization for optical power, which equalizes the optical power at the channel level. Reed Solomon Code

A type of forward error correcting codes invented in 1960 by Irving Reed and Gustave Solomon, which has become commonplace in modern digital communications.

reference clock

A kind of stable and high-precision autonous clock providing frequencies for other clocks for reference.

Reflectance

The ratio of the reflected optical power to the incident optical power.

REG

A piece of equipment or device that regenerates electrical signals.

Regeneration

The process of receiving and reconstructing a digital signal so that the amplitudes, waveforms and timing of its signal elements are constrained within specified limits.

REI

Remote Error Indication

Resource Reservation Protocol

The Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) is designed for Integrated Service and is used to reserve resources on every node along a path. RSVP operates on the transport layer; however, RSVP does not transport application data. RSVP is a network control protocol like Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP).

RF

Radio Frequency

RFC

Requirement for Comments

RFI

remote failure indication

ring network

A type of network topology in which each node connects to exactly two other nodes, forming a circular pathway for signals.

RIP

See Routing Information Protocol

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


587


B Glossary

RMON

remote network monitoring

RNC

See radio network controller

ROADM

See reconfiguration optical add/drop multiplexer

route

A route is the path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. In a TCP/ IP network, each IP packet is routed independently. Routes can change dynamically.

Routing Information Protocol

A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a route based on the smallest hop count between source and destination. RIP is a distance vector protocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its neighboring routers and is known to waste bandwidth.

RS Code

See Reed Solomon Code

RS232

In the asynchronous transfer mode and there is no hand-shaking signal. It can communicate with RS232 and RS422 of other stations in point-to-point mode and the transmission is transparent. Its highest speed is 19.2kbit/s.

RSTP

See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

RSVP

See Resource Reservation Protocol

RZ

return to zero code

S S1 byte

In an SDH network, each network element traces step by step to the same clock reference source through a specific clock synchronization path, thus realizing the synchronization of the whole network. If a clock reference source traced by the NE is missing, this NE will trace another clock reference source of a lower level. To implement protection switching of clocks in the whole network, the NE must learn about clock quality information of the clock reference source it traces. Therefore, ITU-T defines S1 byte to transmit network synchronization status information. It uses the lower four bits of the multiplex section overhead S1 byte to indicate 16 types of synchronization quality grades. Auto protection switching of clocks in a synchronous network can be implemented using S1 byte and a proper switching protocol.

Safe control switch

The IPA safe switch is set in consideration of the long-span networking requirement, which cannot allow too low output optical power. If the safe control switch is turned off, IPA restarting optical power is the specified output power of the OAU. Otherwise, the IPA restarting optical power is restricted to less than 10 dBm.

SAN

See storage area network

SAP

service access point

SAPI

source access point identifiers

SBS

stimulated Brillouin scattering

SC

See square connector

SD

See signal degrade

SD trigger flag

SD stands for signal degrade. The SD trigger flag determines whether to perform a switching when SD occurs. The SD trigger flag can be set by using the network management system.

SDH

See synchronous digital hierarchy

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


588


B Glossary

SDI

See Serial Digital Interface

SDP

serious disturbance period

Search domain

Search field refers to the range of IP addresses being searched. In the TCP/IP, the IP addresses include: Category A address (1.0.0.0---126.255.255.255). For example, 10.*.*.*, whose search field is 10.255.255.255, all 10.*.*.* to be searched. Category B address (128.0.0.0---191. 255. 255. 255). For example, 129.9.*.*, whose search field is 129.9.255.255, all 129.9.*.* to be searched. Category C address (192.0.0.0---223. 255. 255. 255). For example, 192.224.9.*, whose search field is 192.224.9.255, all 192.224.9.* to be searched. Category D address (224.0.0.0---230.255.255.255), which is reserved. Category E address (240.0.0.0---247.255.255.255), which is reserved. Netid 127.*.*.*, in which .*.*.* can be any number. This net-ID is a local address.

Secure File Transfer Protocol

A network protocol designed to provide secure file transfer over SSH.

Self-healing

Self-healing is the establishment of a replacement connection by network without the NMC function. When a connection failure occurs, the replacement connection is found by the network elements and rerouted depending on network resources available at that time.

Serial Digital Interface An interface for transmitting digital signals. Serial Line Interface Protocol

Serial Line Interface Protocol, defines the framing mode over the serial line to implement transmission of messages over the serial line and provide the remote host interconnection function with a known IP address.

service level agreement A service contract between a customer and a service provider that specifies the forwarding service a customer should receive. A customer may be a user organization (source domain) or another differentiated services domain (upstream domain). A SLA may include traffic conditioning rules which constitute a traffic conditioning agreement as a whole or partially. Service protection

A measure that ensures that the services can be received at the receive end.

SES

See severely errored second

SETS

See synchronous equipment timing source

settings

Parameters of a system or operation that can be selected by the user.

severely errored second A one-second period which has a bit error ratio >= 10-3 or at least one defect. Time interval of one second during which a given digital signal is received with an error ratio greater than 10-3 (Rec. ITU R F. 592 needs correction) . SF

See signal fail

SFP

See small form-factor pluggable

SFTP

See Secure File Transfer Protocol

shock-proof reinforce

A process by which the cabinet is fastened to the wiring frame or the top of the equipment room so that the cabinet stands stably.

shortcut menu

A menu that is displayed when right-clicking an object's name or icon. This is also referred to a context menu.

side door

The side door of a cabinet is used to protect the equipment inside the cabinet against unexpected touch and environment impact.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


589


B Glossary

side mode suppression The Side Mode Suppression Ratio (SMSR) is the ratio of the largest peak of the total ratio source spectrum to the second largest peak. side trough

The trough on the side of the cable rack, which is used to place nuts so as to fix the cabinet.

signal cable

Common signal cables cover the E1 cable, network cable, and other non-subscriber signal cable.

signal degrade

A signal indicating the associated data has degraded in the sense that a degraded defect (e.g., dDEG) condition is active.

signal fail

A signal that indicates the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect condition (non-degrade defect) is active.

signal to noise ratio

The ratio of the amplitude of the desired signal to the amplitude of noise signals at a given point in time. SNR is expressed as 10 times the logarithm of the power ratio and is usually expressed in dB (Decibel).

Simple Network Management Protocol

A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modify the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the transmission of management information between any two points. The polling mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control information about each device is maintained by a management information block.

single-ended switching A protection operation method which takes switching action only at the affected end of the protected entity (e.g. "trail", "subnetwork connection"), in the case of a unidirectional failure. single-mode fiber

A type of fiber optic cable through which only one type of light signal with a fixed wave length can travel at a time. The inner diameter of the single-mode fiber is less than 10 microns. This type of fiber is used to transmit data in long distance.

SLA

See service level agreement

SLIP

See Serial Line Interface Protocol

SLM

single longitudinal mode

SM

section monitoring

small form-factor pluggable

A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers.

SMF

See single-mode fiber

SMSR

See side mode suppression ratio

SNCP

See subnetwork connection protection

SNCTP

See subnetwork connection tunnel protection

SNMP

See Simple Network Management Protocol

SNR

See signal to noise ratio

soft permanent connections

An ASON connection which features flexible and dynamic adjustment of routes. SPC includes different classes of services (CoS).

SONET

See synchronous optical network

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


590


span

B Glossary

The physical reach between two pieces of WDM equipment. The number of spans determines the signal transmission distance supported by a piece of equipment and varies according to transmission system type.

Spanning Tree Protocol STP is a protocol that is used in the LAN to remove the loop. STP applies to the redundant network to block some undesirable redundant paths through certain algorithms and prune a loop network into a loop-free tree network. SPC

See soft permanent connections

SPM

self phase modulation

SQL

See structured query language

square connector

Cables may use two styles of connectors: "square" and "D-style".

SRLG

Shared Risk Link Group

SRS

stimulated Raman scattering

SSM

See Synchronization Status Message

SSMB

synchronization status message byte

SSU

synchronization supply unit

STM

Synchronous Transfer Mode

STM-1

See synchronous transport mode 1

STM-4

Synchronous Transport Module of order 4

storage area network

An architecture to attach remote computer storage devices such as disk array controllers, tape libraries and CD arrays to servers in such a way that to the operating system the devices appear as locally attached devices.

STP

See Spanning Tree Protocol

structured query language

A database query and programming language widely used for accessing, querying, updating, and managing data in relational database systems.

sub-network

Sub-network is the logical entity in the transmission network and comprises a group of network management objects. The network that consists of a group of interconnected or correlated NEs, according to different functions. For example, protection subnet, clock subnet and so on. A sub-network can contain NEs and other sub-networks. Generally, a sub-network is used to contain the equipments which are located in adjacent regions and closely related with one another, and it is indicated with a sub-network icon on a topological view. The U2000 supports multilevels of sub-networks. A sub-network planning can better the organization of a network view. On the one hand, the view space can be saved, on the other hand, it helps the network management personnel focus on the equipments under their management.

sub-network number

A number used to differentiate network sections in a sub-network conference. A subnetwork ID consists of the first several digits (one or two) of a user phone number. An oderwire phone number consists of the sub-network ID and the user number.

subnet mask

The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets are destined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the client machine, server or router and is matched with the IP address.

subnetwork connection A function, which allows a working subnetwork connection to be replaced by a protection protection subnetwork connection if the working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performance falls below a required level. Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


591


B Glossary

subnetwork connection SNCTP provides a VC-4 level channel protection. When the working channel is faulty, tunnel protection the services of the entire VC-4 path can be switched over to the protection channel. support

A part used to support and fix a cabinet on the antistatic floor, it is made of welded steel plates and is used to block the cabinets up, thus facilitating floor paving and cabling. Before the whole set of equipment is grounded, insulation plates must be installed under the supports, and insulating coverings must be added to the expansion bolts to satisfy the insulation requirements.

Suppression state

An attribute set to determine whether an NE monitors the alarm. Under suppression status, NE will not monitor the corresponding alarm conditions and the alarm will not occur even when the alarm conditions are met.

Switching priority

There may be the case that several protected boards need to be switched; thus the tributary board switching priority should be set. If the switching priority of each board is set the same, the tributary board that fails later cannot be switched. The board with higher priority can preempt the switching of that with lower priority.

Synchronization Status A message that carries quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing link. Message Nodes on an SDH network and a synchronization network acquire upstream clock information through this message. Then the nodes can perform proper operations on their clocks, such as tracing, switching, or converting to holdoff, and forward the synchronization information to downstream nodes. synchronize NE time

To send the system time of the server of the network management system to NEs so as to synchronize all NEs with the server.

synchronous digital hierarchy

A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines the transmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode, transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and BISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speed counterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is only used only for signals. SDH is suitable for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity since it uses synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure.

synchronous equipment timing source

The SETS function provides timing reference to the relevant component parts of multiplexing equipment and represents the SDH network clement clock.

synchronous optical network

A high-speed network that provides a standard interface for communications carriers to connect networks based on fiberoptic cable. SONET is designed to handle multiple data types (voice, video, and so on). It transmits at a base rate of 51.84 Mbps, but multiples of this base rate go as high as 2.488 Gbps (gigabits per second).

synchronous transport Synchronous Transfer Mode at 155 Mbit/s. mode 1

T TCM

Tandem Connection Monitoring

TCP

See Transmission Control Protocol

TDM

See time division multiplexing

TE

See traffic engineering

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


592


B Glossary

Telecommunication A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communications Management Network network. An architecture for management, including planning, provisioning, installation, maintenance, operation and administration of telecommunications equipment, networks and services. terminal multiplexer

A device used at a network terminal to multiplex multiple channels of low rate signals into one channel of high rate signals, or to demultiplex one channel of high rate signals into multiple channels of low rate signals.

TFTP

See Trivial File Transfer Protocol

TIM

trace identifier mismatch

time division multiplexing

A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time slots (TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3 and so on), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross time slots in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be transmitted over one channel.

Time Slot

Continuously repeating interval of time or a time period in which two devices are able to interconnect.

Time Synchronization

Also called the moment synchronization, time synchronization means that the synchronization of the absolute time, which requires that the starting time of the signals keeps consistent with the UTC time.

time to live

A technique used in best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets that loop endlessly. The TTL is set by the sender to the maximum time the packet is allowed to be in the network. Each router in the network decrements the TTL field when the packet arrives, and discards any packet if the TTL counter reaches zero.

TL1

See Transaction Language 1

TLV

Type/Length/Value

TM

See terminal multiplexer

TMN

See Telecommunication Management Network

TP

traffic Policing

traffic engineering

A technology that is used to dynamically monitor the traffic of the network and the load of the network elements, to adjust in real time the parameters such as traffic management parameters, route parameters and resource restriction parameters, and to optimize the utilization of network resources. The purpose is to prevent the congestion caused by unbalanced loads.

Transaction Language Transaction Language One is a widely used telecommunications management protocol. 1 TL1 is a vendor-independent and technology-independent man-machine language. TL1 facilities can be provided as part of an OSS for interacting with either underlying management systems or NEs. One popular application is for a management system (or NE) to package its trap/notification data in TL1 format and forward it to an OSS component. ...(from authors.phptr.com/morris/glossary.html) Transaction Language 1 (TL1) is a widely used, "legacy", management protocol in telecommunications. It is a cross-vendor, cross-technology man-machine language, and is widely used to manage optical (SONET) and broadband access infrastructure in North America. It is defined in GR-831 by Bellcore (now Telcordia). (from en.wikipedia.org/wiki/TL1)

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


593


B Glossary

Transmission Control Protocol

The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets to be sent via IP (Internet Protocol), and the reassembly and verification of the complete messages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliable in the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer in the ISO/OSI reference model.

tray

A component that can be installed in the cabinet for holding chassis or other devices.

tributary unit group

One or more Tributary Units, occupying fixed, defined positions in a higher order VCn payload is termed a Tributary Unit Group (TUG). TUGs are defined in such a way that mixed capacity payloads made up of different size Tributary Units can be constructed to increase flexibility of the transport network

Trivial File Transfer Protocol

A small and simple alternative to FTP for transferring files. TFTP is intended for applications that do not need complex interactions between the client and server. TFTP restricts operations to simple file transfers and does not provide authentication. TFTP is small enough to be contained in ROM to be used for bootstrapping diskless machines.

trTCM

Two Rate Three Color Marker

TTI

trail trace identifier

TTL

See time to live

TU

tributary unit

TUG

See tributary unit group

U UAS

unavailable second

UAT

See unavailable time event

UDP

See User Datagram Protocol

unavailable time event A UAT event is reported when the monitored object generates 10 consecutive severely errored seconds (SES) and the SESs begin to be included in the unavailable time. The event will end when the bit error ratio per second is better than within 10 consecutive seconds. UNI

See user network interface

universal time coordinated

The world-wide scientific standard of timekeeping. It is based upon carefully maintained atomic clocks and is kept accurate to within microseconds worldwide.

Unprotected

Pertaining to the transmission of the services that are not protected, the services cannot be switched to the protection channel if the working channel is faulty or the service is interrupted, because protection mechanism is not configured.

upload

An operation to report some or all configuration data of an NE to the NMS(Network Management system). The configuration data then covers the configuration data stored at the NMS side.

Upper subrack

The subrack close to the top of the cabinet when a cabinet contains several subracks.

User

A client user of the NMS. The user name and password uniquely identifies the operation rights of a user in the NMS.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


594


User Datagram Protocol

B Glossary

A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send a datagram to an application program on another. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) uses IP to deliver datagrams. UDP provides application programs with the unreliable connectionless packet delivery service. Thus, UDP messages can be lost, duplicated, delayed, or delivered out of order. UDP is used to try to transmit the data packet, that is, the destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data packet is received.

user network interface The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (for example, ATM switches). UTC

See universal time coordinated

V VB

virtual bridge

VC

See virtual container

VCG

See virtual concatenation group

VCI

See virtual channel identifier

virtual channel identifier

A 16-bit field in the header of an ATM cell. The VCI, together with the VPI, is used to identify the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches on its way to its destination.

virtual concatenation group

A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the same virtual concatenation link

virtual container

The information structure used to support path layer connections in the SDH. It consists of information payload and path Overhead (POH) information fields organized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125 μs or 500 μs.

virtual local area network

A logical grouping of two or more nodes which are not necessarily on the same physical network segment but which share the same IP network number. This is often associated with switched Ethernet.

virtual path identifier

The field in the ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode) cell header that identifies to which VP (Virtual Path) the cell belongs.

virtual private network A system configuration, where the subscriber is able to build a private network via connections to different network switches that may include private network capabilities. VLAN

See virtual local area network

VOA

Variable Optical Attenuator

voice over IP

An IP telephony term for a set of facilities used to manage the delivery of voice information over the Internet. VoIP involves sending voice information in a digital form in discrete packets rather than by using the traditional circuit-committed protocols of the public switched telephone network (PSTN).

VoIP

See voice over IP

VPI

See virtual path identifier

VPN

See virtual private network

VRRP

Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


595


B Glossary

W WAN

See wide area network

wavelength division multiplexing

A technology that utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation of single mode optical fiber, uses multiple wavelengths as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously in a single fiber.

Wavelength protection The wavelength protection group is important to describe the wavelength protection group structure. Its function is similar to that of the protection subnet in the SDH NE. The wavelength path protection can only work with the correct configuration of the wavelength protection group. WDM

See wavelength division multiplexing

WEEE

waste electrical and electronic equipment

wide area network

A network composed of computers which are far away from each other which are physically connected through specific protocols. WAN covers a broad area, such as a province, a state or even a country.

Working path

The channels allocated to transport the normal traffic.

Working service

A specific service that is part of a protection group and is labeled working.

WRR

weighted round Robin

WSS

wavelength selective switching

WTR

Wait To Restore

WXCP

wavelength cross-connection protection

WXCP service

The WXCP service is also called the GE ADM protection service. The WXCP is a type of channel protection based on ring network. It adopts the dual fed and selective receiving principle and uses the cross-connection function to achieve service switching between working and protection channels.

X XFP

10Gbit/s Small Form-Factor Pluggable

XPM

cross-phase modulation

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)


596

Configuration Guide(V100R006C001 02)

Recommend Documents